Feature Description PDF Toshiba Strata DK 14,40i,424 Rel 3.1,4.1 General & Desc

Toshiba DK 14,40i,424 Rel 3-1,4-1 General & Feature Desc Toshiba DK 14,40i,424 Rel 3-1,4-1 General & Feature Desc

User Manual: PDF T E X T F I L E S

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 514 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

726+,%$ Telecommunication Systems Division
May 1999
Digital Business Telephone Solutions
General Description
Software Release 4.1
and ACD
Software Release 3.1
Software Release 4.1
Publication Information
Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., Telecommunication Systems Division,
reserves the right, without prior notice, to revise this information publication for any
reason, including, but not limited to, utilization of new advances in the state of
technical arts or to simply change the design of this document.
Further, Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., Telecommunication Systems
Division, also reserves the right, without prior notice, to make such changes in
equipment design or components as engineering or manufacturing methods may
warrant.
DKA-GD-GNDES-VE
4010445
Version E, May 1999
Version D, August 1998
Version C, March 1998
Version B, October 1997
Version A.1, May 1997
Version A, March 1997
© Copyright 1999
Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc.
Telecommunication Systems Division
All rights reserved. No part of this manual, covered by the copyrights hereon, may be
reproduced in any form or by any means—graphic, electronic, or mechanical,
including recording, taping, photocopying, or information retrieval systems—without
express written permission of the publisher of this material.
Strata AirLink and Call Center Viewer are trademarks of Toshiba America Information
Systems, Inc. Stratagy is a registered trademark of Toshiba America Information
Systems, Inc. Strata is a registered trademark of Toshiba Corporation.
Trademarks, registered trademarks, and service marks are the property of their
respective owners.
Strata DK
General End User Information
The Strata DK Digital Business Telephone System is registered in accordance with the
provisions of Part 68 of the Federal Communications Commission’s Rules and
Regulations.
FCC Requirements
Means of Connection: The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has
established rules which permit the Strata DK system to be connected directly to the
telephone network. Connection points are provided by the telephone company—
connections for this type of customer-provided equipment will not be provided on coin
lines. Connections to party lines are subject to state tariffs.
Incidence of Harm: If the system is malfunctioning, it may also be disrupting the
telephone network. The system should be disconnected until the problem can be
determined and repaired. If this is not done, the telephone company may temporarily
disconnect service. If possible, they will notify you in advance, but, if advance notice is
not practical, you will be notified as soon as possible. You will be informed of your
right to file a complaint with the FCC.
Service or Repair: For service or repair, contact your local Toshiba telecommunications
distributor. To obtain the nearest Toshiba telecommunications distributor in your area,
call Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., Telecommunication Systems Division
in Irvine, CA (949) 583-3700.
Telephone Network Compatibility: The telephone company may make changes in its
facilities, equipment, operations, and procedures. If such changes affect the
compatibility or use of the Strata DK system, the telephone company will notify you in
advance to give you an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service.
Notification of Telephone Company: Before connecting a Strata DK system to the
telephone network, the telephone company may request the following:
1. Your telephone number.
2. FCC registration number:
♦Strata DK may be configured as a Key or Hybrid telephone system. The
appropriate configuration for your system is dependent upon your operation of
the system.
♦If the operation of your system is only manual selection of outgoing lines, it may
be registered as a Key telephone system.
♦If your operation requires automatic selection of outgoing lines, such as dial
access, Least Cost Routing, Pooled Line Buttons, etc., the system must be
registered as a Hybrid telephone system. In addition to the above, certain
features (tie Lines, Off-premises Stations, etc.) may also require Hybrid
telephone system registration in some areas.
♦If you are unsure of your type of operation and/or the appropriate FCC
registration number, contact your local Toshiba telecommunications distributor
for assistance.
DK14 and DK40i
Key system: CJ6MLA-74479-KF-E
Hybrid: CJ6MLA-74478-MF-E
DK424
Hybrid: CJ69XA-10243-MF-E
Key system: CJ69XA-10242-KF-E
PBX: CJCHN-22757-PF-E
3. Ringer equivalence number: 0.3B. The ringer equivalence number (REN) is useful
to determine the quantity of devices which you may connect to your telephone line
and still have all of those devices ring when your number is called. In most areas,
but not all, the sum of the RENs of all devices connected to one line should not
exceed five (5.0B). To be certain of the number of devices you may connect to your
line, as determined by the REN, you should contact your local telephone company
to ascertain the maximum REN for your calling area.
4. Network connection information USOC jack required: RJ1CX, RJ2EX, RJ2GX,
RJ48C, RJ48X, RJ11, RJ14C, RJ21X (see Network Requirements in this
document). Items 2, 3 and 4 are also indicated on the equipment label.
Radio Frequency Interference
Warning: This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if
not installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction manual, may
cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC
Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference
when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area is likely to cause interference, in which case, the user, at his/her own
expense, will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the
interference.
This system is listed with Underwriters Laboratory.
UL Requirement: If wiring from any telephone exits the building or is
subject to lightning or other electrical surges, then secondary protection
is required. Secondary protection is also required on DID, OPS, and tie
lines. (Additional information is provided in this manual.)
Important Notice — Music-On-Hold
In accordance with U.S. Copyright Law, a license may be required from
the American Society of Composers, Authors and Publishers, or other similar
organization, if radio or TV broadcasts are transmitted through the music-on-hold
feature of this telecommunication system. Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc.,
hereby disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license.
CP01, Issue 8, Part I Section 14.1
Notice: The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification
means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective,
operational and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal
Equipment Technical Requirements document(s). The Department does not guarantee
the Equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be
connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment
must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. The customer should
be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of
service in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by
the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or
equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request
the user to disconnect the equipment.
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of
the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are
connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.
CAUTION! Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but
should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or
electrician, as appropriate.
CP01, Issue 8, Part I Section 14.2
Notice: The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device
provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to
a telephone interface. The terminal on an interface may consist of any combination of
devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence
Numbers of all the Devices does not exceed 5.
UL
®
Strata DK General Description 5/99 i
Contents
Introduction
Organization........................................................................................................................................... ix
Conventions............................................................................................................................................. x
Related Documents/Media......................................................................................................................x
Chapter 1 – Strata DK14
KSU Architecture....................................................................................................................................2
Digital Telephone/Central Office (CO) Line Circuits...................................................................... 2
Optional Printed Circuit Boards..............................................................................................................3
Central Office Line/Digital Telephone Interface Unit (QCDU2) ....................................................3
Standard Telephone Interface Unit (QSTU2)...................................................................................3
DTMF Receiver/ABR Tone Detector Unit (QRCU3)......................................................................3
Auto Attendant Feature Key (QKYS1) ............................................................................................3
Serial Interface Board (WSIU1).......................................................................................................3
Power Supply ..........................................................................................................................................4
Reserve Power..................................................................................................................................4
Power Failure Interface .................................................................................................................... 4
Music-on-Hold (MOH) Interface ..................................................................................................... 5
Paging Interface................................................................................................................................5
Flexible Relay Contacts....................................................................................................................5
Maximum Line/Station Configurations .................................................................................................. 5
Network Requirements............................................................................................................................ 5
Functional Block Diagram......................................................................................................................6
System Technology.................................................................................................................................7
Pulse Code Modulation ....................................................................................................................7
Custom Electronic Circuitry.............................................................................................................7
Stored Program Control....................................................................................................................7
Microprocessors................................................................................................................................7
Maintenance and Programming ..............................................................................................................8
DKAdmin/DKBackup ...................................................................................................................... 8
Chapter 2 – Strata DK40i
Station and CO Lines .............................................................................................................................. 9
Peripherals............................................................................................................................................. 10
Base KSU Architecture......................................................................................................................... 11
Digital Telephone Circuits..............................................................................................................11
Central Office (CO) Line Circuits (TCOU/TDDU/TBSU)............................................................ 11
ISDN BRI S/T Circuits (TBSU)..................................................................................................... 12
Caller ID (TCIU2) ..........................................................................................................................12
Standard Telephone Interface Unit (KSTU2).................................................................................12
Contents
Chapter 3 – Strata DK424
ii Strata DK General Description 5/99
DTMF/ABR Tone Detection Receiver (K5RCU and K5RCU2)...................................................12
Auto Attendant Feature Key (KKYS) ............................................................................................12
SMDR, SMDI, and Maintenance DKAdmin/Modem (TTY) Interface (TSIU)............................. 12
Power Supply.................................................................................................................................. 13
Power Failure Interface ..................................................................................................................14
Music-on-Hold Interface ................................................................................................................ 14
Expansion KSU Architecture................................................................................................................14
Typical Line Configurations ................................................................................................................. 15
DK40i Line and Station Capacity...................................................................................................15
Network Requirements..........................................................................................................................15
Functional Block Diagram.................................................................................................................... 16
System Technology...............................................................................................................................17
Pulse Code Modulation .................................................................................................................. 17
Custom Electronic Circuitry........................................................................................................... 17
Stored Program Control.................................................................................................................. 17
Microprocessors..............................................................................................................................17
Maintenance and Programming ............................................................................................................17
DKAdmin/DKBackup .................................................................................................................... 17
Strata AirLink Wireless System............................................................................................................18
Chapter 3 – Strata DK424
Architecture........................................................................................................................................... 19
Base and Expansion Cabinets......................................................................................................... 19
Expansion and Configuration......................................................................................................... 20
Expansion Cabinets ........................................................................................................................20
Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs) ....................................................................................................... 21
Maximum Line/Station Capacities........................................................................................................ 22
Power Requirements .............................................................................................................................26
Floor Mount Hardware..........................................................................................................................28
Functional Block Diagrams...................................................................................................................29
System Technology...............................................................................................................................32
Pulse Code Modulation .................................................................................................................. 32
Custom Electronic Circuitry........................................................................................................... 32
Stored Program Control.................................................................................................................. 32
Microprocessors..............................................................................................................................32
Maintenance and Programming ............................................................................................................32
DKAdmin/DKBackup .................................................................................................................... 32
Strata AirLink Wireless System............................................................................................................33
Chapter 4 – Universal Slot PCBs
Station PCBs .........................................................................................................................................35
Digital Telephone Interface Unit (PDKU2) ...................................................................................35
Digital/Standard Telephone Interface Unit (RDSU) ......................................................................35
Strata AirLink Wireless Interface Unit (RWIU) ............................................................................36
CO Line/Digital Telephone Interface Unit (KCDU) (DK40i only) ............................................... 36
Electronic Telephone Interface Unit (PEKU) ................................................................................ 36
Standard/Electronic Telephone Interface Unit (PESU).................................................................. 36
Standard Telephone Interface Unit (RSTU2).................................................................................36
Contents
Chapter 5 – Stations and Peripherals
Strata DK General Description 5/99 iii
Console PCBs........................................................................................................................................37
Attendant Console Interface Unit (RATU, DK424 only)...............................................................37
CO Line PCBs....................................................................................................................................... 37
Caller ID Interface Unit (RCIU2)................................................................................................... 37
Loop Start CO Line Interface Unit (RCOU) .................................................................................. 38
Ground/Loop Start Interface CO Line Interface Unit (RGLU2)....................................................38
Direct Inward Dialing Interface Unit (RDDU)...............................................................................38
Tie Line Unit (REMU) ................................................................................................................... 38
T1/DS-1 Interface Unit (RDTU2) (DK424 only)........................................................................... 38
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Unit (RPTU) (DK424 only)............................................................39
ISDN S/T-type Basic Rate Interface Unit (RBSU) ........................................................................39
ISDN U-type Basic Rate Interface Unit (RBUU) (DK424 only)................................................... 40
Enhanced 911 CAMA Trunk Interface Unit (RMCU/RCMS) (DK424 only)...............................40
Summary of PCBs and Subassemblies ................................................................................................. 40
Option Interface PCBs ..........................................................................................................................43
Option Interface Unit (PIOU)......................................................................................................... 43
Simplified Option Interface Unit (PIOUS)..................................................................................... 44
External Page Interface Unit (PEPU).............................................................................................44
Single Serial Interface Unit (RSSU)............................................................................................... 45
Serial Interface Unit (RSIU, DK424 only).....................................................................................46
Chapter 5 – Stations and Peripherals
Digital Telephones ................................................................................................................................48
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) Telephones........................................................................................... 50
Speakerphones....................................................................................................................................... 51
Peripherals............................................................................................................................................. 52
Digital Telephone Upgrade Options ..................................................................................................... 53
Digital Add-on Module (DADM)...................................................................................................53
Integrated PC Interface (RPCI-DI).................................................................................................53
Headset/Loud Ringing Bell Interface (HHEU) ..............................................................................53
Speaker Off-hook Call Announce (DVSU).................................................................................... 54
Stand-alone Data Interface Unit (PDIU-DS) ........................................................................................54
Cordless Digital Telephone (DKT2004-CT) ........................................................................................ 54
Strata AirLink Wireless Handset .......................................................................................................... 55
Features........................................................................................................................................... 55
PC Digital Telephone (PC-DKT).......................................................................................................... 56
PC Attendant Console (DK-PCATT).................................................................................................... 57
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console ...............................................................................................58
Door Phone (MDFB)............................................................................................................................. 58
Door Phone and Lock Control Unit (DDCB) .......................................................................................59
External Speaker (HESB) .....................................................................................................................59
Toshiba Stratagy and Stratagy DK Processing .....................................................................................59
Cabling and Connectors........................................................................................................................60
Station and Peripheral Specifications.................................................................................................... 60
Chapter 6 – Features
System Features .................................................................................................................................... 61
Abandoned Call Numbers .............................................................................................................. 61
Account Codes (Forced/Voluntary/Verified).................................................................................61
Contents
Chapter 6 – Features
iv Strata DK General Description 5/99
Alarm Sensor (DK40i and DK424 only)........................................................................................62
Alternate Answer Point .................................................................................................................. 62
Amplified Conference Interface.....................................................................................................62
Auto Attendant (Built-in) ...............................................................................................................62
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) (DK424 only)........................................................................62
Automatic Number Identification (ANI)........................................................................................63
Automatic Release from Hold........................................................................................................ 64
Background Music (BGM)............................................................................................................. 64
Caller ID .........................................................................................................................................65
Centrex/PBX Compatible............................................................................................................... 65
Centrex Ringing Repeat..................................................................................................................65
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) .........................................................................................66
Conferencing .................................................................................................................................. 67
Credit Card Calling.........................................................................................................................67
Data Switching ............................................................................................................................... 67
Day/Night Modes ........................................................................................................................... 67
Delayed Ringing............................................................................................................................. 67
Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS) (DK40i and DK424 only).....................................68
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) Lines (DK40i and DK424 only)......................................................68
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)............................................................................................69
Distinctive CO Line/Directory Number Ringing ........................................................................... 69
Door Lock Control..........................................................................................................................69
Door Phones (MDFB) .................................................................................................................... 69
DTMF Back Tone........................................................................................................................... 70
DTMF and Dial Pulse CO Line Compatible .................................................................................. 70
DTMF Signal Time (80/160 milliseconds) ....................................................................................70
Emergency Ringdown .................................................................................................................... 70
Enhanced 911 (E911) Service ........................................................................................................ 70
External Page Zones....................................................................................................................... 71
Flexible Button Assignment........................................................................................................... 71
Flexible Directory Numbers........................................................................................................... 71
Group Paging.................................................................................................................................. 71
Handsfree Directory Number Paths................................................................................................72
Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS).................................................................. 72
Hotline Service ...............................................................................................................................72
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) ................................................................................. 73
Least Cost Routing (LCR).............................................................................................................. 75
Line Groups....................................................................................................................................76
Line Queuing.................................................................................................................................. 76
Live System Programming............................................................................................................. 76
Memory Protection......................................................................................................................... 76
Message Waiting ............................................................................................................................76
Multiple Directory Numbers .......................................................................................................... 76
Multiple FCC Registration .............................................................................................................78
Music-on-hold (MOH) ...................................................................................................................78
Night Ringing Over External Page................................................................................................. 78
Night Ringing Over Selected Page Zones......................................................................................78
Non-blocking Talk Paths................................................................................................................ 78
Off-premises Station.......................................................................................................................78
Outgoing Call Restriction............................................................................................................... 79
Contents
Chapter 6 – Features
Strata DK General Description 5/99 v
Pooled CO Line Button ..................................................................................................................79
Power Failure Transfer................................................................................................................... 79
Privacy/Non-privacy Calling.......................................................................................................... 79
Relay Service.................................................................................................................................. 79
Remote Administration/Maintenance............................................................................................. 80
Reserve Power................................................................................................................................80
Simplified Message Desk Interface (SMDI) ..................................................................................80
Speed Dial....................................................................................................................................... 81
Station Hunting............................................................................................................................... 81
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) ..................................................................................82
Station Relocation........................................................................................................................... 82
StrataControl (DK40i and DK424 only) ........................................................................................82
System Programming through a Station......................................................................................... 83
System Program Administration Software (DKAdmin) ................................................................83
T1 Interface (DK424 only).............................................................................................................83
Tandem CO Line Connections ....................................................................................................... 83
Tenant Service ................................................................................................................................84
Tie Lines.........................................................................................................................................84
Toll Restriction Override by System Speed Dial ........................................................................... 85
Traveling Class of Service..............................................................................................................85
Unrestricted Call Transfer to Directory Numbers..........................................................................85
Voice First or Tone Signaling ........................................................................................................ 85
Voice Mail Integration....................................................................................................................85
Station Features..................................................................................................................................... 90
Account Code Button .....................................................................................................................90
Add-on Module (DADM)............................................................................................................... 90
Alert Signal Button.........................................................................................................................90
Automatic Busy Redial (ABR)....................................................................................................... 90
Automatic Callback (ACB) ............................................................................................................90
Automatic Hold ..............................................................................................................................90
Automatic Line Selection............................................................................................................... 91
Background Music (BGM) with Station Control ...........................................................................91
Busy Override................................................................................................................................. 91
Busy Station Transfer/Busy Station Ringing.................................................................................. 91
Call Forwarding..............................................................................................................................91
Call Park Orbits ..............................................................................................................................92
Call Pickup ..................................................................................................................................... 93
Call Pickup Groups.........................................................................................................................93
Call Transfer with Camp-on........................................................................................................... 93
Call Transfer Immediate................................................................................................................. 93
Call Transfer Music or Ringing Option..........................................................................................94
Call Transfer Recall........................................................................................................................94
Centrex/PBX Features.................................................................................................................... 94
Conferencing .................................................................................................................................. 94
Continuous Dual-tone Multi-frequency (DTMF) Tone..................................................................94
Data Call Button............................................................................................................................. 94
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Buttons..........................................................................................94
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console Features .......................................................................... 94
Directory Number [DN] Buttons.................................................................................................... 95
DISA Security Code Revision........................................................................................................ 95
Contents
Chapter 6 – Features
vi Strata DK General Description 5/99
Distinctive LED Color and Flash Indications.................................................................................95
Distinctive Station Ringing ............................................................................................................95
Do Not Disturb (DND)................................................................................................................... 95
Do Not Disturb (DND) Override.................................................................................................... 95
DP/DTMF Mode Change ............................................................................................................... 95
Exclusive Hold ............................................................................................................................... 95
Executive Override.........................................................................................................................96
Feature Prompting with Soft Keys ................................................................................................. 96
Flash Button....................................................................................................................................96
Handsfree Answerback...................................................................................................................96
Hearing Aid Compatible.................................................................................................................96
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) Features .........................................................................................96
Microphone Cut-off Button............................................................................................................96
Modem Button................................................................................................................................96
Modular Handset and Line Cords...................................................................................................96
Modular Headset.............................................................................................................................97
Off-hook Call Announce (OCA)....................................................................................................97
On-hook Dialing............................................................................................................................. 97
Personal Computer Interface (RPCI-DI)........................................................................................98
Pooled Line Buttons .......................................................................................................................98
Private CO Lines ............................................................................................................................98
Push-button Dialing........................................................................................................................98
Release Button................................................................................................................................98
Release/Answer Button ..................................................................................................................98
Remote Retrieval of Held/Parked Calls..........................................................................................98
Repeat Last Number Dialed ........................................................................................................... 98
Ringing Line Preference................................................................................................................. 98
Saved Number Redial.....................................................................................................................98
Speed Dial Buttons.........................................................................................................................99
Telephone Application Programming Interface (TAPI) Compatibility ......................................... 99
Timed Reminders ........................................................................................................................... 99
Toll Restriction Override Code Revision....................................................................................... 99
User Programmable Feature Buttons..............................................................................................99
PC Attendant Console Features ..........................................................................................................102
Answer Button..............................................................................................................................102
Answer Priority.............................................................................................................................102
Answer Prompting........................................................................................................................102
Attendant Conference Setup......................................................................................................... 102
Auto Day/Night Mode Switching.................................................................................................102
Auto Dialing .................................................................................................................................102
Busy Lamp Field (BLF) Display..................................................................................................102
Call Waiting Count.......................................................................................................................103
Color CRT Display....................................................................................................................... 103
Dial “O” For Attendant.................................................................................................................103
Dial Outside Number For Station User ........................................................................................103
Direct Station Selection (DSS)..................................................................................................... 103
Directory Display and Dialing...................................................................................................... 103
DTMF Signaling from Dial Pad...................................................................................................103
Emergency Calls...........................................................................................................................103
Emergency Page ...........................................................................................................................103
Contents
Chapter 6 – Features
Strata DK General Description 5/99 vii
Feature On-Line Help...................................................................................................................104
Feature Prompting with Soft Keys ............................................................................................... 104
Flexible Programmable Buttons...................................................................................................104
Headset Operation ........................................................................................................................104
Hold Button .................................................................................................................................. 104
Hold Timer Display...................................................................................................................... 104
Incoming Call Identification.........................................................................................................104
Incoming Call Statistics................................................................................................................104
Interposition Call Transfer............................................................................................................ 105
Join Button....................................................................................................................................105
Keyboard or Mouse Operation .....................................................................................................105
Load Sharing................................................................................................................................. 105
Loop Hold Display .......................................................................................................................105
Message Center............................................................................................................................. 105
Multi-tasking ................................................................................................................................ 105
Name or Number Dialing .............................................................................................................106
Overflow....................................................................................................................................... 106
Override........................................................................................................................................ 106
Position Busy Mode......................................................................................................................106
Release Button..............................................................................................................................106
Speed Dial Calling........................................................................................................................ 106
Split/Switch Button....................................................................................................................... 107
Three-way Calling........................................................................................................................107
Through Dialing ...........................................................................................................................107
Transfer Direct to Voice Mail ...................................................................................................... 107
Trunk Group Busy Indication....................................................................................................... 107
Trunk Group Control....................................................................................................................107
Volume Control............................................................................................................................107
Windows PC Operation................................................................................................................107
Appendix .............................................................................................................................................109
Network Requirements........................................................................................................................110
Customer-supplied Peripherals and Interfaces....................................................................................111
Station Specifications.......................................................................................................................... 112
Glossary ............................................................................................................................................... 117
Index ....................................................................................................................................................... 121
Contents
Chapter 6 – Features
viii Strata DK General Description 5/99
Strata DK General Description 5/99 ix
Introduction
This General Description provides an overview of the Strata DK telephone systems, associated
hardware, system and station features. These systems include:
♦Strata DK14
♦Strata DK40i
♦Strata DK424
Organization
This document is divided into the following major topics:
♦Chapter 1 – Strata DK14 presents the Strata DK14 system overall and covers the basics of:
capacities, system expansion and configuration, power requirements, technology, and
maintenance.
♦Chapter 2 – Strata DK40i presents the Strata DK40i system overall and covers the basics of
capacities, system expansion and configuration, power requirements, technology, and
maintenance.
♦Chapter 3 – Strata DK424 presents the Strata DK424 system overall and covers the basics of
capacities, system expansion and configuration, technology, power requirements,
maintenance, and programming.
♦Chapter 4 – Universal Slot PCBs provides information about Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs)
that can be installed in the universal slots of the Strata DK systems.
♦Chapter 5 – Stations and Peripherals describes the most recent Toshiba-proprietary stations
and peripherals, customer-supplied peripherals, as well as cabling and connectors. Includes
information on system tones and data interface specifications.
♦Chapter 6 – Features describes the features which are available system-wide, as well as
station features and shows the types of stations on which they are available. This chapter also
describes the Strata DK PC Attendant Console features.
Introduction
Conventions
xStrata DK General Description 5/99
Conventions
Related Documents/Media
The following documents and CD-ROMS can be used to reference further information about the
Strata DK systems.
♦Digital Telephone User Guide provides all the procedures necessary to operate Toshiba-
proprietary digital telephones, including Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) features. It also
includes instructions for using the add-on module/DSS console.
♦Digital Telephone Quick Reference Guide provides a quick reference for frequently-used
digital telephone features.
♦Digital Single Line Telephone User Guide provides all the procedures necessary to operate
Toshiba-proprietary digital single line telephones.
Conventions Description
Note Elaborates specific items or references other information. Within some
tables, general notes apply to the entire table and numbered notes apply to
specific items.
Important! Calls attention to important instructions or information.
[DN] Represents any Directory Number button, also known as an extension or
intercom number.
[PDN] Represents any Primary Directory Number button (the extension number for
the telephone).
[SDN] Represents any Secondary appearance of a PDN. A PDN which appears on
another telephone is considered an SDN.
[PhDN] Represents any Phantom Directory Number button (an additional DN).
[ ] Brackets indicate a variable button. Example: [DN] represents the actual
Directory Number, such as [301].
$ULDO#%ROG Represents telephone buttons.
Courier Shows a computer keyboard entry or screen display.
+
shows a multiple PC keyboard or phone button entry. Entries without spaces
between them show a simultaneous entry.
Example: Delete+Enter.
Entries with spaces between them show a sequential entry.
Example: & + 8.
Tilde (~) Means “through.” Example: 350 ~ 640 Hz frequency range.
See Figure 10 Grey words within the printed text denote cross-references. In the electronic
version of this document (Strata DK Library CD-ROM or FYI Internet
download), cross-references appear in blue hypertext.
Introduction
Related Documents/Media
Strata DK General Description 5/99 xi
♦Electronic Telephone User Guide explains all the procedures necessary to operate Toshiba-
proprietary electronic telephones, including all LCD features. Does not apply to the Strata
DK14 system. It also includes instructions for using the electronic DSS console.
♦Electronic Telephone Quick Reference Guide provides a quick reference for frequently-
used electronic telephone features. Does not apply to the Strata DK14 system.
♦Standard Telephone User Guide explains all the procedures necessary to operate rotary dial
and push-button standard telephones.
♦Strata AirLink External Wireless Handset User Guide shows how to use the wireless
handset configured to Strata DK telephone system Strata DK telephone system and many non-
Toshiba systems.
♦Strata AirLink External Wireless Quick Reference Guide contains instructions for
operation of commonly used Strata AirLink External Wireless Handset features.
♦Strata AirLink Integrated Wireless Handset User Guide shows how to use the wireless
handset configured to digital ports of the Strata DK telephone system.
♦Strata AirLink Integrated Wireless Quick Reference Guide contains instructions for
operation of commonly used Strata AirLink Integrated Wireless Handset features.
♦System Administrator Guide gives instructions for the System Administrator to manage the
system. Contains instructions for Station Relocation, System Speed Dial, and other features
only activated by the System Administrator.
♦PC/Data Interface User Guide explains all the procedures necessary to operate stand-alone
data interface units in the data mode for printer sharing and modem pooling. Also covers
connection to a PC with a Telephone Application Programming Interface (TAPI).
♦Cordless Telephone User Guide provides instructions on using the DKT2004-CT cordless
digital telephone as a single unit or in conjunction with a digital telephone.
♦PC-DKT User Guide provides installation and operation information for the Personal
Computer Digital Key Telephone system.
♦Strata DK Feature Description Manual describes each feature associated with the Strata
DK424, DK40i and DK14. Also provides descriptions of compatible Toshiba-proprietary
telephones and peripherals.
♦Keyprint 2000 User Guide provides instructions for the Keyprint 2000 software printing
package which allows you to print and store custom button label keystrips for Strata DK 2000-
series 10-button or 20-button digital telephones, 20-button add-on modules, and 60-button
digital DSS consoles.
♦Strata DK Programming Manual provides all instructions necessary to program the system
and system record sheets, including ACD.
♦Strata DK Installation & Maintenance Manual provides installation instructions for
configuring and installing the Strata DK14, DK40i and DK424. It also includes T1/DS-1
interface installation and configuration instructions, as well as fault finding flowcharts to
troubleshoot the systems. An ACD Section provides instructions for installing ACD into the
Strata DK424.
♦Strata AirLink External Wireless System Installation Guide provides step-by-step
hardware and software installation instructions. It includes examples of system configurations,
information on performing a site survey, and troubleshooting techniques.
♦Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) General Description provides an
overall view of the system’s hardware, software, applications and features. The HMIS is a PC-
Introduction
Related Documents/Media
xii Strata DK General Description 5/99
based solution, designed to meet the specific operational needs of small- to medium-sized
hotel/motels and includes both the PC and software.
♦Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) User Guide describes the product’s
many software features and gives step-by-step instructions for using them.
♦Strata DK Library CD-ROM enables you to view, print, navigate and search publications
for Strata DK14, DK40 and DK424 digital business telephone systems. It also includes Strata
DK424 ACD Documentation, including the Strata DK424 Call Center Solutions General
Description, ACD Agent Guide, ACD Supervisor’s Guide. ACD Installation and Programming
instructions are included in the Strata DK Installation and Maintenance Manual and
Programming Manual.
♦Strata DK HMIS CD-ROM contains a copy of all HMIS documentation/bulletins and
enables you to view, print, navigate and search publications.
♦StrataControl CD-ROM contains the StrataControl software, that enables viewing,
downloading, editing, and uploading Strata DK programmed data on a PC. This software also
provides a method of creating custom lists and user guides based on information from the
Strata DK system.The CD-ROM contains the StrataControl User Guide.
♦DKQuote CD-ROM contains the DKQuote application and the DKQuote User Guide, that
shows how to use this interactive software to assist you with Strata DK Systems configuration
and pricing worksheets.
♦DKAdmin/DKBackup CD-ROM includes the programs that let you custom program and/or
update the Strata DK14/DK40/DK424 with a user-friendly PC display. The CD-ROM also
contains the DKAdmin/DKBackup User Guide, that explains how to use the DKAdmin/
DKBackup interactive software applications. The current version does not support DK40i.
The following documentation and media applies to the Strata DK424 system only.
♦Strata DK424 Call Center Solutions General Description provides a system overview,
including hardware and feature information. Highlights the technology employed in operating
the ACD Strata DK424 system.
♦ACD Agent Guide provides step-by-step procedures for using ACD agent features.
♦ACD Supervisor Guide provides instruction on how to use the ACD supervisor features.
♦Insight DK CD-ROM which includes training, all Insight DK documentation, Insight DK
software and the upgrade to Insight DK Plus, and Demo software.
♦Insight DK Installation Guide explains how to set up the network, install the server software,
install clients and explains how the data files are organized.
♦Insight DK Supervisor Guide provides instructions for using the Strata DK Insight and
Insight DK Plus MIS for the Supervisor of a call center. Instructions for creating and using
Real Time Displays, Reports, Alarms, and Wallboards are also included.
♦Insight DK inView Quick Reference Guide provides instructions for viewing and
customizing the on-screen wallboard and displays of the real time call center data.
♦PC Attendant Console User Guide explains how to operate the PC Attendant Console.
♦PC Attendant Console Quick Reference Guide provides a quick reference for frequently-
used PC Attendant Console features.
♦Call Center Viewer User Guide describes how to install and operate the Call Center Viewer
application on a PC. It explains how to view and customize ACD group and agent status data.
♦Software MIS (SMIS) Supervisor Manual provides descriptions, examples, and instructions
on using the Software MIS application.
Strata DK General Description 5/99 1
Strata DK14 1
This chapter provides an overview of the Strata DK14 System and its capacities.
The Strata DK14 Base Key Service Unit (KSU) is a
compact system that provides many of the features offered
by much larger systems. The Strata DK14 KSU is designed
for convenient wall-mounting and occupies very little space
(see Figure 1 and Table 1).
At maximum configuration, the Strata DK14 provides up to
10 station ports, that can be used for up to 8 digital
telephones (including the cordless telephone), up to four
Central Office (CO) lines can be accommodated, and two
standard telephone devices.
The Strata DK14 can be upgraded with these optional
peripherals:
♦Music-on-hold (MOH) source
♦Background Music (BGM) source
♦Night bell
♦Amplifier/speaker for external page
Also, any two of the following optional RS-232 interfaces
can be added as needed:
♦Caller ID (CLID)
♦Station Message Detail Reporting (SMDR)
♦Simplified Message Desk Interface (SMDI) for Voice Mail
♦DKAdmin (TTY) Interface
Table 1 KSU Specifications
Unit Weight Height Width Depth
Key Service Base Unit 5.7 lbs.
(2.59 kg) 16.4 inches
(416 mm) 10.0 inches
(254 mm) 3.0 inches
(76 mm)
AC
DC
2186
Figure 1 Base Key Service Unit
(KSU)
Strata DK14
KSU Architecture
2Strata DK General Description 5/99
KSU Architecture
The Strata DK14 KSU contains the main processor, operating software, circuitry and the following
components (see Figure 2).
Figure 2 KSU Interior
Digital Telephone/Central Office (CO) Line Circuits
The main PCB (WMAU) has four integrated circuits that can connect to digital corded and/or
cordless telephones, stand-alone data interface units (PDIU-DSs), and digital door phone/lock
control units (DDCB). Each of the digital telephones can support a PC Data Interface Unit (RPCI-
DI) or up to two Add-on Modules (DADMs). It does not support a DDSS console.
Two circuits for loop start CO lines are built into the main PCB. Each line can be programmed for
Dual-tone Multi-frequency (DTMF) or dial pulse signaling. It includes a switch to control
potential excess volume from a nearby private branch exchange (PBX) or CO. Built-in gas tubes
help protect each circuit from lightning. Each line supports Caller ID when optional equipment is
added.
J15
QSTS1A
J1
J11 J4
J14
J6
J8
J1
F.G.
STU STU
J7
J5
WARNING
Hazardous voltage inside !
If servicing required,
remove A.C. cord.
HPFB6
QCDU2A
QKYS
J2
J10
J20
J3
J21
J4
J1
SW101
CO4
SIO 1
SIO 2
DC
BATT
QRCU3A
Component Side
CO2
J6-25 Pair
Amphenol Jack
(female) for
Telephone
Tip/Ring and
Relay Contact
CO3
CO1
PFT, RJ11
Modular
Jack
6-wire RJ11
Modular Jacks
6-wire RJ11
Modular Jack
1 or 2
HPFB reserve
power units
System
Frame
Ground
Bar
AC
DC
QCDU2A
MOH
Jack MOH
Volume
Control
600
ohm
Page
Not
Used
F.G.
J9
J1
0 PAD 3
SW101
SW1
190 130
J2
STU
J12
J3
STU
J13
QSTU2A
QSTS2A
VR701 J22
2364
WSIU1A
0 PAD 3
Strata DK14
Optional Printed Circuit Boards
Strata DK General Description 5/99 3
Optional Printed Circuit Boards
Central Office Line/Digital Telephone Interface Unit (QCDU2)
The QCDU2 provides one loop start CO line circuit and two digital telephone circuits. It interfaces
with digital corded and/or cordless telephones, RPCI-DIs, ADMs connected to the corded
telephones and PDIU-DSs, and door phones. The DK14 supports up to six door phones. It does not
support a DDSS console. Up to two QCDU2 PCBs can be added to the DK14. Each line supports
Caller ID when optional equipment is added.
Standard Telephone Interface Unit (QSTU2)
The QSTU2 provides two standard telephone circuits for two-wire devices such as standard
telephones, Auto Attendant devices, alternate BGM source connection, voice mail machines, and
facsimile machines.
DTMF Receiver/ABR Tone Detector Unit (QRCU3)
The QRCU3 enables the Strata DK14 to recognize Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) tones
generated by a standard telephone or any other device connected to a QSTU3 standard telephone
circuit. It is also required for Direct Inward System Access (DISA) calls and built-in Auto
Attendant. The QRCU3 enables busy tone detection for Automatic Busy Redial.
Auto Attendant Feature Key (QKYS1)
The QKYS1 plugs into the QRCU3 option PCB to support built-in Auto Attendant.
Serial Interface Board (WSIU1)
The WSIU1 provides two serial interface ports for up to two of the following devices:
♦Caller ID interface box
♦SMDR Call Accounting device
♦SMDI Voice Mail Interface
♦PC with DKAdmin or external modem
Strata DK14
Power Supply
4Strata DK General Description 5/99
Power Supply
The power supply generates +5VDC and +24VDC for the entire system. Table 2 for a summary of
electrical/environmental characteristics.
Table 2 Summary of Electrical/Environmental Characteristics
Reserve Power
One or two optional Reserve Power Battery and Chargers (HPFBs) can be connected to the Strata
DK14 power supply to maintain normal operation during a power failure. The estimated battery
time for one or two HPFBs is shown below.
Notes
●Reserve power time varies with system call traffic.
●AC power must be available when HPFB is first installed.
●HPFB recharge time is 48 hours per HPFB.
Power Failure Interface
The Strata DK14 KSU provides an interface for a dedicated backup standard telephone during an
AC input power failure. If the system AC input power fails, the backup telephone will
automatically connect to the CO1 line. This feature is independent of the HPFB.
DK14 Primary Power
Input AC
AC frequency
Power
AC input current
115VAC ± 10VAC
50/60 Hz
DK14 - 46 watts maximum
<0.7 amps. max
Environmental Specifications
Operating temperature
Operating humidity
Storage temperature
32~104° F (0 ~40° C)
20~80% relative humidity without condensation
-4~158° F (-20~70° C)
Power Supply
DC voltage output specification +24VDC (+26.3~-27.8VDC)
+5VDC (+4.5~+5.5VDC)
QSTU2
Ring voltage Square wave output with high/low option jumper:
Low position 130 ± 20VDC peak-to-peak (no-load)
High position, 190 ± 25VDC peak-to-peak (no-load)
Ringing capability 2 ringers maximum per circuit, high or low position
DK14 (fully-loaded
system) Estimated Battery
Time (hours)
One HPFB 0.5~1.0
Two HPFBs 1.0~2.0
Strata DK14
Maximum Line/Station Configurations
Strata DK General Description 5/99 5
Music-on-Hold (MOH) Interface
Customers can connect their own MOH source to this interface. The source can also feed external
page speakers and telephone speakers with Background Music (BGM).
Paging Interface
This 600-ohm interface can support a Toshiba External Speaker (HESB) or a customer-supplied
amplifier and speaker for Paging, Night Ringing over Page, and BGM applications.
Flexible Relay Contacts
A relay contact can be programmed to either mute BGM during a page announcement over
external speakers, to operate a device—such as an answering machine or ringing bell—during the
Night Mode, or to provide on-off control for a MOH source.
Maximum Line/Station Configurations
The maximum line and station configurations for DK14 are shown in Table 3.
Table 3 CO Lines and Station Ports
Network Requirements
Network requirements of station/line PCBs and interface cards are summarized in Table 37 on
Page 110.
DK14 System CO Line Ports Digital Ports Standard
Telephone Ports1
1. Standard telephone ports do not support MW lamps on standard telephones.
Basic KSU 240 or 2
Expanded KSU 360 or 2
Expanded KSU 480 or 2
Strata DK14
Functional Block Diagram
6Strata DK General Description 5/99
Functional Block Diagram
Figure 3 shows the Strata DK14 KSU PCBs and the available lines, stations and peripherals. Basic
voltage and cabling information is also included.
Figure 3 Functional Block Diagram
SMDR
Printer
TOSHIBA
Standard Telephone
Stand-alone
Data Interface
Shared
Printer
DIU
POWER READY CONNECT
TOSHIBA
Digital Telephone
and Add-on Module
Digital Telephone
and Add-on Module
MOH/BGM Source
DDCB MDFB
AMP
Digital Telephone
Speaker
Door Phones and Lock Control
600Ω
Night Bell, BGM Mute, or
MOH (Control Relay)
AC Input
Battery Connector
115 ± 10VAC (0.7 AMP)
50/60 Hz
HPFB
Battery
and Charger
(first)
HPFB
Battery
and Charger
(second)
Note One or two optional HPFB
reserve power units may be
installed.
Power Failure
Telephone
Loop Start Lines
• FIC: 02LS2
• REN: 0.3 B
Central Office/
Centrex/PBX
RJ11C/
RJ21X
RJ14C
Line 1
Line 2
CO1
PFT
CO2
RJ11C
Modular Jack
QCDU2A
(first/optional)
2 — Digital Telephone CKTS
1 — Loop CO Line CKT
CO3, RJ11C
CO4, RJ11C
Line 3
Line 4
QSTU2A
(optional)
2 — Standard
Telephone CKTS
WSIU
(optional)
DK Admin, SMDR, SMDI
or CLID Interface CKT
3-pair Modular Interface
FAX
TOSHIBA
Digital Telephone
With RPCI
Page
Output
Relay
Contact
25-pair Amphenol Connector
RS-232 Port 1
RS-232 Port 2
QPSU8A2
Power Supply
QRCU3A
(optional)
DTMF/ABR
Receivers (3)
KSU Main Circuit Board
(standard)
4 — Digital Telephone CKTS
2 — Loop CO Line CKTS
RCA Jacks
QKYS1A
(optional)
Auto
Attendant
Feature Key
2419
QCDU2A
(second/optional)
2 — Digital Telephone CKTS
1 — Loop CO Line CKT
Caller ID Interface
Box (TC-1041)
117 VAC
1
1
1
1
1. Customer-supplied equipment
DK14 Key Service Unit
X
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Strata DK14
System Technology
Strata DK General Description 5/99 7
System Technology
Pulse Code Modulation
Digital switching talkpaths enable all CO and intercom lines to be accessed simultaneously.
Analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog conversion is done by CODECs (coder plus decoder) on
station and CO line PCBs.
Custom Electronic Circuitry
Large Scale Integration (LSI) technology makes the Strata DK14 circuit designs simple and
efficient. Gate arrays using very large scale integration save vast amounts of space by using the
latest technology. More circuitry fits onto smaller PCBs for a more compact system. Widespread
use of CMOS circuits minimizes system power requirements.
Stored Program Control
The system uses a 16-bit microprocessor for stored program control. The Strata DK14 System
operating software is stored on Read Only Memory (ROM), and individual configuration and
custom programming is stored on Random Access Memory (RAM). A lithium battery with a life
span of at least six years preserves RAM in the case of a power failure.
Microprocessors
The system’s main microprocessor is a 16-bit 68000-type that operates at a clock speed of
8 MHz. In addition, some PCBs use 8-bit, TMP90C840-type local microprocessors that run at 10
MHz. This distributed microprocessing architecture is used system wide.
Strata DK14
Maintenance and Programming
8Strata DK General Description 5/99
Maintenance and Programming
Hardware maintenance and repair procedures describe how to quickly locate, remove, and replace
defective parts and PCBs. System programming can be performed without taking the system out-
of-service.
On-site programming can be executed with any 20-button proprietary LCD telephone or with a
DKAdmin PC connected to an optional maintenance port.
Off-site programming with DKAdmin, which can help cut costs and save time, is available
through a customer-provided modem connected to the maintenance port.
DKAdmin/DKBackup
Toshiba DKAdmin Release 4.0 software enables customer data (configuration, station, and system
options) to be downloaded to a PC and stored on a computer disk. The customer data can be added
to, or changed, using the PC independent of the DK System.
The new customer data can then be uploaded to the DK System from the PC, changing customer
program options on-site or remotely over telephone lines and/or modems.
The DKBackup software program is also available. The program consists of a small subset of
DKAdmin functions which can perform backup, restore and upgrade functions, but cannot edit
customer databases.
Strata DK General Description 5/99 9
Strata DK40i 2
This chapter provides an overview of the Strata DK40i System and its capacities.
The Strata DK40i Base Key Service Unit (KSU) is a compact system that provides many of the
features offered by much larger systems. The KSU is designed for convenient wall-mounting and
occupies very little space (see Figure 4 and Table 4.)
Station and CO Lines
The DK40i Base KSU comes equipped with eight digital telephone station circuits. One of three
optional PCBs can be added to provide either four loop start or DID lines, or two ISDN BRI S/T
circuits. An optional TCIU2 Printed Circuit Board (PCB) can be added to the Base KSU loop start
line PCB to provide Caller ID interface. An optional KSTU2 PCB can be added to provide four
standard telephone circuits (ports).
Note An optional Expansion KSU can be added to the DK40i to increase the system capacity to
28 station ports and 12 CO lines (see Figure 5). A maximum of 28 station ports and 12 CO
line interfaces are allowed in the system (Base KSU plus Expansion KSU). Base capacity
is 12 station ports and 4 CO line interfaces.
Figure 4 Base Key Service Unit (KSU) Figure 5 KSU with Expansion Unit
AC DC
POWER
4247
AC DC
POWER
1711
Strata DK40i
Peripherals
10 Strata DK General Description 5/99
Peripherals
The DK40i Base KSU can support a number of peripherals, which are not considered as stations or
lines and do not affect the maximum station and line capacities. The DK40i Base KSU comes
standard with built-in interfaces for connecting the following dealer-supplied equipment: an
amplifier and speaker for paging and night ringing, Music-on-Hold (MOH) source, reserve power
batteries, and emergency standard telephone for system power failure occurrences when using
loop start lines in the base cabinet.
A relay contact is also provided to control one of the following peripherals: MOH source, night
bell, or page amplifier mute control.
An optional KSTU2 PCB provides an alternate background music source interface. The music
plays through Toshiba telephone speakers, as opposed to the external page speakers.
The optional TSIU PCB provides two RS-232 interface ports to connect two of three options: a
DKAdmin PC (or external modem for remote maintenance); or VM SMDI; or an SMDR port to
connect a call accounting device or printer. An Expansion Unit RS-232 interface PCB is required
if all three features are needed.
Table 4 KSU and Expansion Unit Specifications
Unit Weight Height Width Depth
Key Service Base Unit 8.4 lbs.
(3.8 kg) 18.0 inches
(457 mm) 12.2 inches
(310 mm) 3.4 inches
(86 mm)
Expansion Unit
1 lb. empty
(0.45 kg)
4.3 lbs. full
(2.4 kg)
18.0 inches
(457 mm) 7.8 inches
(198 mm) 3.4 inches
(86 mm)
Strata DK40i
Base KSU Architecture
Strata DK General Description 5/99 11
Base KSU Architecture
The Strata DK40i Base KSU contains the main processor, operating software, circuitry and the
following components (see Figure 6).
Figure 6 Base KSU Interior
Digital Telephone Circuits
The main circuit board (TMAU2) in the Strata DK40i Base KSU has eight integrated circuits that
can connect to Toshiba-proprietary digital telephones (including the cordless telephone), Stand-
alone Data Interface Units (PDIU-DSs), Digital Door Phone/Lock Control Units (DDCB), and
Digital Direct Station Selection Consoles (DDSS).
Furthermore, each of the digital telephones can support a PC Data Interface Unit (RPCI-DI) or up
to two Add-on Modules (DADMs).
Central Office (CO) Line Circuits (TCOU/TDDU/TBSU)
A TCOU PCB can be installed in the Base KSU to provide four circuits for loop start CO lines. Or,
a TDDU PCB can be installed to provide four circuits for Direct Inward Dialing (DID) lines. Or,
the TBSU can be installed to provide two circuits for BRI lines or stations (see TBSU below).
The CO line interface and DID interface unit can be programmed for DTMF or dial pulse signaling
and each line has a switch to control potential excess volume that could be created by a nearby
PBX or CO. Built-in gas tubes help protect each TDDU and TCOU line from lightning. An
optional RDDU (for DID lines) installed in the Expansion Unit requires an external secondary
protector. DID lines require the optional K5RCU2 tone receiver.
FG2
POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY
MODEL
INPUT: AC127V 2.2A 60 HZ
OUTPUT: -27.3V 2.8A. -27.3V 0.2A
V. 1A 1996-05 00001
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
TPSU16A
MADE IN
WARNING
Hazardous voltage inside!
If servicing required
remove A. C. plug.
12
+
-
BATT
PN2
12
AC DC
DC POWER
TMAU2A
OFF
ON
4238
Connect Expansion
Unit TB1 TO FG2
Expansion KSU
Cable Receptacle
Important Notice
Battery Jumper
-24 Volt Circuit
Breakers
Reserve Power
Battery Jack
Base Telephone
Tip/Ring and
Relay Contact
Music-on-Hold
Input
Music-on-Hold
Sensitivity Adjustment
IMPORTANT: DKSUE16A is incompatible with this unit
DKSUET16A or DKSUE40A is required for expansion
Strata DK40i
Base KSU Architecture
12 Strata DK General Description 5/99
ISDN BRI S/T Circuits (TBSU)
The TBSU PCB provides two Basic Rate Interface (BRI) circuits for DK40i. The TBSU can only
be installed in the DK40i Base KSU.
The TBSU contains two circuits, each of which reduces the system capacity by two station ports or
two CO lines. If the BRI circuit is configured a station circuit, the circuit assumes two station
ports. If the BRI circuit is configured as a line circuit, the circuit assumes two CO lines. BRI lines
can be used for voice and data calls.
The TBSU circuits are four-wire S/T type circuits and connect to the PSTN BRI lines using a
dealer-supplied UL-listed Network Terminator unit (NT1). In Canada, the NT-1 must be CSA
certified. On the station side, they can connect to S-type ISDN Terminal Equipment (TE) or
Terminal Adapters (TA).
Caller ID (TCIU2)
An optional Caller ID PCB (TCIU2) can be added to the four-circuit loop start CO line PCB
(TCOU) to provide four Caller ID circuits. Local telephone companies do not provide Caller ID on
DID lines; so the TCIU2 PCB cannot be added to the four-circuit DID PCB (TDDU). Caller ID
can also be added with the RCIU2 and KCDU2. See “Caller ID Interface Unit (RCIU2)” on Page
41 and “Caller ID” on Page 65 for more information.
Standard Telephone Interface Unit (KSTU2)
The optional KSTU2 provides four circuits that can interface with DTMF for rotary dial standard
telephones and other single-line devices, including: Strata AirLink Wireless Base Station Interface
Adapters (BSIAs) and handsets, fax/modems (14.4 bps max.), Voice Mail and Auto Attendant
devices, off-premises stations, alternate BGM source and dictation equipment. These devices may
require that the optional tone receiver (K5RCU or K5RCU2) be installed in the DK40i Base KSU
to interpret the DTMF signals the above devices may transmit.
The KSTU2 does not support message waiting lamps on standard telephones. The RSTU2 must be
installed in the Expansion Unit to support message waiting lamps.
DTMF/ABR Tone Detection Receiver (K5RCU and K5RCU2)
Station users in systems that have the optional K5RCU or K5RCU2 installed can access Automatic
Busy Redial (ABR) and communicate with devices, such as standard telephones or voice mail
machines that require DTMF signaling.
This unit is also required for Direct Inward System Access (DISA) and built-in or external Auto
Attendant operation, as well as for DID and Tie lines. Each K5RCU or K5RCU2 PCB contains
five shared receivers.
Auto Attendant Feature Key (KKYS)
The system can be upgraded with an optional built-in Auto Attendant (AA). The KKYS installs
onto the K5RCU PCB in the Base KSU.
SMDR, SMDI, and Maintenance DKAdmin/Modem (TTY) Interface (TSIU)
The TSIU PCB provides two RS-232 interface ports (modular jacks) that allow the DK40i system
to connect to an SMDR Call Accounting device, a DKAdmin PC or external modem for system
maintenance/administration, or an SMDI interface for Voice Mail. It does not have a built-in
modem capability.
Strata DK40i
Base KSU Architecture
Strata DK General Description 5/99 13
Only one TSIU can be installed per DK40i system. When the TSIU PCB is installed, the PIOU can
still be installed for zone paging, control relays, and an SMDR RS-232 interface, built-in (IMDU)
maintenance modem, or an SMDI or maintenance interface.
Power Supply
The power supply generates +5VDC and -24VDC for the entire system, even in its expanded
configuration. (See Table 5 for a summary of electrical/environmental characteristics.)
The power supply provides a built-in charger for the batteries (see Table 6). Two customer-
supplied 12-volt batteries can be connected to the power supply to maintain fully functioning
operation during a power failure.
Table 5 Summary of Electrical/Environmental Characteristics
DK40i Primary Power
Input AC
AC frequency
Power
AC input current
115VAC ± 10VAC
50/60 Hz
75 watts maximum
1.8A maximum
Environmental Specifications
Operating temperature
Operating humidity
Storage temperature
32~104° F (0 ~40° C)
20~80% relative humidity without condensation
-4~158° F (-20~70° C)
Power Supply
DC voltage output specification -24VDC (-25.94~-28.66VDC)
+5VDC (+4.5~+5.5VDC)
-5VDC (-4.5~-5.5VDC) - Expansion KSU only
Battery Charger Characteristics
Charger: current limiting
Nominal float voltage: 2.275 volts/cell
Charge current: 0.7 amps maximum
Battery discharge cut-off voltage: 20.5 ±0.5VDC
KSTU2
Ring voltage Square wave output with high/low option jumper:
Low position 130 ±20VDC peak-to-peak (no-load)
High position, 190 ±25VDC peak-to-peak (no-load)
Ringing capability 2 ringers maximum per circuit, high or low position
RSTU2 or RDSU
Ring voltage 80V RMS sine wave
Ringing capability one ringer per circuit, with or without Message Waiting
RSTU2 (only) Message Waiting voltage -90 VDC/one telephone per circuit (max.)
RSTU2 or RDSU modem interface data rate 14,400 bps maximum
Strata DK40i
Expansion KSU Architecture
14 Strata DK General Description 5/99
Power Failure Interface
The Base KSU provides an interface for a dedicated backup standard telephone during an AC
input power failure. If the system AC input power fails, the backup telephone automatically
connects to the CO1 line. The backup telephone is disabled when the system operates during
normal power conditions.
This feature is independent of Battery Backup and is available when loop start lines are installed in
the Base KSU. A power failure telephone cannot be installed for DID lines.
Music-on-Hold Interface
Customers can connect their own MOH source to this interface. The source can also feed external
page speakers and telephone speakers with BGM.
♦Paging Interface – This 600-ohm interface supports a Toshiba External Speaker (HESB) or a
customer-supplied amplifier and speaker for Paging, Night Ringing over Page, and BGM.
♦Flexible Relay Contacts – A relay contact can be programmed to either mute BGM during a
page announcement over external speakers, to operate a device: i.e., an answering machine or
ringing bell during the Night Mode, or to provide on-off control for a MOH source.
Expansion KSU Architecture
The optional Expansion KSU, which attaches
easily to the side of the Base KSU, offers four
universal slots that can host a variety of line and
telephone PCBs (see Figure 7). See Chapter 4 –
Universal Slot PCBs for descriptions of PCBs.
Table 6 Typical Reserve Power Duration Estimates
Description DK40i Base KSU DK40i Expansion KSU
No KSTU2 KSTU2 1 PCB 2 PCBs 3 PCBs 4 PCBs
Approximate (-24V) current drain (DC amps.) 1.0 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4 2.8
Estimated battery operation time (in hours) 75.0 58.0 41.0 31.0 25.0 20.0
Reserve power time estimates assume the following:
• Batteries are fully charged at start of operation and two batteries are connected in a series (12 VDC, rated 80 amp/hours each).
• Batteries used for this test are gel-cell and maintenance free. Reserve duration will vary depending upon battery type, age, and
manufacturer. These figures should be used as an estimate.
• AC power must be available when first installing reserve power batteries.
Expansion
PCB Slots
Strata DK40i
Expansion KSU
Expansion Cover
Side
Cover
Strata DK40i
Base KSU
4243
Figure 7 Expansion KSU Interior
Strata DK40i
Typical Line Configurations
Strata DK General Description 5/99 15
Typical Line Configurations
This section shows the maximum basic and CO configurations that are possible with the DK40i.
There is a variety of configuration combinations of digital and standard telephones with CO lines,
including loop start, ground start, Tie, and DID lines. Any loop or ground start CO line can be
equipped with Caller ID.
DK40i Line and Station Capacity
The following table shows maximum capacity for a DK40i system (see Table 7). See the Strata
DK Installation and Maintenance Manual, Chapter 2 – DK40i Configuration for details.
Table 7 Maximum CO Lines/Ports and BRI Line and Station Circuits
Attaining maximum system capacities depends on power consumption of a particular
configuration. Power factor calculations in accordance with the Strata DK I&M Manual will
determine if the maximum capacities in these tables can be reached.
Stations can be a combination of ISDN TE-1 and TA S-type devices and digital, electronic or
standard telephones. CO line combinations include ground or loop start, DID, Tie or ISDN BRI.
Each BRI line circuit uses up two CO lines at system capacity. All other line circuits use up one
CO line of system capacity.
Each BRI station circuit uses up to two station ports of system capacity. All other station circuits
use up one station port of system capacity.
Table 8 Typical Maximum Capacity Examples with ISDN BRI (S/T and/or U-type) Circuits
Network Requirements
See Table 37 on Page 110 for network requirements of station and line PCBs and interface cards.
Hardware Maximum
Allowed
CO Lines 12
Station Ports 28
BRI Line Circuits 6
BRI Station Circuits 10
BRI Station
Circuits BRI Station
B channels Other Station
Circuits BRI Line
Circuits BRI Line
B channels Other Line
Circuits
10 20 8 6 12 0
816 1248 4
612 1648 4
48 20612 0
48 2048 4
24 2424 8
0 0 28 0 0 12
Strata DK40i
Functional Block Diagram
16 Strata DK General Description 5/99
Functional Block Diagram
See Figure 8 shows the Strata DK40i Base and Expansion KSU PCBs and the available lines,
stations and peripherals. Basic voltage and cabling information is also included.
Figure 8 Functional Block Diagram
_+
Amp
Interface Box
DIU
POWER READY CONNECT
•
•
•
TCIU2
U
Uor
TBSU
Night Bell, BGM Mute
or MOH (Control Relay)
Digital Telephone
and Add-on Module
AA Digital
Announcer
TCOU Line Only
MOH/BGM Source
DDCB MDFB
Digital Telephone and DSS Console
Voice Mail
E911
Alternated BGM Source
Standard Telephone
Door Phones
and Lock Control
25-Pair
Amphenol
Connector
Digital Telephone with
Integrated Data Interface
Stand-alone
Data Interface
Electronic Telephone
Printer
Door Phones And Lock Control
DDCB
TA or TE-1 BRI (S/T)
MDFB
DK40i Base Key
Service Unit
DK40 Expansion Key
Service Unit
TPSU16A
TSIU
DID or CO1
DID or CO2
DID or CO3
DID or CO4
T
T
NT1
BRI
NT1
BRI
REMU (4)
RGLU (4)
RCIU2 (4)
RCIS (4)
RBSU/
RBSS
RDDU (4)
RCOU (4)
Line PCBs
Charger
BATT
AC
INPUT TMAU2
Common
Control
and
Digital
Tele-
Phone
Ckts (8)
Interface
Digital
Modular Connectors
Optional
Standard
Telephone
Ckts (4)
KSTU2
TBSU
TCOU
or
TDDU
Optional
DTMF/ABR
RCVRS (5)
K5RCU
Auto
Attendant
Key
KKYS1 (AA)
RCA Jacks
Speaker
Optional Customer-supplied Batteries
_+
12 Volt
Battery
_+
12 Volt
Battery
PBTC
Cable
Power Failure
Telephone (PFT)
Central Office/
Centrex/PBX
Loop Start, DID, Tie
or ISDN BRI Lines
(see Note below)
Tie, DID, and
CO Lines
DKAdmin PC (TTY Port)
Door Lock or BGM
Mute Control Relay
Alarm Relay Sensor
Night Bell or MOH
(Control Relays)
SMDR Printer (SMDR Port)
SMDI or DKAdmin PC
SMDI or SMDR Call
Accounting Device
PIOU Page Zone
Relay Control
Note
External Protectors (not shown) must be used
with each RDDU DID or Tie line. TDDU DID
lines have built-in protectors.
PIOUS
or PIOU
KCDU2 (2/4)
RSSU
TTY
Port only
Peripheral
Interface
PCB
PDKU2 (8)
PEKU (8)
PESU (4/2)
PSTU or
RSTU2 (8)
Electronic
Electronic/
Standard
RDSU
(4/2+2)
Digital/
Standard
Standard
Telephone
Digital/
Standard
IMDU
(Modem)
Stratagy
DK
Page Zone 4
Page Zone 1
Modem Personal Computer
Fax
Standard Telephone
25-pair Amphenol Connector
4227
Station PCBs
RCOS (4)
RBSU (2 BRI)
115 ± 10VAC (15 AMP)
50/60 Hz
BRI UT
NT1
6 max.
TA or TE-1 BRI (S/T)
S
RJ45 Modular S
Base Station 1 Handsets
Base Station 2
Strata AirLink Base Station
Interface Adapter (BSIA)
RWIU (16)
Digital
Wireless
Telephone Strata AirLink Wireless
Base Stations (4)
Handsets
Strata DK40i
System Technology
Strata DK General Description 5/99 17
System Technology
Pulse Code Modulation
Digital switching talkpaths enable all CO and intercom lines to be accessed simultaneously.
Analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog conversion is done by CODECs (coder plus decoder) on
station and CO line PCBs.
Custom Electronic Circuitry
Large Scale Integration (LSI) technology enables the Strata DK40i circuit designs to be simple and
efficient. Gate arrays using very large scale integration save vast amounts of space by using the
latest technology. More circuitry fits onto smaller PCBs for a more compact system. Widespread
use of CMOS circuits minimize system power requirements.
Stored Program Control
The system uses a 16-bit microprocessor for stored program control. Strata DK40i system
operating software is stored on Read Only Memory (ROM), and individual configuration and
custom programming is stored on Random Access Memory (RAM). A lithium battery with a life
span of at least six years preserves RAM in the case of a power failure.
Microprocessors
The system’s main microprocessor is a 16-bit 68000-type that operates at a clock speed of 8 MHz.
In addition, some PCBs use 8-bit, TMP90C840-type local microprocessors that run at 10 MHz.
This distributed microprocessing architecture is used system-wide.
Maintenance and Programming
Hardware maintenance and repair procedures describe how to quickly locate, remove, and replace
defective parts and PCBs. System programming can be performed without taking the system out-
of-service.
On-site programming can be executed with any 20-button proprietary Liquid Crystal Display
(LCD) telephone or with a DKAdmin PC connected to an optional maintenance port.
Off-site programming with DKAdmin, which can help cut costs and save time, is available
through a customer-provided modem connected to the maintenance port. DK40i (only) provides
an optional built-in modem for remote administration and maintenance.
DKAdmin/DKBackup
Toshiba DKAdmin software Release 4.0 enables DK40i customer data (configuration, station, and
system options) to be downloaded to a PC and stored on a computer disk. The customer data can
be added to, or changed, using the PC independent of the DK System.
The new customer data can then be uploaded to the DK System from the PC, changing customer
program options on-site or remotely over telephone lines and/or modems.
The DKBackup software program is also available. The program consists of a small subset of
DKAdmin functions which can perform backup, restore and upgrade functions, but cannot edit
customer databases.
Strata DK40i
Strata AirLink Wireless System
18 Strata DK General Description 5/99
Strata AirLink Wireless System
The Strata AirLink™ Wireless Telephone system that is configured to standard ports of the Strata
DK and many non-Toshiba telephone systems has software that enables a System Administrator or
technician to quickly diagnose error messages, alarms, and traffic conditions by viewing a PC
monitor before troubleshooting the hardware.
The Status Window, displayed by the Strata AirLink Manager software, is an active window in
which viewing reports, querying the software, and rebooting the Base Station Interface Adapter
(BSIA) is possible. Some of the available reports are:
♦Base Station channels status
♦Line status
♦Call status
♦Critical alarms
The software also creates log files and sends error messages to the PC monitor to assist the
technician in making corrections. The log files are easily opened in any text editor for viewing and
have information about the BSIA boot software, Base Station upgrades, software queries, errors,
and alarms.
RWIU Wireless System
The Strata AirLink Wireless Telephone system that is configured to Strata DK telephone systems
using its own proprietary RWIU PCB also has software that enables a System Administrator or
technician to:
♦Set system IDs and enter handset IDs
♦Set the time and date, and change passwords
♦Enable UTAM
♦Change communication ports
♦Check the software version of the RWIU and Base Stations
♦View log messages
♦Reset and upgrade Base Stations and the RWIU
♦Change Base Station numbers
LEDs and BER Testing
There are several LEDs on each Base Station, BSIA, and the RWIU that indicate normal, boot up,
and alarm conditions. Signal fading and attenuation can be checked using the resident Bit Error
Rate (BER) test in each handset for additional troubleshooting and maintenance routines.
Strata DK General Description 5/99 19
Strata DK424 3
This chapter presents the Strata DK424, a private
telephone system tailor-made for small- to
medium-sized business applications. It employs
state-of-the-art technology to provide users with
an efficient, easy-to-use, feature-rich telephone
system.
A modular design and a choice of four common
control units enables the system to fit a variety of
customer needs and capacities.
The system line and station capacity can be
increased by adding additional cabinets (see
Figure 9 and Table 9) which have universal slots
capable of interfacing with almost any of the line,
station, and option interface PCBs available with
the system.
Strata DK424 easily connects to outside public
telephone lines (CO lines). All of the telephones
(stations) tied to the system can have direct access
to each other as well as to the public network.
Architecture
Base and Expansion Cabinets
The Base Cabinet and optional Expansion
Cabinets are the building blocks of the system.
Each system has a Base Cabinet, and can have from one to six Expansion Cabinets. All lines,
stations, and options are tied together through the cabinets.
Table 9 Cabinet Specifications
Cabinet Weight Height Width Depth
Base Cabinet (DKSUB424) 30.0 pounds
(13.6 kg) 11.8 inches
(300 mm) 23.6 inches
(600 mm) 9.8 inches
(249 mm)
Expansion Cabinet
(DKSUE424) 28.4 pounds
(12.9 kg) 10.0 inches
(254 mm) 23.6 inches
(600 mm) 9.8 inches
(249 mm)
1952
Figure 9 Base/Expansion Cabinets
Strata DK424
Architecture
20 Strata DK General Description 5/99
Expansion and Configuration
System station and CO line capacity is increased with the addition of cabinets and CO line and/or
station PCBs. Tables 11~15 show the number of stations and lines allowed when additional
cabinets and PCBs are used.
Base Cabinet
The Base Cabinet reserves two slots specifically for the system common control unit, labeled
“R11” and “RCTU.” The Base Cabinet also has six universal slots, labeled “S11 ~ S16,” which can
accommodate any station, line or option PCB (see Figure 10).
Figure 10 Base Cabinet Interior
Common Control Units
The system operates with one of four common control units (RCTUA, RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D,
or RCTUE/F). These common control units (sometimes called the “RCTU processors”) can only
be installed in the Base Cabinet.
♦The RCTUA unit consists of a single PCB.
♦The RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D and RCTUE/F common control units consist of two PCBs.
The RCTI also has a MOH/BGM source interface, and connectors to mount optional DTMF
receiver PCBs needed for DISA, Tie/DID/Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS)/
Automatic Number Identification (ANI) lines, voice mail, AA announcement devices, DTMF
standard telephones, and other peripherals. The RCTU provides an interface for connecting an
optional feature key (RKYS).
The common control unit contains the system's main 16 or 32-bit, 68000-type microprocessor and
microprocessor bus, battery-protected memory circuits, time switch logic, ABR tone detectors,
and system tones. (See Figure 12 on Page 29 for more information.)
Expansion Cabinets
The Expansion Cabinets have eight universal slots, “S_1” ~ “S_8.” Each of the universal slots can
interface with station, line, or option PCBs. Slots “S_1” ~ “S_6” are available with the RCTUA,
RCTUBA/BB, or RCTUC/D. Slots “S_7” and “S_8” are only available with the RCTUE/F
processor. See Figure 11 for slot numbers. The number of expansion cabinets varies according to
processor capacity (see Tables 16~19.
R11 PCTU S11 S12
S13 S14 S15 S16
R11 S11RCTU S12 S13 S14 S15 S16
1
2
3
-24V
POWER
+5V
-5V
AC IN
FG
DC OUT
+
BATT
-
ON
OFF
DKSUE
DKSUB
2520
Strata DK424
Architecture
Strata DK General Description 5/99 21
Figure 11 Expansion Cabinet Interior
Cabinet PCB Subassemblies
Subassemblies can be added within the Strata DK cabinets to provide additional features or to
increase line capacity. Also see “Summary of PCBs and Subassemblies” on Page 40.
DTMF Receiver Subassembly (RRCS)
The RRCS translates DTMF tones from DID/Tie/ANI/DNIS/DISA lines, built-in AA, DTMF
standard telephones, and other peripheral devices to data signals for the system.
The RRCS can be attached to the common control unit and is available with either 4, 8, or 12
(RRCS-4, -8 or -12) shared receiver circuits. See Table 32 on Page 88 for more information.
RKYS Feature Key Upgrades
The system can be upgraded for built-in AA, Automatic Call Distribution (ACD), Software
Management Information System (SMIS) for ACD, and for Insight DK with the following feature
keys that attach to the common control unit. See Table 10 for a list of features provided by RKYS
feature keys.
Table 10 RKYS Features
Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs)
PCBs are installed in the cabinets to provide interface for stations, lines, and peripherals. Each
PCB measures 7.5 x 5.5 inches (190 x 140 mm) and mounts in the slot with a 44-pin backplane
connector. PCB external connections to station equipment are made to the Main Distribution
Frame (MDF) using industry-standard connectors. For more details, see Chapter 5 – Stations and
Peripherals.
Feature(s) Provided RKYS1 RKYS2 RKYS3 Common Control Unit
Built-in Auto Attendant X X X Applies to all RCTUs
ACD X X RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D or RCTUE/F
ACD with MIS data information X RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D or RCTUE/F
S_3 S_6 S_7 S_8S_1 S_2 S_4 S_5
1
2
3
-24V
POWER
+5V
-5V
AC IN
FG
DC OUT
+
BATT
-
ON
OFF
CABINET NO.
23 456
S_1 S_2S
_3S
_4
S_5S
_6S
_7S
_8
DKSUE
DKSUB
2521
S_1S
_2S
_3S
_4
7
Strata DK424
Maximum Line/Station Capacities
22 Strata DK General Description 5/99
Maximum Line/Station Capacities
A summary of the maximum number of lines and stations by processor is shown in Tables 11~19.
Attaining maximum system capacities depends on power consumption of a particular
configuration. Power factor calculations in accordance with the Strata DK I&M Manual will
determine if the maximum capacities in these tables can be reached.
Configurations for a fully expanded system can range from 84 lines/336 stations to a squared
system of 200 outside lines/224 stations.
See Table 11 for the station and line capacities for eight-port RCOU/RCOS CO line PCBs, with
one slot reserved for an optional interface PCB. There is a trade-off between stations and lines.
Every group of eight stations installed decreases the CO line capacity of the system by eight, and
vice versa.
The following table assumes one cabinet slot is used for an Optional Interface PCB.
Table 11 Configuration for Eight-Circuit CO Line PCBs (RCOU/RCOS) Without Caller ID
1 Cabinet
RCTUA
2 Cabinets
RCTUB or
RCTUBA/BB
3 Cabinets
RCTUC/D 4 Cabinets
RCTUC/D 5 Cabinets
RCTUC/D 6 Cabinets
RCTUC/D 7 Cabinets
RCTUE/F
CO
Lines Stations CO
Lines Stations CO
Lines Stations CO
Lines Stations CO
Lines Stations CO
Lines Stations CO
Lines Stations
16 24 48 40 72 64 96 88 120 112 144 136 200 224
44 40 68 64 92 88 116 112 140 136 196 224
40 48 64 72 88 96 112 120 136 144 192 232
36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 188 232
32 56 56 80 80 104 104 128 128 152 184 240
28 56 52 80 76 104 100 128 124 152 180 240
24 64 48 88 72 112 96 136 120 160 176 248
20 64 44 88 68 112 92 136 116 160 172 248
16 72 40 96 64 120 88 144 112 168 168 256
12 72 36 96 60 120 84 144 108 168 164 256
8 80 32 104 56 128 80 152 104 176 160 264
28 104 52 128 76 152 100 176 156 264
24 112 48 136 72 160 96 184 152 272
20 112 44 136 68 160 92 184 148 272
40 144 64 168 88 192 144 280
36 144 60 168 84 192 140 280
32 152 56 176 80 200 136 288
28 152 52 176 76 200 132 288
24 160 48 184 72 208 128 296
44 184 68 208 124 296
40 192 64 216 120 304
36 192 60 216 116 304
32 200 56 224 112 312
52 224 108 312
48 232 104 320
44 232 100 320
40 240 96 328
92 328
88 336
84 336
Strata DK424
Maximum Line/Station Capacities
Strata DK General Description 5/99 23
Tables 12~15 assume one cabinet slot is used for an Optional Interface PCB.
Table 13 Eight Circuit (RCOU/RCOS) CO Loop Start Analog Lines with Caller ID Maximum Capacities
Table 12 Configuration for Four Circuit DID or Tie Line PCBs
1 Cabinet
RCTUA
2 Cabinets
RCTUB or
RCTUBA/BB
3 Cabinets
RCTUC/D 4 Cabinets
RCTUC/D 5 Cabinets
RCTUC/D 6 Cabinets
RCTUC/D 7 Cabinets
RCTUE/F
CO
Lines Stations CO
Lines Stations CO
Lines Stations CO
Lines Stations CO
Lines Stations CO
Lines Stations CO
Lines Stations
8 24 24 40 36 64 48 88 60 112 72 136 100 224
4 32204832724496561206814496232
16 56 28 80 40 104 52 128 64 152 92 240
12 65 24 88 36 112 48 136 60 160 88 248
8 72 20 96 30 120 44 144 56 168 84 256
4 80 16 104 28 128 40 152 52 176 80 264
12 112 24 136 36 160 48 184 76 272
10 120 20 144 32 168 44 192 72 280
16 152 28 176 48 200 68 288
12 160 24 184 36 208 64 296
20 192 32 216 60 304
16 200 28 224 56 312
24 232 52 320
20 240 48 328
44 336
1 Cabinet
RCTUA 2 Cabinets
RCTUBA/BB 3 Cabinets
RCTUC/D 4 Cabinets
RCTUC/D 5 Cabinets
RCTUC/D 6 Cabinets
RCTUC/D 7 Cabinets
RCTUE/F
Lines Stations Lines Stations Lines Stations Lines Stations Lines Stations Lines Stations Lines Stations
8 24244040565672728888104136152
16 56 32 72 48 88 64 104 80 120 128 168
8 72 24 88 40 104 56 120 72 136 120 184
16 104 32 120 48 136 64 152 112 200
24 136 40 152 56 168 104 216
32 168 48 184 96 232
40 200 88 248
80 264
Strata DK424
Maximum Line/Station Capacities
24 Strata DK General Description 5/99
Table 15 Digital, Tie, DID, Ground/Loop Start Digital T1 and ISDN PRI Lines Maximum Combined Capacities
Table 14 Four Circuit (RGLU) CO Ground Start Analog Lines with Caller ID Maximum Combined Capacities
1 Cabinet
RCTUA 2 Cabinets
RCTUBA/BB 3 Cabinets
RCTUC/D 4 Cabinets
RCTUC/D 5 Cabinets
RCTUC/D 6 Cabinets
RCTUC/D 7 Cabinets
RCTUE/F
Lines Stations Lines Stations Lines Stations Lines Stations Lines Stations Lines Stations Lines Stations
8 1620243240444856646872104112
16 40 28 48 40 64 52 72 64 88 100 120
8 64246436724888609696136
16 88 32 88 44 96 56 112 92 144
12 96 28 96 40 112 52 120 88 160
24 112 36 120 48 136 84 168
20 120 32 136 44 144 80 184
16 136 28 144 40 160 76 192
24 160 36 168 72 208
32 184 68 216
28 192 64 232
60 240
56 256
2 Cabinets
RCTUBA/BB 3 Cabinets
RCTUC/D 4 Cabinets
RCTUC/D 5 Cabinets
RCTUC/D 6 Cabinets
RCTUC/D 7 Cabinets
RCTUE/F
Lines Stations Lines Stations Lines Stations Lines Stations Lines Stations Lines Stations
48 56 72 88 112 112 120 152 144 144 1921
1. The maximum number of PRI lines for 2 cabinets is 47, 3~6 cabinets is 141 and 7 cabinets is 188.
240
40 64 64 96 96 120 112 160 120 168 184 248
24 72 48 104 88 128 96 168 112 176 168 264
16 80 40 112 72 136 88 176 96 192 160 272
24 120 64 144 72 184 88 200 144 288
16 128 48 152 64 192 72 216 136 296
40 160 48 200 64 224 120 312
24 168 40 208 48 240 112 320
16 176 24 216 ——96336
Notes
●T1 lines can be in increments of 8, 16 and/or 24.
●PRI channels can be in increments of 23B+1D or 47B + 1D. Each B channel represents a PRI CO line
Strata DK424
Maximum Line/Station Capacities
Strata DK General Description 5/99 25
Tables 16~19 show system maximum capacity examples with ISDN BRI (S/T and/or U) circuits.
Table 16 RCTUA Maximum Capacity Examples with ISDN BRI (S/T and/or U-type) Circuits
Table 17 RCTUBA/BB Maximum Capacity Examples with ISDN BRI (S/T and/or U-type) Circuits
BRI Station
Circuits1BRI Station
B channels1Other Station
Circuits3BRI Line
Circuits4BRI Line
B channels4Other Line
Circuits5
82 16216 0 0 0
612 1624 0
510 1636 0
4 8 164
2820
4 8 1624 4
3 6 1612 8
2 4 2424 8
1 2 2812 12
BRI Station
Circuits1BRI Station
B channels1
Other
Station
Circuits3
BRI Line
Circuits4BRI Line
B channels4Other Line
Circuits5
16232232 821620
12 24 40 8 16 8
10 20 40 8 16 12
8164881616
8164861220
816564 824
816562 428
6125661224
612564 828
612642 432
4 8 64 4 8 32
4 8 64 2 4 32
24722440
1. Each BRI circuit (S/T and/or U-type) provides two B channels plus one D channel and reduces the
system capacity by two station ports and two CO lines. Each (S/T) BRI station circuit allows up to two
TE-1 and TA devices to share the BRI B channels (two simultaneous calls maximum per BRI circuit.).
Each BRI-U circuit supports one TE-1 or TA device.
2. Maximum BRI capacity.
3. Other stations include Toshiba digital and electronic telephones, or attendant consoles, standard
telephones and devices.
4. BRI S/T circuits are available with RBSU/RBSS PCBs and BRI-U circuits are available with RBUU/
RBUS PCBs. ISDN BRI PCBs will be available with a future release of DK424 software. Each BRI
line circuit (S/T or U) provides two BRI CO lines (B channels) for incoming/outgoing calls.
5. Other lines include analog and digital (T1 or PRI) loop start, ground start, DID, and Tie lines.
Strata DK424
Power Requirements
26 Strata DK General Description 5/99
Table 18 RCTUC/D Maximum Capacity Examples with ISDN BRI (S/T and/or U-type) Circuits
Table 19 RCTUE/F Maximum Capacity Examples with ISDN BRI (S/T and/or U-type) Circuits
Power Requirements
Each Base and Expansion Cabinet houses a power supply that generates ±5VDC and -24VDC
which furnishes power to all of the stations and some of the peripherals that interface with the
cabinet. A fully loaded Strata DK424 requires an input power source of 115VAC ± 10VAC
(105VAC ~ 125VAC), 17.5 amps., 50/60 Hz. (see Table 20).
BRI Station
Circuits1BRI Station
B channels1Other Station
Circuits3BRI Line
Circuits4BRI Line
B channels4Other
Line Circuits5
402802144 8216248
30 60 164 8 16 68
20 40 184 8 16 88
16 32 192 8 16 96
12 24 200 8 16 104
816 208 816 112
8 16 216 4 8 120
8 16 216 2 4 124
4 8 228 2 4 132
BRI Station
Circuits1BRI Station
B channels1Other Station
Circuits3BRI Line
Circuits4BRI Line
B channels4Other Line
Circuits5
6421282192 8216256
50 100 216 8 16 84
40 80 240 8 16 104
30 60 256 8 16 124
20 40 280 8 16 144
16 32 288 8 16 152
816 304 816 168
8 16 312 4 8 176
8 16 312 2 4 180
4 8 320 4 8 184
4 8 320 2 4 188
2 4 328 2 4 192
1. Each BRI circuit (S/T and/or U-type) provides two B channels plus one D channel and reduces the system
capacity by two station ports and two CO lines. Each (S/T) BRI station circuit allows up to two TE-1 and TA
devices to share the BRI B channels (two simultaneous calls maximum per BRI circuit.). Each BRI-U circuit
supports one TE-1 or TA device.
2. Maximum BRI capacity
3. Conventional stations include Toshiba digital and electronic telephones, or attendant consoles, standard
telephones and devices.
4. BRI S/T circuits are available with RBSU/RBSS PCBs and BRI-U circuits are available with RBUU/RBUS
PCBs. ISDN BRI PCBs will be available with a future release of DK424 software. Each BRI line circuit (S/T
or U) provides two BRI CO lines (channels) for incoming/outgoing calls
5. Conventional lines include analog and digital (T1 or PRI) loop start, ground start, DID, and Tie lines.
Strata DK424
Power Requirements
Strata DK General Description 5/99 27
Table 20 DK424 Summary of Electrical/Environmental Characteristics
DK424 Primary Power
Input AC
AC amps for seven-cabinet system
AC frequency
Watts per cabinet (continuous)
Watts for six cabinet system (continuous)
115VAC ± 10VAC
20 amp circuit
50/60 Hz
180
845
DK424 Maximum Peak AC Input Current
1 cabinet – 2.5 amps
2 cabinets –5.0 amps
3 cabinets – 7.5 amps
4 cabinets – 10.0 amps
5 cabinets – 11.5 amps
6 cabinets – 15.0 amps
7 cabinets – 17.5 amps
Environmental Specifications
Operating temperature
Operating humidity
Storage temperature
32~104° F (0~40° C)
20~80% relative humidity without condensation
-4~158° F (-20~70° C)
Power Supply
DC voltage output specification -24VDC (-26.3~-27.8VDC)
+5VDC (+4.5~+5.5VDC)
-5VDC (-4.5~-5.5VDC) - Expansion Cabinet only
Battery Charger Characteristics
Charger: current limiting
Nominal float voltage: 2.275 volts/cell
Charge current: 0.7 amps maximum
Battery discharge cut-off voltage: 20.5 ±0.5VDC
PESU (Circuits 1 and 2)
Ring voltage Square wave output with high/low option jumper:
Low position 130 ±20VDC peak-to-peak (no-load)
High position, 190 ±25VDC peak-to-peak (no-load)
Ringing capability 2 ringers maximum per circuit, high or low position
RSTU2 or RDSU
Ring voltage 80V RMS sine wave
Ringing capability 1.5 REN per circuit, with or without Message Waiting
RSTU2 Message Waiting voltage -90 VDC/one telephone per circuit (max.)
RSTU2 or PESU modem interface data rate 14,400 bps maximum
BTU Rating
PDKU (5)
RCOU/RCOS (1)
RCTUB (1)
DKTs (40)
190 BTUs (56 watt hours) per cabinet
Traffic Rating Characteristics
9 CCS per station system-wide
36 CCS per ACD/SMIS station
Note There are system limits for the number of simultaneous Agents depending on traffic. See the Strata DK Call Center
Solutions General Description for details.
Strata DK424
Floor Mount Hardware
28 Strata DK General Description 5/99
Two or four customer-supplied 12-volt reserve batteries can be connected to the system to
maintain normal operation during a power failure (see Table 21). The batteries are kept in a highly-
charged state by the standard power supply and must be connected when the system is operating
normally. Fully charged batteries must be connected, and when normal AC power is available,
batteries cannot be connected after/during an actual power failure.
Table 21 Typical Reserve Power Duration Estimates (in hours)
Underwriters’ Laboratory (UL) and local electrical codes require certain standards for connecting
commercial AC and reserve power to the Strata DK424 system. Table 22 describes which
assemblies may be required to meet UL and local electrical code standards.
Floor Mount Hardware
The lightweight and compact design enables easy wall or floor mounting. The RFIF hardware kit
is needed for floor mounting (see Table 22). If floor mounting three or more cabinets, AC and
reserve power must be connected to the RCCB conduit connection box option by a licensed
electrician. Wall mounting the system does not require special hardware.
Number of Cabinets 1234567
2 batteries 16.0 8.0 5.0 3.7 3.09 2.5 2.1
4 batteries 32.0 16.0 10.0 7.5 6.0 5.0 4.2
Discharge Current 3.5A 6.7A 9.9A 13.1A 16.3A 19.5A 22.7A
Table 22 Cabinet Power, Reserve Power, and Floor Mount Hardware Assemblies
Assembly Function
RBTC1A-2M
Reserve Power Cable – Two cables are required for up to six cabinet systems and three are
required for seven cabinet reserve power installations (for current carrying capacity) when
connecting reserve (battery) power to three or more cabinets (wall mount). RBDB2 is also
required for connecting battery terminals—see “RBDB2” below. A licensed electrician must install
this item to retain UL listing and/or local electrical code compliance.
PBTC-3M
Reserve Power Cable – Connects cabinet Power Supply to battery terminals. If reserve power is
connected to one or two cabinets (wall or table mount), one cable is required for each cabinet. A
licensed electrician must install this item to retain UL listing and/or local electrical code
compliance.
RBDB2
Battery Distribution Box – Distributes reserve power when three or more cabinets require
reserve power (floor or wall mount). Six RBTC2A-1.5M cables are provided with the RBDB2
distribution box to connect up to six DK424 power supplies to the battery distribution box. An
RC7C1A-1.7M is also required for a seventh cabinet.
RC7C1A-1.7M
Cabinet 7 Cable Kit – Provides long data cable to connect the sixth Expansion Cabinet to the
DK424 Base Cabinet. Provides a long battery cable to connect RBDB2 battery distribution box to
the sixth Expansion Cabinet power supply. Data and battery cables used for seven cabinet
installations only.
RFIF
Floor Mount Fixture Kit – Provides two metal stands for mounting three or more cabinets on
floor; supports up to seven cabinets. Three pairs of wall brackets (RWBF) are supplied with RFIF.
Wall brackets are needed to secure floor-mounted systems to the wall for safety purposes (not
required for wall-mounted cabinets).
Strata DK424
Functional Block Diagrams
Strata DK General Description 5/99 29
Functional Block Diagrams
The Functional Block Diagrams shows the PCBs and interface connectors used for connecting the
stations and peripherals (see Figures 12~14).
Figure 12 KSU Processor and Optional Interface PCBs
RCCB1,
RCCB2
Conduit Connection Box – This box is required for AC and battery power connection to three or
more floor-mounted cabinets. (Not required for mounting two cabinets on a table or any number of
cabinets on a wall.) A licensed electrician must install this item to retain UL listing and/or local
electrical code compliance.
RCCB1 supports up to six floor-mounted cabinets.
RCCB2 supports up to seven floor-mounted cabinets.
RPSB1 Three-outlet AC Power Strip – One RPSB1 required when installing three or four cabinets (wall
or floor mount). Two RPSB1s are required when installing five, six, or seven cabinets (wall or floor
mount). Two AC cords will exit the cabinets in some configurations.
RPSB2
Three-outlet AC Power Strip – Used with a high current carrying capacity cord for application
where local electric codes (or user) requires only one AC cord to exit four or more cabinets.
Toshiba highly recommends using the RPSB2 for two-cabinet installations to accommodate
further growth. Must be ordered for seven cabinet systems.
RWBF Wall bracket pair – Required for floor mounted seven cabinet systems. Secures the seventh
cabinet to the wall for safety (not required for wall-mounted cabinets – see RFIF).
Table 22 Cabinet Power, Reserve Power, and Floor Mount Hardware Assemblies
(continued)
Assembly Function
Data and Speech Highway
25-pair
or
Terminal Strip
(N/A RSSU)
4248
IMDU
RCTU
Micro-
Processor
(68000 or 68020)
Flash
or
RAM
Main Control PCB
(Optional)
PCM
Switch
System
Tones
Switch DTMF
Receiver
(4~24 ckts.)
Conf
Switch
RRCS
Twisted
Pair
Music Source: External Zone Page
Background Music
Door Lock or BGM Mute Control Relay
External Zone Page Relays (4 Zones)
External Page Amplifier (600Ω Output)
Music Source: Background Music
and/or Music-on-hold
MOH/BGM
Volume
Control
Main Distribution
Frame (MDF)
MOH/BGM
RCA Jack
Alarm Relay Sensor
Night Bell or MOH (Control Relay)
Battery Charger
12V
Battery
12V
Battery
Twisted Pair
1. Customer-supplied equipment.
RKYS
Option Key
AA/ACD/MIS
(2 or 4 Batteries)
CBRUK
ABR Tone
Detector
(Standard)
RPSU Cabinet
Power Supply
ROM
1200 bps Modem
RSSU/PIOU/PIOUS/PEPU
Single Serial Port (N/A PEPU)
SMDR Port (N/A RSSU/PEPU)
RSIU Serial Interface PCB (1 Port)
RSIS/RMDS
Serial/Modem (2400 bps)
Interface PCBs ( 1~3 Ports)
Programmable Serial Port
Modular Jacks or Remote Modem
HMIS
SMDI
Voice Mail
DKAdmin PC1
Insight DK,
Call Center
Viewer &
ACD/MIS PC 1SMDR
Call Accounting
Device or Printer
1
Amplified Page Output (3 Watts)1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Strata DK424
Functional Block Diagrams
30 Strata DK General Description 5/99
Figure 13 CO Line Side Functional Block Diagram
RDTU2
• 2T1 / DS1(24 Channels / Lines)
• Loop Start, Ground Start, Tie, DID
• Digital Voice Lines
Channel
Service
Unit (CSU)
25-pair Amphenol
TOSHIBA NDTU Cable
DB15
PLL Synchronization Circuits
2
RCOU
4 Loop Start Co Lines (Analog)
RGLU2
4 Loop or Ground Start CO Lines (Analog)
RCOS
(Optional PCB on RCOU Only):
4 Loop Start CO Lines (Analog)
RCIU2
RCIS
4 Caller ID Circuits
4 Caller ID Circuits
(Two 4-Wire Modular Jacks)
MDF
(Two 4-Wire Modular Jacks)
(Two 4-Wire Modular Jacks)
(Two 4-Wire Modular Jacks)
(Two 4-Wire Modular Jacks)
1
RDDU 4 DID CO Lines (Analog)
REMU
4 E&M Tie Lines (Analog)
(REMU, Four 8-Wire Modular Jacks)
(Two 4-Wire Modular Jacks)
Secondary Protectors2
RPTU ISDN PRI (23B+1D channels)
Digital Voice/Data
Toshiba RPRI-CBL-KIT
Channel
Service
Unit (CSU) 8-wire Modular Jacks
2
ISDN BRI (U)
2 Circuits (NT-1 )
Voice/Data (2B+D)
RBUU
RBUS
ISDN BRI (U)
2 Circuits (NT-1)
Voice/Data (2B+D)
U4
U4
8-wire Modular Jacks
8-wire Modular Jacks
3
3
ISDN BRI (S/T)
2 Circuits (TE)
Voice/Data (2B+D)
RBSU
NT1 per circuit2
U4T4
8-wire Modular Jacks
RMCU Trunk Circuits for E911
RCMS 2 Trunk Circuits
RCMS 2 Trunk Circuits
CAMA Line (2-wire Modular Jacks)
CAMA Line (2-wire Modular Jacks)
Network Demarcation Point
4272
Central Office
Centrex
PBX
Common Carrier
Other Telephone System
E911 Public Safety Answer
Point (PSAP)
•
•
•
•
•
•
1. RCIU2/RCIS tip/ring cross
connected to RCOU, RCOS, or
RGLU tip/ring at MDF.
2. Customer-supplied equipment.
3. RBUU/RBUS (Release 4.2).
4. U, S, T, R are ISDN reference
model termination points.
Data and Speech Highway
Strata DK424
Functional Block Diagrams
Strata DK General Description 5/99 31
Figure 14 Station Side Functional Block Diagram
S4R4
S4
U4
U4
RATU
4 Attendant Console Circuits
RBSU3
2B+1D/Circuit
(2-NT Circuits)
RBUU3
2B+1D/Circuit
(2-NT Circuits)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
EOCU
(Option PCB
to Receive
Speaker OCA)
RDSU
4 Digital Telephone Circuits
2 Standa rd Telephone Circuits
PDKU2
8 Digital Telephone Circuits
RWIU
32 Digital Wireless Telephone Circuits
RSTS
(Option PCB)
2 Standard
Telephone
Circuits
R48S
(Option PCB,
RDSU/RSTU2
Only) -48 Volt
Loop Supply
R48S
(Option PCB,
RDSU/RSTU2
Only) -48 Volt
Loop Supply
PESU
4 Electronic Telephone Circuits
2 Standard Telephone Circuits
EOCU
(Option PCB
to Receive
Speaker OCA)
RBSS
2B+1D/Circuit
(2-LT Circuits)
RBUS
2B+1D/Circuit
(2-LT Circuits)
Data and Speech Highway
Digital Telephone (DKT)
and Add-on Module
Digital Telephone
with RPCI-DI
DDCB
Cordless DKT
MDFB
Door Phones and
Lock Controls
TAPI PC
Modem
(Pool)
DIU-DS
Mainframe Computer
DIU-DS
DIU-DS
RS-232 Cables
Printer (Sharing)
Digital Telephone
with DSS Console
1 Pair Modular Cord RS-232 Cable
PC
1-pair Modular Cords
DPFT
Voice
Mail
Base Station 1
Strata AirLink Wireless
Base Stations (4)
Handsets
Handsets
Base Station 2
Modem
RS-232 Cables
HESB
Loud
Ringing Bell
Strata AirLink Base Station
Interface Adapter (BSIA)
Electronic
Telephone (EKT)
Door Phones and
Lock Controls
Standard
Telephone
Alternate BGM
source to stations
and Page Output
Modular Jacks
Main Distribution Frame (MDF)
25-pair Amphenol Connectors and
Cables (except RBSU/RBSS)
PC Attendant
Console
EKT with HDSS Console
(PEKU Only)
Power Failure
Transfer Unit Power Failure
Standard Telephone (8 max.)
Off-premises Station
Digital Annuncer
for ACD and Auto Attendant
Secondary
Protector
1. Customer-Supplied equipment
2. RSTU2 is required for standard telephone message waiting lamp.
3. RBUU/RBUS (Release 4.2).
4. U, S, T, R are ISDN reference model termination points.
FAX
HDCB MDFB
4250
2
RSTU2
8 Standard
Telephone Circuits
PEKU
8 Electronic
Telephone Circuits
PC
ISDN
Telephone
(TE-1, S-Type)
COM Port
ISDN
Telephone
(TE-1, U-Type)
PC with
Video Card
(TE-1, U-Type)
Digital Single Line
Telephone (DKT)
TA
Strata DK424
System Technology
32 Strata DK General Description 5/99
System Technology
Pulse Code Modulation
Digital switching talkpaths enable all CO and intercom lines to be accessed simultaneously.
Analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog conversion is done by CODECs (coder plus decoder) on
station and CO line PCBs.
Custom Electronic Circuitry
Large Scale Integration (LSI) technology enables the Strata DK circuit designs to be simple and
efficient. Gate arrays using very large scale integration save vast amounts of space by using the
latest technology. More circuitry fits onto smaller PCBs for a more compact system. Widespread
use of CMOS circuits minimize system power requirements.
Stored Program Control
The system uses a 16-bit microprocessor for stored program control. System operating software is
stored on Read Only Memory (ROM), and individual configuration and custom programming is
stored on Random Access Memory (RAM) for Strata DK. A lithium battery with a life span of at
least six years preserves RAM in the case of a power failure.
Microprocessors
The system’s main microprocessor is a 16-bit 68000-type that operates at a clock speed of 8 MHz.
In addition, some PCBs use 8-bit, TMP90C840-type local microprocessors that run at 10 MHz.
This distributed microprocessing architecture is used system-wide.
Maintenance and Programming
Hardware maintenance and repair procedures describe how to quickly locate, remove, and replace
defective parts and PCBs. System programming can be performed without taking the system out-
of-service.
On-site programming can be executed with any 20-button proprietary LCD telephone or with a
DKAdmin PC connected to an optional maintenance port.
DKAdmin/DKBackup
Toshiba DKAdmin/DKBackup software enables customer data (configuration, station, and system
options) to be downloaded to a PC and stored on a computer disk. The customer data can be added
to, or changed, using the PC independent of the DK System.
The new customer data can then be uploaded to the DK System from the PC, changing customer
program options on-site or remotely over telephone lines and/or modems.
The DKBackup software program is also available. The program consists of a small subset of
DKAdmin/DKBackup functions which can perform backup, restore and upgrade functions, but
cannot edit customer databases.
Strata DK424
Strata AirLink Wireless System
Strata DK General Description 5/99 33
Strata AirLink Wireless System
The Strata AirLink Wireless Telephone system that is configured to standard ports of the Strata
DK and many non-Toshiba telephone systems has software that enables a System Administrator or
technician to quickly diagnose error messages, alarms, and traffic conditions by viewing a PC
monitor before troubleshooting the hardware.
The Status Window, displayed by the Strata AirLink Manager software, is an active window in
which viewing reports, querying the software, and rebooting the Base Station Interface Adapter
(BSIA) is possible. Some of the available reports are:
♦Base Station channels status
♦Line status
♦Call status
♦Critical alarms
The software also creates log files and sends error messages to the PC monitor to assist the
technician in making corrections. The log files are easily opened in any text editor for viewing and
have information about the BSIA boot software, Base Station upgrades, software queries, errors,
and alarms.
RWIU Wireless System
The Strata AirLink Wireless Telephone system that is configured to Strata DK telephone systems
using its own proprietary RWIU PCB also has software that enables a System Administrator or
technician to:
♦Set system IDs and enter handset IDs
♦Set the time and date, and change passwords
♦Enable UTAM
♦Change communication ports
♦Check the software version of the RWIU and Base Stations
♦View log messages
♦Reset and upgrade Base Stations and the RWIU
♦Change Base Station numbers
LEDs and BER Testing
There are several LEDs on each Base Station, BSIA, and the RWIU that indicate normal, boot up,
and alarm conditions. Signal fading and attenuation can be checked using the resident Bit Error
Rate (BER) test in each handset for additional troubleshooting and maintenance routines.
Strata DK424
Strata AirLink Wireless System
34 Strata DK General Description 5/99
Strata DK General Description 5/99 35
Universal Slot PCBs 4
This chapter describes each of the PCBs that install into the universal slots of the Strata DK40i
Expansion KSU and the DK424 Base/Expansion Cabinets. The following paragraphs categorize
the cards according to their function.
Descriptions here apply to both DK40i and DK424 unless noted otherwise. The DK14 does not
support any universal slot PCBs.
Station PCBs
Feature subassemblies, such as the Standard Telephone Interface Subassembly (RSTS), are listed
below the associated PCB. For a list of available subassemblies, see Table 23 on Page 40.
Digital Telephone Interface Unit (PDKU2)
The PDKU2 has eight digital telephone circuits that can support digital telephones (cordless as
well as corded), integrated PC interface data units for data calling and/or TAPI application, off-
hook call announce, DDSS consoles or DADMs for attendant stations that must handle a heavy
load of calls, and a DDCB for a variety of applications.
Each of these devices only requires one circuit except for the integrated PC interface unit or
DADM, which shares a circuit with the telephone to which they are connected.
Digital/Standard Telephone Interface Unit (RDSU)
The RDSU in its basic configuration has two standard telephone circuits and four digital telephone
circuits (cordless as well as corded). The standard telephone circuits can support the same devices
that the RSTU2 can, with the exception of standard telephone message waiting lamps.
The digital circuits can support the same devices as the PDKU, except for the DDSS console. The
RDSU can be equipped with an RSTS subassembly to provide two more standard telephone
circuits, and an R48S subassembly to increase the standard telephone maximum loop length.
♦DK40i – a K5RCU or K5RCU2 must be installed in the Base KSU to interpret DTMF tones
transmitted by devices connected to the standard telephone circuits.
♦DK424 – an RRCS must be installed on the common control unit to interpret the DTMF
signals for devices connected to the standard telephone circuits.
Standard Telephone Interface Subassembly (RSTS)
The RSTS attaches to the RDSU and adds two standard telephone circuits to the PCB. With the
RSTS installed, the RDSU provides four standard telephone circuits and four digital telephone
circuits. (RSTS does not support standard telephone message waiting.)
Universal Slot PCBs
Station PCBs
36 Strata DK General Description 5/99
Strata AirLink Wireless Interface Unit (RWIU)
The RWIU interfaces the DK40i and DK424 with the Strata AirLink Telephone wireless system.
The card functions as a protocol converter between the Base Stations and the PBX. It has four
digital circuits that connect to four Base Stations using industry standard RJ11 jacks. Roaming and
handoff functionality are present between all four Base Stations.
CO Line/Digital Telephone Interface Unit (KCDU) (DK40i only)
The KCDU provides two analog loop start CO line circuits and four digital telephone circuits. The
CO line circuits offer all of the features that the Base TCOU and the RCOU line circuits provide.
The digital telephone circuits can support every peripheral (except for the DDSS console) that the
PDKU2 and a Base KSU digital circuit can support. Up to four KDCU PCBs can be installed in
the DK40i Expansion Unit.
Note The RCIU2 Caller ID Interface Unit is required to add Caller ID with the KCDU PCB.
Electronic Telephone Interface Unit (PEKU)
The PEKU provides eight electronic telephone circuits that can interface with electronic
telephones, an alternate BGM source, a Direct Station Selection Console (HDSS), an external
amplifier for DISA or two-CO line Conferencing.
Standard/Electronic Telephone Interface Unit (PESU)
The PESU offers two standard and four electronic telephone circuits. Its standard circuits support
the same devices as the KSTU2. Its electronic circuits interface with the same peripherals as the
PEKU, except for the HDSS console.
♦DK40i – a K5RCU or K5RCU2 must be installed in the Base KSU to interpret DTMF tones
transmitted by devices connected to the standard telephone circuits.
♦DK424 – an RRCS must be installed on the common control unit to interpret the DTMF
signals for devices connected to the standard telephone circuits.
Off-hook Call Announce Upgrade Unit (EOCU)
Electronic telephones connected to PEKU and PESU PCBs can receive speaker Off-hook Call
Announce (OCA)—internal [DN] calls over their speaker while they are on another call—if the
PCBs are equipped with an EOCU. Digital telephones also support this function, but do not require
an EOCU in the KSU. Unlike digital telephones, electronic telephones cannot receive handset
OCA.
Standard Telephone Interface Unit (RSTU2)
The RSTU2 has eight circuits that can support single-line devices (one device per RSTU2 port).
Besides rotary and DTMF standard telephones, the RSTU2 can support the Strata AirLink
Wireless analog system, fax machines, dictation equipment, modems, a separate BGM source, off-
premises stations, Toshiba Stratagy and VP voice mail systems, and digital announcement devices
for optional built-in AA or ACD.
This PCB also supports the Message Waiting feature on standard telephones that are equipped with
a 90VDC neon message waiting lamp.
The RSTU2 also provides an 80V RMS sine wave ring generator and has interface connectors for
an optional R48S subassembly that increases the maximum possible station loop length from 600
to 1200 ohms.
Universal Slot PCBs
Console PCBs
Strata DK General Description 5/99 37
♦DK40i – a K5RCU or K5RCU2 must be installed in the Base KSU to interpret DTMF tones
transmitted by devices connected to the standard telephone circuits.
♦DK424 – an RRCS must be installed on the common control unit to interpret the DTMF
signals for devices connected to the standard telephone circuits.
48V Loop Voltage (R48S)
The optional R48S unit can be connected to the RSTU2 or RDSU, and, by creating 48V loop
voltage instead of 24V, can extend the maximum possible loop length of standard telephone
circuits (including the resistance of the phone) from 600 ohms to 1200 ohms, allowing standard
telephones to be connected farther from the system.
By using this unit, a less expensive type of off-premises lines can be used (see Table 23 on Page
40).
Console PCBs
Attendant Console Interface Unit (RATU, DK424 only)
The RATU can support four attendant consoles. Multiple consoles enable automatic load-sharing
on a rotation basis from a central call queue, increasing call handling efficiency. The RATU PCB
in the Strata DK424 system cabinet connects to the PC Attendant Console Interface (RATI) via
two pair of wires.
RATU is only available for systems operating with RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D or RCTUE/F
common control units. One RATU is available per system to support a maximum of four Attendant
Consoles per system with RCTUC/D or RCTUE/F, two with RCTUBA/BB, (any combination of
PC or conventional consoles).
CO Line PCBs
A summary of Strata DK station, CO line PCBs and feature subassemblies are listed in Table 23 on
Page 40.
Caller ID Interface Unit (RCIU2)
The RCIU2 is required, along with an analog ground/loop start CO line PCB, to provide the Caller
ID feature. Caller ID is also known as CLID and is available at extra cost per line from the local
Telco. It is sometimes known as a CLASS feature.
Each RCIU2 circuit receives and decodes telephone number and name information sent from the
calling CO. Caller ID is available on analog loop start lines and analog ground start lines only. An
RCIU2 circuit must be available with each RGLU2, RCOU/RCOS, PCOU or KCDU2 circuit that
is to receive Caller ID. Built-in gas tubes help protect each RCIU2 circuit from lightning surges.
An RCIS subassembly PCB can be installed onto the RCIU2 to provide four additional Caller ID
circuits.
Caller ID Interface Subassembly (RCIS)
The RCIU2 comes equipped with four Caller ID circuits; an RCIS subassembly PCB can be
installed onto the RCIU2 to provide four additional Caller ID circuits. Hence, an installed RCIU2/
RCIS can provide a maximum of eight Caller ID circuits per cabinet slot. Built-in gas tubes help
protect each RCIU2/RCIS circuit from lightning surges.
Universal Slot PCBs
CO Line PCBs
38 Strata DK General Description 5/99
Loop Start CO Line Interface Unit (RCOU)
The RCOU in its basic configuration has four analog loop start CO line circuits, connecting to the
public telephone network.
Each RCOU line can be programmed for DTMF or Dial Pulse signaling and has a switch to control
potential excess volume that can be created by a nearby PBX or CO.
An optional RCOS subassembly can be attached to the RCOU for four more loop start lines. Each
line can be programmed for DTMF or Dial Pulse signaling. Built-in gas tubes help protect each
circuit from lightning.
Loop Start CO Line Interface Subassembly (RCOS)
The RCOS can be attached to the RCOU to provide four additional analog loop start CO line
circuits. Each RCOS line has all of the features that are available with the RCOU lines.
Ground/Loop Start Interface CO Line Interface Unit (RGLU2)
The RGLU2 provides four analog CO line circuits which can be configured individually for
ground start or loop start. Ground start should be used for applications requiring disconnect
supervision, such as AA/Voice Mail, or ACD.
The RGLU2 also provides ring detection, dial outpulsing, Hold, and CO line flash signal. Each
RGLU2 line can be programmed for DTMF or Dial Pulse signaling and has a switch to control
potential excess volume that can be created by a nearby PBX or CO. Built-in gas tubes help protect
each circuit from lightning.
Direct Inward Dialing Interface Unit (RDDU)
The RDDU provides four analog DID lines, each of which is assigned a single office code along
with a block of extension numbers. Each extension number is programmed to ring a [DN] selected
in system programming. This enables calls over the same line to be routed to different stations.
Each DID line can be set for either Wink Start or Immediate Start. DID lines can also support
DNIS and/or ANI. An optional K5RCU or K5RCU2 (DK40i) or RRCS (DK424) tone receiver
PCB is required for DTMF DID operation. Rotary DID signaling ability at 20 pps is a standard
feature. An external protector is required for each line.
Tie Line Unit (REMU)
The REMU has four analog circuits for E & M Type I or Type II signaling, Immediate Start or
Wink Start Tie lines. A choice between 2- or 4-wire transmission is available as a jumper-plug
option.
Tie lines can also support DNIS and/or ANI. An optional K5RCU or K5RCU2 (DK40i) or RRCS
(DK424) tone receiver PCB is required for DTMF Tie operation. An external protector is required
for each line. REMU Tie lines are two-way and can be used for incoming and outgoing calls.
T1/DS-1 Interface Unit (RDTU2) (DK424 only)
The RDTU provides either 8, 16 or 24 digital voice channels that can be individually configured
for ground start CO line operation, loop start CO line operation, DID/DOD line operation (with
hookflash) or Tie line operation. The number and type of channels for each RDTU installed is
assigned in system programming. All RDTU line types are two-way and can be used for incoming
and outgoing calls.
Any RDTU, DID/DOD, or Tie channel can be configured in system programming to receive DNIS
and/or ANI information from long distance carriers.
Universal Slot PCBs
CO Line PCBs
Strata DK General Description 5/99 39
The RDTU is available for systems operating with a RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D or RCTUE/F
common control unit. The RDTU normally requires the installation of a Channel Service Unit,
which is not supplied by Toshiba. RDTU T1/DS-1 digital voice channels can be configured for SF
or ESF format and either AMI or B8ZS line coding (see Table 23).
The new RDTU2, installed in a DK424 Release 4.0 system, supports the hook flash capability.
“SuperTrunk” requires hook flash operation on T1 two-way DID/DOD lines. The RDTU1 can be
upgraded to support hook flash.
In most locations within the U.S., network connection using RDTU2 requires a dealer-supplied,
UL-listed external CSU or in Canada, a CSA-certified CSU.
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Unit (RPTU) (DK424 only)
The Primary Rate Interface Unit is a 24-channel PRI card, which provides 1 data (control) channel
and 23 bearer channels (available in Release 4.0). All B channels appear and program as CO lines
in the DK424 system and can be individually configured for local service, FX, WATS, DID, Tie,
etc., service operation. Network connection using the RPTU requires a dealer-supplied, UL-listed,
external CSU in most locations in the U.S. In Canada, the CSU/DSU must be CSA certified.
The RPTU is supported by the RCTUBA3/BB4, RCTUC3/D4 and RCTUE3/F4. See “ISDN
Primary Rate Interface (PRI)” on Page 73 for more information.
ISDN S/T-type Basic Rate Interface Unit (RBSU)
The Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Unit provides two BRI S/T circuits. Each circuit provides two
simultaneous voice and/or data connections with a single interface. BRI uses the 2B+D
transmission format which is defined as two 64-kbps bearer channels and one 16-kbps data
(control) channel. The D channel carries call setup control data.
The RBSU BRI circuits can be connected to ISDN BRI network lines and/or ISDN S-type
Terminal Equipment (TE-1) or Terminal Adapters (TA) on the station side.
The RBSU/RBSS BRI circuits that are configured for the station side provide a passive bus that
enables up to two TE1 and TA devices to be connected to one BRI circuit. When multiple TE1 and
TA devices are installed on a singled RBSU/RBSS BRI circuit, the devices must share or contend
for that circuit’s two B channels.
A maximum of two simultaneous voice and/or data calls are allowed between all devices
connected to the same BRI circuit. The contention rule for the two BRI B channels is first come,
first serve. Network connections using BRI S/T type interface also require a dealer-supplied, UL-
listed, external Network Terminal (NT-1) device. In Canada, the NT-1 must be CSA certified.
Note RBSU/RBSS will be available with DK424 and DK40i Release 4.1.
Basic Rate Interface Subassembly (RBSS)
The RBSS attaches to the RBSU to provide two additional BRI S/T type circuits that can be
used for station-side connections only. An RBSU with the RBSS subassembly provides four
BRI circuits in one card slot.
RBSU/RBSS stations can be voice and/or data devices, such as ISDN telephones and Terminal
Adapters, that support the standard S-type interface. Each RBSU/RBSS circuit provides two B
channels, plus one D channel and reduces the system’s basic capacity by two station ports and
two CO lines. See “ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI)” on Page 73 for more information.
Note RBSU/RBSS will be available with DK424 and DK40i Release 4.1.
Universal Slot PCBs
Summary of PCBs and Subassemblies
40 Strata DK General Description 5/99
ISDN U-type Basic Rate Interface Unit (RBUU) (DK424 only)
The Basic Rate Interface Unit provides two Basic Rate Interface (BRI) “U” circuits. Each circuit
provides two simultaneous voice and/or data connections with a single interface. BRI uses the
2B+D transmission format which is defined as two 64-kbps bearer channels and one 16-kbps data
(control) channel.
Note RBUU/RBUS will be available with Release 4.2.
Basic Rate Interface Subassembly (RBUS)
The RBUS attaches to the RBUU to provide two additional BRI “U” circuits that can be used to
connect to Network BRI lines and/or station-side connections only. An RBUU with the RBUS
subassembly provides four BRI “U” circuits in one card slot.
RBUU/RBUS stations can be voice and/or data devices, such as ISDN telephones and Terminal
Adapters, that support the standard U-type interface. Each RBUU/RBUS circuit provides two B
channels plus one D channel and reduces the basic system capacity by two CO lines and two
station ports. See “ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI)” on Page 73 for more information.
Enhanced 911 CAMA Trunk Interface Unit (RMCU/RCMS) (DK424 only)
The RMCU/RMCS PCBs provide up to four CAMA trunk circuits. The RMCU/RMCS eliminates
the need for connection of adjunct terminal adapter equipment to E911 CAMA trunks. Available
for DK424 in Release 4.0. Also, see note below RCMS.
CAMA Trunk Subassembly (RCMS)
One RCMS subassembly attaches to the RMCU to provide two CAMA trunk circuits. A second
RCMS can be added to provide four CAMA trunk circuits. Available in a future release.
Note The RCMS is ordered separately from the RMCU, but it must be installed on the RMCU
to provide CAMA trunk interface.
Summary of PCBs and Subassemblies
Table 23 provides a summary of the universal slot PCBs and available subassemblies.
Table 23 PCB Circuits, Interface Options and Connectors
PCB Subassembly Circuits Interface Options Connector
RPTU
(DK424 only)
1 circuit/ISDN PRI
(23 B channels/1 D channel)
POTS
FX
Tie (senderized)
Tie (cut through)
OUTWATS (intra-LATA)
OUTWATS (inter-LATA)
InWATS
RJ48C or RJ48X
ISDN TIA-568A
RBSU 2 ISDN BRI S/T point circuits (NT
or TE). Each circuit is 2B+1D.
(Host for the RBSS)
Network and/or station side RJ45, ISDN TIA-568A
attaches to
RBSU RBSS 2 ISDN BRI, S point circuits (2B+D
each)
Station side only
1 RBSS subassembly per RBSU RJ45, ISDN TIA-568A
Universal Slot PCBs
Summary of PCBs and Subassemblies
Strata DK General Description 5/99 41
RBUU
(DK424 only) 2 ISDN BRI, U point
circuits (2B+D each). Host for the
RBUS. (Release 4.2)
Network and/or station side RJ45, ISDN TIA-568A
attaches to
RBUU RBUS 2 ISDN BRI, U point circuits
(2B+D each) subassembly for the
RBUU. (Release 4.2)
Network and/or station side
1 RBUS subassembly per RBUU. RJ45, ISDN TIA-568A
RDTU2
Applies to DK424 only.
1~8, 1~16, or 1~24 channels
(lines), depends on system
programming
Loop start lines
Ground start lines
Tie lines (wink or immediate)
DID/DOD lines (wink or immediate)
2-pair amphenol
RJ48M
(All PCB amphenol
connectors are female)
RMCU 2 E911 CAMA circuits with the 1
RCMS or 4 with 2 RCMSs E911 CAMA lines
RJ11C modular
attaches to
RMCU RCMS 2 E911 CAMA circuits Up to 2 RCMSs per RMCU for 4
CAMA lines max.
REMU 4 Tie line circuits
E&M Tie lines
2- or 4-wire transmission
Type I signaling
Type II signaling
Immediate start
Wink start
REMU (8-wire modular jack)
2- or 4-wire/type I or II
KCDU
(DK40i only)
2 CO line circuits/
4 digital telephone circuits
CO loop start lines
Digital circuits same as PDKU,
except no DDSS
RJ14C modular (CO Line
circuits)
25-pair amphenol (digital
phone circuits)
RCOU
4 CO line circuits (lines)
With RCOS:
8 CO line circuits (lines)
CO loop start lines
RJ14C modular
attaches to
RCOU RCOS Provides four additional Loop
Start CO lines. 1 RCOS subassembly per RCOU
RCIU2 4 circuits
With RCIS: 8 circuits
Loop or Ground Start Lines with
Caller ID. Requires: RCOU, RGLU2
or PCOU RJ14C modular
attaches to
RCIU2 RCIS
Used with RCOU/RCOS, PCOU,
and RGLU2 CO line PCBs to
provide 4 Caller ID circuits.
1 RCIS subassembly per RCIU2
RDDU 4 DID circuits DID Lines RJ14C modular
RGLU2 4 line circuits Loop or ground start lines RJ14C modular
PIOU,
PIOUS,
PEPU,
RSSU
A PIOU or PIOUS can use an
IMDU
ACD/SMIS (DK424 only, except
RCTUA)
SMDI for Voice Mail
SMDR printer or call accounting
machine
PC or maintenance terminal (local
or remote)
25-pair amphenol (PIOU or
PEPU)
Spring clip terminal (PIOUS)
Two 3-pair modular (TTY/
SMDR/SMDI/SMIS)
(All PCB amphenol
connectors are female)
attaches to
PIOU and
PIOUS IMDU
Provides remote maintenance 300
bps or 1200 bps full-duplex modem
for DKAdmin or DKBackup. 1 per
PIOU/PIOUS.
None
Table 23 PCB Circuits, Interface Options and Connectors
(continued)
PCB Subassembly Circuits Interface Options Connector
Universal Slot PCBs
Summary of PCBs and Subassemblies
42 Strata DK General Description 5/99
RSTU2 8 standard telephone circuits
Standard telephones
Voice mail ports
Off-premises stations
Other similar devices
Alternate BGM source
Auto Attendant digital announcer
Message Waiting lamp (RSTU2
only)
Fax machines
ACD Announcer
Strata Airlink wireless telephones
25-pair amphenol
(All PCB amphenol
connectors are female)
attaches to
RSTU2 and
RDSU
R48S 48 volt circuit for up to 8 standard
telephone circuits
Optionally interfaces to the RSTU2
and RDSU to extend loop length of
standard telephones from 600
ohms to 1200 ohms.
None
RDSU
Without RSTS:
2 standard telephone/
4 digital telephone circuits
With RSTS:
4 standard telephone/
4 digital telephone circuits
Digital: same as PDKU, except no
DDSS console
Standard: same as RSTU
(standard Message Waiting not
available)
25-pair amphenol
attaches to
RSTU2 and
RDSU RSTS Provides two additional standard
telephone circuits 1 maximum per RDSU None
PESU
2 standard telephone circuits/
4 electronic telephone circuits
(standard/electronic telephone
ports)
Standard: same as KSTU2
Electronic: same as PEKU, except
PESU does not support HDSS
console
25-pair amphenol
RATU
(DK424 only)
4 PC attendant PC console
circuits
PC attendant console
Conventional attendant console 25-pair amphenol
PDKU2 8 digital telephone circuits
Digital telephones (with or without
RPCI-DI, DVSU, DADMs, or digital
cordless telephone)
Stand-alone digital cordless
telephone
DDSS console
PDIU-DS
DDCB
25-pair amphenol
Stratagy DK
2, 4, 6, or 8 VM ports
All of the above Stratagy DK
systems use 8 station ports in the
DK40i and DK424 software
None None
PEKU 8 electronic telephone circuits
Electronic telephones
HDSS console
Alternate BGM source
EOCU PCB for OCA
External conference amplifier
HDCB
25-pair amphenol
(All PCB amphenol
connectors are Female)
Table 23 PCB Circuits, Interface Options and Connectors
(continued)
PCB Subassembly Circuits Interface Options Connector
Universal Slot PCBs
Option Interface PCBs
Strata DK General Description 5/99 43
Option Interface PCBs
For a list of optional interfaces, see Table 24 (DK40i) and Table 25 (DK424).
Option Interface Unit (PIOU)
The PIOU provides interfaces for Paging (Amplified, Unamplified, and Zone), SMDR, SMDI for
Voice Mail integration, SMIS for ACD, DKAdmin Interface for on or off-site maintenance, an
Alarm sensor, and a Remote Maintenance Modem subassembly (IMDU) that allows the system to
be programmed from an off-site DKAdmin PC.
♦DK40i – the PIOU PCB's three-watt or non-amplified 600 Ω paging output is not used since
paging is supported by the Base KSU paging interface.
attaches to
PEKU or
PESU
EOCU
Provides Speaker OCA path for 8
circuits on PEKU or 4 circuits on
PESU. (Handset OCA is not
available on EKTs.)
1 for PEKU or PESU that supports
Speaker OCA
RSIU
(DK424 only)
Up to 4 interface ports when
installed with the optional RSIS or
RMDS piggy-back PCBs.
ACD/SMIS
SMDI for voice mail
SMDR printer or call accounting
machine
PC or maintenance terminal (local
or remote)
One 3-pair modular (TTY/
SMDR/SMDI/SMIS)
attaches to
RSIU RSIS, RS-232
interface
RMDS
(Modem/
RS-232)
(DK424 only)
Up to 3 RSISs
...or
1 RMDS and
2 RSISs per RSIU
Provides up to four interface ports
(RS-232 and modem) for system
interface with:
RMDS (1200 or 2400 bps)
Voice Mail SMDI
ACD/SMIS
SMDR
Local or Remote Maintenance for
DKAdmin or DKBackup PC.
One 3-pair modular per
RSIS (RS-232), RMDS
(Modem/RS-232)
RWIU 4 RJ11 jacks to support 4 Strata
AirLink Integrated Base Stations
Digital Wireless Handsets: same as
PDKU, except no DDSS console,
Stand-alone cordless telephone,
PDIU-DS, or DDCB
None
Table 23 PCB Circuits, Interface Options and Connectors
(continued)
PCB Subassembly Circuits Interface Options Connector
Universal Slot PCBs
Option Interface PCBs
44 Strata DK General Description 5/99
♦DK424 – the PIOU provides two-relay contact pairs. One of the contact pairs can be set for
control of a customer-provided door lock or control of a MOH source. The other relay pair can
be configured to mute BGM while the page feature is being activated or for the Night Relay
function.
Simplified Option Interface Unit (PIOUS)
The PIOUS has most of the PIOU’s features, including SMDR output and the TTY output port
interface and IMDU. It also provides flexible relay contacts and an Unamplified Page output. It
does not provide Amplified or Zone Paging.
Remote Maintenance Subassembly (IMDU)
The IMDU is an optional modem that connects to a PIOU or PIOUS to link the system to off-site
programming and maintenance equipment, such as a DKAdmin PC. The IMDU has an internal
maintenance channel and does not require a dedicated CO line or station port. Data transmission
speed can be set at 300 or 1200 bps full duplex.
External Page Interface Unit (PEPU)
The PEPU is a reduced version of the PIOU and PIOUS, providing most of the Paging and Relay
Contact options offered by these other optional PCBs.
Table 24 DK40i Interface PCB Options
Interface Options1
1. Amplified page output (single zone, 3 watts, 8 ohms) on the PIOU and PEPU is not available on the DK40i.
RSSU PIOU PIOUS PEPU TSIU DK40i Base 2
2. These functions are standard (built-in) to the DK40i Base KSU.
Zone page interface (unamplified, 4 zones) X
Unamplified page output (single zone, 600 Ω,
duplex) X
Night transfer or Music-on-hold control relay XXX X
Door lock or external amplifier control relay X X X X
IMDU disables TTY output when piggy-backed
onto PIOU or PIOUS cards XX
Remote Maintenance using customer-provided
external modem, StrataControl and/or DKAdmin
PC (requires TTY output port) X X X X
SMDR output (RS-232/6-wire modular connector) XX X
Alarm sensor X X
Voice Mail SMDI (requires TTY output port) XXX X
Universal Slot PCBs
Option Interface PCBs
Strata DK General Description 5/99 45
Single Serial Interface Unit (RSSU)
The RSSU contains one RS-232 serial port for connecting an SMDI, SMIS processor, DKAdmin/
DKBackup PC or external modem.
The RSSU provides a cost-effective alternative to the PIOU or PIOUS when only one other serial
I/O port is needed, or when the other features of the PIOU or PIOUS are not required. The RSSU
has a fixed speed of 1200 bps. It does not support SMDR, or the IMDU or RMDS modems.
♦DK40i – one optional RSSU maintenance interface PCB can be used for connecting a
maintenance PC or external modem (local or remote) to the DK40i.
♦DK424 – a maximum of three RSSU cards can be supported per DK424.
Table 25 DK424 Interface PCB Options
Interface Options RSSU1PIOU1PIOUS1PEPU RSIU/
RSIS1
Zone page interface (unamplified, 4 zones) X
Unamplified page output (single zone, 600 ohms, duplex) XXX
Amplified page output (single zone, 3 watts, 8 ohms) XX
Night transfer or Music-on-hold control relay XXX
Door lock or external amplifier control relay XXX
Alarm Sensor X X
Remote maintenance modem subassembly (IMDU or RMDS)
(disables TTY output when they are piggy-backed onto the
PIOU/PIOUS or RSIU/RSIS cards)2
X
(IMDU)
X
(IMDU)
X
(IMDU)
Remote Maintenance using customer-provided external
modem (requires TTY output port)2X X X X
SMDR output (RS-232/6-wire modular connector) X3X3X
MIS for ACD (requires TTY output port)2, 4 X X X X
Voice Mail SMDI (requires TTY output port)2XXX X
StrataControl and/or DKAdmin PC (requires TTY output port)2X X X X
1. PIOU, PIOUS, and RSSU each provide one TTY port which can be flexibly programmed for the features marked with X.
RSIU/RSIS can provide up to four flexible TTY/SMDR ports.
2. Maintenance modem, ACD/SMIS, Insight DK, Voice Mail, SMDI and DKAdmin PC Interface each require a separate TTY
output. PIOU, PIOUS, and RSSU provide one TTY output each. RSIU with RSIS PCBs provides up to four TTY outputs.
3. SMDR output will function simultaneously on the same PIOU or PIOUS with one of the following: DKAdmin, remote
modem, SMIS for ACD, Insight DK, or SMDI features.
4. Insight DK, Call Center Viewer and SMIS for ACD requires that the system processor (RCTU PCB) must be equipped with
an RKYS3 or higher feature key.
Universal Slot PCBs
Option Interface PCBs
46 Strata DK General Description 5/99
Serial Interface Unit (RSIU, DK424 only)
The RSIU provides up to four interface ports that allow the Strata DK424 system to connect to the
following:
♦Voice Mail system with RS-232 SMDI
♦ACD/SMIS system or Call Center Viewer
♦SMDR printer or call accounting machine
♦DKAdmin/DKBackup running on a PC as a maintenance terminal (locally or remotely)
The RSIU, which comes standard with one port, can be equipped with up to three more optional
RS-232 ports (total of four RS-232 ports). The Single Interface Subassembly (RSIS) piggy-backs
onto the RSIU PCB to provide the optional ports. One of the serial ports can be an internal modem.
An optional 2400 bps built-in Modem Subassembly (RMDS) can be added onto the RSIU.
The maximum allowed combined speed of all four channels is 9600 bps. All four channels of the
RSIU connect directly to the RCTU processor via a short ribbon cable. The RSIU must be
positioned in the first universal slot of the Base Cabinet.
RMDS (DK424 only)
The optional RMDS modem mounts on an RSIU and can function either as a remote maintenance
modem to provide the same functions as the IMDU or as a direct RS-232 link to a DKAdmin/
DKBackup PC COM port.
The function of the RMDS is set in system programming. Data transmission speed for the built-in
modem function can be set at 1200 bps or 2400 bps via system programming.
Strata DK General Description 5/99 47
Stations and Peripherals 5
This chapter discusses the current line of Strata DK telephones and peripherals that are compatible
with DK14, DK40i and DK424.
The Strata DK40i and DK424 systems can also support all older Strata digital telephones and most
Strata electronic telephones.
A large number of widely used and sophisticated features are available to Strata DK station users.
Everyday features such as Call Transfer, Call Forwarding, Call Holding, and Call Pickup are
executed with just the push of a button or a brief access code. LCD telephones offer more
sophisticated features.
In addition to various operational features, the Strata DK also supports multiple [DNs], providing
easy access to specific lines at the convenience of station users.
Toshiba Telecommunication Systems Division (TSD) does not provide ISDN station equipment,
such as ISDN telephones, fax machines, and computer interface devices for high speed internet
access or video conferencing. Toshiba does provide the interface circuit boards that support all of
the above ISDN station equipment.
Stations and Peripherals
Digital Telephones
48 Strata DK General Description 5/99
Digital Telephones
The Strata DK supports the latest line of Strata DKT2000-series digital telephones, which offer
station users a number of useful features that are easy to access (see Figure 15).
Figure 15 2000-Series Digital Telephone Buttons and Features
These telephones share a similar design and fit with a variety of office environments. The
DKT2000-series are available in charcoal gray or ash white color in the following models:
DKT2010-H
The DKT2010-H
is a 10-Button
Digital Telephone
with Handsfree
Answerback.
DKT2020-S
The DKT2020-S is
a 20-button Digital
Speakerphone.
DKT2010-SD
The DKT2010-SD
is a 10-Button
Digital
Speakerphone
with Liquid
Crystal Display.
DKT2020-SD
The DKT2020-SD is
a 20-Button Digital
Speakerphone with
Liquid Crystal
Display.
1716
Dial Pad
Message Waiting Button and
LED Indicator
Microphone ON/OFF Button
and LED Indicator
Speaker ON/OFF Button and
LED Indicator
Last Number Redial
Conference/Transfer
Volume (up/down)
Hold
Handset
Red/Green
LED Indicators
LCD Display
LCD Control/Soft
Key Buttons
Flexible Feature
Control Buttons
Microphone Location
Stations and Peripherals
Digital Telephones
Strata DK General Description 5/99 49
DKT2001
The DKT2001 is a Digital Single Line Telephone. It looks similar to
the existing 2000-series telephones, but it has a smaller footprint. It is
narrower because there are no programmable buttons and no LCD.
The DKT2001 connects to same digital station port as other 2000-
series digital telephones. This makes it compatible with all Strata DK
and Perception systems that support digital station ports.
Features
The digital single line telephone supports many features of the other
2000-series digital telephones, including:
♦Line button with a red LED. The Line button for the DKT2001 is
the [PDN] on this telephone.
♦Hold button
♦Conference/Transfer button
♦Message Waiting button with red LED
♦Volume Up and Volume Down buttons
♦One-way voice announce and handset OCA
♦Supports most DKT features through the use of feature codes
There are some features of the other 2000-series digital telephones that the DKT2001
does not
support:
♦On-hook dialing
♦Handsfree answerback.
♦Speaker OCA
♦Add-on module (DADM2020)
♦Personal Computer Interface Unit (RPCI)
♦Headset/loud ringing bell connection (HHEU)
♦Redial button
♦Programmable buttons or LCD
The digital single line telephone has many feature advantages over analog single-line telephones:
♦Automatic Busy Redial
♦Automatic Line Selection
♦Background Music with station control
♦Busy Override over Handset
♦Exclusive Hold
♦One-way voice announce and handset OCA
Stations and Peripherals
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) Telephones
50 Strata DK General Description 5/99
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) Telephones
LCD telephones (DKT2010-SD and DKT2020-SD) provide a variety of calling and messaging
information on an alphanumeric screen that displays up to two-lines of information, up to 16
characters per line. LCD telephones provide the features shown in Table 26.
Table 26 LCD Features
Feature Description
Alphanumeric
Messaging Station users can create alphanumeric messages that display on other station users’
LCDs, including busy, called station, calling station, and group station messaging.
Automatic Number
Identification (ANI) Displays the telephone numbers of the calling party for incoming, transferred, and
Call Forward calls.
Busy Lamp Field
(BLF) Indication Indicates the busy or idle status of all of the telephones in the system.
Call Duration The time elapsed during an outside call displays.
Caller ID The telephone number or name of the calling party displays on the ringing telephone
for incoming, transferred, and Call Forward calls.
Call Park Orbits When a call is parked, the orbit number displays. When multiple calls are parked,
LCD station users can scroll through a list of parked calls.
CO Line
Identification Each line can be assigned a name which displays when station users answer or
access lines. Names can be up to 16 characters long.
Date/Time of Day The date and time displays when stations are idle.
Dialed Number
Identification
Service (DNIS)
Displays names of called parties which have been previously correlated with the
system database of assigned DNIS numbers.
[DN] User Name/
Number Station users can enter a name that displays on the station’s LCD when idle, and
appears on the LCDs of other calling stations when the station calls them. The called
station’s name also appears on the calling station’s LCD. Names can be up to 16
characters long.
If a name is not created for a station, the station’s Primary Directory Number [PDN]
displays in place of the name.
Feature Prompting
Soft Keys Soft keys are used as an alternative to access codes or feature buttons. Station
users can access features by responding to LCD prompts.
Timed Reminders
with Messaging Selected station users can define up to five separate messages and have each
message appear on their LCD at pre-scheduled times.
Speed Dial Memo
Directory Dialing Selected station users can enter 12-character names for each of their Station
(Personal) Speed Dial numbers. They can call any of these numbers by scrolling
through the directory on the LCD, selecting the desired name, and pressing a line
access button. LCD users can also scroll the system common speed dial directory.
Stations and Peripherals
Speakerphones
Strata DK General Description 5/99 51
Speakerphones
The DKT2010-SD, DKT2020-S, and DKT2020-SD models enable users to make both internal and
outside calls without lifting the handset (see Table 27).
Table 27 Speakerphone Features
Feature Description
Handsfree Answerback All DKT2000-series telephones enable users to answer internal calls without
lifting the handset.
Handset OCA Enables you to speak through the handset of an off-hook, busy digital phone.
Flexible Buttons All DKT2000-series telephones have flexible buttons which can be assigned
to access features or CO lines.
The DKT2010-H and the DKT2010-SD both have 10 flexible buttons, and the
DKT2020-S and the DKT2020-SD have 20. LEDs can be red or green
depending on conditions.
Fixed Buttons All DKT2000-series digital telephones have fixed buttons with red LEDs
which are permanently dedicated to the features noted below:
0VJ The Message button is used to turn on the Message LED of a called station
that is busy or that does not answer. Users can press 0VJ to call back the
station or voice mail device that left the message.
0LF The Microphone button cuts off the microphone during speakerphone
operation to enable private office conversations. Also used to enable
handset OCA talkback mode.
6SNU The Speaker button is used to turn the speaker on and mutes handset
microphone for group listening. It also disconnects on-hook dialing calls.
5HGLDO The Redial button is used to redial the number last dialed from the station.
&QI7UQ The Conference/Transfer button is used to set up the Conference and
Transfer features.
9RO The Volume up/down button provides independent control of the handset,
speaker, and ring volumes.
+ROG The Hold button places internal [DN] and outside calls on hold. Can also be
used to place calls on Exclusive Hold.
Stations and Peripherals
Peripherals
52 Strata DK General Description 5/99
Peripherals
The Strata DK supports several types of stations and customer-supplied peripheral devices, such as
attendant consoles, Direct Station Selection (DSS) consoles, door phones for visitor screening, a
music source for MOH, a speaker for BGM and Paging, Toshiba Stratagy systems and Voice
Processing (VP) for voice mail/auto attendant applications, and more (see Figure 16).
For information on the supporting PCB or data interface unit, refer to “Customer-supplied
Peripherals and Interfaces” on Page 111.
Figure 16 Strata DK Peripherals
$
4275
SMDR Data
Collection
Ground/Loop/OPS/Caller ID (all DKs)
Tie/DID/T1/ANI/DNIS/
ISDN PRI (DK40i, DK424)
and BRI (DK424)
Network Interface Lines
Door Lock
Control
Standard
Telephone
Voice Mail Integration
(SMDI and In-Band DTMF)
Alarm Sensor
(DK40i, DK424)
Least Cost
Routing
Door Phone/
Monitor Stations
External
Speaker
Off-hook Call
Announce
Digital
Telephone
Modem Pooling
Digital Telephone
with ADM Console
Centrex
Printer
(Sharing) Stand-alone Data
Interface Unit
Mainframe Computer Access
Digital Telephone With
Integrated Personal
Computer Interface
TAPI Personal
Computer
DSS Console
(DK40i, DK424)
Strata AirLink
Wireless Handset
Facsimile
G4-ISDN (DK40i, DK424)
PC Attendant Console (DK424)
DKAdmin PC Remote Administration
ACD/MIS PC (DK424)
Call Center Viewer (DK424)
PC Digital Telephone
Insight DK and Insight DK Plus (DK424)
ISDN Video Conference (DK424)
ISDN Fast Internet Data (DK424)
Hospitality Management Information System
(DK40i and DK424)
StrataControl
Music-On-Hold/
Recorder Control
Stations and Peripherals
Digital Telephone Upgrade Options
Strata DK General Description 5/99 53
Digital Telephone Upgrade Options
Digital telephones can be upgraded with the following options.
Digital Add-on Module (DADM)
The DADM adds 20 feature buttons to DKT2000-
series telephones. These feature buttons can be
assigned for CO line access, DSS, and Station or
System Speed Dial. Directory Numbers or other
functions, however, cannot be assigned to DADMs.
Up to two DADMs can be attached to a telephone to
provide 40 buttons to supplement the telephone’s 10
or 20 buttons.
♦DK14 supports up to 8 DADMs
♦DK40i supports up to 12 DADMs
♦DK424 supports up to 200 DADMs (Table 34
on Page 89 for the capacities of different
DK424 common control units)
Integrated PC Interface (RPCI-DI)
An optional RS-232 PC interface unit that replaces
the normal telephone base and provides the
telephone with simultaneous computer-telephone
interface and voice/data features, without the need
of a modem or an extra outgoing line.
RPCI-DI-equipped digital telephones can also be
connected to a PC with Microsoft® Windows®
TAPI applications. TAPI, or Telephony Application Programming Interface, applications enable
the DK to provide “pop-up” screens on a PC that show information on the Calling or Called party.
Information such as ANI, DNIS, and Caller ID data is sent from the digital telephone/RPCI-DI to
provide information for “pop-up” screens to the computer. The Telephone Service Provider
Interface (TSPI) PC software is included with each RPCI-DI. For details on data interface
specifications (Table 43 on Page 116).
Digital phones shared with the Cordless DKT-2004-CT telephone cannot use the RPCI.
Headset/Loud Ringing Bell Interface (HHEU)
The HHEU provides interfaces for both a headset and a loud ringing bell speaker. The headset
must use a carbon microphone. (With the loud ringing bell feature, the speaker amplifies the
ringing or voice announcement of an incoming call.) For details on data interface specifications
(Table 42 on Page 115).
Stations and Peripherals
Stand-alone Data Interface Unit (PDIU-DS)
54 Strata DK General Description 5/99
Speaker Off-hook Call Announce (DVSU)
DVSU-equipped digital telephones can receive Speaker OCA. This enables stations to receive
internal calls over their speaker while on another call. DVSU is not required in a telephone to
originate OCA calls or in a digital telephone that receives OCA calls via the handset or headset.
Stand-alone Data Interface
Unit (PDIU-DS)
The PDIU-DS enables users to make switched data
connections for modem pooling, printer sharing,
and host/mainframe computer accessing. LEDs on
the front panel of the PDIU-DS indicate the status
of each call.
Cordless Digital Telephone
(DKT2004-CT)
The Toshiba DKT2004-CT Cordless Digital
Telephone brings mobility and productivity to
office telephones. Greater call access cuts down on
leaving messages and “telephone tag.” Its compact
design enables the user to take it to many locations
within the office complex.
Digital 900 MHz spread-spectrum technology
provides nine simultaneous channels and represents
state-of-the-art design and engineering. Spread-
spectrum technology provides clarity in
unsurpassed range, several times greater than conventional analog cordless telephones.
Spread-spectrum technology also provides extremely secure communications between cordless
digital telephones and their corresponding base stations within a given environment. Fully
charged, the cordless digital telephone provides over 3 hours of talk time, and 42 hours standby.
An extended operation battery is also available to provide over five hours of talk time.
The cordless digital telephone either attaches to a Toshiba DKT2000-series corded digital
telephone or is used as a stand-alone. It provides many sophisticated Strata features:
♦LCD provides information such as User Name, DNIS and Caller ID
♦Four programmable buttons for feature, multiple line or feature access
♦Headset jack (headset optional)
♦Handset volume adjustment
♦Conference/Transfer (&QI7UQ) button
♦+ROG button
♦Message Waiting LED and button
♦20 Speed Dial number memory (in addition to 40 station speed dials)
Stations and Peripherals
Strata AirLink Wireless Handset
Strata DK General Description 5/99 55
The DKT2004-CT Cordless Digital Telephone operates from the same digital station port on the
PDKU2 as the DKT2000-series digital telephone which may or may not be attached. It is not
compatible with receiving Group Pages or All Call Pages.
Strata AirLink Wireless Handset
The Strata AirLink Wireless handset, like the cordless telephone, is
designed for mobility, reliability, and outstanding performance.
Operating in the 1.9 GHz Unlicensed Personal Communication Service
(UPCS) range, it represents state-of-the-art design and engineering.
The handset can access up to eight separate Strata AirLink wireless
systems enabling movement from building to building, system to
system.
It provides unsurpassed range, clarity, and fully-secured
communications using a voice scrambling algorithm.
The handset uses one Nickel Metal Hydride (NiMH) battery. When fully
charged, the battery provides up to 4 hours of talk and 40 hours of
standby time.
Features
The handset is equipped with 12 handset volume adjustments (plus a silent mode), 8 ring levels,
and a lockable dial pad. Seventy internal alphanumeric Speed Dial memory locations enable Speed
Dialing by name or number.
The handset has an LCD that shows an idle message, date, call duration, and icons. The icons
represent these conditions:
♦Off-hook or ringing
♦Battery strength
♦Alpha mode
♦Signal lock and strength
It also has standard built-in buttons that perform these specific functions:
3:5 – turns the power ON and OFF
)/6+ – performs hookflash functions
)&1 – enables features with the use of other buttons; for example, Call Forward, Transfer, Speed
Dial, and Conference
▲/▼ – adjusts volume and scrolls through menu options
$%&– toggles handset between alpha and numeric modes
5&/ – recalls numbers stored in memory
672 – stores Speed Dial numbers/names and the idle message
&$// – places the handset off-hook to enable calling
(1' – places the handset on-hook and exits from RCL, FCN, STO, and ABC modes
&/5 – erases one or more digits in the display
*▲ – scrolls backwards through the Speed Dial list
▼– scrolls forward through the Speed Dial list and locks/unlocks the dial pad
Stations and Peripherals
PC Digital Telephone (PC-DKT)
56 Strata DK General Description 5/99
PC Digital Telephone (PC-DKT)
Using Windows, the PC Digital Telephone (PC-DKT) application functions as an independent
telephone. The PC-DKT enables you to make and receive calls using the Windows Virtual
Telephone Display on your PC screen, using your PC’s mouse and/or keyboard. A Toshiba digital
desk telephone can be connected for backup or for speakerphone use. It’s automatically activated
when you close the PC-DKT application or when your computer is turned off.
The PC-DKT software runs in the background while you work on other Windows applications.
You can set it to appear when calls arrive and when you want to make a call, or keep it displayed
on top of all active applications. You can also use the PC-DKT with a Toshiba Cordless Digital
Telephone and switch between them at the touch of a button - even during a call.
The PC-DKT provides all the features of a Toshiba LCD Digital Telephone while giving you these
advanced features:
♦StrataBase directory stores frequently called numbers and other contact information. Speed-
dial directly from the database, and easily find specific information with the Search feature.
♦Call logging tracks time, date, duration, destination, and Caller ID of all incoming and
outgoing calls.
♦Voice mail access panel lets you conveniently operate voice mail with user-definable buttons
on screen.
♦Analog port enables you to connect a speakerphone, cordless phone or other external device,
or if you choose, send faxes and data from your PC telephone line through the Strata DK
system.
♦Customize ring tones to identify internal, external, recall, and emergency calls. It also can
play separate sound wave (.WAV) tones to give each telephone line its own ringing sound
(sound card required).
♦Call recording and playback enables you to store recorded calls as sound wave (.WAV) files,
play them back, and attach them to other applications (sound card required).
♦On-line help makes the PC-DKT easy to use.
♦Account code calling becomes an automatic process for any call, simply by selecting the
option.
Stations and Peripherals
PC Attendant Console (DK-PCATT)
Strata DK General Description 5/99 57
PC Attendant Console (DK-PCATT)
Operators can process a heavy load of incoming calls quickly and efficiently using the Strata DK
PC Attendant Console for Microsoft Windows. The console is not available for the RCTUA
processor, DK40i or DK14. The console consists of the following items:
♦Custom keyboard (DK-PCATT-KB)
♦Handset and cradle (RATHC)
♦Attendant Console Interface Unit (RATI) connected to an RATU PCB
♦Special Toshiba-proprietary software
The following customer-supplied items are needed:
♦An IBM-compatible personal computer (PC) with a 1.44 floppy disk drive and an additional
COM port to attach to Toshiba RATI PCB
♦Windows 3.1 software, or higher
♦Color VGA monitor
♦Windows graphics acceleration
♦Mouse
Note Minimum requirements for the PC are a 100MHz Pentium® computer with 16MB of RAM
(for Microsoft Windows 3.1) or 32MB of RAM for (Windows 95), and 200MB hard drive.
The application uses up to 20MB on the hard drive. A tower PC, placed on the floor, is
recommended over a desktop type for visibility. An internal or external modem is
recommended with a third COM port.
The system supports up to four attendant consoles. Multiple consoles automatically sharing
incoming call load on a call-by-call rotation basis. Features such as Overflow, Position Busy
Mode, and Interposition Call Transfer add to the efficiency of multiple console applications.
Although designed to be a dedicated console, the PC can also be used for other Windows
applications and serve as a multi-purpose work station.
The main screen, shown below, changes according to the status of the console.
Stations and Peripherals
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
58 Strata DK General Description 5/99
Various telephone and system parameters can be changed from the console, without a separate
maintenance port. These include Telephone User Names and System Speed Dial numbers.
The PCATT provides a Name/Number search that works with automatic or manual call handling.
Other powerful features for the PCATT include Call Answer Priority and Queuing, Direct Station
Selection, dial pad DTMF signaling, Emergency Call ID, Flexible Programmable Keys, Loop
Keys with Status Indication, keyboard or mouse operation, and headset or handset operation with
volume control. See “PC Attendant Console Features” on Page 102 for feature descriptions and
Table 36 on Page 108 for a list of features.
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
The DSS consoles are for system operators.
They operate alongside a digital or electronic
telephone and have 60 buttons which can be
programmed for DSS, CO line access, All Call
Page, Night Transfer, and Station or System Speed
Dial. DSS consoles do not have their own [DNs],
since they are connected to a telephone.
Multiple consoles can operate with one DKT:
♦DK14 does not support DSS consoles
♦DK40i supports up to three consoles
♦DK424 supports up to eight consoles (Table 34
on Page 89 for DK424 DSS console capacities
for various common control units)
The DSS console uses LEDs to indicate call and feature status; the DDSS has dual red and green
LEDs to help further define status. The DDSS console connects to the PDKU2. For details on data
interface specifications (Table 43 on Page 116). The older electronic HDSS console is also
supported.
Door Phone (MDFB)
MDFBs are often used with a door lock to screen
building visitors. Door phones also can operate as a
“hot line.” For example, a door phone can be used
for calls between an office and a warehouse
(requires DDCB).
♦DK14 can have up to 6 door phones
♦DK40i can have up to 9 door phones
♦DK424 can have up to 12 door phones (see
Table 34 on Page 89 for MDFB capacities for various common control units)
Stations and Peripherals
Door Phone and Lock Control Unit (DDCB)
Strata DK General Description 5/99 59
Door Phone and Lock Control Unit
(DDCB)
The DDCB can support as many as three door phones
(MDFBs) or two door phones (MDFBs) and one door lock
and connects to designated telephone circuits.
External Speaker (HESB)
The HESB is a multi-functional, external, six-inch speaker
unit with a built-in three-watt amplifier. It can be used as a
paging speaker, an amplified talkback speaker, or a
telephone’s Loud Ringing Bell.
Toshiba Stratagy and Stratagy DK Processing
The Strata DK can operate with Toshiba Stratagy and Stratagy DK voice processing systems,
which provide a number of helpful features.
The DK14, DK40i and DK424 also support SMDI voice mail integration (see “Simplified
Message Desk Interface (SMDI)” on Page 80). Refer to the appropriate Stratagy literature for
details. For Stratagy voice mail processors, a standard telephone PCB is also required (QSTU2,
KSTU2, RDSU, RSTU2).
The Strata DK supports in-band DTMF voice mail integration for all of the above voice mail
systems and requires DTMF receivers:
♦DK14 requires the QRCU3 for DTMF voice mail integration.
♦DK40i requires the DK40i Expansion KSU for Stratagy DK voice mail. The K5RCU3 is
required for DTMF voice mail integration. The Stratagy DK does not require a KSTU2,
RDSU or RSTU2; it acts as an RSTU2 in the Strata DK KSU slot.
♦DK424 requires the RRCS for DTMF voice mail integration.
Stations and Peripherals
Cabling and Connectors
60 Strata DK General Description 5/99
Cabling and Connectors
Strata DK uses industry standard cabling and connectors to interface with lines, stations, and
peripherals (Table 39 on Page 112).
Stations use standard twisted-pair cabling to connect to the system via the MDF. Digital and
standard telephones require just one pair-cabling, or two pair, if equipped with DADM, RPCI or
DVSU. Electronic telephones need two-pair cabling or three-pair for Speaker OCA.
Station PCBs connect to stations and peripherals with a 25-pair Amphenol connector via the MDF.
CO, DID, and Tie line circuits interface with the public telephone network via modular connectors.
Peripheral devices such as SMDR, DKAdmin maintenance PC, etc., are connected to the interface
PCBs (TSIU, RSIU, PIOU, etc.) with three-pair (six wires) modular cords and the Toshiba PPTC9
or PPTC RS-232-to-modular adapters.
The Strata AirLink Wireless Telephone system configured to standard ports (RSTU2) connects to
all Strata DK systems using the Base Station Interface Adapters (BSIAs) and one or two Base
Stations.
The Strata AirLink Wireless Telephone system configured to digital ports interfaces to the DK40i
and DK424 (standard cabling and connectors) using the proprietary RWIU PCB. The RWIU uses
industry standard RJ11 jacks to support up to four Base Stations. Multiple RWIUs can be installed
to increase the capacity of the wireless system.
Station and Peripheral Specifications
For more information on Station and Peripheral Specifications, refer to these tables in the
Appendix.
♦Station Loop Requirements (Table 39 on Page 112)
♦Station Dimensions (Table 40 on Page 113)
♦System Tones (Table 41 on Page 114)
♦Subassemblies for Toshiba Telephones (Table 42 on Page 115)
♦Data Interface Specifications (Table 43 on Page 116)
Strata DK General Description 5/99 61
Features 6
This chapter provides descriptions of system and station features for the DK14, DK40i and
DK424, in alphabetical order. These features apply to all of these systems, except where noted.
This chapter includes these sections:
♦System Features
♦Station Features
♦PC Attendant Console Features (DK424 only)
System Features
This section describes features that are available on a system-wide basis. See Table 32 on Page 88
for a list of system features.
Abandoned Call Numbers
Automatic Number Identification (ANI) and Caller ID calls that ring but are abandoned before
they are answered can be stored in system memory. LCD telephone and attendant console users
can display and Auto Dial the “abandoned call” ANI and Caller ID numbers.
♦DK14 and DK40i can store up to 200 ANI and Caller ID abandoned call numbers
♦DK424 can store up to 2,000 ANI and Caller ID abandoned call numbers
For DK14/DK40i/DK424, stations can be programmed to store from 0 to 100 abandoned call
numbers in increments of 10.
Account Codes (Forced/Voluntary/Verified)
Account Codes provide a method of tracing and categorizing CO line calls on the SMDR report.
They may even be used to temporarily change a restricted station's class of service to allow long
distance calling after an Account Code is entered.
Account Codes may be required before dialing calls (Forced) or optionally entered during calls
(Voluntary). Codes can be as long as 15 digits and can be verified or nonverified. If a printer is
connected to the system, a record of each Account Code prints out on the SMDR report.
Note The 911 emergency number and two other optional customer-designated numbers (up to
four digits long) can be assigned to bypass Forced Verified Account Code requirements.
Features
System Features
62 Strata DK General Description 5/99
Alarm Sensor (DK40i and DK424 only)
Both the PIOU and PIOUS option interface PCBs have a sensor that can be connected to a
customer-supplied alarm system. If the alarm is activated, the sensor triggers a loud alert tone to all
digital and electronic telephones. Any station programmed with an $ODUP button can turn off the
alert tone.
Alternate Answer Point
Users can answer a transferred outside line call from any station that has the /LQH button or a
Secondary [DN] for the destination station.
Amplified Conference Interface
Provides interface for a customer-supplied amplifier to improve low volume levels due to losses
on some CO lines. The amplifier is not dedicated to certain CO lines (it is shared by all CO lines)
and automatically connects to calls that include two CO lines: for example, DISA, conferencing
and external call forward.
This amplifier provides a louder sound level on these types of calls and requires two circuits on a
PEKU or PESU PCB installed in the Strata DK per amplifier. A maximum of two (DK40i) or four
(DK424) amplifiers per system can automatically connect to any two CO line conference. This
feature is available for the Strata DK40i and DK424.
Auto Attendant (Built-in)
The built-in AA feature acts as an operator that automatically directs incoming calls to stations.
Strata DK provides a built-in AA feature via optional feature upgrade keys: QKYS (DK14),
KKYS (DK40i), RKYS1~3 (DK424).
Callers who dial in to assigned Strata DK AA lines can receive a dialing prompt menu, such as,
“Dial 5 for Sales, dial 6 for Tech Support.” When the caller dials the digit, the call routes to a
[DN], ACD group, or Distributed Hunt group (assigned in system programming).
AA can be programmed to answer CO line calls immediately or with a delayed ring option. AA
can pick up unanswered calls that ring for either 12 or 24 seconds at selected stations. An
unlimited number of CO lines can be assigned for built-in AA. Built-in AA applies to loop and
ground start CO lines only; it does not answer Tie or DID line calls.
Built-in AA enables access to outgoing lines via DISA, which should be security protected with
account codes and/or a DISA security code.
The AA feature requires customer-provided digital announcement device(s) and optional QRCU3
(DK14), K5RCU (DK40i) or RRCS (DK424) tone receiver PCBs. Callers can be connected to one
digital announcer simultaneously. One DTMF receiver is needed per caller.
♦DK14 enables up to three caller connections
♦DK40i enables up to five caller connections
♦DK424 allows up to 24 caller connections
Auto Attendant is licensed by Dytel, Inc. under United States Patent No. 4,975,941.
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) (DK424 only)
With an optional feature upgrade key (RKYS2~3) connected to an RCTU processor, stations in the
DK424 can be arranged in ACD groups. Such an arrangement enables incoming calls over a CO
line to be distributed among a group of ACD Agents. This is ideal where a number of staff
members receive the same type of calls, since calls can be automatically distributed.
Features
System Features
Strata DK General Description 5/99 63
Incoming calls that are not directly connected to Agents wait in queue for the first available Agent
in the called group. While waiting, callers hear programmed announcements and music at
designated intervals to encourage them to remain on hold. This feature requires a customer-
provided, digital announcement device(s) and music source.
When the number of ACD calls waiting in queue reaches a programmable threshold, calls can
overflow to another ACD group or destination such as a Distributed Hunt (DH) group.
The ACD feature also enables supervisor stations to provide ACD Agents with call assistance and
call monitoring. ACD Supervisor LCD telephones can display ACD group status, individual Agent
status (available/unavailable, on an ACD call, etc.) and Call Status (the number of calls in queue,
longest call in queue, etc.).
Additionally, the RKYS3 feature key enables the use of a Call Center Viewer, SMIS, or Insight
DK application. SMIS provides detailed supervisory monitoring of Agent calls (on a PC screen)
and printed reports regarding an Agent’s performance. Call Center Viewer presents real-time ACD
Agent and Queue Status to multiple PC screens.
Insight DK (DK424 only)
The Insight DK and Insight DK Plus systems are full-featured ACD MIS tools for call center
supervisors, providing user-defined supervisor displays, user-defined historical reports, electronic
wall board connections, and inView LAN-based status display messaging.
Insight DK and DK Plus are Windows-based MIS software programs that work with PCs running
Windows 95 (Vers. 4.00.950A, B, or C), Windows 98 or Windows NT® with Service Pack 3.
They both support external wallboard displays and scheduled reporting. The data collected can be
exported for further processing using other report generator programs or spread sheets. They also
support inView, which provides LAN-based status displays in a wallboard format on Agent’s or
Supervisor’s PC screens. See the Strata DK424 Call Center Solutions General Description for
more information.
ACD Feature capacities are listed in Table 28.
Table 28 ACD Capacities
Automatic Number Identification (ANI)
LCD telephones can display the telephone number of the calling party for direct, incoming,
transferred, and Call Forwarded calls. The telephone number can also be sent to an application
computer or to voice mail.
The system supports ANI on analog or digital lines (T1 or ISDN PRI/BRI), DID and Tie lines, and
provides the calling telephone number to answering parties. An optional tone receiver PCB
(K5RCU for DK40i; RRCS for DK424) is required for ANI line operation. DK14 does not support
ANI.
DK424
ACD RCTUBA/BB RCTUC/D RCTUE/F
ACD/Insight DK and Insight DK Plus/SMIS/Call Center Viewer Yes Yes Yes
ACD Groups 81616
ACD Agent IDs1
1. There are system limits for the number of simultaneous Agents depending on traffic. See the Strata DK424 Call
Center Solutions General Description for details.
200 256 256
ACD Music Interface Ports (1 per Group) 81616
ACD Announce Interface Ports (3 per Group) 24 48 48
Features
System Features
64 Strata DK General Description 5/99
ANI is also known as Calling Number Identification Service (CNIS) on ISDN lines. CNIS
operates the same as ANI on the DK424. ANI digits can be received independently or
simultaneously with DNIS called number digits.
Calls received with DNIS digits can be routed to unique destinations for each DNIS number (see
“Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS) (DK40i and DK424 only)” on Page 68 and
Table 29).
If ANI is received without DNIS, all ANI calls ring the same selected destination. ANI calls are
calls can be routed to a unique destination for each system ringing mode (Day, Day 2, Night). All
routing destinations except Intercept can be assigned by system programming to change according
to the time of day (see “Day/Night Modes” on Page 67).
In the DK40i, each ANI line reduces station capacity by one. ANI (DID or Tie) lines do not reduce
the station capacity in DK424 systems, Release 4.0.
Refer to the sections on ANI, Caller ID, DNIS or DID and Table 29 for more specific routing
information.
Automatic Release from Hold
If an outside caller on hold hangs up, the system will automatically disconnect the call and free the
line for other calls. This feature applies to DISA, DNIS and/or ANI external routed calls, AA,
voice mail calls, and regular voice calls.
Automatic Release is available on a line-by-line basis and operates only with COs that provide a
disconnect (Calling Party Control) signal.
Background Music (BGM)
BGM can be sent to telephone and external speakers. The customer-supplied BGM source(s) can
be applied in a flexible manner.
Table 29 ANI, Caller ID, and DNIS Routing Destinations
Routing Destination ANI Line1, 2
Calls
1. DNIS calls can be received independently or simultaneously with ANI “calling number” digits. ANI-only calls (without DNIS) can
also be routed to one destination shown in this table.
2. Not supported by DK14.
Caller ID
Line Calls DNIS Line1, 2
Calls Tie & DID 1, 2
Line Calls
Ground 2
Loop Start
Line Calls
Individual Primary/Secondary/Phantom DNs ✕✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
CO line or pooled line buttons ✕ ✕
Individual Distributed Hunt (DH) Groups 2✕✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Individual ACD Groups ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Remote Maintenance/Administration modem ✕✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
System External Page (Tie lines, private
network lines only) ✕
System night bell or night ringing over
external Page ✕✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Intercept destination (station console
announcement) applies to DID line types only ✕ ✕ ✕
External telephone network numbers ✕✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Voice mail box/Auto Attendant device ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Features
System Features
Strata DK General Description 5/99 65
One music source can feed both types of speakers, or both types can have their own separate
source. The source used for MOH can also be piped to telephone speakers for BGM or an alternate
BGM source can be connected so callers on-hold have a separate music/announcement source.
The BGM source connects to the RCA jack in the system’s Base Cabinet, RCTU, or to a
designated standard or electronic telephone circuit port.
Caller ID
This feature enables the telephone number or name of the calling party to display on the ringing
telephone’s LCD. It can also be sent to an application computer or to voice mail. Up to 10 digits or
16 characters can be displayed or sent to a computer.
Caller ID (CLID) information displays on direct, incoming, transferred, and Call Forwarded calls.
For PCs, CLID allows both the caller’s name and number to be sent. If the Strata DK system is
programmed to receive both ANI and DNIS information on incoming calls, the station user can
press 3DJH while the call is ringing to alternate between DNIS and ANI/Caller ID LCD displays.
See Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) on Page 66 for more information.
Caller ID is similar to ANI except that Caller ID is offered by local carriers on ground or loop start
lines. Most local carriers charge an extra fee for this service.
A Caller ID Interface PCB is required, in conjunction with the normal ground or loop start CO line
PCBs, to provide the Caller ID feature.
Caller ID can be provided only on analog loop start lines (with QCDU2, KCDU2, TCOU, RCOU
or RCOU/RCOS) and analog ground start lines (RGLU2). It is not available on any other type of
analog lines (TDDU, RDDU and/or REMU) or any type of T1 or ISDN digital lines (see Table 29).
♦DK14 – the WSIU PCB is required to provide an RS-232 interface to a customer-provided
Caller ID interface device (TC-1041). CO lines that receive Caller ID must be cross-connected
to the TC-1041 (MLX-41) Caller ID interface box. The TC-1041 (MLX-41) is available from
TEL-CONTROL, Inc., P.O. Box 4087, Huntsville, AL 35815-4087. Phone (205) 881-4000.
♦DK40i –the TCIU2, RCIU2 and RCIS PCBs come with four Caller ID circuits each. The
TCIU2 is used for Base Cabinet lines and the RCIU2/RCIS is used for Expansion Cabinet
lines to provide up to eight Caller ID interface circuits. A KCDU2 can also support Caller ID
with an RCIU2. A TCIU2/RCIU2/RCIS circuit must be available for each line that is to
receive Caller ID.
♦DK424 – when ordered from the factory, the RCIU2 PCB comes with four Caller ID circuits;
however, an RCIS piggy-back PCB can be installed on the RCIU2 to provide four more Caller
ID circuits, for a maximum of eight Caller ID circuits per cabinet slot. An RCIU2/RCIS circuit
must be available for each line that is to receive Caller ID.
ANI is delivered by long distance providers on DID or Tie lines.
Centrex/PBX Compatible
All system features are compatible with Centrex/PBX operation, including repeat of Centrex/PBX
ringing cadence, one-button access to Centrex/PBX features, a two- to four-digit station
numbering plan, and Delayed Ringing to selected stations.
Centrex Ringing Repeat
The system can mimic CO/Centrex/PBX ringing cadences received from outside lines when it
rings a called station.
Features
System Features
66 Strata DK General Description 5/99
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)
CTI combines the capabilities of the Strata DK digital business telephone system with custom
functionality provided by computer applications. This can be provided through the Digital
Telephone Integrated PC Interface.
Digital Telephone Integrated PC Interface
A Toshiba 2000-series digital telephone can be connected to a PC. This can be used for both
routine data switching simultaneous voice and data applications, and for more robust CTI
applications.
The connection is made with an RS-232 cable from a communication port on a PC to an RS-232
port on the digital telephone. The RS-232 port is provided by equipping the digital telephone with
an integrated PC Interface Unit (RPCI-DI). This optional unit replaces the normal telephone base
and equips the telephone for simultaneous computer-telephone interface and voice/data features.
Data switching applications enable users to make data calls to printers, PCs, and other data
devices. Users can also make voice calls using PC directory dialing software, without the need for
a modem or an additional outgoing line.
The system can be programmed with one to four security groups, and can restrict calls between
groups. It can also support modem pooling and printer sharing.
For CTI applications, digital telephones interface to a PC that runs the application software using
the Microsoft Telephone Application Programming Interface (TAPI), to provide customized
functionality. The PC must run Microsoft Windows software.
Any TAPI-enabled PC software is compatible with Strata DK systems. The most common types of
application are database look-up and pop-up screens that provide information on the calling party.
From a Strata DK system, Caller ID, ANI, DNIS and call processing information can be passed
from the digital telephone to the application computer.
StrataLink
The Strata DK can interface with computer applications that conform to Microsoft Windows TAPI
format. The Toshiba StrataLink Telephony Service Provider Interface (TSPI) software enables the
Strata DK to communicate with TAPI applications. StrataLink TSPI software is bundled with the
RPCI-DI in the form of a 3-1/2” IBM-compatible disk.
StrataLink software greatly enhances the use of the basic TAPI interface, enabling you to
customize the call-control functions of your PC application, including:
♦Select how the PC application responds to the next call event – StrataLink can accept call
events from the telephone, apply call handling rules and conditions, and invoke actions in a PC
application.
♦Handle multiple telephone calls – Most TAPI compatible applications can only handle one
call at a time because they only respond to a ringing line for Caller ID database lookup and
screen display. StrataLink enables the application to respond to multiple calls and events that
capture Caller ID and generate screen displays. It also displays transferred calls and
reconnections to held calls. The display can be delayed until after the current call or for a
programmed amount of time.
♦Handle multiple PC applications from the same telephone – Incoming calls can activate
actions in different applications, depending upon the type of call.
For example, you can generate “customer database” application screens of callers on your
regular directory numbers, use “help desk” application software generated from ACD calls,
and have your pager beep with Caller ID when you are away from your desk. Different
applications can be assigned to work on specific buttons on your telephone, or on all buttons.
Features
System Features
Strata DK General Description 5/99 67
♦Enhance outbound calling – StrataLink provides for outbound telephone calling and call
control from the PC application.
♦Easy setup, testing, and monitoring – StrataLink provides tools for testing the interface,
debugging or monitoring the call events, and makes application setup easier. When you select
from pre-defined tested applications, the proper interface is automatically assigned.
Conferencing
A variety of Conferencing combinations are available to all station users, as listed below. Stations
and lines can be added in any order. (See “Amplified Conference Interface” on Page 62 for more
information.)
♦One or two stations and two outside lines
♦Two or three stations and one outside line
♦Four stations on one internal [DN] line
Credit Card Calling
Callers can make credit card calls (0 + telephone number + credit card number) that bypass Toll
Restriction. The calls are billed to the credit card, not to the Strata DK line. The system requires
that a specific quantity of digits be dialed; otherwise, the call will be dropped within 20 seconds to
prevent operator-placed calls that would be billed to the Strata DK line.
Data Switching
Strata DK offers a sophisticated optional data switching capability using PDIU-DS and RPCI-DI
that can interconnect a wide range of customer-supplied data equipment, including PCs, printers,
and modems. Asynchronous data can be transmitted between devices connected to PDIU-DS/
RPCI-DI at speeds up to 19.2 kbps (see Table 34 on Page 89).
The system provides four data security groups to restrict data calls between groups. Dialing by PC
(both data and voice calls) as well as modem pooling and printer sharing is supported.
Day/Night Modes
The system has three available ringing modes for routing incoming line calls. The routing
destinations are [DNs], ACD groups, Distributed Hunt groups, Auto Attendant, DISA, and a night
bell. The ringing modes are Day, Day2, and Night.
Each mode can be assigned a distinct ringing destination. The system can be programmed with
either two modes (Day, Night) or three modes (Day, Day 2, Night), which can be changed by any
station programmed with a 1LJKW7UDQVIHU button. A supervisor’s 1LJKW/RFN button can be
provided to prevent false changes in modes. Day/Night call routing applies to all incoming line
types: ANI, DNIS, Caller ID, DISA, Tie, and DID lines.
Delayed Ringing
If an incoming CO, DID or Tie line or internal [DN] call rings a station [DN] and is unanswered,
alternate stations can be programmed to ring 12 or 24 seconds later. The stations that were ringing
initially will continue to ring after the Delayed Ringing begins. This feature is assigned on a line-
by-line and [DN] basis.
It is also possible to direct loop or ground start CO line calls to the Strata DK built-in AA on a
delayed ring basis. In this case, the telephone(s) that initially ring will stop ringing when the AA
answers.
Features
System Features
68 Strata DK General Description 5/99
Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS) (DK40i and DK424 only)
This feature enables incoming DNIS (called party) telephone numbers to display on the LCDs of
ringing telephones. DNIS is provided on analog, and/or digital (T1, ISDN PRI/BRI), DID and Tie
lines. An optional DTMF tone receiver PCB is required for DNIS.
Normally, DNIS is associated with “1-800” type calls offered by various long distance carriers;
however, the Strata DK can provide DNIS information over DID and Tie line circuits.
Traditionally, each 800-number is assigned to its own line group, often resulting in a large number
of under-used lines. DNIS allows multiple numbers to ring into the same line or line group, which
provides a more efficient use of 800-numbers. Each DNIS line is used on an as-needed basis for
different 800-number calls.
♦DK14 does not support DNIS.
♦DK40i supports up to 200 DNIS numbers and a maximum of 100 telephone network numbers.
The K5RCU (DK40i) optional tone receiver PCB is required for DNIS. Each DNIS, DID or
Tie line reduces the station capacity by one.
♦DK424 supports up to 500 DNIS numbers and a maximum of 300 telephone network
numbers. RRCS optional tone receiver PCB is required for DNIS. See “Station and Peripherals
Capacities” on Page 89. DNIS, DID or Tie lines do not reduce station capacity in DK424
Systems, Release 4.0.
The DNIS numbers are correlated in the system database with assigned DNIS names. DNIS names
(up to 16 alphanumeric characters) display on direct incoming, transferred, and Call Forward calls.
This allows incoming calls to be identified and answered appropriately.
DNIS numbers can be assigned to ring unique destinations in the Day, Day2, and Night Ring
modes (see Table 29). The DNIS (called number) digits can be received independently or
simultaneously with ANI “calling number” digits (see “Automatic Number Identification (ANI)”
on Page 63).
Priority of ANI or DNIS is set for each line in system programming. DNIS digits can also be sent
to a PC. See “Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)” on Page 66.
External Telephone Network Numbers
All DNIS/DID/Tie numbers that ring into the Strata DK can be routed externally to any outside
telephone number. Depending on the application, the caller DNIS name may be passed to the
destination Strata DK when routed over the telephone network.
Voice Mail
If assigned in the system database, incoming calls for each unique DNIS/DID/Tie number can be
directly routed or Call Forwarded to a designated voice mailbox. This allows callers of each DNIS/
DID/Tie number to receive immediate personal custom greetings.
Note This feature is available on in-band integration only. It is not available using SMDI.
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) Lines (DK40i and DK424 only)
Based on the final digits of a dialed telephone number, DID enables incoming calls over a single
line to directly ring one or a number of stations which share a common [DN]. DID numbers can be
assigned to ring a number of destinations (see Table 29). DK14 does not support DID.
DID is provided by analog or digital (T1, ISDN PRI/BRI) lines. The TDDU and RDDU analog
PCBs support DID. For the DK424 only, the digital T1/DS-1 (RDTU2) or ISDN PRI (RPTU)
PCBs support DID.
Features
System Features
Strata DK General Description 5/99 69
Each DID number can be assigned a Name to display on an LCD telephone that rings when the
DID number is called. Each DID line has a single office code and a block of extension numbers
(the final digits) that can be individually assigned in system programming to ring stations.
DID lines can directly access the remote maintenance modem and can optionally provide
automatic Camp-on-busy when callers dial a busy [DN] on incoming DID calls. This feature
provides a camp-on tone and distinctive LED flash at the busy station.
♦DK40i – each DID line reduces the station capacity by one.
♦DK424, Release 4.0 – DID lines do not reduce station capacity.
An optional tone receiver PCB (K5RCU or RRCS) is required for DID line DTMF operation.
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Outside callers using a DTMF-capable telephone can dial internal stations or outgoing lines
directly, without going through a receptionist or operator. DISA security codes and/or a verified
account codes, each up to 15 digits, can be assigned to prevent undesired access to lines.
DISA is available to any quantity of ground or loop start lines (not Tie or DID), either directly or
through the Strata DK built-in AA. It enables privileged users to take advantage of the benefits of
the Strata DK even when they are not on the premises. An optional tone receiver PCB (QRCU3,
K5RCU or RRCS) is required for DISA.
DISA can be accessed by calling into the DK built-in AA. To prevent users from calling into the
Auto Attendant and accessing an outgoing line with DISA to make unauthorized external calls, be
sure to use the DISA security code.
Distinctive CO Line/Directory Number Ringing
The incoming line ringing tone to digital telephones is distinct from the internal ringing tone
indicating the type of the call. This feature is optional for standard telephones by using a different
ring pattern.
Door Lock Control
Digital and electronic telephone station users can unlock a customer-supplied electronic door lock
at the touch of an optional button on their telephone.
♦DK14 supports up to two locks
♦DK40i supports up to three locks
♦DK424 RCTUA supports up to four locks; all other processors support up to five locks
Door Phones (MDFB)
Door phones are frequently mounted near building entrances and associated with a customer-
provided door lock to help screen visitors. Door phones can be assigned to ring [PDNs] and/or
[PhDNs]. Each door phone must be connected to a DDCB or HDCB.
They also monitor sound—station users can call the door phone and listen to sounds from the
surrounding area. In a warehouse-type environment, a door phone can work as a “hot link,” for
example, the door phone can have a preassigned button that accesses a certain telephone [DN] in
an office, and any common [DNs].
♦DK14 supports up to 6 door phones
♦DK40i supports up to 9 door phones
♦DK424 supports up to 12 door phones
Features
System Features
70 Strata DK General Description 5/99
DTMF Back Tone
The system can be programmed to allow or prevent DTMF tones from being returned to digital
telephones when a user dials on outside lines or sends DTMF digits to a voice mail device.
DTMF and Dial Pulse CO Line Compatible
The Strata DK System works with either DTMF or rotary dial pulse CO lines on a line-by-line
basis.
DTMF Signal Time (80/160 milliseconds)
DTMF tones that are sent via Speed Dial to lines and via automatic dialing to voice mail devices
can be set to 80 or 160 milliseconds. The time can be set independently for line out-dialing and for
voice mail automatic dialing. See “Continuous Dual-tone Multi-frequency (DTMF) Tone” on Page
94.
Emergency Ringdown
Standard telephones can be programmed to automatically ring a designated extension when they
are taken off hook, after a predetermined time without dialing. The receiving digital or electronic
LCD station or attendant console displays the station name/number of the off-hook calling station.
This feature does not work with digital and electronic telephones.
In healthcare applications, this feature is known as Emergency Ringdown operation. It is used to
assist callers who may not be able to complete a call by dialing. If a station is left off-hook,
continuous ringing will occur at a designated extension. This feature is also known as “Hotline
Service” for hotel/motel applications. See “Hotline Service” on Page 72 for more information.
Enhanced 911 (E911) Service
In the public safety arena, Enhanced 911 (E911) is distinguished from Regular 911 by the delivery
of specific location information to the console of the dispatcher handling the emergency call. The
public switched telephone network (PSTN) delivers a Caller Emergency Service Identifier
(CESID) to the Public Safety Answering Position (PSAP) as part of the telephone call set up.
PSAP procedures outside the telephone connection translate the CESID into a specific location to
which emergency services can be dispatched. The Strata DK is not involved in the translation of
CESID into Automatic Location Information (ALI).
The Strata DK40, DK40i and DK424 can accept a call dialed as “911” or “9” + “911” from any
extension and deliver it to a specially programmed, single-line telephone port that connects to
customer-provided, emergency call adjunct equipment. As part of the call, the DK communicates
the originating directory number (DN) to the external equipment using DTMF signaling. The
external equipment translates the received DN to a valid CESID, connects the call to the PSTN and
delivers the CESID information when the call is answered.
Centralized Automatic Message Accounting (CAMA) trunks connect the customer-provided
equipment to the PSTN. When its CAMA trunk interfaces become available, the Strata DK424
will be able to connect directly to CAMA trunks, eliminating the need for external equipment.
The RMCU PCB with one RCMS subassembly provides two CAMA trunk interfaces in one
cabinet slot. One more RMCS may be added to the RMCU for a system total of 4 CAMA trunks.
An extension dialing “911” or “9” + “911” will be routed to its appropriate CAMA trunk. The
DK424 will seize the CAMA trunk, dial “911,” and deliver that stations CESID once the trunk is
answered. The DK424 stores a unique, programmable CESID for each Primary Directory Number.
The DK424 has several internal notification features. It will notify all consoles and designated
stations of an E911 call. It may be programmed to initiate a conference call including the
Features
System Features
Strata DK General Description 5/99 71
originating telephone, the PSAP and an internal emergency station. The SMDR port will generate
a special record at the beginning of the call as well as at the end.
DK owners are urged to learn local regulations and availability of services which may vary
widely. A growing number of locations require a business owner to maintain accurate location
information in a public safety database. Certain locations require E911 only for systems
functioning as PBXs or hybrids but not as key systems. Contact your local emergency services
provider and Local Exchange Carrier for specific information. Another useful resource is the
National Emergency Number Association (NENA) at www.NENA.org.
External Page Zones
The Strata DK40i can support up to four External Page Zones and DK424 can support up to eight
(Tables 24 and 25). Station users can access one, four or eight zones simultaneously by dialing a
brief access code. The zones are composed of customer-supplied speaker(s) and amplifier(s) which
interface with one or two PIOU PCBs. DK14 does not support zone paging.
Flexible Button Assignment
Each of the flexible buttons on digital and electronic telephones can be assigned for feature or CO
line access, enabling station users access to features and lines with the touch of a button. Digital
telephones are available in 10- and 20-button models.
Flexible Directory Numbers
A “flexible” number of digits can be programmed for station [DNs] in the Strata DK. The DK14,
DK40i and DK424 station [DNs] can have from one to four digits. The maximum available
number of unique station [DNs] ([PDNs] plus [PhDNs]) are listed below:
♦DK14 – up to 20 unique station [DNs] are allowed
♦DK40i – up to 56 unique station [DNs] are allowed
♦DK424 – up to 672 unique station [DNs] are allowed
Single-digit [DNs], such as “0”, can be assigned to attendant consoles or attendant telephones.
Flexible Line Ringing Assignment
Each CO line can be programmed to ring the Auto Attendant, night bell, DISA, remote
maintenance modem or any station [DN] in the system. A different ringing assignment can be
created for each of three ringing modes—Day, Day2 or Night. Stations assigned to ring can do so
with any of the following three timing designations:
♦Immediate – Stations assigned Immediate timing ring as soon as the line rings into the system.
♦Delay 1 – If stations with Immediate timing have not answered within 12 seconds (3 rings),
stations assigned Delay 1 timing also begin ringing. Immediate Ring telephones continue to
ring when Delay 1 Ring telephones ring.
♦Delay 2 – If the above stations have not answered within 24 seconds (6 rings), stations
assigned Delay 2 timing also begin ringing. Immediate and Delay 1 Ring telephones continue
to ring when Delay 2 Ring telephones ring.
Group Paging
Digital and electronic stations can be divided into Paging Groups. Any station user can make a
page announcement to just one or all of these groups. The page is sent to the speakers of all idle
telephones in a page group. For more information, see Table 34 on Page 89.
Features
System Features
72 Strata DK General Description 5/99
♦DK14 and DK40i each support up to five Paging Groups, including the All Call Page Group.
♦DK424 supports to up to nine Paging Groups in systems operating with the RCTUC/D and
RCTUE/F common control units (up to five are supported with either the RCTUA or
RCTUBA/BB). These groups include the All Call Page Group.
Note Cordless DKT-2004-CTs and standard telephones are not compatible with Paging.
Handsfree Directory Number Paths
All stations can have handsfree conversations simultaneously. Because [DN] paths are
nonblocking, the number of conversations is only limited by the amount of digital and electronic
stations.
Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS)
The Toshiba Strata DK Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) is a PC-based
solution, designed to meet the specific operational needs of small- to medium-sized hotels and
motels.
The HMIS tightly integrates with the Strata DK40i and DK424 Digital Telephone System, Release
3.1 or higher, and the Stratagy Voice Processing System, providing a complete and fully-integrated
hospitality package.
The HMIS is an optional turnkey package that includes both the PC and software. The packaged
product includes a PC with a Pentium® 133 MHz processor, 2GB hard drive, three serial ports,
keyboard, mouse, SVGA color monitor, and software (printer not included). The HMIS software is
a Microsoft Windows 95-based application.
The HMIS PC is dedicated to running the HMIS server program and functions as a front desk
terminal. In applications requiring multiple front desk terminals, PC HMIS workstations can be
networked together to share a common database.
The HMIS application provides hotel/motel features and property management capabilities that
are not resident within the Strata DK telephone system. The HMIS is well integrated with the
telephony features of the Strata DK telephone system to which it is attached.
The Strata HMIS provides guest check-in/check-out, up to 20-year reservation capacity, automatic
wake-up calls, SMDR telephone call tracking and costing, billing, telephone system control, and
many other features. See the Hospitality Management Information System General Description for
details.
Hotline Service
Standard telephones can be automatically ring a designated extension if they go off hook and do
not dial with a preprogrammed time. The receiving digital or electronic LCD station or attendant
console displays the station name/number of the off-hook calling station. This feature does not
work with digital and electronic telephones.
Hotline Service is very useful for hotel/motel applications, where it may be preferable to have
lobby or public area telephones without dialing capability. Standard telephones can be
programmed to automatically call a specific number, such as the front desk. This feature is also
known as Emergency Ringdown in the healthcare field (see “Emergency Ringdown” on Page 70.)
Features
System Features
Strata DK General Description 5/99 73
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)
ISDN is a set of integrated telecommunications services, available over the public
telecommunications networks. ISDN makes it possible to send, receive and modify information
using telephone lines in ways that were not previously possible, such as:
♦Dynamic use of individual or groups of standard (POTS), DID, Tie, FX, WATS, 800 lines on
an as-needed basis
♦Much faster call setup and data transfer up to 128 kbps
♦Multi-purpose line use, including sharing lines for voice, data, fax, and video
♦DID functionality based on the number dialed; without needing to reserve a block of numbers
ISDN service comes in two forms:
♦Primary Rate Interface (PRI) supports 23 or 24 simultaneous voice or data connections. PRI
is similar to digital T-1 service and uses two pairs of wires from your phone company.
♦Basic Rate Interface (BRI) supports up to two simultaneous connections using a single pair
of wires.
National ISDN standards were first established in 1992. These were formed for all equipment
providers and services to create a common set of functions for these new services. The public
network is in the process of implementing nationwide the National ISDN 2 (NI-2) services and
some locations have started National ISDN 3. Strata DK Release 4.0 is based on NI-2.
ISDN Primary Rate Interface (PRI)
PRI is the larger ISDN interface (via the RPTU) and uses the 23B+D transmission format, which
has 23 64-kbps bearer channels and one 64-kbps data (control) channel, with total bandwidth of
1.544 mbps.
PRI is designed as the trunk interface to the ISDN network. PRI connects the Strata DK424
telephone system to an intra- or inter-LATA communication provider. PRI can be used to send/
receive voice and/or data.
More importantly, PRI can save money by enabling the multiple use of the channels on the PRI
link for a variety of services, such as DID, Tie, FX, WATS, 800, etc., on demand.
This capability to support multiple services and dynamically allocate channel use as needed is
known as the call-by-call feature. PRI lines also support Calling Number Identification Services
(CNIS).
A dealer-supplied, UL listed, Channel Service Unit (CSU) is required between the DK PRI
interface and the PRI line provider interface in most locations of the U.S. In Canada, a CSA
certified DSU/CSU must be installed.
ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI)
Note Strata DK40i and DK424 support BRI S/T. The DK424 and DK40i will support BRI U
basic features in Release 4.2. No supplementary features are offered in theses releases.
BRI is the smaller ISDN interface and provides two simultaneous voice or data connections with a
single interface. BRI uses the 2B+D transmission format which is defined as two 64-kbps bearer
channels and one 16 kbps data (control) channel. The D-channel carries call setup control data.
ISDN BRI station applications allow the connection of ISDN instruments, such as a group IV fax,
PC, computer terminal or port, a LAN bridge, video conferencing terminal, Internet access
devices, LAN access routers, or other devices that benefit from an all digital transmission link.
Features
System Features
74 Strata DK General Description 5/99
BRI applications for the DK424 will include video conferencing, remote access servers, faster
Internet access, point-of-sale devices and high-speed data connections from ISDN stations to the
public ISDN network, as well as typical voice and fax connections. With the correct external
adapter, data can be sent up to 128 kbps.
Like PRI, BRI provides CNIS, DID, Direct Inward Lines, and other data access services when
used to access the public network.
The Strata DK424 BRI cards will support both station side and trunk side connections. The Strata
DK424 system will also support BRI interface from the public network as a CO line service. There
are two types of ISDN BRI interfaces: S/T type (via RBSU/RBSS) and the U-type (via RBUU/
RBUS). Both types are used in the U.S.
The Public Switched Telephone Network provides BRI U-type lines only; therefore, a dealer-
supplied, external Network Terminal Unit (NT-1) is required to connect DK S/T-type BRI line
circuits to the network. The NT-1 must be UL listed (U.S.) or CSA certified (Canada).
Call-by-Call Service Selection
This feature permits the grouping of individual PRI B-channels to be shared among various types
of services specified by the customer, instead of having to dedicate each channel to a particular
type of service. Using this common pool of channels provides much improved traffic handling
than using dedicated channels.
This dynamic allocation of service can reduce the number of circuits required to access various
services, especially if various services have different peak busy periods.
In Release 4.15, the DK424 will enable specifying the minimum and maximum number of B-
channels used for each service on a common set of B-channels in system programming. Minimum
and maximum values can be set for three time periods during the day.
These values can be used to ensure that a minimum number of channels remain available for
incoming calls. They can also be used to determine if calls should be rejected because they exceed
the maximum number subscribed for that service. Until Release 4.15 becomes available, Call-by-
Call minimum/maximum service will be implemented at the CO.
Call-by-Call services can be specified to map Strata DK capabilities to network services such as
DID, Tie, FX, WATS, 800, etc. These services can be provided via the local telephone carrier or be
connected to any ISDN inter-exchange carrier.
Outgoing calls, specific numbers, or DID numbers can be checked against the Call-by-Call table
which lists all valid DNs. DNs can be identified on a per station basis to enable billing calls to a
selected service or station. All numbers used for identifying the call must be subscribed from the
providing service, otherwise the call will be rejected by the provider.
Non-Facility Associated Signaling (NFAS)
NFAS provides the ability to create ISDN trunk groups beyond the 23 channels available with a
single PRI. This is extremely important when Call-by-Call Services are used since all B-channels
must be controlled using a common D-channel.
The Strata DK system will support one additional PRI (two circuits to be linked with one D-
channel). This extends the number of call-by-call B-channels to 47 (2 x 24 minus 1). This provides
better performance and cost savings in high volume ISDN PRI applications.
Features
System Features
Strata DK General Description 5/99 75
Calling Number Identification Services (CNIS)
CNIS features provide “Calling Party Information” to the network (outgoing calls) and from the
network (incoming calls). There are four types of CNIS services:
♦Number Provisioning for outgoing calls is controlled by subscription parameters with your
telco provider. The choice is for the number to be necessary or not. The number sent is based
on the call originator and the call type. The originator can be a tandem call, a station (with or
without DID), or a station with a designated number. The type of call refers to whether it is a
direct or redirected (call forwarded) call.
For a tandem call, the Calling Party Number digits received are the digits that will be sent. For
a direct station call, the default number assigned to the selected service, and which is
programmed into the Strata DK as the Listed Directory Number (LDN), will be the number
sent. In this case, the system can send a fixed number (assigned in the system) or it can use the
DID programming to determine the number to be sent.
♦Number Screening is normally performed by the public network to ensure that the call being
placed has a valid billing number. In systems with a flexible Calling Number Provisioning, the
network can determine if the call is for a valid billing number. Based on this, it can either place
or reject the call, rather than completing the call and billing it to the default LDN.
♦Number Privacy allows the caller to prevent the public network from delivering the Calling
Number to the called party on a per-call basis. Service subscribers can request that the number
be presented or not, as a default from the public network. Subscribers can also change default
settings. If a public telco service allows changes to be made, then a user can enter change a
code to the setting for that call after selecting a trunk group.
♦Number Delivery sends the calling number with the call setup message, if that number is not
blocked. The Strata DK handles the number the same way that ANI information from T1
trunks is handled. For instance, the number can display on the called telephone’s LCD, or it
can be used by TAPI interfaces, or it can be recorded in SMDR data records.
Note Name Delivery will not be supported in this release, due to the lack of a common
specification for the public ISDN network.
Least Cost Routing (LCR)
Different route plans may be designed to automatically place outgoing calls over the most cost-
efficient routes. See the table below for LCR capacities.
Three different LCR time schedules with their own priority schedules can be set up for the
business day. Stations can be grouped into one of eight LCR classes, each with its own routing
priority. Selected station users may have priority use of a line, even when the route with the lowest
cost is not available. LCR is compatible with ABR.
Table 30 Least Cost Routing Capacities
DK424
Least Cost Routing DK14 DK40i RCTUA RCTUBA/BB RCTUC/D RCTUE/F
LCR route plans 8 8 8 8 16 16
Area Code/Office Code exception tables 8 8 8 8 16 16
Time schedules 3 3 3 3 3 3
Station classes 4 4 4 4 8 8
Route definition tables 4 4 4 4 6 6
Modify digit tables 6 6 6 6 12 12
Features
System Features
76 Strata DK General Description 5/99
Line Groups
For easy access, various types of outside lines can be assigned to groups (normally for pooled line
and LCR applications). For example, all local lines can be assigned to one group and WATS lines
in another group. Station users access line groups by dialing an access code or by pressing a
feature button.
♦DK14 provides up to 4 line groups
♦DK40i provides up to 8 line groups
♦DK424 provides up to 16 line groups
Line Queuing
A station user can use the Automatic Callback feature to enter the queue for a busy outgoing line.
When the line becomes available, the system calls the station back. Queuing applies to single lines,
line groups, and when calling via LCR.
Live System Programming
Programming the Strata DK from an on-site or off-site location does not interrupt the operation of
the system in most cases. It is interrupted for hardware upgrades.
Memory Protection
If the power fails, the Strata DK has an internal battery backup that protects data and the
customer’s programmed configuration. This information will be maintained within a powerless
system for at least six years.
Message Waiting
Any station and most voice mail devices can leave a message waiting indication (light) on a
designated message waiting light of a digital, electronic, or standard telephone station.
Message waiting lights can be activated when a voice mail message has been left, or they can be
turned on by a calling station. The station user can retrieve messages by pressing the button next to
the message waiting light.
♦DK14 and DK40i – QSTU2 and KSTU2 PCBs do not support standard telephone MW lamps.
♦DK424 and DK40i – an RSTU2 PCB must be connected to a standard telephone with a MW
lamp to enable this feature. The DK40i and DK424 provide Message Waiting to standard
telephones with a message waiting lamp. The user can enter an access code to retrieve the
messages. A standard station can store up to four indications.
Multiple Directory Numbers
A [DN], sometimes called an “extension number,” is the number someone must call to reach a
destination within the system. To maximize call coverage flexibility, station [DNs] can appear on
multiple telephones. Also, individual telephones can have multiple [DNs] (see Figure 17).
The system provides three types of [DNs]: Primary, Secondary and Phantom. All [DNs] can be
used to originate and answer calls. If you press a [DN] while on a call, it releases the existing call
and provides dial tone to make another call.
♦DK14 supports a maximum of 10 [PDNs] and 10 [PhDNs]
♦DK40i supports a maximum of 28 [PDNs] and 28 [PhDNs]
♦DK424 supports a maximum of 336 [PDNs] and 336 [PhDNs] (see Table 32 for maximum
capacities for various common control units)
Features
System Features
Strata DK General Description 5/99 77
Primary Directory Number [PDN]
Each station in the Strata DK has a unique [PDN]. This [PDN] can appear on multiple buttons (up
to four) of the primary station.
Secondary Directory Number [SDN]
When the [PDN] of a station appears on another station, it becomes an [SDN]. Any [PDN] can
appear as an [SDN] on all other Toshiba telephones in the system. A [PDN]/[SDN] can ring on up
to 120 telephones in the system. Each telephone can be assigned up to four of the same [SDN]. The
maximum number of [PDNs] plus [SDNs] on each telephone is 16.
Phantom Directory Number [PhDN]
This is an additional [DN] that can be dedicated to a station or to a group of stations (usually in the
same area or department). Each unique [PhDN] can only appear once on a given telephone, but
each telephone can be assigned up to eight different [PhDNs].
Any [PhDN] can appear on all Toshiba telephones in the system. A [PhDN] can ring on up to 120
telephones in the system. Each [PhDN] must be assigned to a designated telephone owner via
system programming.
Each [PhDN] is flexibly assigned to an owner telephone in system programming. Only [PhDN]
owner telephones have the following privileges:
♦Set Call Forward for [PhDNs]
♦Set Call Forward Mailbox destination for [PhDNs]
♦Receive Message Waiting (MW) indication for up to four [PhDNs] on individual Phantom
Message Waiting [PhDN/MW] LEDs
♦Receive OCA when the [PhDN] is called
Figure 17 Multiple Directory Number Example
Notes
●Incoming calls come in to a telephone’s [PDNs] from the top down to prevent “call collisions.”
For example, incoming calls to Stations 200’s [PDN] will first ring the top “200-1” line, a
second call will ring “200-2” below it, and a third call will ring “200-3.” Auto preference to
200-3
200-2
200-1
201-2
201-1
500
MW/500
501
504
Station 200's [PDNs]
[SDNs] of Station 201
Station 200 can originate or
answer calls for Station 201
by pressing [201-1] or [201-2].
[PhDNs]
Station 200
201-2
201-1
200-3
200-2
200-1
500
501
508
Station 201
0554
Features
System Features
78 Strata DK General Description 5/99
select a [DN] to make a call by going off-hook is from the bottom [PDN] up. This avoids
answering an incoming call while attempting to originate a call.
●Each [PhDN] can have a dedicated Message Waiting [PhDN/MW] LED/button to notify the
[PhDN] owner telephone user that there is a message for the person or department associated
with the [PhDN]. Up to four [PhDNs/MWs] can be programmed onto the flexible buttons of
each telephone. In the above example, [MW/500] is the Message Waiting button for [PhDN
500].
●A station [PDN] shows busy on Busy Lamp Field when the station is in DND mode or off-
hook on any [DN], CO line or Tie line. [PhDNs] do not display Busy Lamp indication.
●[PhDNs] are usually associated with a function such as an “800” number for a Technical
Support Group; whereas a specific [PDN] is usually associated with a person, for example,
Station 200 is assigned to Steve, Station 201 is for Susan, etc.
Multiple FCC Registration
The DK14 and DK40i can be configured as either a key or hybrid system with separate FCC
registration numbers for each type. The DK424 can be configured as either a key, hybrid, or PBX
system with separate FCC registration numbers for each type.
Multiple registration ensures compliance with FCC regulations, regardless of how the system is
configured. The appropriate configuration for an individual system depends on its function.
Systems configured only for manual selection of lines via line buttons may be registered as key
systems; systems with Automatic Line Selection, LCR, 3RROHG/LQH buttons, etc., usually must
be registered as hybrid or PBX systems.
Music-on-hold (MOH)
A customer-supplied radio, tape player, tuner, compact disc player, or other device can be used to
send music or announcements to parties on-hold on CO lines or on [DNs].
Night Ringing Over External Page
Incoming line or door phone calls can be programmed to ring over an external speaker when the
system is in the Night mode. The call can be picked up from any telephone. After-hours employees
who are not near a ringing telephone can easily answer calls with this feature.
Night Ringing Over Selected Page Zones
Lines can be programmed to night ring over four selected PIOU Page zones via customer-supplied
paging equipment. Programmed lines can be divided into tenant groups which can then be
assigned to night ring over the selected zones:
♦DK40i supports two tenant groups
♦DK424 supports two tenant groups with RCTUA; all other processors support four tenant
groups
Non-blocking Talk Paths
All outside lines and internal [DN] lines can be used at the same time.
Off-premises Station
Off-site standard telephones can be part of the system, having access to many of the features
offered by the Strata DK. Each off-site station requires a special line from the CO.
Features
System Features
Strata DK General Description 5/99 79
Outgoing Call Restriction
Stations can be selectively restricted from originating calls over any number of lines. The same
stations can receive incoming calls on those restricted lines.
Pooled CO Line Button
Several lines can be pooled to appear under one digital telephone, electronic telephone CO /LQH
button. The lines are usually pooled in categories, e.g., WATS lines in one pool, regular lines in
another, etc. Pooled and single-appearing line buttons are designed for use with loop and ground
start lines, not DID, Tie, DNIS, or ANI lines.
Power Failure Transfer
CO line(s) can be switched directly to dedicated standard telephones (customer-provided 2500- or
500-type) for incoming and outgoing calls in the case of a system power failure. The number of PF
telephones available depends on system configuration. Refer to the appropriate configuration
chapter in the Strata DK Installation & Maintenance Manual.
During normal operation with AC power, in the DK14 or DK40i Base KSU, the PF telephone
connected to the base KSU PF jack does not function.
In the DK424 and the DK40i Expansion Unit, PF telephones connected to DPFT/RSTU2 do
function as a normal standard telephone with all the Strata DK available features, when operating
with normal AC power.
During a power failure, the following connections are made:
♦DK14 – one CO line is connected directly to the PF phone.
♦DK40i – in the Base KSU, one CO line is connected directly to the PF phone (up to eight more
can be added in the Expansion Unit).
♦DK424 – in the DK424, multiple CO lines can be switched. If AC power is lost, the PF
telephones are automatically/directly connected to a pre-wired CO lines.
PF transfer requires an external unit called the Power Failure Transfer Unit (DPFT) and the
RSTU2 PCB on the DK424 and in the DK40i Expansion KSU (if more than one PF telephone is
needed). Each DPFT provides interface for eight power failure telephones.
An RSTU2 PCB is required to supply the DPFT with a -24VDC control signal and ground
connections.
Privacy/Non-privacy Calling
This feature applies to CO /LQH buttons only and does not apply to [DNs]. Outside CO /LQH
buttons can be Private or Non-private on a station-by-station basis. Private lines prohibit users
from pressing a common CO /LQH button and accessing a line that is already in use, whereas users
can do so on Non-private lines.
Private line users can change the mode with a 3ULYDF\5HOHDVH button, enabling as many as
three stations (total) on a line. Non-private users can block access to their lines with a 3ULYDF\
button.
Relay Service
The DK14 KSU and DK40i Base KSU provide one relay contact to provide the functions listed
below. For the DK40i and DK424, the PIOU, PIOUS, and PEPU PCBs each have two pairs of
relay contacts that can each be programmed for one of the following two functions.
Features
System Features
80 Strata DK General Description 5/99
External Page/Door Lock Control
♦External Page is a Page over external speakers will mute BGM that is being broadcast over
the same speakers.
♦Door Lock Control Relay requires PIOU or PIOUS relays. Only the PIOU and PIOUS relays
will open a customer-supplied door lock for three or six seconds when a designated button is
pressed on selected telephones.
Night Relay/Hold Relay
♦Night Relay enables answering machine or a night bell (or chime) will be activated when a
call rings in during the Night mode.
♦Hold Relay enables an MOH source will turn on only when calls are placed on-hold.
Remote Administration/Maintenance
See “System Program Administration Software (DKAdmin)” on Page 83.
Reserve Power
Customer-supplied 12-volt batteries (gel-cell and maintenance free) can be connected to the
system power supply as a power failure backup.
If there is a power failure, Strata DK automatically switches over to battery power without any
interruption to operation. A built-in charger circuit keeps the batteries charged during normal
system operation.
Reserve power duration depends on the condition of the batteries and the system load, and is
specific for each Strata DK model. Reserve power batteries must be fully-charged, connected, and
tested before a power failure occurs.
♦DK14 – see “Power Supply” on Page 4
♦DK40i – see “Power Supply” on Page 13
♦DK424 – see “Power Requirements” on Page 26
Simplified Message Desk Interface (SMDI)
This feature provides system integration between the Strata DK and the Toshiba Stratagy and VP
voice processing systems.
SMDI is a standard (RS-232 serial) link; its protocol was developed by Bellcore and is used by
many PBX and Central Office telephone systems to integrate with voice mail systems. SMDI does
not support Strata DK DNIS mail box routing. SMDI interface requires that the Strata DK have a
WSIU, TSIU, PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU, or RSIU PCB installed.
By using this standard integration method, a Strata DK has the flexibility to integrate with a wide
range of standard voice mail machines and also to grow with the standard as more features are
added for enhanced integration.
Advantages provided by the Strata DK and the Stratagy/VP SMDI integration are:
Features
System Features
Strata DK General Description 5/99 81
Better Port Usage
SMDI is a faster and more efficient integration compared to DTMF (in-band) integration and is
recommended for high-traffic installations.
Improves Call Coverage
Stratagy uses the call forwarding status (e.g., all calls, no answer, busy, etc.) supplied by SMDI to
provide better call coverage. The status information also enables Stratagy to perform custom
applications using Stratagy RNA and Busy Chain options.
Streamlines Messaging Procedures
♦SMDI provides the calling party’s extension to Stratagy. Users calling Stratagy from their
telephone do not have to enter their User ID to log on to their mailbox.
♦When an internal party calls an extension that is forwarded to voice mail, SMDI applies the
calling party’s identification to the message. Since the source of the message is already known,
the message recipient does not have to enter the User ID when replying to it.
♦Caller ID and ANI numbers are delivered to the Voice Mail machine via SMDI packets. DNIS
names are not sent on SMDI packets.
Speed Dial
Speed Dial enables users to dial frequently-called telephone numbers (up to 20 digits per number)
quickly by dialing a brief access code or by pushing a feature button. DK and Centrex/PBX feature
access codes can also be stored for Speed Dial. There are two types of Speed Dial: System and
Station.
System Speed Dial
System Speed Dial numbers can be used by all stations on the system. A designated station or
attendant console or DKAdmin PC can assign System Speed Dial numbers.
♦DK14, DK40i and the DK424 RCTUA processor provide up to 40 System Speed Dial
numbers that can be used by all stations on the system.
♦DK424 RCTUBA/BB and RCTUC/D provide up to 100 Speed Dial numbers.
♦DK424 RCTUE/F can have up to 800 System Speed Dial numbers.
Station Speed Dial
The Strata DK14, DK40i, and DK424 Systems provide up to 40 personal Station Speed Dial
numbers for each individual user. Each user Station Speed Dial numbers are exclusive to that user,
and are not available to other station users. For more information, see “Speed Dial Buttons” on
Page 99.
Station Hunting
The system supports two types of station hunting:
Serial Hunt
When a called [DN] ([PDN] or [PhDN]) is busy, the call (data or voice) will hunt to an assigned
[DN]. If that [DN] is busy, the call hunts to the next assigned [DN], and so on.
The call is eventually routed to the first idle station, or if it is a CO line call, then the call camps on
to the last station in the hunt sequence, if all stations are busy.
If a hunt station is call forwarded, calls to the station will ring at the forwarded destination—not
the hunt destination. Internal callers will receive busy tone if calling into a hunt group in which all
stations are busy.
Features
System Features
82 Strata DK General Description 5/99
Distributed Hunt (DH)
When a call is directed to the DH group, the system hunts for and sends the call to the next
available station that is assigned to the DH group. Calls are evenly distributed to the members of
the group on a rotational basis. The rotation of DH calls always follows the last telephone that
receives a call.
Each DH group is assigned to a unique [DN]. When a DH-[DN] is called, the call is sent to the
[PDN] or 3RROHG/LQH button of the telephone that is next in rotation to receive calls.
If all stations in the DH group are busy, calls directed to the group will be placed into a call waiting
queue and will be routed to the next available telephone in the DH group. Callers in queue will
receive ringback tone until a DH group member becomes available to answer the call.
DH calls can be routed or transferred from Caller ID/DID/DNIS/ANI lines, Tie lines, DISA lines,
loop/ground start CO lines, [DN] lines, and built-in and/or external AA. They can also be
forwarded calls from stations, and overflow calls from ACD groups.
The DK14, DK40i, and DK424 provide a maximum of 16 DH groups. The queue can contain up to
10 calls per group. A telephone can be a member of more than one (up to 16) DH group. Up to 32
telephone [PDNs] can be programmed in any rotation order desired in each DH group. [PhDNs]
can be assigned as members of the DH group in Release 3.1 and higher.
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
The system produces calling information that is sent to a printer or call accounting device
connected to a serial interface unit PCB (see below):
♦DK14 – WSIU
♦DK40i – TSIU in the base KSU, PIOU, PIOUS in the Expansion Unit
♦DK424 – PIOU or PIOUS or RSIU/RSIS
The station number and the [DN] that made, received, or transferred a call is sent to the SMDR
device after the call or transferred call is completed. Account Code information can also be
included. ANI numbers, Caller ID numbers, and DNIS/DID/Tie numbers/names can be
programmed to appear on the SMDR report. If present, the names take the place of the system
Account Codes.
SMDR reports include the called number(s), and the time and duration of calls. Customers can
select what type of calls—all calls, outgoing only, long distance calls—they want to appear on the
report.
Station Relocation
This feature enables stations to be moved from one location to another without having to
reprogram the Strata DK. Stations which are moved will maintain their set features and all [DNs],
including Primary, Secondary, and Phantom.This feature does not work when stations are
relocated from a PDKU to a KCDU PCB in the DK40i.
StrataControl (DK40i and DK424 only)
StrataControl™ is a system administrative tool designed specifically for end users who prefer to
administer part of their own telephone system. It is a Windows-based PC application enables
limited access to Strata DK40 and DK424 system programming functions.
StrataControl also enables printing telephone keystrips based upon button programming assigned
within the Strata DK system. Quick reference user guides can be printed based upon station
features and options assigned within the system. StrataControl also includes an on-line telephone
user guide, compiled from the end user’s DK database, specifically for each telephone.
Features
System Features
Strata DK General Description 5/99 83
System Programming through a Station
The system can be fully programmed with a 20-button, LCD-type digital or electronic telephone.
Programming telephones function the same as any other station when they are not in programming
mode. See “Live System Programming” on Page 76.
System Program Administration Software (DKAdmin)
Toshiba DKAdmin software enables all customer configuration program options (speed dial,
number plan, ring assignment, etc.) to be downloaded and stored on a PC disk. The customer data
can be added or changed, using a PC independent of the Strata DK. DKAdmin is fully functional
on DK14, DK40i and all processors of DK424.
The new (or original) customer program options stored on disk can be uploaded into the Strata DK
from the PC to change (or restore) customer configuration.
DKAdmin software can be used to change or restore a customer’s configuration database stored on
the PC disk and then installing at the customer’s site or remotely by modem. It enables customer
database information to be transferred from one common control PCB to another, even when
upgrading to a higher level processor.
Remote maintenance interface is enabled by the WSIU (DK14 only), TSIU (DK40i only) or for
both DK40i and DK424, an RSSU and a customer-provided external modem, or a PIOU/PIOUS
with IMDU built-in-modem, or an RSIU with RMDS (DK424 only).
An external customer-supplied modem could be used in place of IMDU or RMDS; however, the
external modem will require a standard telephone port or CO line.
T1 Interface (DK424 only)
The T1 (DS-1) interface provides the system with up to 24 digital voice channels that can be
individually programmed to operate as ANI, DNIS, Tie, DID, loop start or ground start CO lines.
This allows the system to connect to a CO, Long Distance Provider or another type of Key or PBX
system with a T1 interface.
The T1 interface (via the RDTU2 PCB) provides economic advantages through the high-traffic
carrying capacity of its 24 channels and the cost-effectiveness of its digital transmission facilities.
This feature requires a customer-provided, UL listed CSU in most locations of the U.S. In Canada,
a CSA certified CSU/DSU is required.
T1 interface users also benefit from the increased quality and no loss nature of digital
transmission. Access to the T1 interface is completely transparent to station users. With DK424,
Release 4.0, RDTU2 PCBs supports features, which require the hook-flash signal on T1 DID/
DOD/Tie circuits.
Tandem CO Line Connections
This feature enables unattended line-to-line connections for the Strata DK, freeing the
conferencing analog station or voice mail port for other calls and important tasks (see Table 32 on
Page 88 for feature system capacities).
♦DK14 enables up to two tandem connections
♦DK40i enables up to three tandem connections
♦DK424 enables up to 10 tandem connections
When a tandem connection is set up with a [DN] only, the [DN] must appear on the originating
DKT or EKT. With DK14 and DK40i, standard telephones and VM ports that set up a tandem CO
line connection cannot release from the connection.
Features
System Features
84 Strata DK General Description 5/99
With DK424, Release 3.2 and above, standard telephones and/or VM devices can establish tandem
analog CO line connections and then release them without disconnecting the tandem connection.
After releasing from tandem call, reconnecting to the call can be accomplished by dialing an
access code. This feature does not work if one or both of the CO lines are digital.
Tandem CO line volume level depends on the volume loss level of the Telephone Network CO
lines (see “Amplified Conference Interface” on Page 62).
Tenant Service
Businesses in the same office building can share a system.
♦DK14 and DK40i each support up to two tenants
♦DK424 supports up to two tenants with RCTUA; all other processors support up to four
tenants
Tenants can have separate LCR and Toll Restriction plans, Page Groups/Zones, Night Transfer
ringing assignments, and flexible door phone and CO line ringing assignments.
Tie Lines
Tie lines can link the Strata DK40i or DK424 to other Strata DK systems or PBXs that support Tie
lines. Incoming Tie line calls can be routed to ring a number of destinations within the Strata DK
(see Table 29 on Page 64).
Analog Tie lines are interfaced via the REMU PCB, each of which provides four circuits. The
interface options of Tie lines are: E & M Type I or Type II signaling, optional 2- or 4-wire
transmission, Wink or Immediate start. Digital Tie lines, available with DK424, are provided by
the RDTU2 and RPTU PCBs.
Tie lines do not reduce station capacity in DK424 Systems, Release 4.0. In DK40i, each Tie line
reduces the station capacity by one.
CO lines transferred from Strata DK to another system over Tie lines will recall back to the
originating Strata DK if the transferred call is not answered within a specified time (recall time is
flexible for each station). The recalling station number may display on the LCD of the telephone
being recalled.
An optional DTMF tone receiver PCB is required for Tie line operation:
♦DK14 does not support Tie lines
♦DK40i requires the K5RCU tone receiver
♦DK424 requires the RRCS tone receiver
Toll Restriction
Stations can be individually restricted from making toll calls. Separate restriction levels can be
defined, each allowing or denying specific area and office codes, long distance information calls,
international calls, and/or operator-assisted calls.
Each station is assigned any one of the available restriction levels or no restriction. Individual lines
can be defined as unrestricted. Restriction levels can also be assigned to verified account codes,
which require a user to enter an account code before dialing long distance.
Features
System Features
Strata DK General Description 5/99 85
Toll Restriction Override by System Speed Dial
System Speed Dial numbers can be programmed to override Toll Restriction. When employees
need to access a toll number that falls into a restricted area/office code for work purposes, an
employer can assign the particular toll number as a System Speed Dial number. After overriding
Toll Restriction with system Speed Dial, the caller can be blocked from or allowed to dial
additional digits. Dialing long distance provider access codes (10XXX and 101XXX) is not
allowed, except when entered via a System Speed Dial number or LCR.
Traveling Class of Service
The normal Toll Restriction class of a station can be temporarily changed to another class. Each of
the Toll Restriction classes can be assigned a four-digit code.
If one of these codes is entered at any station, the station assumes the class associated with the
code for the next dialed number. Then the station reverts back to its normal Toll Restriction class
for subsequent calls. Traveling Class codes can be added, deleted, or changed by users from
stations selected in programming.
Traveling Class codes will not appear on the SMDR reports. Verified account codes, which can
also change Toll Restriction Class of Service, do print out on SMDR reports.
Unrestricted Call Transfer to Directory Numbers
Any CO, Tie or DID line or internal call can be transferred to any station [DN]. A station does not
need a specific CO line’s appearance in order to transfer or answer the call.
Voice First or Tone Signaling
The system can be programmed for either Voice First Signaling to [PDNs] or Tone First Signaling
to [PDNs] as the standard method of internal [PDN] call signaling.
Tone Signaling is the commonly-used telephone ring when a call comes in. Tone Signaling better
ensures privacy. With Tone Signaling, the called telephone receives a one-second ring tone every
three seconds.
With Voice First Signaling, station users will hear a tone burst followed by the caller's voice over
their telephone speaker when called by another station user. Voice First allows handsfree talkback
from the called telephone on internal and private network Tie line calls.
When [PhDNs] are called, they always ring Tone first. Callers can always select the alternative
method immediately after dialing a station number by dialing a .
Voice Mail Integration
The system can be configured with a Toshiba Stratagy, Stratagy DK or VP (Voice Processing) or a
customer-supplied voice mail messaging system. The following features are available with many
of the systems.
Automated Attendant
Many voice mail systems offer AA as part of their overall feature package.
ANI/DNIS Routing to Voice Mailbox
Each DNIS number or all ANI numbers can be assigned to route directly to a voice mailbox
independent of telephone user voice mailboxes. Routing ANI/DNIS calls directly to a voice
mailbox can be set for all calls or just calls during a particular system mode (Day, Day2, or Night).
This feature is available with in-band VM integration only, not with SMDI.
Features
System Features
86 Strata DK General Description 5/99
Call Forward to Voice Mailbox
Each telephone user can forward calls directly to a personal mailbox. The caller bypasses the usual
sequence of voice mail commands and simply leaves a message after hearing a tone. Feature
integration of special voice mail features in Strata DK software enables the systems to work
together more efficiently.
The DK Systems provide SMDI or Inband DTMF tones for voice mail feature integration. These
two options function independently of each other or together. All systems require a DK standard
telephone port to interface with each Voice Mail port.
♦DK14 – the QRCU3 PCB enables DTMF. The WSIU PCB provides SMDI.
♦DK40i – the K5RCU enables DTMF. TSIU, PIOU, PIOUS or RSSU PCBs enable SMDI.
♦DK424 – the RRCS enables DTMF. PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU or RSIU/RSIS PCBs enable SMDI.
Message Waiting Indication
When a message is recorded in a user’s mailbox, the voice mail system automatically sets a
message waiting indication—typically a flashing LED—at the user's digital or electronic
telephone or the message waiting lamp on a standard telephone connected to an RSTU2 PCB.
A Toshiba telephone can have up to five message waiting buttons/LEDs. A fixed 0VJ button for
the telephone’s [PDN], and up to four (flexible) message buttons for each of the [PhDN].
Voice Mail Control via Station
On DK14 and DK40i, station users can control voice mail equipment from their telephone dial
pads. when not connected in a conference call. With DK424, Release 3.2 and above, DK424
station users can control voice mail equipment on a conference call with other station’s internal or
external CO lines.
Features
System Features
Strata DK General Description 5/99 87
Table 31 Standard and Optional System Features
Standard System Feature
Abandoned Call Numbers (ABR)
Account Codes (forced/voluntary/verified)
Alternate Point Answer
Automatic Release from Hold/DISA
Background Music Interface1
Centrex/PBX Compatible
Centrex Ringing Repeat
Conferencing
Credit Card Calling
Day/Night Modes
Delayed Ringing
Distinctive CO Line/Directory Number Ringing
Distributed Hunt (DK424 only)
DTMF Back Tone
DTMF and Dial Pulse CO Line Compatible
DTMF Signal Time (80/160 ms)
Flexible Button Assignment
Flexible Directory Numbers
Flexible Line Ringing Assignment:
♦Immediate
♦Delay 1
♦Delay 2
Flexible Port/line Assignment
Group Paging
Least Cost Routing
Line Groups
Line Queuing
Live System Programming
Memory Protection
Message Waiting1
1. Some feature implementation may require additional auxiliary equipment.
Multiple Directory Numbers
Multiple FCC Registration
Music-on-Hold (MOH) Interface
Night Ringing Answer Code
Non-blocking Talk Paths
Outgoing Call Restriction
Pooled CO Line Buttons
Pooled CO Release/Answer Button
Privacy/Non-privacy
Station Hunting
Station Speed Dial
Station Relocation
System Programming through Station
System Speed Dial
Tandem CO Line Connections
Tenant Service
Toll Restriction
Toll Restriction Override by System Speed Dial
Transfer Recall (CO line and Tie line)
Traveling Class of Service
Unlimited Handsfree Directory Number Talk Paths
Unrestricted Call Transfer to Directory Numbers
Voice First or Tone Signaling
Voice Mail Integration:
♦ANI/DNIS Routing to Voice Mail Box
♦Automated Attendant
♦Call Forward to Voice Mailbox
♦Feature Integration
♦Message Waiting Indication
Voice Mail Control via Station
Optional Features
Alarm Sensor1
Alternate Background Music1
Amplified Conference Interface1
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)1
Automatic Number Identification (ANI)
Built-in Auto Attendant1
Caller ID1
Computer Applications1
Data Switching1
Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS)
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) Lines
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Door Lock Control1
Door Phones (MDFB)
Enhanced 911 (E911) Service1
External Page Interface1
External Page Zones1
External Amplified Speaker1
Ground Start CO Lines
Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS)
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)
Loop Start CO Lines
Modem Pooling1
Night Ringing Over External Page1
Night Ringing Over Selected Page Zones1
Off-premises Station1
Power Failure Transfer1
Printer Sharing1
Relay Service1
♦External Page/Door Lock Control Relay
♦Night/Hold Relay
Remote Administration and Maintenance1
Reserve Power1
System Program Administration Software1
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)1
Tie Lines
Voice Mail Interface (SMDI)
Features
System Features
88 Strata DK General Description 5/99
Table 32 System Feature Capacities
DK424
Features DK14 DK40i RCTUA RCTUBA/
BB RCTUC/D RCTUE/F
Amplified Conferencing1
1. Requires additional customer-supplied hardware.
024444
Auto Attendant (built-in) simultaneous calls in
queue 3 5 12 12 24 24
Caller ID/ANI/CNIS Abandoned Call Numbers:
stored per station 10~100 10~100 10~100 10~100 10~100 10~100
stored per system 200 200 200 400 1000 2000
CO Line Groups 4 8 8 8 16 16
Distributed Hunt (DH) Calls in Queue per Groups 10 10 10 10 10 10
DH Groups 16 16 16 16 16 16
DH stations per Group 8 28 32 32 32 32
DNIS Network Routing Numbers 0 100 100 200 300 300
DNIS Numbers 0 200 200 350 500 500
DTMF receivers 3512122424
External Page Zones 0 4 4 4 4 8
Call Park Orbits - general 20 20 20 20 20 20
Call Park Orbits - individual 10 28 32 80 240 336
Personal LCD Messages per DKT2
2. Personal Messages includes: timed reminder memo and station speed dial memo.
10 10 10 10 10 10
Personal Message DKTs 8 16 16 32 96 96
[PhDNs] per System 10 28 32 80 240 336
[PDNs] per System 10 28 32 80 240 336
Ring Tones 3 3 3 3 3 3
Simultaneous Party Conferencing (4-party) 2 3 3 7 7 14
Simultaneous Two-CO Line conferencing
(3-party) 244 101020
Station Speed Dial 40 40 40 40 40 40
Stratagy DK Systems (per tenant group) 1 1 1 1 1 1
Stratagy DK Systems (per system) 0 2 2 2 4 4
System LCD Messages 40 40 40 40 40 40
System Speed Dial 40 40 40 100 100 800
Telephone Page Groups 5 5 5 5 9 9
Telephone Group Page – simultaneous stations
paged 82832 80120120
Telephone Pickup Groups 8 20 20 20 20 20
Tenants 2 2 2 4 4 4
Toll Restriction (AC/OC) Table 8 8 8 8 16 16
Toll Restriction Classes 4 4 4 4 8 8
Verified Account Codes 300 300 300 300 300 500
Voice Mail SMDI Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Features
System Features
Strata DK General Description 5/99 89
Table 33 Line Capacities and Universal Printed Circuit Board Slots
DK424
Lines and PCB Slots DK14 DK40i RCTUA RCTUBA/BB RCTUC/D RCTUE/F
Universal slots 0 41
1. There are four universal slots in the DK40i expansion unit.
6123654
CO lines – loop start 4 12 216 2
2. All CO line capacities assume a PIOU, PIOUS, PEPU, RSSU, or RSIU is installed for RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D or
RCTUE/F, but no Caller ID RCIU2/RCIS PCBs.
48 2144 2200 2
CO lines – ground start 0 12 16 240 2136 2200 2
DID lines (analog) 0 12 16 3
3. Limits apply to analog DID and Tie lines, not T1 DID/Tie lines.
40 3136 3200 3
Tie lines (analog) 0 12 16 340 3136 3200 3
T1 (DS-1) lines each) 00 0 48 4
4. T1 lines can be loop start, ground start, Tie, or DID (maximum 24 lines per unit, any type or combination).
144 4192 4
ISDN BRI B channel lines 0128
5
5. BRI lines provide CO line services, including Caller ID, DID and Direct Inward Lines (DIL).
16 516 516 5
ISDN PRI B channel lines 00 0 47 6
6. PRI lines provide CO line services, including Calling Party Number, DID, Tie, POTS, FX and DIL.
141 6188 6
Squared System Maximum
(lines + stations)
4 lines +
4 stations
12 lines +
12 stations
16 lines +
16 stations
48 lines +
48 stations
144 lines +
144 stations
200 lines +
200 stations
Table 34 Station and Peripherals Capacities
DK424
Stations DK14 DK40i RCTUA RCTUBA/BB RCTUC/D RCTUE/F
Add-on modules (DADM) 8 12 12 40 120 200
Attendant consoles 0 0 0 2 4 4
DKT2004-CT Cordless Telephones 8 28 32 80 240 336
DKT2004-CT simultaneous calls 8 9 9 9 9 9
Door locks 2 3 4 5 5 5
Door phones 6 9 9 12 12 12
DSS consoles 0 3 3 4 8 8
ISDN BRI station circuits TE-1 and TA
(2B+D per circuit)1
1. ISDN BRI TE-1 and TA include ISDN telephones, modems, video conference interfaces, etc. Up to two stations (TE-1 and/or TA)
can connect to and share one BRI S-type circuit. Only one station can connect to a BRI U-type circuit.
0 10 8 16 40 64
Handset;OCA stations 8 28 32 80 240 336
Off-premises stations 2 20 32 80 232 328
PDIU-DS2
2. Speaker OCA, PDIU and RPCI capacity is determined by 2B channel slot availability and power supply limits.
7 24 31 79 160 208
RPCI-DI used for data + TAPI, per system 28 24 32 80 144 200
RPCI-DI used for TAPI only: per cabinet 2N/A N/A 32 40 40 40
per system 28 24 32 80 186 280
Speaker OCA stations 28 28 32 80 160 208
Standard stations 2 20 24 72 232 328
Telephones – DKT 8 28 3
3. To install the maximum of 28 total DKTs and EKTs in the DK40i, up to 16 of the stations can be EKTs and at least 8 of the stations
must be DKTs.
32 4
4. Maximum capacity of DKT/EKT stations per DK424 cabinet is 62, less for EKT 2000, 3000 (Power Factor limitation).
80 4 240 4 336 4
Telephones – EKT 0 16 3 32 4 80 4 240 4 328 4
Features
Station Features
90 Strata DK General Description 5/99
Station Features
This chapter describes the features that are available to Strata DK station users. For an overview,
see “Station Features by Station Type” on Page 100. Tables 34 and 35 list the station and
peripheral capacities and station features.
Note Not all features for digital telephones are available on the digital cordless phones.
Account Code Button
This button, enables digital telephone users to enter Voluntary Account Codes (verified or
nonverified), during conversations without interrupting the talk path. It can also be used to enter
Verified Account Codes to allow normally restricted stations to dial long distance calls.
Add-on Module (DADM)
One to two DADMs can be attached to a DKT2000-series digital telephone to provide an
additional 20 or 40 buttons (see “Digital Add-on Module (DADM)” on Page 53). DADM buttons
can be programmed for outside line access, System or Personal Speed Dial, or Direct Station
Selection (Appendix – Table 42 on Page 115).
Alert Signal Button
This feature enables a digital or electronic telephone user to signal a predesignated station. When
the $OHUW6LJQDO button is pressed, a distinct tone signal is sent to the dedicated station. This
signal can be used to alert someone about a pre-arranged event or action—No talk path will exist
between the called and calling telephones.
An alert signal can be sent to telephones that are idle, or Busy, Call Forward, and/or Do Not
Disturb mode. Each station that has this feature can send/receive the alert signal to/from the other
station in the alerting pair. Up to four unique $OHUW6LJQDObuttons can be on a station.
Automatic Busy Redial (ABR)
Digital and electronic telephone users who dial a busy outside telephone number can set ABR,
which automatically redials the number at preprogrammed intervals. Busy tone must consist of
standard tones. The system will call back the station when it rings the number. ABR is compatible
with LCR and ISDN, but is not compatible with outgoing DID or Tie line calls. ABR requires the
QRCU3 on DK14 and K5RCU option PCB for the DK40i; it is standard on the DK424.
Automatic Callback (ACB)
Station users that call busy or Do Not Disturb (DND) stations can set ACB and have the system
call them back when the busy or DND station or trunk group becomes available. When calling a
station with multiple [PDNs] in the ring first mode, ACB will be available to the calling station
only if all the [PDNs] of the called station are busy.
Automatic Hold
This option enables a user to place a CO /LQH or [DN] call on Hold by pressing another CO /LQH
or [DN] button. The user can then alternate between the new and the old call by pressing the
desired /LQH or [DN]. If this feature is not activated, users must press +ROG before accessing
another line and switching between calls.
Features
Station Features
Strata DK General Description 5/99 91
Automatic Line Selection
A digital or electronic telephone user with this programmable feature automatically accesses an
outside line, a line group, and an internal [PDN] line whenever the handset is lifted or the speaker
(6SNU) button is pressed.
Background Music (BGM) with Station Control
Digital telephone users can control BGM playing over their telephone speakers. (Only a
designated station can control BGM over External Page speakers.) Besides being able to turn the
music on or off, users can also adjust the volume level. The Cordless DKT-2004-CT attached to a
DKT is not compatible with BGM.
Busy Override
Enables a station user to send tone bursts to a busy station’s idle [DN] or CO /LQH button by
dialing a or pressing a feature button. The tone burst can either be sent two times (four seconds
apart) or repeated continuously every four seconds. If there are no idle [DNs] or line buttons on the
busy station, the station will receive two bursts of camp-on tone (see “Call Transfer with Camp-
on” on Page 93.)
The busy station can be a digital or electronic and receive this tone. The DKT2000-series
telephone users can adjust their telephones to receive the tone over their handset or headset
receiver, as well as the speaker. Standard telephones will receive camp-on tone twice from the
handset receiver (it is not continuous on standard phones).
Busy Station Transfer/Busy Station Ringing
The Busy Station Transfer and Busy Station Ringing features operate together to ensure that a
busy digital or electronic telephone station always receives transferred calls along with distinct
LED and tone indications. A typical application is when an AA device transfers calls frequently to
a busy answering position station.
Call Forwarding
Outside CO Line and internal [DN] calls to stations in the Call Forwarding mode are routed to an
alternate station or voice mail device. Stations in this mode can originate calls as usual. Call
forwarding can be set by a feature button or access code.
Station users can set Call Forward for the telephone’s [PDN] or the [PhDN] that is “owned” by that
telephone. The Call Forward destination mailbox can be different for each [PDN] or [PhDN]. LCD
telephones display the forwarded [DN] and the “forward to” destination.
On DK424, Release 3.2 and above, a telephone can be designated as the Call Forward controlling
telephone in applications that require ground and loop start CO lines to ring a group of telephones.
In DK14 or DK40i, and prior releases of DK424, CO lines that ring more than one telephone do
not Call Forward.
To Call Forward in a particular ringing assignment (immediate, 12-second delay, 24-second
delay), the Call Forward control telephone must be the only one designated to ring in the ringing
assignment. If the call forwards to voice mail, it is sent to the mailbox controlling telephone’s
[PDN] or designated [PhDN]. There are six Call Forwarding modes:
All Calls
This mode forwards all calls to a busy or idle [DN] immediately; the station will not ring.
Features
Station Features
92 Strata DK General Description 5/99
Busy
When this mode is set, all calls to a busy [DN] immediately forward. If a station has an idle [PDN],
but is busy on another [DN] or CO line call, calls to the [PDN] will not forward if the system has
Ring First signaling, but they will forward if the system has Voice First Signaling. If all the
station’s [PDNs] are in use, then calls to the [PDN] will forward immediately. When a station is in
the DND mode, all calls to the station’s [PDN] forward immediately, if the [PDN] does not appear
on other stations.
No Answer
Calls to an idle [DN] set with this mode will ring for 8 to 60 seconds and then forward. The Ring
No Answer time (8 to 60 seconds) can be set by the telephone user. Call Forward No Answer
(CFNA) is optional on Handsfree Answerback.
Notes
●OCA calls will not Call Forward.
●Handsfree internal calls can be programmed to automatically forward if there is No Answer. If
this is not programmed, callers can force Call Forward with a one-digit entry.
Busy/No Answer
When a station is idle and in this mode, calls will ring for 8 to 60 seconds and then forward. The
Ring No Answer time can be set by the telephone user. When all the station’s [DNs] are busy or
when the station is in the DND mode, the call will “Call Forward-busy” immediately.
On Ring First systems, if the station is busy on a call, but has an idle [DN], calls will mute-ring the
idle [DN] until the CFNA timer expires and then the call will forward. This allows other users to
answer the call if the called [DN] appears on their telephones. On Voice First systems, calls will
immediately Call Forward-busy when the station is busy on a call, even if it has an idle [PDN]. A
station in the DND mode will call forward immediately.
Fixed
Calls to the [PDN] or private CO line of an idle or busy digital or electronic telephone in this mode
will forward immediately to a destination assigned in system programming, but not as defined by
the telephone user.
External Call
Users can set their stations to forward incoming calls (on private or DID lines) to numbers outside
the DK System. The forwarding destination can be cancelled or changed to another outside
number or an internal voice mailbox (either remotely via DISA or from the user’s telephone,
security code protected). Internal, Tie line, and transferred calls will not call forward externally,
but can forward internally if another Call Forward mode is set simultaneously with Call Forward-
external.
Note Call Forwarding can be set for [PDNs] and [PhDNs] individually, with the exception of
Call Forward External and fixed Call Forward which applies only to [PDNs].
Call Park Orbits
The Call Park feature enables a station user to place a call temporarily in an orbit so that the call
can be retrieved by any user, either from the same station or from a different station. There are 20
General Park Orbits for the system and one Personal Park Orbit for each station. Personal Park
Orbits are available to any type of telephone, including standard telephones.
If a call is parked, but not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period, it will recall the parking
telephone. The Park recall time is set individually for each station.
Features
Station Features
Strata DK General Description 5/99 93
Park and Page
This feature enables a user to park a call (in a General or Personal Park Orbit), enter a Page Zone
or Group access code, and then announce the orbit number of the waiting call to the Paged party. A
pre-programmed flexible button can be assigned to telephones to automatically connect to a
predesignated External Paging circuit, a Telephone Paging group or both.
Auto Park
This feature is only available to LCD telephones. When a telephone user parks a call, the user can
enter  instead of a specific Orbit Number. The system will then automatically select the next
available General Park Orbit and park the call. The parking telephone’s LCD will show the Park
Orbit that has been automatically selected for the parked call.
Call Pickup
By pressing a button or by going off-hook and dialing an access code, any station can pick up the
following type of calls:
♦[PDN] or [PhDN] calls on hold or ringing at other stations
♦CO/DID/Tie lines calls ringing at other stations, either all lines or designated lines. (See
“Tenant Service” on Page 84.)
♦External or Station Group Page
♦CO line ringing during the Night mode over External Page or night bell
♦Door phone calls
♦Incoming CO line calls
♦Parked calls
♦Any ringing line or designated Tenant Group lines
♦Tandem CO line connections (by tandem origination telephone)
Call Pickup Groups
Up to 20 Call Pickup groups can be created to enable station users to pickup calls ringing at other
stations with the touch of a Pickup feature button or by dialing brief access codes.
Station users can pick up a call that is ringing or transferred to any station in their own group with
a single access code or feature button, and can pickup calls ringing stations in other groups with
selected codes. Any station can be in all the different pickup groups.
Call Transfer with Camp-on
A station user can transfer a CO, DID, or Tie line or internal call to a busy station, which will
receive an alert tone indicating that a call is camped-on. If the busy station fails to answer, the
camped-on call will recall the transferring station.
A camp-on tone is also sent to electronic or digital telephones that are busy and that do not have an
idle [DN] or /LQH button to receive the call. Camp-on tone consists of two tone bursts, followed
by silence. It can be enabled or disabled for each individual station.
Call Transfer Immediate
For Digital LCD telephones: If the Feature Prompting Soft Key is used to transfer a call, the call
immediately transfers after the last digit of the destination is dialed. If the called station is not
available or is busy, the call automatically camps-on to it. This feature is helpful to people who
process a large number of calls with no time to wait for transferred calls to be answered.
Features
Station Features
94 Strata DK General Description 5/99
Call Transfer Music or Ringing Option
This feature enables ringing or music to be heard by the caller when a call is transferred,
depending on system programming. Prior to Release 3.2, callers heard music during the transfer
process and no ringing option in programming was available.
Call Transfer Recall
CO, DID, or Tie lines that are transferred (internally or over Tie lines) will recall to the transferring
station if the called station does not answer. The recall time is individually set for each transferring
station.
Centrex/PBX Features
System Speed Dial buttons can be programmed with access codes, plus any flashes or pauses
necessary to access features through a host switching system.
Conferencing
A variety of Conferencing combinations are available to all station users, as listed below. Stations
and lines can be added in any order. (See “Amplified Conference Interface” on Page 62 for more
information.)
♦One or two stations and two outside lines
♦Two or three stations and one outside line
♦Four stations on one internal [DN] line
♦Three to four simultaneous Conference calls (Table 32 on Page 88).
♦Voice Mail plus one station and two other parties (internal or outside line for DK424, Release
3.2 and above. (Outside line must be analog, not digital.)
Continuous Dual-tone Multi-frequency (DTMF) Tone
The DTMF dial signal sent to an outside line or voice mail/auto attendant device can continue as
long a DKT2000-series digital telephone user presses a button on the dial pad. This feature is not
available with electronic or DKT1000-series digital telephones.
Data Call Button
A flexible button on a digital telephone can be assigned as a 'DWD&DOO button, which can be used
to dial internal data calls. The telephone must be equipped with an RPCI-DI for 'DWD&DOO button
applications.
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Buttons
Digital telephone users can ring selected stations by pressing a flexible feature button assigned for
a DSS function. The LED associated with the button provides the busy status of the station and the
station’s [PDN]. Each flexible button can be assigned as a DSS button to a different station [PDN].
DSS buttons can also be assigned on DADMs.
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console Features
On DK40i and DK424, digital and electronic telephones can operate with DSS consoles, which
offer the following features:
♦Automatic CO line Hold
Features
Station Features
Strata DK General Description 5/99 95
♦Feature buttons
♦All Call Voice Page
♦Outside Line access buttons
♦DSS with busy LED indication
♦Night Transfer
♦Speed Dial
♦Voice First or Tone Signaling
♦Call Forward Override
Directory Number [DN] Buttons
These are the telephone’s call buttons, used to originate and receive internal and external calls. See
“Multiple Directory Numbers” on Page 76 for information on the different types of [DNs].
DISA Security Code Revision
Certain digital telephones selected in programming can revise the DISA security code.
Distinctive LED Color and Flash Indications
♦Outside CO /LQH and [DN] button LEDs light red or green to help digital telephone users
determine the status of calls. Electronic telephone LEDs are always red when they light.
♦Digital and electronic telephone LEDs flash at varying rates to indicate calling status.
Distinctive Station Ringing
Digital and electronic telephones can have one of three different ring tones for incoming CO and
DID line calls to help distinguish incoming calls. Also, ring tones for transferred CO and DID line
calls are different from the ring tones of direct CO line calls to the same telephone.
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Station users with digital telephones can activate DND to prevent any calls from ringing them.
Callers will hear a fast busy tone. If a DND station’s [DN] appears on other telephones, callers will
ring the [DNs] on those other telephones. The [DN] will then flash on the DND station, but it will
not ring. Stations in DND mode can originate calls. Also, Call Forward-Busy will operate on a
DND telephone, even if the telephone has idle [DNs].
Do Not Disturb (DND) Override
Stations with this special feature programmed can override stations in the DND mode with a tone
that indicates that somebody is trying to contact them.
DP/DTMF Mode Change
This feature allows digital and electronic telephone users to change the line out-dialing signal
mode from Dial Pulse (DP) to DTMF with the touch of a feature button.
Exclusive Hold
Exclusive Hold enables a digital telephone user to place a call on hold so that the call can only be
picked up at that station or at another station using Directed Call Pickup. No other station can pick
up the call by simply pressing the [DN] or line button that the call is being held on.
Features
Station Features
96 Strata DK General Description 5/99
Executive Override
Stations with this feature programmed can enter any conversation, except ACD and ACD/PBX
calls, in the system by dialing an access code or pressing a Feature Prompting Soft Key. An
optional warning tone notifies the parties that another party is about to conference into their
conversation. Executive Override can be blocked selectively to any station in system programming
for security with modem (data) calls, voice mail calls, fax machine calls, etc.
Feature Prompting with Soft Keys
As an alternative to dialing access codes and using feature buttons, station users with LCD digital
telephones use Soft Keys (shown on their LCD) to access features. Abbreviated feature names
appear during a call (when the telephone is in the ring or talk state) on the LCD above fixed keys.
Users can select a feature by pressing the associated key. The LCD feature selections change
according to the call state to provide the most logical options.
Flash Button
An optional button on a digital or electronic telephone can be used either to disconnect a line and
regain CO dial tone, or to gain access to Centrex features. The timing choice is system-wide by
system programming.
Handsfree Answerback
When a voice-announced internal [DN] call comes in to a digital or electronic telephone, users can
answer without lifting the handset. The Cordless DKT-2004-CT and standard telephones are not
compatible with this feature.
Hearing Aid Compatible
All Toshiba digital telephones are hearing aid compatible.
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) Features
LCD model telephones provide a number of features, such as: ANI, Caller ID, CO Line
Identification, DNIS, and more. See Table 26 on Page 50 for a list of LCD features.
Microphone Cut-off Button
Digital telephones can be programmed with a Microphone Cut-off (0LFURSKQ &XWRII) button to
turn the microphone inside the telephone on and off while idle. This “push-on/push-off” button
enables/disables Handsfree Answerback to the telephone. When Microphone Cut-off is on, it
blocks room monitoring and Hands-free Answerback.
Modem Button
This button enables a digital telephone user to reserve a modem from a pool or to switch from a
voice to a data call. Its LED indicates the availability of modems. The telephone must be equipped
with an Integrated PC Interface Unit (RPCI) for 0RGHP button applications.
Modular Handset and Line Cords
All Toshiba telephones are equipped with modular handset and line cords.
Features
Station Features
Strata DK General Description 5/99 97
Modular Headset
Digital telephones may be optionally equipped with a modular headset jack by installing an HHEU
PCB.
Off-hook Call Announce (OCA)
OCA allows a station user to send a voice announcement to a busy digital or electronic telephone.
The call must be directed to a station’s [PDN] or [PhDN]. OCA will not occur when the called
station is not the owner of the dialed [PDN] or [PhDN]. Only the [PhDN] owner telephone can
receive OCA on calls to the [PhDN].
In order for a station to receive OCA, the station must be assigned with OCA-receive capability in
the system database. Depending on system programming and hardware availability, the called
station can receive OCA in one of the following ways:
Handset Mode
An OCA announcement can be sent through the handset receiver to called party who is off-hook
and engaged in a conversation. Only digital telephone sets can have this feature. If the called
party’s station has been programmed with Handset Mode and OCA-receiving capability, an OCA
warning tone (optional) and announcement can be sent to through the handset. The Cordless DKT-
2004-CT will also receive the warning tone and announcement.
The called station user, while off-hook and engaged in a conversation, will hear the outside talking
party and the OCA calling party, but the outside talking party cannot hear the OCA calling party.
The called station user can hold down the 0LF button to respond and talk to the OCA calling party
through the handset; the outside talking party will not hear the response.
A digital telephone feature button can be programmed to work with “push-on/off” action. When
“push-on/off” is used, the outside party will hear MOH, if installed, when the called party talks
back to the OCA party; otherwise, the outside party hears nothing when excluded from the talk
path. Receiving handset OCA calls is available to digital telephones only; no special hardware
additions are required.
The DKT2001 telephone can receive handset OCA annoucements, but the user cannot respond,
since the DKT2001 does not have 0LF button.
Speaker Mode
An OCA announcement can be sent through the speaker to a called party who is off-hook and
engaged in a conversation. The called phone user must be equipped with a digital telephone with
the optional DVSU PCB and the station must be programmed for OCA-receiving capability. The
Cordless DKT-2004-CT telephone is not compatible with Speaker OCA.
The called station user can respond to the OCA caller by talking into the telephone’s microphone.
With more than one party connected, two-way simultaneous conversations are possible. However,
the RPCI PC/Data Interface cannot be used if speaker mode OCA is installed or vice versa.
Electronic telephones are compatible with speaker OCA (optional hardware is required).
On-hook Dialing
Digital and electronic telephone users can dial calls without lifting the handset, freeing their hands
for other tasks. System dial tone, dial pulsing, ringing, and the voice of the answering party are all
heard over the telephone speaker. The handset does not need to be lifted until after the party
answers, and on speakerphone models does not need to be lifted at all.
Features
Station Features
98 Strata DK General Description 5/99
Personal Computer Interface (RPCI-DI)
An optional PC interface unit that replaces the normal digital telephone base and provides the
telephone with simultaneous computer-telephone interface and voice/data features as described in
“Integrated PC Interface (RPCI-DI)” on Page 53.
Pooled Line Buttons
A group of CO lines can appear under one button on digital and electronic telephones. The system
can support up to 16 line groups. A station can have up to four buttons for the same group for
handling calls in the same group. Pooled and single appearing line buttons are designed for use
with loop and ground start lines, not Tie, DID, DNIS, or ANI lines.
Private CO Lines
The system can be programmed to allow certain “private” CO lines to appear only on one digital or
electronic telephone and is accessible only by that station.
Push-button Dialing
All Toshiba telephones are equipped with push-button dial pads.
Release Button
Users can complete a transfer or disconnect from a call and become idle just by pressing an
optional 5HOHDVH button on their digital telephones; going on-hook or pressing the hookswitch is
not required. This feature is useful for headset-equipped stations.
Release/Answer Button
The 5HOHDVHDQG$QV button enables a station user that is talking on a call to release and
transfer or disconnect the active call and automatically answer a new incoming call. This is useful
for DSS console’s telephones or stations that must process many incoming calls.
Remote Retrieval of Held/Parked Calls
Calls placed on hold or parked by a station can be picked up selectively by another station by
pressing a feature button or dialing an access code.
Repeat Last Number Dialed
The last number dialed by a digital or electronic telephone is stored in system memory, and may be
redialed automatically by accessing a CO line and pressing the 5HGLDO button or dialing an access
code.
Ringing Line Preference
A digital or electronic telephone user with this programmable-by-station feature can answer an
incoming CO, DID, or Tie line call ringing at their station just by lifting the handset or pressing the
6SNU button, without having to press the button associated with the line.
Saved Number Redial
After dialing a telephone number, a digital telephone user can “save” the number by pressing an
optional feature button. The system will automatically redial the saved number when the user
accesses a [DN] or CO line and presses the button again.
Features
Station Features
Strata DK General Description 5/99 99
Speed Dial Buttons
This feature enables digital station users to dial telephone numbers with the push of a button.
Standard telephones can dial System and Station Speed Dial numbers with access codes. There are
two types of Speed Dial buttons:
♦Station Speed Dial Buttons – Station users can store their own personal telephone numbers
on Station Speed Dial buttons. Each button uses one of the assigned 40 station speed dial
number storage locations.
♦System Speed Dial Buttons – A designated station user can store numbers for System Speed
Dial buttons, which can be assigned to any digital or electronic telephone. For the number of
available system speed dial numbers, see “System Speed Dial” on Page 81.
Telephone Application Programming Interface (TAPI) Compatibility
The DK can interface with computer applications which conform to the Microsoft Windows TAPI
format. TSPI software, which allows the DK to communicate with TAPI applications, is bundled
with the RPCI in the form of a 3-1/2” IBM-compatible disk.
The TAPI connection is made with a customer-supplied RS-232 cable connected to a
communication port on a PC and through a DKT2000-series digital telephone with an installed
RPCI. The PC must be able to run Microsoft Windows software.
Timed Reminders
Five separate “reminders” (i.e., a tone which sounds at a preset time) can be set at any telephone to
ring only once or at the same time daily.
Toll Restriction Override Code Revision
Privileged digital telephone stations can change Toll Restriction Override Codes.
User Programmable Feature Buttons
This feature enables digital and electronic telephone users to program their personal Speed Dial
buttons with codes to access features and/or dial telephone number. As many as 20 digits and
button functions—such as Hold, [PDN] access, and Conference/Transfer (2 digits each)—can be
stored. More than one feature can be linked under one button to allow functions like placing a line
on hold and accessing the Page system with the touch of one button.
Features
Station Features
100 Strata DK General Description 5/99
Table 35 Station Features by Station Type
Feature DKT DKT2001 Digital
Wireless Cordless EKT1ST & Analog
Wireless Standard
Feature
Account Code Button X X X X X
Account Code Revision X X X X
Add-on Module (DKT2000-series only) X
ANI/Caller ID X2XX
2
Alert Signal Button X X X
Automatic Busy Redial (ABR) X X X X X X3
Automatic Callback (ACB) X X X X X X X
Automatic Hold X X X X X
Automatic Line Selection X X X X X X
Background Music with Station Control 3XX X X
Busy Override (receive) X X X X X
Receive over Handset/Headset X X X X X
Busy Station Transfer/Busy Station Ringing X X X X X X X
Call Forward: X
All Calls X X X X X X X
Busy X X X X X X X
No Answer X X X X X X X
Busy/No Answer X X X X X X X
Fixed X X X X X X
External Call X X X X X X X
Call Park Orbits: X
Park/Page X X X X X X X
Auto Park/Page X2X 2X
Orbit Lists X2X 2X
Call Pickup: X
Night Bell X X X X X X
Tenant Ringing Lines (4-Groups) X X X X X X X
Station Groups (20-Groups, All Call Types) X X X X X X X
Any Ringing Line X X X X X X X
Directed Station (All Call Types) X X X X X X X
Held CO Lines (Selectively) X X X X X X X
Door Phone X X X X X X X
Parked Call X X X X X X X
External Page X X X X X X X
Call Transfer with Camp-on X X X X X X X
Call Transfer Immediate X
Call Transfer Recall X X X X X X X
Centrex/PBX Compatible X X X X X X X
CO/Centrex Feature Buttons X X X X X
Conferencing X X X X X X X
Continuous DTMF Tones X X X
Data Call Button 4X
Direct Station Selection Buttons X X X
Direct Station Selection Console Features X X X
Directory Number Buttons X X X X X
DISA Security Code Revision X X X
Distinctive Ringing - CO vs. Station X X X X X
Distinctive Ringing - Station (for CO calls) X X X X X
DKT – Digital Telephone
EKT – Electronic Telephone
ST – Standard Telephone
Features
Station Features
Strata DK General Description 5/99 101
Do Not Disturb (DND) X X X X
Do Not Disturb Override (receive) X X X X X
DP/DTMF Mode Change X X X X
Exclusive Hold X X X X X
Executive Override X X X X X X X
Feature Prompting with Soft Keys X
“Flash” Ability X X X X X X X
Flexible Buttons X X X X
Handsfree Answerback X X X
Headset Interface 3XXXX
Headset Receiver Volume Control 3XXX X
Hearing Aid Compatible X X X X X X
LED - Distinctive Indications X X X X
LED - Dual Colors X X
Liquid Crystal Display X X X X
Message Waiting Indication X X X X X X3X
Multiple Message Waiting X X X X X X
Microphone Control Button (fixed) X X X
Microphone Sensitivity Control by User X
Modem Button X X
Modular Handset and Line Cords X X X X
Modular Headset\Loud Ringing Bell Interface X X
Night Lock X X X
Night Transfer X X X
Off-hook Call Announce - Handset Mode X X5XX X
Off-hook Call Announce - Speaker Mode X X
Off-premise Station X
On-hook Dialing X X X
Page Access X X X X X X
PC Interface - Telephone Application Program
Interface (TAPI) Compatibility X
Phantom Message Waiting Indication X X X X
Pooled Line Buttons X X X X
Private CO Lines X X X X X
Push-button Dialing X X X X X X
Release Button X X X X
Release/Answer Button X X X X
Remote Retrieval of Held/Parked Calls X X X X X X X
Repeat Last Number Dialed X X X X X X
Ringing Line Preference X X X X X
Saved Number Redial X X X X
Speed Dial Buttons X X X
Timed Reminders X X X X
Toll Restriction Override Code Revision X X X X
Two CO Line Conference X X X X X X6X
User Name Display X X X X X
User Programmable Feature Buttons X X X X
1. Does not apply to DK14.
2. For LCD EKTs and DKTs.
3. Standard on DK424; optional on DK14 and DK40i.
4. May require customer-supplied hardware.
5. The DKT2001 can receive handset OCA, but cannot respond (no button).
6. Not applicable on DK14 or DK40i. DK424 requires software Release 3.2 or higher.
Table 35 Station Features by Station Type
(continued)
Feature DKT DKT2001 Digital
Wireless Cordless EKT1ST & Analog
Wireless Standard
Feature
Features
PC Attendant Console Features
102 Strata DK General Description 5/99
PC Attendant Console Features
The Strata DK PC Attendant Console (DK-PCATT) offers many new features, not available on the
older model DK Attendant Console (see Table 36 on Page 108). Additionally, it offers most of the
features available on digital telephones and the older DK Attendant Console. Most features can be
operated either from the DK-PCATT-KB keyboard or from a PC mouse.
Note For minimum requirements and an illustration of the DK-PCATT screen, see “PC
Attendant Console (DK-PCATT)” on Page 57.
The following describes specific console features that are available to DK-PCATT users.
Answer Button
Automatically answers the next ringing call based upon the system defined priority (incoming CO,
recall, transferred, etc.—see Answer Priority). Multiple ringing calls are automatically queued to
the $QVZHU button. The system can prioritize on a first-in first-out (FIFO) basis, or according to
the priority defined by the user with the Answer Priority feature.
Answer Priority
Enables the $QVZHU button to answer multiple ringing calls in a priority sequence. The priority
sequence is programmable except for emergency calls, which are always the highest priority. The
program default priority sequence is (highest to lowest) Emergency Call, Park Orbit Recall,
Transfer Recall, Hold Recall, Transferred to “O” Call, Incoming CO Line Call, Internal “O”
Operator Call, Internal to Operator Directory Number [DN] Call.
Answer Prompting
When an incoming call rings the console, the screen displays can display prompts for answering
the various CO line or DNIS call. These prompts are stored from the console.
Attendant Conference Setup
This enables the Attendant to set up a conference call with up to four members. Conference
members can be another console, station, or CO line user. The conference can be originated by the
Attendant or requested by a station user or outside party.
Auto Day/Night Mode Switching
The DK-PCATT can automatically switch the Strata DK between Day, Day2, and Night modes,
according to the time of day and day of week. Parameters are programmed from the attendant
console. With automatic mode switching, the 1LJKW7UDQVIHU button does not have to be
pressed. Automatic mode switching is only available with a DK-PCATT and is not a standard
system feature of the Strata DK.
Auto Dialing
When Auto Dial is on, the DK-PCATT can search for names and numbers in the directory, and
then automatically dial the number. If Auto Dial is off or no match is found, the Attendant can use
the directory and press a button to call a party or enter a number to be dialed.
Busy Lamp Field (BLF) Display
The console screen shows station status (busy/idle), so the Attendant can see who is busy. BLF
data displays in the directory area of the screen, either with or without station names.
Features
PC Attendant Console Features
Strata DK General Description 5/99 103
Call Waiting Count
The number of calls waiting to be answered in the attendant console answer queue is displayed and
constantly updated.
Color CRT Display
Console text information is displayed on the monitor screen in full color. Various colors indicate
different status or conditions, making them more distinguishable to the Attendant.
Dial “O” For Attendant
Up to four attendant consoles can be installed per system. To call any available console, station
users dial O. To call a specific console, dial the specific console [DN].
Dial Outside Number For Station User
The Attendant can access a CO line and dial an outside destination number for a station user. To do
this, the Attendant must be in the talk state with a station user, an outside caller, or a caller on an
incoming Tie trunk.
Direct Station Selection (DSS)
The Attendant can make direct station calls or transfers by pressing a button, or pointing and
clicking the mouse button on the station name or number on the internal directory screen.
Directory Display and Dialing
The directory listing area of the screen can display both names and numbers of internal station
users. The Attendant can point and click on a name to automatically dial the number.
♦The Internal Directory displays the names, directory numbers, and station status (busy/idle) of
station users and ACD groups. This facilitates quick and easy call processing, primarily
transfer of incoming calls.
♦A scroll bar enables the Attendant to quickly scan all of the names in the directory listing.
DTMF Signaling from Dial Pad
The Attendant can press a button to send DTMF tones from the dial pad. DTMF tones are used to
signal external devices such as voice mail, auto attendants, answering machines, etc.
Emergency Calls
Emergency calls from internal stations that arrive at an attendant console receive higher priority
call treatment than other calls. Emergency calls display in the incoming call area of the screen. If
the call is placed on hold, hold time appears in red to highlight this call for quick retrieval.
Emergency Page
An attendant console equipped with an assigned (PHUJHQF\3DJH button can Page the All Call
Page group. The Page sounds over the speakers of all idle telephones in the All Call Page group,
but does not sound over the external paging speakers.
Features
PC Attendant Console Features
104 Strata DK General Description 5/99
Feature On-Line Help
On-line Help provides feature instructions at the touch of a button or a click of the mouse. It
functions the same as other Windows PC applications. On-line Help provides more details than the
Soft Key feature prompts. For even more detailed explanations and instructions, refer to the Strata
DK PC Attendant Console User Guide.
Feature Prompting with Soft Keys
Feature Prompting with Soft Keys provides access to various console features. On-screen
instructions and Soft Key functions change according to the state of the Attendant Console.
Examples are:
♦Sending a message waiting indication to a station
♦Breaking into an ongoing conversation
♦Performing a transfer, conference, or voice page
Flexible Programmable Buttons
There are 16 flexible buttons on the display screen which can be programmed with a variety of
feature assignments, trunk access, or as Incoming Call (In) buttons.
Headset Operation
In addition to the handset, the console can be used with a headset. The headset can be plugged into
the RATI attendant console interface unit.
Hold Button
When the Hold button is selected, the current call is placed on hold. If the call is not answered
within a preprogrammed time period, the Attendant is reminded by an on-screen ring indicator.
Hold Timer Display
The timer information screen shows the amount of time each call has been on hold. This serves as
a reminder for the Attendant, ensuring that the held calls will not be ignored or forgotten. Also, the
color indicates whether the call is on Hard Hold, Consultation Hold, Supervised Hold, or
Emergency Call Hold.
Incoming Call Identification
This feature enables selective answering of all categories of calls to the Attendant (internal [DN],
transferred, park recall, hold recall, transfer recall, emergency, operator, and incoming CO for all
16 CO line groups). The Attendant can select and answer calls in the incoming call display area,
instead of using the Answer button. Thus, the Attendant can override the FIFO or priority order
established by the Answer button and the Answer Priority feature.
Incoming Call Statistics
The DK-PCATT collects incoming call statistics, such as the number of calls received per hour,
total talk time (in seconds) per hour, total incoming talk time per hour, total waiting time (in
seconds) in queue per hour, and the maximum number of calls in queue each 15-minute interval.
The data is stored on disk for display or printing. Today’s data can be displayed on screen and the
previous day’s data can be printed.
Features
PC Attendant Console Features
Strata DK General Description 5/99 105
Interposition Call Transfer
This feature allows calls to be transferred from one attendant console to another.
Join Button
Allows the Attendant to connect an incoming call with an outside party on hold or an internal
station. Rather than transferring the call, the Attendant presses the Join button to create a
temporary conference from which the Attendant can drop out.
Keyboard or Mouse Operation
Most of DK-PCATT functions can be operated by clicking a mouse on screen buttons or by
pressing the equivalent keyboard buttons. Attendants can choose the easiest method for them.
Load Sharing
In a multiple-console environment, incoming calls are distributed among the available consoles
(up to four) on a call-by-call rotation basis, which increases efficiency and call coverage
flexibility.
Loop Hold Display
This display lists the calls on hold and the hold time. If a call is not answered within a
preprogrammed time, it recalls with a ring indicator and appears on the Incoming Call display.
The console can be set for Supervised loop operation, which keeps the call in the Loop display
even after it’s transferred, enabling the Attendant to monitor it or re-enter the conversation. With
release loop operation, the held call appears briefly in the Loop display area until it is answered by
the station receiving the transferred call. Then it disappears from display.
The Attendant can type a note, such as who the call is for, the caller’s name, etc., while still
connected to the call. This note is associated with the call so that Attendant can provide personal
attention to each caller.
Message Center
The Attendant can use the DK-PCATT keyboard to enter a message into the message database.
When a message is entered, the station’s message light is automatically lit. At a later point, the
station user can press 0VJ and call the Attendant. If the station is an LCD phone, the display will
show that the Attendant called. Once the station user is connected with the Attendant, the
Attendant can display a list of messages for that caller and read them back.
Multi-tasking
The Strata DK-PCATT software runs as a standard Windows application. Toshiba recommends
using a dedicated PC for the console to maximize response time and efficiency. However, other
applications can be run simultaneously on the same PC, enabling the Attendant to use the PC for
multi-tasking purposes.
When call traffic is light, the PC can toggle from the Attendant Console mode to another
application. If a call is received while in another application, the PC can immediately switch back
to Attendant Console mode to handle the ringing call. The DK-PCATT can be set to toggle
automatically (Auto Activate on) or manually.
Features
PC Attendant Console Features
106 Strata DK General Description 5/99
Name or Number Dialing
The DK-PCATT directory can include individuals who do not have stations within the system.
This accommodates personnel located off-site (in other facilities, working at home, etc.). The
directory can include information on reaching these people. It also provides an area for entering
messages for them.
The Attendant can use the directory to select parties by name, number, or department. If Auto Dial
is on, a matching name or number invokes automatic calling or transferring. A department list
shows the names and/or numbers of people within a department.
Overflow
Calls that have been waiting in the ringing queue too long will be re-routed to another console,
station, or answering device. This feature is controlled by the overflow timer, and can be manually
activated by the Attendant during high-traffic conditions via the 2YHUIORZ button.
Override
There are three different ways to override calls:
♦Busy Override lets the Attendant send a tone to a busy station to signal a call is waiting.
♦DND Override lets the Attendant send a tone to an idle station in the DND mode to indicate
that an important call is coming in.
♦Executive Override lets the Attendant enter an established conversation.
Position Busy Mode
This feature places the console in Unattended mode. It should only be used when multiple
attendant consoles are sharing the load of incoming calls.
When one console is in Position Busy Mode, new calls are sent to other console(s). Held and
unanswered transferred calls will continue to recall to the console that processed them. When the
last console in the Attendant group is placed in Position Busy mode, the entire group is considered
Unattended. Consoles must set Call Forward and/or Night Transfer in order for calls to be rerouted
to another destination, such as Night Bell, alternate answer position, etc.
Release Button
This button releases the console from any connection by transferring (or extending) the call and
placing the console in the idle state.
Speed Dial Calling
Speed dial numbers and names can be used for calling or transferring. When a speed dial name or
location number is entered on the “active keyboard,” speed dial information displays. Up to 40
station speed dial numbers and 100 system speed dial numbers (for RCTUB, RCTUC/D), or 800
system speed dial numbers for RCTUE/F can be stored in the speed dial list.
From the console, the Attendant enters the names for the speed dial numbers; these names can be
different from those entered in the system records, so the Attendant can customize them.
Features
PC Attendant Console Features
Strata DK General Description 5/99 107
Split/Switch Button
The Split/Switch button is used to alternate between source and destination parties; the two
parties are kept separate. This feature can only be used during a three-way conference (console,
source and destination party). The parties can be connected on outside lines only, either on [DN]
lines only, or on a combination of outside and [DN] lines. The Split feature does not work on four-
party conference calls.
Three-way Calling
Three-way Calling enables an Attendant to talk simultaneously with the source and destination
parties. This feature requires a connection with a station user or outside caller, including a party on
Consultation Hold.
Through Dialing
This feature lets an Attendant provide outgoing call privileges to a restricted station user. On a
call-by-call basis, the Attendant can access otherwise denied trunks and then pass the dial tone to
the station user. The station user can then complete the call dialing procedure. Through Dialing can
also be applied to callers using DISA and incoming Tie trunks.
Transfer Direct to Voice Mail
A button on the DK PC-ATT enables direct transfer of outside callers to a station user’s voice
mailbox. This is more efficient than directing a call to a busy station which, if call forward was set
to voice mail, would then forward. This is also helpful when the Attendant knows a station user is
unavailable. This feature is also useful the called party does not own a station set, but they do have
a voice mailbox. The Attendant can release the call when voice mail answers.
Trunk Group Busy Indication
This feature shows the trunk groups and whether all members of the group are busy. Trunk groups
with no members are always shown busy.
Trunk Group Control
Outgoing CO line groups can be restricted on an as-needed basis. This feature also restricts
outgoing calls on two-way CO line groups. This enables the Attendant to control outgoing traffic
on heavily-used line groups during busy hours.
Volume Control
The Vol Up and Vol Dn buttons adjust the console’s ringing and handset/headset volumes.
Windows PC Operation
The Strata DK PC-ATT software runs on the computer as an application within Windows. Toshiba
recommends using a dedicated PC for the console; however, other applications can run
simultaneously on the same PC. The PC can toggle between Attendant Console mode and other
applications.
The console commands are similar to other Windows applications, making training easier for
previous Windows users. Either a mouse or keyboard can be used for console operation.
Features
PC Attendant Console Features
108 Strata DK General Description 5/99
Table 36 PC Attendant Console Feature List
Attendant Console Features
Answer Button
Answer Priority
Answer Prompting by CO Line or DNIS
Attendant Conference Setup
Auto Day/Night Mode Switching
Auto Dialing
Busy Lamp Field (BLF) Display
Call Waiting Count
Color CRT Display
Dial “0” For Attendant
Dial Outside Number for Station User
Direct Station Selection (DSS)
Directory Display and Dialing Internal [DN]
DTMF Signaling from Dial Pad (Tone Button)
Emergency Calls
Emergency Page
Feature On-Line Help
Feature Prompting with Soft Keys
Flexible Programmable Buttons
Headset Operation1
Hold Button
Hold Timer Display
Incoming Call Identification
Incoming Call Statistics
Interposition Call Transfer
Join Button
Keyboard or Mouse Operation
Load Sharing
Loop Hold Display
Message Center
Multi-tasking
Name/Number Dialing
Overflow
Override
Position Busy Mode
Release Button
Speed Dial Calling - Outgoing Speed Dialing
Split/Switch Button
Three-way Calling
Through Dialing
Transfer Direct to Voice Mailbox
Trunk Group Busy Indication
Trunk Group Control
Volume Control
Windows PC Operation
Station Features Performed by the Attendant Console
Account Code Calls
Alarm Set
ANI/Caller ID Display1
Automatic Callback
Automatic Hold
Automatic Recall
Parked Calls
Held Calls
Transferred Calls
Background Music Control
Call Forward
Call Park
♦Call Park Orbits
♦Auto Park/Page
♦Call Pickup
Call Transfer with Camp-On
Conferencing
Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS) Display
Directory Number User Name/Number Display
DISA Security Code Revision
Door Lock Control
Door Phone Operation
DTMF Tone Signaling from Dial pad
Last Number Redial
Message Waiting
Night Transfer
Paging
♦External Speakers1
♦Telephone Speakers
Privacy Release
Saved Number Redial
User Programmable Feature Buttons
1. Some feature implementation may require additional auxiliary equipment.
Strata DK General Description 5/99 109
Appendix
This appendix contains reference information for the DK14, DK40i and DK424 systems and
compatible stations. The information here applies to all systems unless noted otherwise.
The tables in this appendix include:
♦Network Requirements
♦Customer-supplied Peripherals and Interfaces
♦Station Specifications, which includes these tables:
♦Station Loop Requirements
♦Station Dimensions
♦System Tones
♦Subassemblies for Toshiba Telephones
♦Data Interface Specifications
Appendix
Network Requirements
110 Strata DK General Description 5/99
Network Requirements
Table 37 PCB Network Requirements
PCB/Interface Facility Interface Code Network Jack Ringer
Equivalence Universal Service
Order Code
QSTU2/PESU/RSTU2/
KSTU2/RDSU1
(Off-premises Station)
1. Only PESU circuits 1 and 2, and RDSU circuits 1~4 provide Off-premises Station (OPS) capability. PESU must use OL13A or
equivalent line conditioning for OPS connection. RDSU must use OL13A or OL13B if providing –24 volt loop voltage. If
equipped with the –48 volt loop option PCB (R48S), OL13A, OL13B, or OL13C may be used for OPS connection.
OL13A (PESU)
OL13B (QSTU2, RSTU2, –24V)
OL13C (RSTU2, RDSU with R48S-
48V)
RJ21X N/A 9.0F
QCDU2/RCOU/RCOS, TCOU
(loop start line) 02LS2
RJ11C/RJ21X
(QCDU2 only)
RJ14C/RJ21X
(all others)
0.3B N/A
RDDU, TDDU 02RV2-T RJ14C/RJ21X 0.0B AS.2
REMU type 1 or type 2
TL11M, 2-wire
TL31M, 4-wire
TL12M, type 2, 2-wire
TL32M, type 2, 4-wire
RJ2EX
RJ2GX
RJ2FX
RJ2HX
Not Available
(N/A) 9.0F
RGLU2 (ground or loop start
line)
02GS2 (ground)
02LS2 (loop) RJ14C/RJ1CX 0.3B N/A
RDTU (DS-1/T1)2
2. When ordering DS-1/T1 circuits, six items must be specified:
●The number of channels per T1 circuit, fractional increments are normally 8, 12, or 16 channels, full service is 24 channels.
Unused channels must be bit-stuffed.
●Type of CO line assigned to each channel: Loop Start, Ground Start, Tie (Wink or Immediate Start), DID (Wink or
Immediate).
●Frame Format Type: Super Frame (SF) or Extended Super Frame (ESF). The T1 provider normally specifies the Frame
Format to be used, either is adequate for DK424 CO digital voice lines. ESF provides a higher level of performance
monitoring, but requires trained personnel and the ESF CSU normally costs more than an SF only CSU.
●Line Code Type: Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI) or Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution (B8ZS). The T1 provider normally
specified the Line Code to be used, either is adequate for DK424 T1 CO digital voice lines.
●The customer may have to provide the Channel Service Unit (CSU) to interface the DK424 T1 circuit to the Telco T1 circuit.
(CSUs are a Telco requirement.)
●RDTU Network Channel Interface Codes: 04DU9-BN, 04DU9-DNZZ, 04DU9-1SN, 04DU9-1KN, 04DU9-1ZN.
(See last bullet note on Note 2 below.) RJ48C/RJ48X/
RJ48M N/A 6.0P
RCIU2/RCIS (Caller ID) N/A RJ21X/RJ14C 0.3B N/A
RPTU (PRI)3
3. For information on how to order ISDN PRI/BRI circuits, you should refer to the Toshiba ISDN Training CBT. ISDN circuits
may require a customer-provided CSU for PRI and/or Terminal Adapter or Network Terminal units for BRI. In U.S. CSU/TAs
must be UL-listed in the U.S. In Canada, they must be CSA certified.
04DU9-1SN RJ48C/RJ48M N/A
6.0P
RBSU (S/T, BRI)302IS5 RJ48C/RJ48X N/A
RBUU/RBUS (U, BRI)302IS5 RJ48C/RJ48X N/A
RCMU/RCMS (CAMA) 02RV2-O RJ11C/RJ21-X N/A
TBSU 021S5 RJ48C/RJ48X N/A 6.0P
Appendix
Customer-supplied Peripherals and Interfaces
Strata DK General Description 5/99 111
Customer-supplied Peripherals and Interfaces
The Strata DK supports many customer-supplied peripheral devices, a number of which are listed
in Table 38 (with the supporting PCB or data interface unit noted). For a depiction of these
devices, see Figure 16 on Page 52.
Table 38 Customer-supplied Peripherals and Interfaces
Peripheral Interface
Auto Attendant (built-in) digital
announcement devices QSTU2, KSTU, RSTU2, RDSU, or PESU
Alternate BGM interface QRCU3, QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2, RDSU, PEKU, or PESU
Caller ID KSTU2, WSIU, TCIU2, TCOU, RSIU, RCIU/RCIS, RGLU, RCOU, RCOS,
PIOU
Dictation equipment QSTU2, RSTU2, RDSU, or PESU
DTMF An optional QRCU3, K5RCU, K5RCU2 or RRCS tone receiver is required if
a DTMF signalling peripheral is connected to QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2,
RDSU, or PESU; or if Tie, DID or DISA lines are used.
External page equipment PIOU, PIOUS, PEPU, DK14 KSU or DK40i Base KSU
External remote maintenance modem WSIU, TSIU, PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU or RSIU
Fax machines QSTU2, RSTU2, RDSU, or PESU
Local maintenance terminal WSIU, TSIU, PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU, or RSIU
Mainframe computers PDIU-DS
Modems WSIU, TSIU, RSTU2, RDSU, KSTU2, QSTU2, PESU, or PDIU-DS
Personal computers RPCI or PDIU-DS
Radio paging equipment QSTU, KSTU, RSTU2, RDSU, or PESU
Remote maintenance (built-in) RSIU with RMDS, PIOU or PIOUS with IMDU
Standard telephones QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2, RDSU, or PESU
Standard telephone with Message
Waiting neon lamp RSTU2
SMDR printer/call accounting device
or SMDI WSIU, TSIU, PIOU, PIOUS, RSIU, RSIS
Voice mail device voice ports QSTU2, KSTU2, RSTU2, RDSU, PESU or Stratagy DK
ISDN Terminal Adaptors/
Terminal Equipment1
1. ISDN Terminal Adaptors (TA) and Terminal Equipment (TE-1) are ISDN status devices, such as ISDN telephones, G-4 fax
machines, modem and video conference interfaces, etc.
RBSU/RBSS, RBUU/RBUS
Appendix
Station Specifications
112 Strata DK General Description 5/99
Station Specifications
Table 39 Station Loop Requirements
Device No. of Wire Pairs
(24 AWG twisted pair)
Max. Loop
Resistance
(includes device)
Max. Distance
(KSU/Cabinet to Device)
Digital telephones1
DDSS consoles
PDIU-DS
DDCB
1. Two-pair wiring or optional telephone power supply is required to achieve maximum range with DADM,
OCA, Headset, or DIU.
1-pair
40 ohms 1000 ft. (303 m)
Attendant Console (DK424
only) 2-pair
HDCB
Electronic telephones 2-pair; 3-pair for OCA
RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI2 Shares digital telephone
wire-pair1
DADM
RATI (DK424 only) 1- or 2-pair
HDSS consoles 2-pair 20 ohms 500 ft. (152 m)
Standard telephones, voice
mail, AA, etc. 1-pair
300 ohms Approx. 3000 ft. (909 m) with
150 ohm device.2
2. See manufacturer’s product specifications for exact resistance of device.
600 ohms Approx. 9000 ft. (2727 m)
with 150 ohm device.2
1,200 ohms Approx. 21000 ft. (6363 m)
with 150 ohm device.2
BRI-TE1 (S or U type)3
3. ISDN station devices (telephones, fax machines, modems, etc.) are classified as Terminal Equipment (TE-1)
or Terminal Adapters (TAs). There are generally two models available for each particular device: S-type or
U-type.
4-pair modular 100 ohms 1650 ft.
BRI-TA (S or U type)31650 ft.
Appendix
Station Specifications
Strata DK General Description 5/99 113
Table 40 Station Dimensions
Device Height Width Depth
10-button Digital Telephone with Handsfree Answerback (DKT2010-H) 3.3 inches
(85 mm)17.8 inches
(199 mm)
9.0 inches
(230 mm)
10-button Digital Telephone with Speakerphone and Liquid Crystal
Display (DKT2010-SD)
3.8 inches
(97 mm)17.8 inches
(199 mm)
9.0 inches
(230 mm)
20-button Digital Telephone with Speakerphone (DKT2020-S) 3.3 inches
(85 mm)17.8 inches
(199 mm)
9.0 inches
(230 mm
20-button Digital Telephone with Speakerphone and Liquid Crystal
Display (DKT2020-SD)
3.8 inches
(97 mm)
7.8 inches
(199 mm)
9.0 inches
(230 mm)
Digital Single Line Telephone (DKT2001) 3.8 inches
(97 mm)15.4 inches
(137 mm)
9.0 inches
(230 mm)
Add-on Module (DADM) 3.3 inches
(85 mm)
2.8 inches
(71 mm)
9.0 inches
(229 mm)
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console 3.3 inches
(85 mm)
7.8 inches
(199 mm)
9.0 inches
(230 mm)
Stand-alone Data Interface Unit (PDIU-DS) 1.5 inches
(38 mm)
4.8 inches
(122 mm)
7.3 inches
(185 mm)
External Speaker Amplifier (HESB) 10.3 inches
(263 mm)
10.3 inches
(263 mm)
5.0 inches
(128 mm)
Door Phone/Lock Control Unit (DDCB) 4.6 inches
(117 mm)
5.5 inches
(140 mm)
1.5 inches
(38 mm)
Door Phone (MDFB) 5.5 inches
(140 mm)
3.1 inches
(79 mm)
1.3 inches
(33 mm)
Attendant Console Interface (RATI) (DK424 only) 1.5 inches
(38 mm)
4.8 inches
(122 mm)
7.3 inches
(185 mm)
Handset with Handset Cradle (RATHC) (DK424 only) 2.8 inches
(70 mm)
2.8 inches
(70 mm)
9.5 inches
(241 mm)
Strata AirLink Wireless Telephone Handset 6.0 inches
(152 mm)
2.3 inches
(58 mm)
1.0 inches
(25 mm)
Digital Cordless Telephone (DKT2004-CT) Height Width Depth
Base (without antenna) 3.7 inches
(95 mm)
5.0 inches
(128 mm)
7.5 inches
(190 mm)
Handset (with antenna) 1.1 inches
(27 mm)
2.2 inches
(55 mm)
8.3 inches
(210 mm)
Base with handset (with antennas) 8.7 inches
(221 mm)
5.4 inches
(137 mm)
8.8 inches
(223 mm)
1. 4.1 inches (105 mm) with handset.
Appendix
Station Specifications
114 Strata DK General Description 5/99
Table 41 System Tones
CO Line
Idle digital and electronic
telephones
Ring Tone Options 1 2 3 All tones are interrupted
at 10 Hz
1-sec. ON – 3 sec. OFF
Direct Ring Call 500/640 Hz 1200/1500 Hz 800/1000 Hz
Ring Transfer Call 540/760 Hz 1300/1780 Hz 860/1180 Hz
Busy station (queuing) to DKT/EKT 2400 Hz, interrupted at 10 Hz, 1 sec. ON – 3 sec. OFF
(twice or continuous 4 sec. apart)
Busy station transfer (camp-on) to DKT/EKT 2400 Hz, interrupted at 10 Hz, one-time 1 sec. tone burst
(twice or continuous 4 sec. apart)
Standard telephone or voice mail port 20 Hz
Normal ring option 1 sec. ON – 3 sec. OFF
Camp-on tone options to standard telephone No tone or two 160 msec. bursts of 1209 Hz 160 msec. apart, twice, 3 sec.
apart
Distinctive ring option (standard telephone) 0.4 sec. ON – 0.2 sec. OFF – 0.4 sec. ON – 3 sec. OFF
Tie or DISA line calls
To busy station 480/620 Hz, 0.50 sec. ON – 0.50 sec. OFF
Internal [DN] Calls (except for DKT-2004-CT)
Tone first (EKT/DKT ring signal) 500 Hz, 1 sec. ON – 3 sec. OFF (twice or continuous)
Door phone A & C 870 Hz, 1 sec./710 Hz, 0.5 sec. twice per ring (1 or 5 rings)
B 870 Hz, 0.5 sec./710 Hz, 0.5 sec. twice per ring (1 or 5 rings)
Alert Signal to idle telephone Six - 160 msec. burst of 350/440 Hz, twice 1 sec. apart
Alert Signal to busy telephone 2400 Hz, interrupted at 10 Hz, 1 sec. ON, twice, 1 sec. apart
Busy station transfer (camp-on) to DKT/EKT 2400 Hz, interrupted at 10 Hz, one-time 1 sec. tone burst
(twice or continuous 3 sec. apart)
Busy Override/DND Override 2400 Hz, 1 sec. ON – 3 sec. OFF (twice or continuous 3 sec. apart)
Dial Tone (internal) 350/440 Hz, continuous
Ringback Tone 440/480 Hz, 1 sec. ON – 3 sec. OFF (once: voice first; continuous: ring first)
Busy Tone 480/620 Hz, 0.5 sec. ON – 0.5 sec. OFF
Reorder Tone 480/620 Hz, 0.25 sec. ON – 0.25 sec. OFF
Do Not Disturb 480/620 Hz, 0.125 sec. ON – 0.125 sec. OFF
Voice Page Warning 500 Hz, 1 sec. ON (via DKT/EKT telephone speaker)
Speaker OCA Warning 500 Hz, 1 sec. ON only (via DKT/EKT telephone speaker)
Handset OCA Warning 350/440 Hz, 0.5 sec. (via DKT handset)
Executive/Privacy Override Warning 440 Hz, 1 sec. ON only (via handset or speaker)
Hold Recall 2400 Hz, interrupted at 10 Hz, 1 sec. ON – 1 sec. OFF
Standard telephone ringing 20 Hz, 1 sec. ON – 3 sec. OFF
Standard telephone Busy Override 160 msec. burst of 1209 Hz, twice, 3 sec. apart
Standard telephone Camp-on tone Two 160 msec. bursts of 1209 Hz, 160 msec. apart, twice, 3 sec. apart
Voice Mail Special Tones
Answer: DTMF “A”
80 or 160 msec., dual toneDisconnect: DTMF “D”
Recall: DTMF “B”
Special Confirmation Tones
Verified Account Code
confirmation tones (sent
only to the station that
enters the code, not to the
outside party)
Code valid 350/440 Hz, 0.5 sec. ON
Code not valid 350/440 Hz, 0.125 sec. ON – 0.125 sec. OFF – 0.125 sec. ON
Station option programming confirmation tones
(Call Forward, Timed Reminders, etc.) 350/440 Hz, 1 sec. ON
ACD
Supervisor Monitoring Tone 350/440 Hz, 0.5 sec. every 15 sec.
Queue Alarms Alarm 1 2400 Hz, interrupted at 10 Hz, 1 sec. ON – 0.5 sec. OFF
Alarm 2 2400 Hz, interrupted at 10 Hz, continuous
Appendix
Station Specifications
Strata DK General Description 5/99 115
Table 42 Subassemblies for Toshiba Telephones
Subassembly Host Telephone Function Capacity per
Telephone
DVSU1
1. Only one of the following subassembly types is allowed per telephone: DVSU, RPCI-DI or DADM.
2000- and 1000-series
Digital Telephones Provides interface for digital telephone to
receive Speaker OCA. Not required for
Handset/Headset OCA.
1
RPCI-DI12000-series Digital Telephones Provides two modes of operation:
TAPI PC application interface and Data
Calling interface.
HVSU2 6500-series
Electronic Telephone Provides interface for electronic telephone
to receive OCA.
HHEU 2000- and 1000-series Digital
Telephones. 6500- and 6005-
series Electronic Telephones
Provides interface for headset and Loud
Ringing Bell to telephone. Can be installed
with DVSU, RPCI-DI, or DADM.
DADM12000-series Digital Telephones Provides telephone with 20 (or 40 with two
DADMs) additional feature buttons for
DSS, System or Station Speed Dial, or CO
line appearances.
1 or 2
Appendix
Station Specifications
116 Strata DK General Description 5/99
Table 43 Data Interface Specifications
Item Specifications
Terminal or personal
computer interface
specification
RS-232C (EIA)
V.24/V.28 (CCITT)
TAPI compatible (RPCI-DI only)
Data transmission speed Up to 19.2 kbps, asynchronous
Flow control Half and full duplex, utilizing RTS/CTS/CD control leads
Automatic dialing Based on AT commands:
♦Data speed of AT command is 300, 600, 2300, 2400, 4800, or 9600
♦Data bit: 7 or 8 bits
♦Stop bit: 1 or 2 bits
♦Parity bit: even, odd, or no parity
Maximum distance: KSU to
DKT with integrated RPCI-
DI or stand-alone DIU
♦With system power supply; 1000 feet with 2-pair (24 AWG)
♦With battery back-up; 330 feet with 1-pair or 675 feet with 2-pair (24 AWG), or
1000 feet with external power to telephone
Number of wire pairs 1-pair or 2-pair (24 AWG)
LED indicators (stand-alone
DIU only) Power: lights when power is on
Ready: lights when DTE and DIU are ready
Connect: lights when DIU is in transmission or ringing mode
Automatic disconnect time-
out Forced hang up when RPCI-DI or PDIU does not detect data on SD or RD within
nine minutes.
LSI technology (RPCI-D1/
PDIU-DS only)
♦One-chip CPU with a clock frequency of 12.288 MHz
♦Memory: ROM, 16KB; RAM, 512KB
♦Ping-pong transmission: LSI with bearer transmission rate of 512kbps, 2B+D-
type link
Strata DK option
compatibility Digital telephones with integrated RPCI-DI:
♦No DVSU (Speaker Off-hook Call Announce only)
♦No Add-on Module
♦Compatible with associated DDSS console
♦Compatible with headset (HHEU)
♦Desktop or wall mount compatible
Cabling/connectors ♦RPCI-DI, PDIU-DS to DTE/DCE device: 9-wires, 50 feet maximum, 24AWG:
compatible with RJ-45, 8-wire modular cable and RJ-45 to DB25 RS-232
modular adaptors
♦Stand-alone DIU: RJ-11 modular connector
♦Integrated RPCI-DI: connected inside digital telephone
♦Stand-alone DIU jumper plugs enable straight wire connection to a DTE or
DCE device without null-modem cables or adaptors
Strata DK General Description 5/99 117
Glossary
Term Definition
AA Auto Attendant (built-in or external). This feature acts as an automatic operator that directs
incoming callers to stations by offering a menu of dialing prompts.
ABR Automatic Busy Redial.
ACB Automatic Callback.
ACD Automatic Call Distribution. Allows incoming calls to be distributed to a group of ACD agents.
The ACD Supervisor’s LCD telephone displays ACD Agent and Group information which
allows the Supervisor to monitor calls and assist agents.
ADM Add-on Module—
See DADM.
AMI Alternate Mark Inversion.
ANI Automatic Number Identification—Telephone number of the calling party is sent to the Strata
DK system over incoming DID or Tie lines. This feature is provided by some long distance
telephone service companies.
B-channel Used in ISDN. Data or voice information is transmitted on the B-channels of an ISDN line at
64kpbs. The B-channel refers to the frequency range of transmissions on a copper pair; it is a
logical, rather than physical channel. Also see BRI and PRI.
B8ZS Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution.
BGM Background Music—Allows customer-supplied music to be sent to telephone speakers and
external speakers.
BLF Busy Lamp Field.
BPS Bits Per Second—Unit of measure that refers to the transmission speed (baud rate) of
electronic signals. It is used when describing the Data Interface Unit and modem operation.
BRI Basic Rate Interface—ISDN line with 2B + 1D channel. BRI lines can have a U-interface with
RJ-11 jacks and single twisted pair wiring, or RJ-45 four pair S/T interface wiring. BRI is the a
smaller ISDN interface than PRI.
BSIA Base Station Interface Adapter–Interface between the Strata Airlink™ Wireless Telephone
Base Stations and the host telephone system.
CESID Caller’s Emergency Service Identification—Telephone number for specific station or station
location which is sent to the CAMA trunk.
CLASS Custom Local Area Signaling Services—Defines a number of features offered by local
telephone companies.
CLID or CND Calling Line Identification or Calling Number Delivery—Telephone number or name of the
calling party sent to the Strata DK system over incoming ground or loop start CO lines. This
feature is one of the “CLASS” features offered by some local telephone companies.
Glossary
CO ~ HDCB
118 Strata DK General Description 5/99
CO Central Office—The facility which houses switching equipment that provides telephone
service (CO lines, E & M Tie lines, DID lines, Centrex lines, etc.) for the immediate
geographical area.
CODECs Coder/Decoder—Semiconductors that allow the system to process analog-to-digital and
digital-to-analog conversions.
CSU Channel Service Unit. Required between the DK PRI interface and the PRI line provider
interface in most locations of the U.S.
CNIS Calling Number Identification Services—Caller ID for ISDN. CNIS is calling party information
for outgoing and incoming calls sent to the ISDN network.
DADM Digital Add-on-Module—Optional device that connects to 2000-series digital telephones to
provide the telephones with 20 flexible feature buttons that can be assigned individually for
Direct Station Selection, System and Personal Speed Dial, and CO line access.
D-channel Used in ISDN. This channel transmit call control information (out-of-band signaling) for B-
channels. The D-channel is a logical, not physical channel.
DDCB Digital Door Phone/Lock Control Unit—A peripheral hardware unit compatible with
designated digital telephone circuits that supports optional door phones (MDFBs) and
provides door lock control.
DDSS Digital Direct Station Selection Console—A device that helps facilitate the processing of a
heavy load of incoming calls. The DDSS connects only to designated digital telephone
circuits, and is associated with a digital telephone.
DH Distributed Hunt.
DID Line Direct Inward Dialing line—Allows external callers to dial directly to an internal number.
DIL Direct In Line—Refers to two-way, standard CO trunk lines that are assigned to a particular
extension or hunt group.
DISA Direct Inward System Access—Enables an outside party to access the Strata DK system
internal stations or outgoing CO lines without having to go through an operator or automated
attendant. An optional security code may be set to prevent unauthorized access to outgoing
CO lines for through system calling.
DKT Digital Key Telephone.
[DN] Directory Number.
DNIS Dialed Number Identification Service—Telephone number of called party is sent to the Strata
DK over incoming DID or Tie lines. This feature is provided by some long distance telephone
companies.
DSS Direct Station Selection—Enables a telephone user (as well as a DSS console and ADM
user) to call another station with the touch of a flexible feature button.
DTMF Dual-tone Multi-frequency—Push-button tone dialing.
DVSU A subassembly that equips a digital telephone with the capability to receive Speaker Off-hook
Call Announce (OCA) calls. DVSU is not required to receive Handset OCA (HS-OCA).
EKT Electronic Key Telephone.
ESF Extended Super Frame.
FIFO First-In, First-Out.
HDCB Electronic Door Phone/Lock Control Unit—A peripheral hardware unit compatible with
designated electronic telephone circuits that supports optional door phones (MDFBs) and
provides door lock control.
Term Definition
Glossary
HDSS ~ RAM
Strata DK General Description 5/99 119
HDSS Electronic Direct Station Selection Console—A device that helps facilitate the processing of a
heavy load of incoming calls. The HDSS console connects only to designated electronic
telephone circuits, and is associated with electronic telephones.
HESB External Speaker Box—A speaker/amplifier that can be configured with the system to provide
a variety of functions, such as a paging speaker and/or Background Music (BGM) speaker.
HHEU Headset/Loud Ringing Bell Interface—Subassembly that fits inside a digital telephone or a
6500-series electronic telephone to allow a headset or an external speaker box (HESB) to be
connected to the telephone.
ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network. ISDN service requires service subscription from a telco
with ISDN equipment. It allows digital information to be exchanged directly at each end of the
line, without the need to convert analog to digital signals. Connection speeds are faster and
audio quality is superior.
LATA Local Access and Transport Area.
LCD Liquid Crystal Display—The optional display on digital and electronic telephones that
displays calling information.
LCR Least Cost Routing.
LSI Large Scale Integration—Related to circuit design technology. Strata DK system printed
circuit boards (PCBs) use LSI circuit design.
MDF Main Distribution Frame—The wiring frame usually located in a phone closet.
MDFB Door Phone Box—A peripheral two-way speaker box option.
MOH Music-on-Hold—Customer-supplied music or announcements can be sent to parties on-hold
on CO lines or the intercom.
NFAS Non-facility Associated Signaling—provides the ability to create ISDN trunk groups beyond
the 23 channels available with a single Primary Rate Interface.
NT-1 Used in ISDN. Network Termination device that powers a U-interface ISDN line and enables
multiple S/T ISDN devices to connect to it. The NT-1 must be UL-listed (U.S.) or CSA-certified
(Canada).
OCA Off-hook Call Announce. There are two types: Handset OCA and Speaker OCA.
PBX Private Branch Exchange—Industry-standard term which refers to a telephone switch,
usually on-premises, which serves an individual company, and is connected to a public
telephone exchange through the Central Office (CO).
PCB Printed Circuit Board.
[PDN] Primary Directory Number.
PF Power Failure.
[PhDN] Phantom Directory Number.
PRI Primary Rate Interface—A trunk interface to the ISDN network, which enables multiple use of
channels for DID, Tie, FX, WATS, 800, etc. It supports multiple services and dynamic channel
allocation. PRI is the larger ISDN interface (via the RPTU) with 23B+D transmission format.
Channels are 64-kbps. Also see BRI.
PSAP Public Safety Answering Point—Used for E911 calls.
RAM Random Access Memory—Refers to the type of system memory that holds individual system
configuration and feature programming. RAM is read/write memory, and can be easily
revised in programming.
Term Definition
Glossary
ROM ~ U Interface
120 Strata DK General Description 5/99
ROM Read Only Memory—Refers to the type of system memory that holds static software that
comprises the mechanics of the features’ functions. ROM is only revised by Toshiba software
engineers.
[SDN] Secondary Directory Number.
SF Super Frame.
SLT Single-line Telephone.
SMDI Simplified Message Desk Interface—RS-232 link from PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU, RSIS, or RSIU
modular jack connected to a voice mail machine to provide Strata DK voice mail integration.
SMDR Station Message Detail Reporting.
SMIS Software Management Information System (SMIS).
S/T Interface Reference interface points (“S” or “T”) of an ISDN network. S/T interfaces are
RJ-45, 8-wire connection interfaces for ISDN equipment. An NT-1 is needed to network U-
type BRI lines to S/T type interfaces.
TAPI Telephone Application Programming Interface.
TA Terminal Adapter or ISDN modem that converts PC and other types of protocol into a signal
that works with ISDN. Generally, TAs support RJ-11 voice ports and RS-232C or V.35 or
V.449 data interfaces.
TE Terminal Equipment. This refers to devices using ISDN service (telephones, faxes,
computers, etc.). TE1 supports ISDN formats with S/T or U-type interfaces.
TSPI Telephony Service Provider Interface.
U Interface A single twisted pair of copper wire on an RJ-11 jack. The wiring is identical to POTS, with
different signaling. Only one U-interface device can be attached per line.
Term Definition
Strata DK General Description 5/99 121
Index
Symbols
[DN], 95
[PDN], 77, 88
[PhDN], 77
[SDN], 77
Numerics
48v loop voltage, 37
A
AA, 12, 62
abandoned call numbers, 61
ABR, 90
ACB, 90
account code button, 90
account codes, 61
ACD, 62
add-on modules, 90
capacities, 89
administration software, 83
alarm sensor, 62
alert signal button, 90, 100
alternate answer point, 62
amplified conference, 88
interface, 62
ANI, 63, 88
ANI/caller ID, 100
answer
button, 102
priority, 102
prompting, 102
attendant console (see PC attendant console)
auto attendant, 62
DK14 feature key, 4
DK40i feature key, 12
DK424 feature key, 21
simultaneous announcements, 88
auto day/night mode switching, 102
auto dialing, 102
automatic
busy redial, 90
call distribution, 62
callback, 90
hold, 90
line selection, 91
number identification, 63
release from hold, 64
B
background music, 64
with station control, 91
base cabinet, 19
basic rate interface (see BRI, see also ISDN)
BGM, 64, 91
BRI, 39, 40, 40, 73
busy lamp field display, 102
busy override, 91
busy station transfer/busy station ringing, 91
C
cabling, 60
call forwarding
all calls, 91
busy, 92
busy/no answer, 92
external call, 92
fixed, 92
no answer, 92
call park orbits, 88
auto park, 93
park and page, 92
call pickup, 93, 100
call transfer
immediate, 93
recall, 94
unrestricted to DNS, 85
with camp-on, 93
call waiting count, 103
Index
D ~ D
122 Strata DK General Description 5/99
caller ID, 12, 65, 88
interface unit, 37
lines (see also BRI, PRI lines)
calling number identification services, 75
CAMA trunk, 40
centrex ringing repeat, 65
centrex/PBX
compatible, 65
features, 94
CNIS, 75
abandoned call numbers, 88
CO line, 9
capacities, 89
groups, 88
CO line/digital telephone interface, 36
CO private lines, 98
color CRT display, 103
common control units, 20
computer telephony integration (CTI), 66
conferencing, 67, 88, 94
connectors, 60
continuous DTMF tone, 94
cordless digital telephone, 54, 89, 100
credit card calling, 67
D
DADM, 53, 90
data call button, 94
data switching, 67
day/night modes, 67
DDCB, 59
DDSS, 58, 94
delayed ringing, 67
DH, 82, 88
diagnostics and troubleshooting
system, 18, 33
dial “o” for attendant, 103
dial outside number for station user, 103
dialed number identification service, 68
DID, 38, 68
lines, 89
digital
add-on module, 53
single line telephone (see DKT2001)
telephones, 48
features, 90, 100
interface unit, 35
system capacities, 89
upgrade options, 53
digital/standard telephone interface unit, 35
direct inward dialing
interface unit, 38
lines, 68
direct inward system access, 69
direct station selection, 103
button, 94
console, 58, 94
directory
display and dialing, 103
number buttons, 95
DISA, 69
security code revision, 95
distinctive
CO line/directory number ringing, 69
LED color indications, 95
station ringing, 95
distributed hunt, 82, 88
DK14, 1
base KSUarchitecture, 2
digital telephone circuits, 2
features, 61
functional block diagram, 6
maintenance and programming, 8
power failure interface, 4
power supply, 4
stations and peripherals, 47
system technology, 7
typical line configurations, 5
DK40i, 9
base KSU
architecture, 11
caller ID, 12
CO line circuits, 11
digital telephone circuits, 11
expansion KSUarchitecture, 14
features, 61
functional block diagram, 16
interface PCB options, 44
line configurations, 14
maintenance and programming, 17
power failure interface, 14
power supply, 13
stations and peripherals, 47
system technology, 17
DK424, 19, 109
architecture, 19
features, 61
floor mount hardware, 28
functional block diagram, 29
interface PCB options, 45
Index
E ~ I
Strata DK General Description 5/99 123
maintenance and programming, 32
maximum line capacities, 22
PCBsubassemblies, 21
peripherals, 52
power requirements, 26
printed circuit boards, 21
release 3.2, 101
release 4.0, 64, 68, 69, 73, 83, 84
stations and peripherals, 47
system technology, 32
DKAdmin, 8, 17, 32, 83
DK-PCATT, 57
DKT2001, 49, 100
DKT2004-CT, 54, 89
DNIS, 68, 88
do not disturb, 95
override, 95
door locks, 89
door phones, 59, 69, 89
lock control unit, 59
DP/DTMF mode change, 95
DSS, 94, 103
DTMF
back tone, 70
dial pulse CO line compatible, 70
receiver subassembly, 21
signal time, 70
signaling from dial pad, 103
DTMF/ABR tone detection receiver, 12
DVSU, 54
E
E&M tie line unit, 38
E911 cama trunk
interface unit (RMCU), 40
subassembly (RCMS), 40
E911 CAMA trunk, 40
electronic telephone
features, 90, 100
interface unit, 36
system capacities, 89
emergency
calls and paging, 103
enhanced 911 service, 70
EOCU, 36
exclusive hold, 95
executive override, 96
expansion
cabinets, 19
expansion KSU, 14
external
page interface unit, 44
page zones, 71
speaker (HESB), 59
telephone network numbers, 68
external page zones, 88
F
feature prompting with soft keys, 96
features, 61
PC attendant console, 102
station, 90
system, 61
flash button, 96
flexible
button assignments, 71
directory numbers, 71
line ringing assignment, 71
programmable buttons, 104
relay contacts, 5
functional block diagram, 6, 16, 29
G
ground/loop start interface CO line interface
unit, 38
group paging, 71
H
handset OCA stations, 89
handsfree
answerback, 96
directory number paths, 72
headset operation, 104
headset/loud ringing bell interface, 53
hearing aid compatible, 96
HESB, 59
HHEU, 53
HMIS, 72
holdbutton, 104
timer display, 104
hospitality management information system (see
HMIS)
I
incoming call
identification, 104
statistics, 104
integrated PC Iinterface, 53
integrated services digital network (see ISDN)
interposition call transfer, 105
Index
J ~ P
124 Strata DK General Description 5/99
ISDN, 73
basic rate interface unit (RBSU), 39, 40
subassembly (RSSS), 39
subassembly (RSSS), 40
BRI S/T or S-type circuits (TBSU), 12
BRI station circuits TE-1 and TA, 89
BRI, PRI channel lines, 89
primary rate interface unit (RPTU), 39
J
join button, 105
K
K5RCU3, 12
KCDU, 36
keyboard or mouse operation, 105
KKYS1, 12
KSTU2, 12
L
LCD
features, 96
telephones, 50
least cost routing, 75
line capacities, 5, 14, 22
groups, 76
queuing, 76
live system programming, 76
load sharing, 105
loop hold display, 105
loop start CO line interface, 38
subassembly, 38
M
maintenance
DK14, 8
DK40i, 17
DK424, 32
DKAdmin/modem (TTY) interface, 12
MDFB, 59
memory protection, 76
message center, 105
message waiting, 76
buttons, 78
microphone cut-off button, 96
modem button, 96
modular
handset and line cords, 96
headset, 97
MOH, 5, 78
multiple directory numbers
PDN, SDN, PhDN, 77
multiple FCC registration, 78
multi-tasking, 105
music-on-hold, 78
interface, 5
N
name/number dialing, 106
night ringing over
external page, 78
selected page zones, 78
non-blocking talk paths, 78
non-facility associated signaling (NFAS), 74
O
OCA speaker, 89
off-hook call announce, 89
handset mode, 97
speaker mode, 54, 97
upgrade unit, 36
off-premises stations, 78, 89
on-hook dialing, 97
option interface unit, 43
outgoing call restriction, 79
overflow calls, 106
overriding calls, 106
P
paging
external zones, 88
groups, 71, 88
interface, 5
max. simultaneous stations, 88
PC applications, 99
attendant console, 57
conference setup, 102
features, 102
interface unit, 37
on-line help, 104
soft keys, 104
system capacities, 89
digital telephone, 56
PCB, 21
circuits, interface options and connectors, 40
CO line, 37
console, 37
option interface, 43
station, 35
universal slot, 35
Index
Q ~ S
Strata DK General Description 5/99 125
PC-DKT, 56
PC-telephone interface (RPCI-DI), 98
PDIU-DS, 54, 89
PDKU2, 35
PEKU, 36
PEPU, 44
peripherals, 52
customer-supplied, 111
specifications, 60
PESU, 36
PhDN, 77, 88
PhDN/MW, 78
pickup groups, 88
PIOU, 43
pooled line button, 79, 98
position busy mode, 106
power failure transfer, 79
PRI, 39, 73
primary rate interface (see PRI‚ see also ISDN)
privacy/non-privacy, 79
programming
DK14, 8
DK40i, 17
DK424, 32
push-button dialing, 98
Q
QCDU2, 3
QKYS1, 3
QRCU3, 3
QSTU2, 3
R
R48S, 37
RATU, 37
RBSU, 40
RBUU, 41
RCIS, 37
RCIU2, 37
RCMS, 40
RCOS, 38
RCOU, 38
RDDU, 38
RDSU, 35
RDTU, 38
RDTU2, 41
relay service, 79
external page/door lock control relay, 80
night relay/hold relay, 80
release
3.2, 94, 101
4.0, 64, 68, 69, 73, 83, 84
button, 98, 106
release/answer button, 98
remote
administration/maintenance, 80
retrieval of held/parked calls, 98
REMU, 38
repeat last number dialed, 98
reserve power, 80
DK14, 4
RGLU2, 38
ringing line preference, 98
RMCU, 40, 41
RPCI, 98
RPCI-DI, 53, 89
RPTU2, 40
RRCS, 21
RSIU, 46
RSSU, 45
RSTS, 35
RSTU2, 36
RWIU, 43
S
saved number redial, 98
[SDN], 77
serial hunting, 81
serial interface unit, 46
simplified message desk interface (see SMDI)
single serial interface unit, 45
SMDI, 80
SMDR, 12
speaker
OCA stations, 89
off-hook call announce, 54
speakerphones, 51
speed dial, 81
buttons, 99
from PC attendant console, 106
system capacities, 88
split/switch button, 107
stand-alone data interface unit, 54
standard telephone, 89
features, 100
interface units
KSTU2, 12
RSTU2, 36
subassembly, 35
Index
T ~ W
126 Strata DK General Description 5/99
standard/electronic telephone interface unit,36
station lines,9
station message detail recording (see SMDR)
stations
dimensions,113
features,90, 100
hunting,81
relocation,82
specifications,60
status window,18, 33
Strata AirLink
cabling,60
interface unit,43
troubleshooting,33
wireless handset,55
StrataControl,82
Stratagy DK,59
StrataLink,66
system
features,61
programming,83
technology,7
troubleshooting,18, 33
T
T1/DS-1
interface unit,38
lines,89
tandem CO line connections,83
TBSU,12
TCIU2,12
TE-1,39
telephone application programming interface
(TAPI),66, 99
telephones
DKT,48, 89
DKT2004-CT (cordless),54
EKT,89
features,90, 100
wireless handset,55
tenants,84, 88
three-way calling,107
through dialing,107
tie lines,84, 89
timed reminders,99
toll restriction,84, 88
override codes,99
transfer direct to voice mail,107
traveling class of service,85
trunk group busy indication and control,107
TSIU,12
TSPI,66
U
universal slots,89
PCBs,35
user programmable feature buttons,99
V
verified account codes,88
voice first/tone signaling,85
voice mail,68
integration,85
SMDI,88
voice processing
Stratagy DK,59
volume control,107
W
windows
PC operation,107
compatibility,99
wireless handset (see Strata Airlink)
WSIU1,3
726+,%$ Telecommunication Systems Division
May 1999
Digital Business Telephone Solutions
Feature Description
Manual
Software Releases 4.0, 4.1, 4.2
Software Release 3.1
Software Release 4.1
Publication Information
Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., Telecommunication
Systems Division, reserves the right, without prior notice, to revise
this information publication for any reason, including, but not limited
to, utilization of new advances in the state of technical arts or to
simply change the design of this document.
Further, Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc.,
Telecommunication Systems Division, also reserves the right, without
prior notice, to make such changes in equipment design or
components as engineering or manufacturing methods may warrant.
Version D, May 1999
Version C, November 1998
Version B, May 1998
Version A, March 1996
© Copyright 1999
Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc.
Telecommunication Systems Division
All rights reserved. No part of this manual, covered by the copyrights
hereon, may be reproduced in any form or by any means—graphic,
electronic, or mechanical, including recording, taping, photocopying,
or information retrieval systems—without express written permission
of the publisher of this material.
Strata is a registered trademark of Toshiba Corporation. Stratagy is a
registered trademark of Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc.
Strata AirLink, Call Center Viewer, Insight DK and Insight DK Plus
are trademarks of Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc.
Trademarks, registered trademarks, and service marks are the property
of their respective owners.
Strata DK
General End User Information
The Strata DK Digital Business Telephone System is registered in
accordance with the provisions of Part 68 of the Federal Communications
Commission’s Rules and Regulations.
Important Notice – Music-On-Hold
In accordance with U.S. Copyright Law, a license may be required from the
American Society of Composers, Authors and Publishers, or other similar
organization, if radio or TV broadcasts are transmitted through the
music-on-hold feature of this telecommunication system. Toshiba America
Information Systems, Inc., hereby disclaims any liability arising out of the
failure to obtain such a license.
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 i
Contents
Introduction
Organization..........................................................................................................................................vii
Conventions..........................................................................................................................................viii
Related Documents ................................................................................................................................. x
Chapter 1 – System Overview
Strata DK14............................................................................................................................................. 1
Strata DK40i............................................................................................................................................1
Strata DK424...........................................................................................................................................1
Migration................................................................................................................................................. 2
System Capacities ...................................................................................................................................2
Feature Availability.................................................................................................................................4
System Administration Tools................................................................................................................ 10
Chapter 2 – Features
System Features .................................................................................................................................... 15
Account Codes................................................................................................................................ 16
Alarm Sensor ...............................................................................................................................18
Alternate Answer Point .................................................................................................................. 19
Amplified Conference ....................................................................................................................20
Auto Attendant ............................................................................................................................ 21
Automatic Hold Recall................................................................................................................... 23
Automatic Number Identification (ANI)........................................................................................24
Automatic Release From Hold ....................................................................................................... 26
Background Music (BGM) Interface..............................................................................................27
Caller Identification (ID) .............................................................................................................. 28
Centrex/PBX Compatibility ........................................................................................................... 30
Centrex Ringing Repeat..................................................................................................................31
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) .........................................................................................32
Conferencing .................................................................................................................................. 35
Credit Card Calling (“0+” Dialing)................................................................................................ 36
Delayed Ringing............................................................................................................................. 37
Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS) .............................................................................. 38
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) ......................................................................................................... 41
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ........................................................................................... 42
Distinctive CO Line/Internal Ringing ............................................................................................43
Door Lock Control .........................................................................................................................44
Door Phone..................................................................................................................................... 45
DTMF and Dial Pulse CO Line Compatible .................................................................................. 46
Contents
Features
ii Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
DTMF Signal Time Setting............................................................................................................47
E911 Enhanced Operation ............................................................................................................. 48
External Amplified Speaker .......................................................................................................... 50
Flexible Button Assignment........................................................................................................... 51
Flexible Intercom/DN Numbering..................................................................................................53
Flexible Line Ringing Assignment................................................................................................. 54
Flexible Slot Assignment................................................................................................................55
Ground Start Lines ......................................................................................................................... 56
Hotline Service (Emergency Ringdown)........................................................................................57
ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI)...................................................................................................58
ISDN Primary Rate Interface (PRI)................................................................................................ 61
Least Cost Routing (LCR).............................................................................................................. 64
Line Call Pickup Groups ................................................................................................................65
Line Groups....................................................................................................................................66
Line Queuing.................................................................................................................................. 67
Live System Programming............................................................................................................. 68
Memory Protection......................................................................................................................... 69
Message Waiting ............................................................................................................................70
Multiple Directory Numbers (DNs) ...............................................................................................72
Multiple FCC Registration .............................................................................................................74
Multiple Simultaneous Handsfree Intercom Paths......................................................................... 75
Music-on-Hold (MOH) Interface ...................................................................................................76
Night Ringing Answer Code .......................................................................................................... 77
Night Ringing Over External Page................................................................................................. 78
Night Ringing Over Selected Page Zone........................................................................................ 79
Night Transfer (Day/Night Modes)................................................................................................80
Non-blocking Dialing.....................................................................................................................81
Off-premises Station (OPS)............................................................................................................82
Outgoing Call Restriction............................................................................................................... 83
Paging - All Call Voice Page..........................................................................................................84
Paging - External Page Interface .................................................................................................... 85
Paging - External Zone Paging....................................................................................................... 86
Paging - Group Paging ...................................................................................................................87
Pooled CO Lines............................................................................................................................. 88
Power Failure Transfer................................................................................................................... 89
Privacy/Non-privacy Option........................................................................................................... 90
Relay Service.................................................................................................................................. 91
Remote Administration/Maintenance ............................................................................................ 92
Reserve Power Battery Backup Interface.......................................................................................93
Speed Dial (SD).............................................................................................................................. 94
Station Hunting............................................................................................................................... 96
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) .................................................................................98
Station Relocation......................................................................................................................... 101
System Programming Through Station ........................................................................................102
Tandem CO Line Connection (Trunk-to-Trunk) .........................................................................103
Tenant Service ..............................................................................................................................105
Tie Lines ...................................................................................................................................... 106
Toll Restriction.............................................................................................................................107
Toll Restriction Override Codes................................................................................................... 109
Toll Restriction Override Using System Speed Dial.................................................................... 110
Contents
Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 iii
Transfer Privacy ...........................................................................................................................111
Traveling Class of Service............................................................................................................112
T1 Interface................................................................................................................................... 113
Voice Mail Interface ....................................................................................................................114
Voice or Tone Signaling...............................................................................................................117
Wall or Table Mounting ............................................................................................................... 118
Station Features................................................................................................................................... 119
Alert Signal Button.......................................................................................................................120
Automatic Busy Redial (ABR) ....................................................................................................121
Automatic Callback (Internal Calls).............................................................................................122
Automatic Hold ............................................................................................................................123
Automatic Off-hook Line Selection ............................................................................................ 124
Background Music (BGM) with Station Control .........................................................................125
Busy Override Tone......................................................................................................................127
Busy Station Transfer/Busy Station Ringing................................................................................ 128
Call Forward................................................................................................................................. 129
Call Park ....................................................................................................................................... 132
Call Pickup ................................................................................................................................... 133
Call Pickup Groups.......................................................................................................................134
Call Transfer with Camp-on.........................................................................................................135
Centrex/PBX Feature Buttons ......................................................................................................136
Continuous DTMF Signal Time...................................................................................................137
Data Buttons .................................................................................................................................138
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Buttons........................................................................................139
Distinctive LED Indicators........................................................................................................... 140
Distinctive Station Ringing ..........................................................................................................141
Do Not Disturb (DND)................................................................................................................. 142
Do Not Disturb (DND) Override.................................................................................................. 143
Dial Pulse/DTMF Mode Change.................................................................................................. 144
Exclusive Hold ............................................................................................................................. 145
Executive Override.......................................................................................................................146
Flash Button..................................................................................................................................147
Handsfree Answerback on Intercom ............................................................................................ 148
Hearing-aid Compatible ............................................................................................................... 149
LCD - Alphanumeric Messaging..................................................................................................150
LCD - Automatic Callback Number Display ...............................................................................151
LCD - Busy Lamp Field Indication.............................................................................................. 152
LCD - Busy Station Messaging....................................................................................................153
LCD - Call Duration Display........................................................................................................ 154
LCD - Call Forward Source/Destination Display.........................................................................155
LCD - Calling/Called Number Display........................................................................................156
LCD - Called Station Messaging..................................................................................................157
LCD - Calling Station Messaging ................................................................................................ 158
LCD - Clock/Calendar Display ....................................................................................................159
LCD - CO Line Identification ......................................................................................................160
LCD - Dialed Number Display.....................................................................................................161
LCD - Feature Prompting with Soft Key Operation.....................................................................162
LCD - Message Waiting Display.................................................................................................. 163
LCD - Recalling Station Identification.........................................................................................164
LCD - Remote/Group Station Messaging ....................................................................................165
Contents
Strata AirLink
iv Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
LCD - Speed Dial Memo Directory Dialing ................................................................................166
LCD - Station Identification......................................................................................................... 167
LCD - Timed Reminders ..............................................................................................................168
LCD - User Name/Number Display............................................................................................. 169
Message Waiting ..........................................................................................................................170
Microphone Control Buttons........................................................................................................171
Modular Handset and Line Cords.................................................................................................172
Modular Headset Interface ........................................................................................................... 173
Off-hook Call Announce (OCA)..................................................................................................174
On-hook Dialing........................................................................................................................... 176
Personal Computer Interface (RPCI-DI) .....................................................................................177
Pooled CO Line Buttons...............................................................................................................178
Privacy Button..............................................................................................................................179
Privacy Override...........................................................................................................................180
Privacy Release Button.................................................................................................................181
Private CO Lines ..........................................................................................................................182
Pushbutton Dialing .......................................................................................................................183
Release Button..............................................................................................................................184
Release/Answer Button ................................................................................................................185
Remote Retrieval of Held Calls.................................................................................................... 186
Repeat Last Number Dialed .........................................................................................................187
Ringing Line Preference............................................................................................................... 188
Saved Number Redial...................................................................................................................189
Speed Dial (SD) Button................................................................................................................ 190
Timed Reminder...........................................................................................................................191
Toll Restriction Override Code Revision..................................................................................... 192
User Programmable Feature Buttons............................................................................................193
Chapter 3 – Strata AirLink
System Components............................................................................................................................195
Handset Features.................................................................................................................................203
FCN Feature Access..................................................................................................................... 204
Flash Button..................................................................................................................................205
Lock/Unlock the Dial Pad ............................................................................................................ 206
Menu Operation............................................................................................................................207
Mute.............................................................................................................................................. 208
Speed Dial..................................................................................................................................... 209
Volume Adjustment......................................................................................................................210
Chapter 4 – PC Attendant Console
Features ............................................................................................................................................... 211
Operation............................................................................................................................................. 213
PC Requirements.................................................................................................................................214
Windows PC Operation.......................................................................................................................214
Applications ........................................................................................................................................ 214
PC Attendant Console Features ..........................................................................................................216
Answer Button..............................................................................................................................217
Answer Priority.............................................................................................................................218
Answer Prompting........................................................................................................................219
Attendant Conference Setup......................................................................................................... 220
Contents
Automatic Call Distribution
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 v
Auto Day/Night Mode Switching.................................................................................................221
Auto Dialing .................................................................................................................................222
Busy Lamp Field (BLF) ...............................................................................................................223
Call Waiting Count.......................................................................................................................224
Color CRT Display....................................................................................................................... 225
Dial “0” for Attendant ..................................................................................................................226
Dial Outside Number for Station User .........................................................................................227
Direct Station Selection (DSS)..................................................................................................... 228
Directory Display and Dialing...................................................................................................... 229
DTMF Tone Signaling..................................................................................................................230
Emergency Calls...........................................................................................................................231
Emergency Page ...........................................................................................................................232
Employee Profile Information...................................................................................................... 233
Feature Online Help......................................................................................................................234
Feature Prompting with Soft Keys ............................................................................................... 235
Flexible Programmable Buttons...................................................................................................236
Headset Operation ........................................................................................................................237
Hold Button .................................................................................................................................. 238
Hold Timer Display...................................................................................................................... 239
Incoming Call Identification.........................................................................................................240
Incoming Call Statistics................................................................................................................241
Interposition Call Transfer............................................................................................................ 242
Join Button....................................................................................................................................243
Keyboard or Mouse Operation .....................................................................................................244
Load Sharing................................................................................................................................. 245
Loop Hold Display .......................................................................................................................246
Message Center............................................................................................................................. 247
Multitasking.................................................................................................................................. 248
Name or Number Dialing .............................................................................................................249
Overflow....................................................................................................................................... 250
Override........................................................................................................................................ 251
Park and Page ............................................................................................................................... 252
Position Busy................................................................................................................................ 253
Release Button..............................................................................................................................254
Reminder Notes............................................................................................................................255
Split/Switch Button....................................................................................................................... 256
Speed Dial Calling........................................................................................................................ 257
Three-way Calling........................................................................................................................258
Through Dialing ...........................................................................................................................259
Transfer Direct to Voice Mail ...................................................................................................... 260
Trunk Group Control....................................................................................................................261
Volume Control............................................................................................................................262
Chapter 5 – Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Operation ................................................................................................................................... 263
ACD System Features.........................................................................................................................269
After Shift Service........................................................................................................................270
Automatic Disconnect .................................................................................................................. 271
Automatic Number Identification (ANI)......................................................................................272
Call Distribution ...........................................................................................................................273
Contents
Hospitality Management Information System
vi Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Caller ID .......................................................................................................................................274
Data Collection and Reporting ..................................................................................................... 275
Delay Announcements and Music................................................................................................276
Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS)............................................................................. 277
Inbound Call Routing ...................................................................................................................278
Overflow....................................................................................................................................... 279
PBX Calls ..................................................................................................................................... 281
Queuing ........................................................................................................................................ 282
Queue Alarm Timer......................................................................................................................283
ACD Agent Features...........................................................................................................................284
ACD, PBX, and Non-ACD Calls .................................................................................................285
ACD Call Pickup..........................................................................................................................286
ACD Display Information ............................................................................................................ 287
ACD Help.....................................................................................................................................288
After Call Work Time...................................................................................................................289
Auto Answer with Zip Tone.........................................................................................................290
Log In/Log Out.............................................................................................................................291
Unavailable Mode.........................................................................................................................292
Work Unit.....................................................................................................................................293
ACD Supervisor Features ...................................................................................................................294
ACD Agent Assistance................................................................................................................. 295
ACD Call Pickup..........................................................................................................................296
ACD Supervisor LCD Display.....................................................................................................297
ACD Supervisor Log In/Log Out.................................................................................................298
Call Monitoring ............................................................................................................................299
End of ACD Shift.........................................................................................................................300
Insight DK and Insight DK Plus................................................................................................... 301
General Features.................................................................................................................................. 308
Insight DK Features ............................................................................................................................310
Insight DK Plus................................................................................................................................... 311
MIS Access...................................................................................................................................317
Queue Alarm Indication ............................................................................................................... 318
ACD Feature Interaction..................................................................................................................... 319
Assistance From Busy Supervisor................................................................................................ 320
Call Forwarding............................................................................................................................321
Executive/Busy Override..............................................................................................................322
Message and Display.................................................................................................................... 323
Station Do Not Disturb (DND)..................................................................................................... 324
ACD Call Center Viewer.............................................................................................................. 325
ACD Software MIS (SMIS).........................................................................................................332
Chapter 6 – Hospitality Management Information System
Hardware Configurations.................................................................................................................... 345
Connection Requirements...................................................................................................................347
Main Screen ........................................................................................................................................347
Glossary................................................................................................................................................. 351
Index........................................................................................................................................................ 355
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 iii
Introduction
This manual pertains to features and capabilities of Strata DK14 Release 1, DK40i Release 1, and
DK424 Release 4 digital business telephone systems. Each feature profile includes:
♦System Availability – indicates whether a feature is standard, optional or available only on
certain Strata systems.
♦Description – gives a detailed description of the feature.
♦Benefits – provides an overview of benefits when using the feature either alone or with other
Strata features.
Organization
This manual is divided into the following chapters:
♦Chapter 1 – System Overview outlines basic categories and options for Strata features.
Multiple tables provide hardware and software capacities and all the available features.
♦Chapter 2 – Features provides all of the available features in the Strata DK systems in
alphabetical order.
♦Chapter 3 – Strata AirLink™ outlines the basic concepts of the analog and digital wireless
systems and describes the components and configuration software. For detailed information,
refer to the Strata Airlink Installation and User Guides, and Strata DK I&M (Chapter 16) and
General Description Manuals.
♦Chapter 4 – PC Attendant Console provides an alphabetical list by feature name, a profile
for each Strata DK424 Personal Computer (PC) Attendant Console feature.
♦Chapter 5 – Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) details the various features and options
available with ACD applications.
♦Chapter 6 – Hospitality Management Information System provides an overview of HMIS
capabilities. For detailed feature information, refer to the HMIS User Guide and HMIS
General Description.
Conventions
Introduction
iv Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Conventions
Conventions Description
Note Elaborates specific items or references other information. Within
some tables, general notes apply to the entire table and numbered
notes apply to specific items.
Important! Calls attention to important instructions or information.
CAUTION! Advises you that hardware, software applications, or data
could be damaged if the instructions are not followed closely.
WARNING! Alerts you when the given task could cause personal injury or
death.
[DN] Represents any Directory Number button, also known as an
extension or intercom number.
[PDN] Represents any Primary Directory Number button (the extension
number for the telephone).
[SDN] Represents any Secondary appearance of a PDN. A PDN which
appears on another telephone is considered an SDN.
[PhDN] Represents any Phantom Directory Number button (an additional
DN).
$ULDO#%ROG Represents telephone buttons.
Courier Shows a computer keyboard entry or screen display.
Helvetica Bold Represents LCD displays, tokens or custom IVR functions. For
example: M ( ).
“Type” Indicates entry of a string of text.
“Press” Indicates entry of a single key. For example: Type prog then
press Enter.
Plus (+)
Shows a multiple PC keyboard or phone button entry. Entries
without spaces between them show a simultaneous entry.
Example: Esc + Enter. Entries with spaces between them show
a sequential entry. Example: # + 5.
Tilde (~) Means “through.” Example: 350 ~ 640 Hz frequency range.
➤Denotes the step in a one-step procedure.
➤Denotes a procedure.
See Figure 10
Grey words within the printed text denote cross-references. In the
electronic version of this document (Strata DK Library CD-ROM
or FYI Internet download), cross-references appear in blue
hypertext.
Conventions
Introduction
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 v
Action/Response Table
1. Actions you perform
appear in this column.
They can consist of
either a single step or a
series of numbered
steps.
The immediate response to the action performed appears in this
column. Addtional notes and comments are also included.
2. When the action you
perform results in a
screen, menu, dialog
box, etc., the example to
the right displays.
2765
Related Documents/Media
Introduction
vi Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Related Documents/Media
Note Some documents listed here may appear in different versions on the CD-ROM, FYI, or in
print. To compare and find the most current version, check the document title page.
♦Digital Telephone User Guide provides all the procedures necessary to operate
Toshiba-proprietary digital telephones including Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) features. It
also includes instructions for using the add-on module/DSS console.
♦Digital Telephone Quick Reference Guide provides a quick reference for frequently used
digital telephone features.
♦Digital Single Line Telephone User Guide provides all the procedures necessary to operate
the Toshiba DKT2001 telephone features.
♦Electronic Telephone User Guide explains all the procedures necessary to operate Toshiba-
proprietary electronic telephones including all LCD features. Does not apply to the Strata
DK14 system. It also includes instructions for using the electronic DSS console.
♦Electronic Telephone Quick Reference Guide provides a quick reference for frequently used
electronic telephone features. Does not apply to the Strata DK14 system.
♦Standard Telephone User Guide explains all the procedures necessary to operate rotary dial
and push-button standard telephones.
♦Strata AirLink External Wireless Handset User Guide shows how to use the wireless
handset configured to Strata DK telephone system Strata DK telephone system and many non-
Toshiba systems.
♦Strata AirLink External Wireless Handset Quick Reference Guide contains instructions
for operation of commonly used Strata AirLink External Wireless Handset features.
♦Strata AirLink Integrated Wireless Handset User Guide shows how to use the wireless
handset configured to digital ports of the Strata DK telephone system.
♦Strata AirLink Integrated Wireless Handset Quick Reference Guide contains instructions
for operation of commonly used Strata AirLink Integrated Wireless Handset features.
♦System Administrator Guide gives instructions for the System Administrator to manage a
system. Contains instructions for station relocation, system Speed Dial, and other features only
activated by the System Administrator.
♦PC/Data Interface User Guide explains all the procedures necessary to operate stand alone
data interface units while in the data mode for printer sharing and modem pooling. Also
provides instructions for connecting to a PC with Telephone Application Programming
Interface (TAPI).
♦Cordless Telephone User Guide provides instructions on using the DKT2004-CT cordless
digital telephone as a single unit or in conjunction with a digital telephone.
♦PC-DKT User Guide provides installation and operation information for the Personal
Computer Digital Key Telephone system.
Related Documents/Media
Introduction
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 vii
♦DKAdmin/DKBackup User Guide describes how to use the DK Admin/DK Backup
interactive software applications, which enable you to easily and quickly custom program and/
or update the Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424 with a user friendly PC display. It also describes
how to backup and restore existing Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424 system data using the
programs.
♦Keyprint 2000 User Guide provides instructions for the Keyprint 2000 software printing
package which enables you to print and store custom button label keystrips for Strata DK
2000-series 10-button or 20-button digital telephones, 20-button add-on modules, and 60-
button digital DSS consoles.
♦Strata DK Programming Manual provides all instructions necessary to program the Strata
DK14, DK40i, and DK424 systems and system record sheets including ACD. The Strata
AirLink wireless systems are included throughout the manual.
♦Strata DK Installation & Maintenance Manual provides installation instructions for
configuring and installing the Strata DK14, DK40i and DK424. It also includes ISDN, T1/DS-
1 interface installation and configuration instructions, and troubleshooting. Additional
chapters are: ACD, providing installation instructions; Strata AirLink, providing installation
instructions for the standard- and digital-port configurations of the wireless system.
♦Strata AirLink External Wireless System Installation Guide provides step-by-step
installation instructions for the Base Station Interface Adapter (BSIA) system, including
system configurations examples, site surveys, and troubleshooting techniques.
♦Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) General Description provides an
overall view of the hardware, software, applications and features.
♦Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) User Guide describes the product’s
many software features and gives step-by-step instructions for using them.
♦The following applies only to the Strata DK424.
♦Strata DK424 Call Center Solutions General Description provides a system overview,
including hardware and feature information.
♦ACD Agent Guide describes the ACD agent feature operation along with step-by-step
procedures for using features.
♦ACD Supervisor Guide provides instruction on how to use the ACD supervisor features.
♦Call Center Viewer User Guide describes how to install and operate the Call Center Viewer
application on a PC. It explains how to view and customize ACD group and agent status
information.
♦Insight DK Installation Guide provides installation instructions for Strata DK Insight and
Insight DK Plus Management Information System (MIS) application onto server and client
PCs. Also included are software installation instructions for electronic wallboards and the
inView™ LAN display application.
♦Insight DK Supervisor Guide provides instructions for using the Strata DK Insight and
Insight DK Plus MIS for the call center Supervisor.
♦Insight DK inView Quick Reference Guide provides instructions for viewing and
customizing the on-screen wallboard and large character views of the real time call center
data.
♦Software MIS (SMIS) Supervisor Manual provides descriptions, examples, and instructions
on using the Software MIS application.
♦Strata DK Library CD-ROM enables you to view, print, navigate and search publications
for Strata DK14, DK40i and DK424 digital business telephone systems.
Related Documents/Media
Introduction
viii Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
♦Insight DK CD-ROM contains the Insight DK software and upgrade to Insight DK Plus
software, demo software and instructions, as well as all Insight DK documentation and a
training module.
♦StrataControl CD-ROM contains the StrataControl software and documentation and enables
viewing, downloading, editing, and uploading Strata DK programmed data on a PC.
♦Strata DKQuote CD-ROM contains the DKQuote software and documentation and enables
viewing, downloading, editing, and uploading of DKQuote data to a PC.
♦Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) CD-ROM describes HMIS,
including installation, the Setup Utility, maintaining the HMIS databases and software, and
troubleshooting.
Note For authorized users, Internet site FYI (http://fyi.tsd.toshiba.com) contains all Strata DK
documentation and enables you to view, print, and download current publications.
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 1
System Overview 1
The Strata DK14, DK40i, and DK424 are digital business telephone systems that are electronically
compatible with the public telephone network and can function in PBX or Centrex environments.
Each system can be configured as key or hybrid (DK424 PBX also) with separate Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) registration numbers. Feature capabilities are very similar.
The primary difference between models is capacity. Each system and station feature is described
completely, beginning on Pages 15 and 119 respectively.
Strata DK14
The Strata DK14 uses a compact, single cabinet, wall mount design. It provides built-in circuitry
for two CO lines and four digital stations. It can be expanded to a maximum capacity of four CO
lines and ten stations (eight digital telephone stations and two standard stations).
Strata DK40i
The Strata DK40i uses a compact, double cabinet (base plus expansion), wall mount design. It
provides capacity for four CO lines, eight digital stations, and four standard stations in the base
cabinet. With the expansion cabinet, it has a maximum capacity of 12 CO lines and 28 stations.
Strata DK424
The Strata DK424 uses a modular, building block system design that can be configured using from
one to seven cabinets (base cabinet and up to six expansion cabinets). This enables customers to
grow cost effectively from small to large configurations. They can reuse common equipment by
adding options rather than replacing existing hardware. The only part they potentially replace is
the processor, depending upon the size they start with or grow to.
There are four DK424 processor models available having different degrees of capacity, capability,
and price. The processors are:
♦RCTUA small system processor – for one-cabinet configurations not requiring some of the
advanced features, such as ACD/MIS, PRI, T1 Interface, Attendant Console, or System Open
Architecture Interface (OAI). It provides a maximum capacity for 16 CO lines and 32 stations.
♦RCTUBA/BB medium system processor – for one- or two-cabinet configurations and
supports all of the advanced features, such as ACD/MIS, PRI, T1 Interface, Attendant
Console, and System OAI. It provides a maximum capacity for 48 CO lines or 80 stations.
♦RCTUC/D large system processor – for up to six-cabinet configurations and supports all of
the advanced features. It provides a maximum capacity for 144 CO lines or 240 stations.
System Overview
Migration
2Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
♦RCTUE/F maximum system processor – for up to seven-cabinet configurations and supports
all of the advanced features. It provides a maximum capacity for 200 CO lines or 336 stations.
Migration
An important aspect of the Toshiba product line strategy is cost-effective migration from smaller
to larger systems. This includes reusing as much of the existing equipment as possible.
All Strata DK systems use the same 2000-series digital telephones and wiring. This means a
customer growing from as small as a DK14 to as large as a DK424 can use the same telephones.
Older digital and electronic telephones are also compatible with Strata DK40i and DK424
systems. This means customers growing out of older Strata systems into current larger ones, can
reuse their existing electronic telephones.
Printed circuit boards from Strata DK24/56/96 systems can be reused in DK424 systems. This
includes CO line interface cards, station interface cards, and option cards. This means DK24/56/96
customers need only to buy a new processor and the appropriate number of cabinets to migrate to
the larger DK424.
Customers buy Toshiba telecommunication products knowing their investment is designed for
long-term use. Not only are they buying quality products that will last, but they can also grow and
expand cost effectively.
System Capacities
Table 1 is an overview of each system’s hardware capacities and Table 2 is an overview of each
system’s software capabilities.
Table 1 Hardware Capacities DK424
Lines and PCB Slots DK14 DK40i RCTUA RCTUBA/BB RCTUC/D RCTUE/F
Universal slots 0 416123654
CO lines – loop start 4 12216248214422002
CO lines – ground start 0 12 16240213622002
DID lines (analog) 0 12 16340313632003
Tie lines (analog) 0 12 16340313632003
T1 (DS-1 lines each) 0 0 0 48414441924
ISDN BRI B channel lines 0 12 85165165165
ISDN PRI B channel lines 0 0 0 47614161886
Squared-system maximum
(lines + stations) 4 + 4 12 + 12 16 + 16 48 + 48 144 + 144 200 + 200
Stations and Peripherals DK14 DK40i RCTUA RCTUBA/BB RCTUC/D RCTUE/F
Add-on modules (DADM) 8 12 12 40 120 200
Attendant consoles 0 0 0 2 4 4
DKT2004-CT cordless telephones 8 28 32 80 240 336
DKT2004-CT simultaneous calls 8 9 9 9 9 9
Door locks 2 3 4 5 5 5
Door phones 6 9 9 12 12 12
DSS consoles 0 3 3 4 8 8
System Overview
System Capacities
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 3
Stations and Peripherals DK14 DK40i RCTUA RCTUBA/BB RCTUC/D RCTUE/F
ISDN BRI station circuits
TE-1 and TA (2B + D per circuit)70 10 8 16 40 64
Handset OCA stations 8 28 32 80 240 336
Off-premises stations 2 20 32 80 232 328
PDIU-DS87 24 31 79 160 208
RPCI-DI used for data + TAPI, per
system88 24 32 80 144 200
RPCI-DI used for TAPI only per:
♦Cabinet8
♦System8N/A
8N/A
24 32
32 40
80 40
186 40
280
Speaker OCA stations88 28 32 80 160 208
Standard stations 2 20 24 72 232 328
Telephones – DKT 8 289 3210 8010 24010 33610
Telephones – EKT 0 169 3210 8010 24010 32810
Strata AirLink wireless handsets N/A 20 24 72 232 328
1. There are four universal slots in the DK40i expansion unit.
2. All CO line capacities assume a PIOU, PIOUS, PEPU, RSSU, or RSIU is installed for RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D or
RCTUE/F, but no Caller ID RCIU2/RCIS PCBs.
3. Limits apply to analog DID and Tie lines, not T1 DID/Tie lines.
4. T1 lines can be loop start, ground start, Tie, or DID (maximum 24 lines per unit, any type or combination).
5. BRI lines provide CO line services, including Caller ID, DID and Direct Inward Lines (DIL).
6. PRI lines provide CO line services, including Caller ID, ANI, DID, Tie, POTS, FX and DIL.
7. ISDN BRI TE-1 and TA include ISDN telephones, modems, video conference interfaces, etc. Up to two stations (TE-1 and/or TA) can
connect to and share one BRI S-type circuit. Only one station can connect to a BRI U-type circuit.
8. Speaker OCA, PDIU and RPCI capacity is determined by 2B channel slot availability and power supply limits.
9. To install the maximum of 28 total DKTs and EKTs in the DK40i, up to 16 of the stations can be EKTs and at least 8 of the
stations must be DKTs.
10. Maximum capacity of DKT/EKT stations per DK424 cabinet is 62, less for EKT 2000, 3000 (Power Factor limitation).
Table 2 System Software Capacities
Software DK14 DK40i DK424
RCTUA DK424
RCTUBA/BB DK424
RCTUC/D DK424
RCTUE/F
Class of Srv. Toll Restriction Levels 4 4 4 4 8 8
Call Pickup CO Line Groups 2 2 2 2 4 4
Call Pickup Station Groups 8 20 20 20 20 20
Pooled CO Line Groups 4 8 8 8 16 16
Conference Parties 4 4 4 4 4 4
Simultaneous Conferences 2 4 3 7 7 14
Tandem CO Line Connections 2 4 4 10 10 20
System Speed Dial Numbers 40 40 40 100 100 800
Station Speed Dial Numbers 40 40 40 40 40 40
Speed Dial Digits 20 20 20 20 20 20
Speed Dial Digits Chained 37 37 37 37 37 37
Account Code Digits 4~15 4~15 4~15 4~15 4~15 4~15
Verified Account Codes 100 300 300 300 300 300
DISA Security Code Digits 1~15 1~15 1~15 1~15 1~15 1~15
Table 1 Hardware Capacities
(continued)
DK424
System Overview
Feature Availability
4Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Feature Availability
Refer to Tables 3~5 for features and services that are available for Strata DK systems.
DNIS Numbers N/A N/A 200 350 500 500
Abandoned ANI/Caller ID Number N/A N/A 200 400 1000 2000
Primary Directory Numbers N/A N/A 32 80 240 336
Phantom (Multiple) Directory
Numbers N/A N/A 32 80 240 336
Table 3 Strata DK System Feature Availability
Feature DK14 DK40i DK424
RCTUA DK424
RCTUBA/BB DK424
RCTUC/D DK424
RCTUE/F
Account Codes-Forced Std Std Std Std Std Std
Account Codes-Verifiable Std Std Std Std Std Std
Account Codes-Voluntary Std Std Std Std Std Std
Alarm Sensor Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt
Alternate Answer Point Std Std Std Std Std Std
Amplified Conference
Interface N/A Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt
Automated Attendant,
Built-in Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt
Auto Attendant
Delayed Ringing Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt
Automatic Call Distribution N/A N/A N/A Opt Opt Opt
Automatic No. Identification
(ANI) N/A Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt
Automatic Recall
(Hold, Transfer) Std Std Std Std Std Std
Automatic Release from
Hold Std Std Std Std Std Std
Background Music Interface Std Std Std Std Std Std
Battery Backup
Interface-System Std Std Std Std Std Std
Battery Backup-Memory Std Std Std Std Std Std
Call Waiting Tone Std Std Std Std Std Std
Caller ID Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt
Centrex/PBX Compatibility Std Std Std Std Std Std
Centrex Ringing Repeat Std Std Std Std Std Std
Class of Service, Station Std Std Std Std Std Std
Class of Service, Travelling Std Std Std Std Std Std
CO Line Call Pickup Groups 2 Groups 2 Groups 2 Groups 2 Groups 4 Groups 4 Groups
CO Line Groups 4 Groups 8 Groups 8 Groups 8 Groups 16 Groups 16 Groups
Std = Standard
Opt = Optional
N/A = Not Available
Table 2 System Software Capacities
(continued)
Software DK14 DK40i DK424
RCTUA DK424
RCTUBA/BB DK424
RCTUC/D DK424
RCTUE/F
System Overview
Feature Availability
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 5
CO Line Queuing Std Std Std Std Std Std
Computer Telephony
Integration (CTI) Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt
Conferencing 4 Party 4 Party 4 Party 4 Party 4 Party 4 Party
Credit Card Calling
(“0+” Dialing) Std Std Std Std Std Std
Delayed Ringing Std Std Std Std Std Std
Dialed Number ID Service
(DNIS) N/A Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) N/A OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
Direct Inward System
Access (DISA) Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt
Distinctive CO Ringing Std Std Std Std Std Std
Door Lock Control Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt
Dual-tone Multi-frequency
(DTMF) and Dial Pulse
Compatible Std Std Std Std Std Std
DTMF Signal Time Setting
(160/80 ms) Std Std Std Std Std Std
End-to-End Signal Tones Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt
E911 Enhanced Operation Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt
FCC Registration
(Key, Hybrid) Std Std Std Std Std Std
FCC Registration (PBX) N/A N/A Std Std Std Std
Flash Timing Programmable Std Std Std Std Std Std
Flexible Button Assignment Std Std Std Std Std Std
Flexible Intercom
DN Numbering Std Std Std Std Std Std
Flexible Line Ringing
Assignment Std Std Std Std Std Std
Flexible Slot Assignment N/a Opt
(Expansion
Cabinet)
Std Std Std Std
Ground Start Lines N/a Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt
Hotline Service (Emergency
Ringdown) N/A N/A Std Std Std Std
Internal Call Hold Std Std Std Std Std Std
Internal Call Transfer Std Std Std Std Std Std
ISDN Basic Rate Interface N/A Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt
ISDN Primary Rate Interface N/A N/A N/A Opt Opt Opt
Least Cost Routing (LCR) Std Std Std Std Std Std
Live System Programming Std Std Std Std Std Std
Message Waiting (MW) DKT Std Std Std Std Std Std
Table 3 Strata DK System Feature Availability
(continued)
Feature DK14 DK40i DK424
RCTUA DK424
RCTUBA/BB DK424
RCTUC/D DK424
RCTUE/F
Std = Standard
Opt = Optional
N/A = Not Available
System Overview
Feature Availability
6Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
MW Lamp Generator for
2500 SLTs N/A Opt Std Std Std Std
Modular Expansion System
Design N/A Std Std Std Std Std
Multiple DNs Std Std Std Std Std Std
Music-on-Hold Interface Std Std Std Std Std Std
Night Ringing Answer Code Std Std Std Std Std Std
Night Ring Over External
Page Std Std Std Std Std Std
Night Ring Over Ext. Page
Zones N/A Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt
Night Service Std Std Std Std Std Std
Non-blocking Dialing
DKT/EKT Std Std Std Std Std Std
Non-blocking Internal Call Std Std Std Std Std Std
Off-premises Stations Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt
Outgoing Call Restriction Std Std Std Std Std Std
Page Pickup
(Meet-Me Page) Std Std Std Std Std Std
Paging-External Interface Std Std Opt Opt Opt Opt
Paging-External Zone
(4 zones) N/A Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt
Paging-Internal DKT All Call Std Std Std Std Std (120) Std (120)
Paging-Internal DKT Group 4 Groups 4 Groups 4 Groups 4 Groups 8 Groups 8 Groups
Pooled CO Line Groups 4 8 8 8 16 16
Power Failure Transfer Std Std Opt Opt Opt Opt
Privacy/Non Privacy Option Std Std Std Std Std Std
Relay Service Std Std Opt Opt Opt Opt
Remote Maint./Admin. Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt
SMDR Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt
Station Hunting – Dist. Std Std Std Std Std Std
Station Hunting – Serial Std Std Std Std Std Std
Station Relocation Std Std Std Std Std Std
System Programming
Through Station Std Std Std Std Std Std
System Speed Dialing 40 40 40 100 100 100
Tandem CO Line
Connection Std Std Std Std Std Std
Tenant Service 2 2 2 4 4 4
Tie Line Transfer Recall N/A Std Std Std Std Std
T1 Interface N/A N/A N/A Opt Opt Opt
Toll Restriction Std Std Std Std Std Std
Table 3 Strata DK System Feature Availability
(continued)
Feature DK14 DK40i DK424
RCTUA DK424
RCTUBA/BB DK424
RCTUC/D DK424
RCTUE/F
Std = Standard
Opt = Optional
N/A = Not Available
System Overview
Feature Availability
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 7
Toll Restriction Override
Codes Std Std Std Std Std Std
Toll Restr. Speed Dial
Override Std Std Std Std Std Std
Transfer Privacy Std Std Std Std Std Std
TTY Local Terminal
Interface Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt
Upload/Download
Programming Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt
Voice Mail Integration
In Band Std Std Std Std Std Std
Voice Mail Integration
(SMDI) Std Std Std Std Std Std
Voice or Tone Signaling
Selectable Std Std Std Std Std Std
Table 4 Strata DK LCD Feature Availability
Feature DK14 DK40I DK424
RCTUA DK424
RCTUBA/BB DK424
RCTUC/D DK424
RCTUE/F
Alphanumeric Personal Messages 10 10 10 10 10 10
Alphanumeric System Messages 40 40 40 40 40 40
ANI/DNIS Display N/A Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt
Auto Callback Number Display Std Std Std Std Std Std
BLF Indication Std Std Std Std Std Std
Busy Station Messaging Std Std Std Std Std Std
Call Duration Display Std Std Std Std Std Std
Call FWD Source/Destination Std Std Std Std Std Std
Called Station Messaging Std Std Std Std Std Std
Caller ID Display Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt
Calling Station Messaging Std Std Std Std Std Std
Calling/Called Number
Intercom/DN Std Std Std Std Std Std
Clock/Calendar Display Std Std Std Std Std Std
CO Line ID Incoming/Outgoing Std Std Std Std Std Std
Dial Input Verification Std Std Std Std Std Std
Feature Activation Display Std Std Std Std Std Std
Feature Prompting with Soft Keys Std Std Std Std Std Std
Group Station Messaging Std Std Std Std Std Std
Intercom/DN User Name Display Std Std Std Std Std Std
Remote/Group Station Messaging Std Std Std Std Std Std
Std = Standard
Opt = Optional
N/A = Not Available
Table 3 Strata DK System Feature Availability
(continued)
Feature DK14 DK40i DK424
RCTUA DK424
RCTUBA/BB DK424
RCTUC/D DK424
RCTUE/F
Std = Standard
Opt = Optional
N/A = Not Available
System Overview
Feature Availability
8Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Speed Dial Directory Dialing Std Std Std Std Std Std
Speed Dial Directory Name Scroll Std Std Std Std Std Std
Timed Reminders Std Std Std Std Std Std
Table 5 Strata DK Station Feature Availability
Feature DK14 DK40i DK424
RCTUA DK424
RCTUBA/BB DK424
RCTUC/D DK424
RCTUE/F
Alert Signal Button Std Std Std Std Std Std
Auto Busy Redial (ABR) Opt Opt Std Std Std Std
Auto Callback Intercom Std Std Std Std Std Std
Auto Dial Inside (DSS) Buttons Std Std Std Std Std Std
Auto Dial Outside Buttons Std Std Std Std Std Std
Automatic Hold Std Std Std Std Std Std
Auto Off-Hook Line Selection Std Std Std Std Std Std
Background Music (BGM) with
Station Control Std Std Std Std Std Std
Busy Override Tone Std Std Std Std Std Std
Busy Station Transfer/Ringing Std Std Std Std Std Std
Call Forward-All Calls (CFAC) Std Std Std Std Std Std
Call Forward-Busy (CFB) Std Std Std Std Std Std
Call Forward-Busy/No Answer
(CFBNA) Std Std Std Std Std Std
Call Forward-No Answer (CFNA) Std Std Std Std Std Std
Call Forward-External/Remote Std Std Std Std Std Std
Call Forward-Fixed (CFF) Std Std Std Std Std Std
Call Forward Override Std Std Std Std Std Std
Call Park Std Std Std Std Std Std
Call Park Orbits Std Std Std Std Std Std
Call Pickup-Directed Station Std Std Std Std Std Std
Call Pickup-Holding/Parked Std Std Std Std Std Std
Call Pickup-Ringing CO Line Std Std Std Std Std Std
Call Pickup-Ringing CO Tenant
Groups 2 Groups 2 Groups 2 Groups 2 Groups 4 Groups 4 Groups
Call Pickup-Station Group 20 Groups 20 Groups 20 Groups 20 Groups 20 Groups 20 Groups
Call Transfer Immediate Std Std Std Std Std Std
Call Transfer with Announcement Std Std Std Std Std Std
Call Transfer with Camp-on Std Std Std Std Std Std
Centrex/PBX Feature Buttons Std Std Std Std Std Std
Continuous DTMF Signal Time
(DKT2000) Std Std Std Std Std Std
Std = Standard
Opt = Optional
N/A = Not Available
Table 4 Strata DK LCD Feature Availability
(continued)
Feature DK14 DK40I DK424
RCTUA DK424
RCTUBA/BB DK424
RCTUC/D DK424
RCTUE/F
Std = Standard
Opt = Optional
N/A = Not Available
System Overview
Feature Availability
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 9
Distinctive Station Ringing 3 Tones 3 Tones 3 Tones 3 Tones 3 Tones 3 Tones
Do Not Disturb (DND) Std Std Std Std Std Std
Do Not Disturb Override Std Std Std Std Std Std
DP/DTMF Mode Change (Tone
Button) Std Std Std Std Std Std
Exclusive Hold Std Std Std Std Std Std
Executive Override (Break-in) Std Std Std Std Std Std
Flash Button Std Std Std Std Std Std
Handset CW/Camp-on Tone On/Off Std Std Std Std Std Std
Handset Volume Control (DKT) Std Std Std Std Std Std
Handsfree Answerback on Internal
Calls Std Std Std Std Std Std
Headset Compatible Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt
Hearing-Aid Compatible Std Std Std Std Std Std
Line in Use (I-Use) Std Std Std Std Std Std
Line on Hold (I-Hold) Std Std Std Std Std Std
Microphone Control Button Std Std Std Std Std Std
Microphone Sensitivity Control
(DKT) Std Std Std Std Std Std
Off-hook Call Announce (OCA)
Handset Std Std Std Std Std Std
Off-hook Call Announce (OCA)
Speaker Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt
On-hook Dialing Std Std Std Std Std Std
Pooled CO Line Buttons Std Std Std Std Std Std
Privacy Button Std Std Std Std Std Std
Privacy Override Std Std Std Std Std Std
Privacy Release Button Std Std Std Std Std Std
Private CO Lines Std Std Std Std Std Std
Release Button Std Std Std Std Std Std
Release/Answer Button Std Std Std Std Std Std
Remote Retrieval of Held Calls Std Std Std Std Std Std
Repeat Last Number Dialed Std Std Std Std Std Std
Ringing Line Preference Std Std Std Std Std Std
Saved Number Redial Std Std Std Std Std Std
Speakerphone Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt
Station Speed Dial Numbers 40 40 40 40 40 40
Two Color LEDs – DKT Std Std Std Std Std Std
User Programmable Feature
Buttons Std Std Std Std Std Std
Table 5 Strata DK Station Feature Availability
(continued)
Feature DK14 DK40i DK424
RCTUA DK424
RCTUBA/BB DK424
RCTUC/D DK424
RCTUE/F
Std = Standard
Opt = Optional
N/A = Not Available
System Overview
System Administration Tools
10 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
System Administration Tools
Important and time-saving installation and support tools are available for use with Strata DK
systems. Installation and support is easier and more efficient for both Toshiba dealers and end
users. These PC software programs are easy to use with a menu-driven format and help screens.
DKQuote
DKQuote is an automated Strata DK system configuration software package that makes it easy for
you to determine which system components you need for configuration of a Strata DK system. Use
it for original installation or add-ons.
DKQuote is like an on-line worksheet that serves as a checklist that even tells you in which slot to
install circuit cards. You can insert your own prices that are password protected. It is great for:
♦Sales representatives preparing a bid using Strata DK14, DK40i, or DK424 systems.
♦Operations personnel ordering equipment.
♦Technicians doing installation planning.
This software package runs on your 486 or faster IBM-compatible PC with Windows 95.
DKAdmin
DKAdmin, a Strata DK14, DK40i, DK424 system programming and administration software
package, provides all the functions of DKBackup, plus it easily and efficiently enables you to do
off-line system programming from an IBM-compatible Pentium® PC with DOS 6.2 or above.
With DKAdmin you can:
♦Query the Strata DK system for all or specific programming functions.
♦Display or change all information for a single station, such as Toll Restriction Class, Auto
Busy Redial (ABR), Busy Override, telephone LCD names, and Speed Dial.
Note Queries and changes can be done by selecting from a program table, feature table, or
station ID/range/user name table.
♦Change programming for a range of stations for the same function or for specific individual
stations.
♦Save the complete Strata DK configuration programming information in a disk file on a PC the
same way as DKBackup. This saves customer data such as Speed Dial, numbering plan,
ringing assignments, station options, and LCD messages.
♦Save certain programming changes as templates for later use with the transfer data function.
This is valuable in re-creating a specific customer’s saved data for reloading, using file upload
capabilities. This also enables you to build a library of standard types of installations for use in
new installations minimizing programming effort.
DKAdmin requires the DKAdmin (red) copy-protection key and is not compatible with the
DKBackup (green) copy-protection key.
Using the backup function built into DKAdmin, the system configuration program options and
customer data is retrieved from the processor. The options and customer data are saved in a file on
your IBM-compatible PC, which is connected to the system using a PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU, RSIU,
TSIU (DK40i), or WSIU (DK14).
System Overview
System Administration Tools
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 11
DKAdmin then enables you to add or change customer data (both system-wide programming and
individual-station settings) using a PC independent of the Strata DK system. Password protection
enables multiple levels of access, so some users can only edit and change selected items in the
Strata DK database, while others can change all programs and station settings.
For example, DKAdmin provides a station administration menu that enables the end user to add,
delete, or change any Strata DK feature on a user’s telephone, such as telephone flexible buttons,
Speed Dial numbers, station class of service, station user LCD names, LCD messages, and more.
Using the restore function built into DKAdmin, the new data can be restored to the Strata DK from
the PC file, changing the customer program options and customer data, locally on-site or remotely
over telephone lines and modems.
DKAdmin makes it easy to maintain and update the end-user’s system and provides an efficient
way to backup and restore their current database. The DKAdmin software is easy to use with a
menu-driven spreadsheet format and help screens.
DKBackup
DKBackup is a Strata DK software package, which enables you to retrieve system configuration
program options (Speed Dial, numbering plan, ringing assignments, and station options) from the
system processor. It also saves the data in a file on your IBM-compatible PC (386/486 or faster
with DOS 6.2 or above), which is connected to the system using a PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU, RSIU,
TSIU (DK40i) or WSIU (DK14).
Customer data can be restored to the Strata DK by sending the data from the PC file to the new
initialized system, locally (on-site) or remotely, over telephone lines and modems. The backup
procedure can be performed for the whole customer database or selected individual parts
(programming options, System Speed Dial, Station Speed Dial, voice mail codes, user names, Call
Forward status, Message Waiting status, and Lost Call Caller ID and ANI telephone numbers).
DKBackup provides an efficient way to backup and restore the customer’s database. It also makes
an easy installation tool and is especially useful for providing software upgrades without having to
manually re-program everything.
It is easy to use because of its menu-driven spreadsheet format and help screens. The software is
available on a 3.5-inch floppy diskette operating in conjunction with the DKBackup (green) copy-
protection key which plugs into your 25-pin PC printer port.
StrataControl
StrataControl is a Windows-based PC tool designed to make simple system programming changes
to Strata DK40i and DK424 digital business telephone systems easy for end users.
StrataControl enables users to download information from their Strata DK system and make
programming changes using their PC. When the changes are completed, they are uploaded and
implemented in their Strata DK system. Both direct connection and modem access are available,
so customers have the added advantage of configuring systems remotely.
StrataControl enables customers to manage and store system programming information for
multiple systems in separate files. If the customer has multiple Strata DK systems, all of the
systems can be administered from the same StrataControl application. StrataControl provides the
ability to modify programming in the following categories.
System Overview
System Administration Tools
12 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
System Administration
♦Auto Attendant
♦Operating parameters
♦Account Codes
♦ACD
♦Call Park
♦Long distance parameters
♦Serial output parameters
Station Administration
♦Button assignments on telephones, add-on modules, DSS consoles, and Attendant consoles
♦Station group options
♦Station operating parameters
♦Station general options
♦Standard telephone options
Customer Data
♦Name assignments to extensions, CO lines, page groups, pick-up groups, and hunt groups
♦ACD functionality
♦Data station hunting
Printing and Output
♦Keystrips according to telephone station programming (prints on blank 2000-series DKT
keystrip stock available from Toshiba)
♦Digital Telephone User Guide
♦Custom Quick Reference Telephone Guide based upon station features and options assigned
within the system
♦Extension lists
CO Line Administration
♦CO line names
♦Ringing assignments
Important! StrataControl enables self-administration of the simpler aspects of programming
and maintenance. It does not contain and is not designed to accommodate the
complete installation and maintenance functions that the DKAdmin package
provides. StrataControl is designed for the end user and DKAdmin is designed for
the trained service technician.
System Overview
System Administration Tools
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 13
Keyprint 2000
Keyprint 2000, a keystrip printing software package, creates and prints custom button label
keystrips for 2000-series 10 or 20-button digital telephones. It runs on a 386 or faster PC with
DOS 3.3 and above and prints on laser or 24-pin dot matrix printers.
The software supports hundreds of different printers from lasers to dot matrix. It prints three
keystrips per sheet on the DKT 2000-series blank keystrip stock for output to small or large groups
of custom keystrips. It is easy to use with a menu driven format. You can display, change, and store
keystrip layouts to create a database of many keystrip varieties.
Keyprint 2000 is available on a copy-protected 3.5-inch floppy disk.
Strata AirLink Wireless Manager
The Strata AirLink™ Wireless Telephone System includes the Strata AirLink Manager
administration software that configures the wireless system and handset features on the controller.
The software runs diagnostics and enables the System Administrator to check Base Station status
and remove or restore service to the Base Stations. It also reports alarm conditions and provides
traffic statistics on Base Station channel usage throughout the system.
Available on 3.5-inch floppy disks, the software application runs under Microsoft Windows on an
IBM-compatible Personal Computer (PC). It is easy to use with a menu-driven format.
System Overview
System Administration Tools
14 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 15
Features 2
System Features
This section describes the system features for the Strata DK14, DK40i, and DK424. The features
apply to all these systems, except where noted.
Features
System Features
16 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Account Codes
Account Codes are 4~15 digits in length and are often used for cost allocation. The codes are
printed on a Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) printout with other call details, so that the
customer can identify all calls associated with a specific account code.
Forced Account Codes can be required on selected CO lines, which forces the assigned stations to
enter those account codes. Stations without the Forced Account Code feature can voluntarily enter
account codes on any incoming or outgoing call over any CO line. While account codes can also
be entered on incoming calls, the entry cannot be forced on these calls.
The Strata DK14, DK40i, and DK424 systems can have up to 300 Verifiable Account Codes which
can be forced or voluntary. DK424 systems with RCTUE/F processors can have up to 500
Verifiable Account Codes.
Stations and CO lines can have one of four possible account code features:
♦Forced Account Codes
♦Voluntary Account Codes
♦Forced Verifiable Account Codes
♦Voluntary Verifiable Account Codes
If Verifiable Account Codes are forced, the Strata DK system verifies the code entered by the user
before it authorizes the call.
Verifiable Account Codes can be set up in two ways:
♦All digits in the code can be verified. With this method, 300 (or 500 with RCTUE/F) specific
account codes can be verified. For example, if a 4-digit code is used, the system can verify 300
specific 4-digit numbers. If a 9-digit code is used, the system can verify 300 specific 9-digit
numbers.
♦The first “portion” of the code can be verified. This enables 300 specific verifiable “prefixes,”
which can then enable thousands of “partially” Verifiable Account Codes. For example, with a
5-digit code, there could be 300 verifiable 3-digit prefixes:
100 _ _, which verifies 10000, 10001, 10002, ... 10099 (100 codes)
101 _ _, which verifies 10100, 10101, 10102, ... 10199 (100 codes)
102 _ _, which verifies 10200, 10201, 10202, ... 10299 (100 codes)
•
•
•
299 _ _, which verifies 29900, 29901, 29902, ... 29999 (100 codes)
Each of the 300 verifiable prefixes partially verifies 100 codes, for a total of 30,000 partially
verifiable codes. This is an important capability to ensure valid accounts are being used while
allowing freedom to use sub-accounts for specific allocation of the call.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 17
A Verifiable Account Code can have a toll restriction class of service. When an account code is
entered at a station, the system checks the toll restriction class of service associated with that
account code, and then determines if the call is authorized.
The Account Code button can be programmed on an electronic or digital telephone to facilitate
voluntary account code entry during conversations without interrupting the talk path. It can also be
used to enter Verified Account Codes to enable normally restricted stations to dial long distance
calls.
Note The 911 emergency number and two other optional customer-designed numbers (up to
four digits long) can be assigned to bypass Forced Verified Account Code requirements.
Benefits
Account Codes control costs and ensure accurate billing to departments, clients, projects, or
individual employees. The advantage of using Account Codes for this purpose is that they register
on SMDR for tracking and reporting.
Forced and verified account codes can also be used in conjunction with Toll Restriction. Used this
way, they function as override codes or as traveling class of service codes.
Features
System Features
18 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Alarm Sensor
The Alarm Sensor is configured with a customer-supplied alarm. When the sensor detects that the
alarm relay is activated, it causes all telephones to sound an alert tone. Any station programmed
with the Alarm button (alarm reset) can reset the alarm on a Strata DK system.
Benefits
Conveniently controlled with an electronic telephone, so that you can have an alarm indication
wherever telephones are located. The source of the alarm is controlled from the device creating the
alarm indication.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Requirements
PIOU and PIOUS interface units are
optional on the DK40i/DK424
DDCB, Door Phone Control Box, can be
added to the DK14
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 19
Alternate Answer Point
Alternate Answer Point enables you to answer transferred CO line calls from any station that
shares the CO Line button appearance or secondary DN for the destination station.
Benefits
Ideal for employees who have high mobility and promotes efficiency and better service to callers.
It can also minimize the distraction caused by unanswered ringing phones.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
System Features
20 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Amplified Conference
One or more customer-provided automatic gain, switched, two-way line amplifiers can be
connected to proprietary station ports in the system. The amplifiers are automatically activated
whenever a user conferences two CO lines together. Up to two amplifiers can be connected on the
DK40i and up to four amplifiers on DK424 systems.
With Strata DK systems using Amplified Conference, there is negligible loss through the system,
and the amplifier compensates for loss in volume over the public network. Any customer-supplied,
two-way line amplifier that is FCC registered with Automatic Gain Control (AGC) should be
compatible. The Reliance Electric model VFR 5050 has been successfully used.
The amplifier increases signal strength between any two outside CO lines. If Tandem,
Call-Forward External, or Direct Inward System Access (DISA) CO line connections are provided
in the system, the CO line-to-CO line connection is amplified.
Amplified connections are available on a first-come, first-served basis. On Strata DK systems,
amplified conference is available to a standard telephone as well as digital or electronic
telephones.
Each amplifier requires two EKT station ports, and reduces the station capacity by two. The two
ports supporting the amplifier must be designated ports on a PEKU card. One PEKU supports one
external amplifier.
Benefits
Enables the external parties of a conference call to hear each other. Conference calls are shorter
and more efficient, since time is not wasted repeating inaudible parts of the conversation. Shorter
calls are cheaper calls. When conferees can hear clearly, they get accurate information.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK40i/DK424
Unavailable on DK14
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 21
Auto Attendant
Requirements
The built-in Auto Attendant feature acts as a round-the-clock attendant that automatically directs
incoming calls to stations. Calls can be answered simultaneously depending upon the number of
DTMF tone receivers are installed in the system (maximum of 3 in DK14, 5 in DK40i, and 24 in
DK424).
Callers who dial into assigned Auto Attendant lines receive a menu of dialing prompts, such as,
“Dial 5 for Sales or dial 6 for Technical Support.” When the caller dials the digit, the call routes to
a DN, ACD group, or Distributed Hunt group (assigned in system programming).
An unlimited number of CO lines can be programmed for immediate answer or delayed ring, such
as 12 or 24 seconds, at selected stations. Auto Attendant also enables access to outgoing lines by
using DISA, which should be security protected with Account Codes and/or a DISA security code.
CO lines that are assigned as Auto Attendant lines, in any of the system’s three time of day modes
(Day, Day 2, Night), can be assigned to ring stations or a night bell when the system is switched to
another mode. This enables calls to be manually answered until the Attendant requests the Auto
Attendant to answer all new calls.
Customer-provided digital announcement devices and optional QRCU3 (DK14), K5RCU (DK40i)
or RRCS (DK424) tone receiver PCBs are required. Multiple callers can be connected to one
digital announcer simultaneously as follows:
♦DK14 enables up to three caller connections
♦DK40i enables up to five caller connections
♦DK424 enables up to 24 caller connections
One DTMF receiver is needed for each caller.
The Auto Attendant can be programmed to answer on a delayed ring basis, which can be used for
overflow and secondary answering purposes. This enables callers to hear Music-on-Hold (MOH)
or Ring Back Tone (program option) after dialing a selection.
The system can have a primary announcement only, or a primary and secondary announcement.
The primary announcement is the initial greeting played to the caller usually providing dialing
instructions. The secondary announcement is automatically played if the selected station is not
available.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Requirements
QKYS (DK14), KKYS (DK40i), and
RKYS1~4 (DK424) PCBs
Not supported by Tie, DID, DNIS, or ANI
lines for any applications including ACD
Standard station ports for announcers
DTMF receivers for simultaneous answering
Ground and loop start lines
Features
System Features
22 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
From one to four primary announcers can be configured on a DK40i or DK424 system and one or
two on a DK14 system. Light or normal incoming call traffic and/or short announcements can be
handled by one or two announcers, while up to four can satisfy the demands of heavy traffic
applications and/or long announcements.
The DK424 can have one to four primary announcers and zero to four secondary announcers. The
DK40i can have a maximum of four announcers, and for the DK14, two announcers are maximum.
Each announcement is stored on a customer-supplied digital announcer connected to a standard
telephone station port.
Callers who are directed to a station that is busy or does not answer are routed to:
♦One secondary announcement which could inform the caller that the destination is unavailable
and repeat the menu.
♦The original announcement to hear the greeting and menu repeated.
♦Ring designated alternate stations.
Unanswered calls ring the final destination station until either:
♦A disconnect signal is received from the CO
...or, the call is disconnected by an optional Strata DK call timer
...or, the call is call forwarded.
If using loop start CO lines, reliable automatic release from hold must be available from the CO.
Ground start lines are preferred, because of better disconnect supervision. With T1, ground-start
lines must be provided.
Benefits
Extremely flexible with a single-level dialing menu and can have as many as 10 selections, each of
which can direct calls to specific stations, hunt groups, or ACD Groups (DK424 only). If the caller
knows the extension number wanted, quick and direct access is achieved. With Auto Attendant,
customers and employers are provided an option to specify how their calls are handled.
Twenty-four hour coverage means no need to worry about lunch and break coverage and provides
after-hours coverage. Also, overflow call coverage during peak traffic periods are handled
efficiently without requiring additional Attendants to answer calls.
Auto Attendant can process a larger volume of calls more quickly and efficiently than a live
Attendant. This provides incoming callers better overall service.
Three modes of ringing (Day, Day 2, Night) can be assigned for flexible answering by the built-in
Auto Attendant or the Attendant.
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 23
Automatic Hold Recall
When a station user puts a call on hold, the call automatically rings back to that station after a
programmable period of time. Hold recall time is normally set at 32 seconds, but can be
programmed from 11 to 160 seconds.
Benefits
Ensures that station users pick up calls that have been put on hold in a timely manner. Courteous
customer service dictates acknowledging the caller periodically and informing them about delays.
This feature can help a company project a professional, efficient, and courteous image.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
System Features
24 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Automatic Number Identification (ANI)
ANI displays the telephone number of the calling party on the LCD of a ringing telephone,
Attendant Console display, and/or sends it to an application computer or voice mail. The
information is displayed on direct incoming, transferred, and call-forwarded calls. The ANI
information continues with the call as many times as the active call is forwarded or transferred
within the system.
The system supports ANI on analog or digital (T1) DID and Tie
lines and provides helpful call identification information to
answering parties. A typical ANI display example is shown at the
right.
ANI is usually associated with “1-800” type calls offered by
various long distance carriers (except AT&T) through T1
facilities. However, the Strata DK also provides ANI information
received over analog DID and Tie line circuits. Either Sprint or
MCI ANI format is supported.
ANI data is routed to DNs, Distributed Hunt Groups, ACD groups, voice mail devices, and
external network numbers through external-call routing. ANI data on answered calls can be
displayed on SMDR reports. ANI numbers can be routed to different destinations during Day, Day
2, or Night mode.
ANI digits can be received independently or simultaneously with Dialed Number Identification
Service (DNIS) called number digits. When received with DNIS digits, calls can be routed to
unique destinations for each DNIS number (see Table 6 on Page 25). When ANI is received
without DNIS, all ANI calls ring the same selected destination.
Important! ANI is unavailable on Strata DK14 systems.
Abandoned Call Numbers
ANI data is stored in system memory for calls that ring, but are abandoned before being answered
so users see the telephone number of who called, even if the caller did not leave a message. LCD
telephone and Attendant Console users can display and Auto Dial the “abandoned call” ANI
numbers.
The DK424 system stores up to 2,000 ANI abandoned calls with
the RCTUE/F processor, up to 1000 on RCTUC/D, up to 400 on
RCTUBA/BB, and up to 200 on RCTUA. DK14 and DK40i can
store up to 200 ANI abandoned call numbers. Individual stations
can be programmed to store from 0 to 100 of the total ANI
abandoned calls in increments of 10. A typical ANI abandoned call
display is shown at the right.
System Availability
Unavailable on DK14
Optional on Strata DK40i with K5RCU and
DK424 with RRCS
CN:7145833700
LINE 3 RINGING
3026
3027
08/02 17:52
CN:7145836798
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 25
Computer Applications
For computer applications, ANI digits are sent to an individual PC connected using an Integrated
PC Data Interface Unit (RPCI-DI). It enables pop-up screens on the PC that provide information
regarding the calling/called party before answering and during the call.
Benefits
Provides instant information about the person calling to the station user and expedites call
handling by shortening the length of the telephone call. Most of the information that the caller
would have to provide is already available to the call taker.
Abandoned call information is available so station users know the telephone number and time/date
of the last call, even if the caller hung up without leaving a message. This provides better service to
callers and is a big productivity boost to call takers.
Table 6 ANI, Caller ID, and DNIS Routing Destinations
Routing Destination ANI Line
Calls
Caller ID
Line
Calls
DNIS
Line
Calls1,2
1. DNIS calls can be received independently or simultaneously with ANI “calling number” digits.
2. Not supported by DK14.
Tie & DID
Line Calls2
Ground2/
Loop Start
Line Calls
Individual Primary/Secondary/Phantom Directory
Number XXX X X
CO Line or pooled line buttons X X
Individual Distributed Hunt (DH) Group2XXX X X
Individual Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Groups XXX X X
Remote Maintenance/Administration (M&A)
Modem XXX X X
System external Page (Tie lines, private network
lines only) X
System night bell or night ringing over external
Page XXX X X
Intercept destination (station console
announcement) applies to DID line types only XXX
External telephone network numbers X X X X X
Voice mail box/Auto Attendant device X X X X X
Features
System Features
26 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Automatic Release From Hold
If an outside caller on hold hangs up, the system automatically disconnects the call and frees the
line for other calls. This feature applies to DISA, DNIS and/or ANI external routed calls, Auto
Attendant, and voice mail calls, as well as regular voice calls.
Automatic Release is available on a line-by-line basis, while on hold only or at all times, and
operates only with COs that provide a disconnect (calling party control) signal.
This feature is designed to work with loop start CO lines and is not available on T1 lines.
Benefits
Provides full use of all CO lines at all times. A CO line is not tied up if a station user puts the line
on hold and the caller hangs up before the station user returns to the call.
This is very useful for disconnect supervision in voice mail and built-in Auto Attendant
applications, but availability and reliability of the signaling from the CO must be confirmed.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 27
Background Music (BGM) Interface
A BGM/Music-on-Hold (MOH) RCA jack is built into the common control unit on DK14, DK40i,
and DK424 systems and connects a customer-supplied music source to the system. The music
source or sources is flexible, providing one music source for telephone and external speakers or a
separate source for each.
When BGM is broadcast over digital or electronic telephone speakers, no optional hardware is
required. The customer-supplied music source for both background music on telephone speakers
and MOH connects directly to the common control unit.
To connect BGM (separate music source) over telephone speakers, a station port should be
assigned. The required interfaces cards are:
♦DK14 – QSTU
♦DK40i – KSTU, RSTU, PSTU, PEKU, or PESU
♦DK424 – RSTU, RDSU, PSTU, PEKU, or PESU
When a music source is connected and this feature is activated, a station user can access BGM
through the speaker of a digital or electronic telephone. The music is turned on and off at the user’s
option using the BGM button or a dial access code. The user can also control the volume.
On DK40i and DK424 systems, up to three separate music sources can be connected to the system
at the same time. One source can broadcast BGM over digital or electronic telephone speakers, the
second broadcasts over external speakers, and the third provides music or a recording for MOH.
DK14 systems can support two separate music sources, one for MOH, and the other shared by
DKT and external speakers.
When the source input for BGM over external speakers is unamplified, a DK40i or DK424 system
can use the built-in, three-watt amplifier of an Option Interface Unit (PIOU or PEPU). Amplified
music output requires the PIOU or PEPU, or the music input source must be connected through an
external amplifier.
If an external paging system is installed, music can also be broadcast through the external paging
speakers, providing background music throughout the facility. Music on both the external speaker
and the telephones is muted when a paging announcement is made or when night ringing occurs.
Note There is an optional secondary interface.
Benefits
Provides music that is conducive to the work environment and enable employees to listen without
the conflict that can accompany the use of radios or tape recorders.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
System Features
28 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Caller Identification (ID)
On the DK14 system, the WSIU PCB provides an RS-232 interface to a customer-provided Caller
ID interface device (TC-1041). CO lines that receive Caller ID must be cross connected to the TC-
1041 (MLX-41) Caller ID interface box. The TC-1041 is available from TEL-CONTROL, Inc.,
P.O. Box 4087, Huntsville, AL 35815-4087, (205) 881-4000.
On the DK40i, the TCIU2, RCIU2 and RCIS PCBs provides four Caller ID circuits each. The
TCIU2 is used for base cabinet lines and the RCIU2/RCIS is used for expansion cabinet lines to
provide up to eight Caller ID interface circuits. A TCIU2/RCIU2/RCIS circuit must be available
for each line that is to receive Caller ID.
On the DK424, the RCIU2 provides four Caller ID circuits when installed at the factory; however,
an RCIS piggyback PCB can be installed on the RCIU2 to provide four more Caller ID circuits, for
a maximum of eight Caller ID circuits per cabinet slot. An RCIU2/RCIS circuit must be available
for each line that is to receive Caller ID.
The telephone number or name of the calling party can be displayed on the LCD of a ringing
telephone, Attendant Console display, and/or sent to an application computer or voice mail. The
information is displayed on direct, incoming, transferred, and forwarded calls. The Caller ID
information continues with the call as many times as the active call is forwarded or transferred
within the system.
A maximum of 10 telephone number digits can be displayed or sent to a computer, and a
maximum of 16 characters for the name. A typical Caller ID display with soft keys off is shown
below:
If both the name and number of the caller are sent by the COs, the name, rather than number,
appears on the top line of the LCD display. The name and number do not appear together on the
same LCD display. However, while the call is ringing, the user can press the Page button to toggle
the top line display from name to number and back. This enables the station user to see both the
name and number of the caller while the telephone is ringing. If the Caller ID feature is being used
in conjunction with a CTI application, both the name and number are sent to the TAPI application
computer.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Requirements
Caller ID/ground or loop start CO line PCBs
DK14 – WSIU PCB
DK40i – TCIU2, RCIU2 and RCIS PCBs
DK424 – RCIU2 and RCIS PCBs
JAKE JENSEN
LINE
3028
CN:7145833700
LINE 3 RINGING 3 RINGING
MODE MODE
PAGE SCROLL PAGE SCROLL
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 29
Caller ID, on ground or loop start lines, provides similar capabilities as ANI. However, Caller ID
in addition to the telephone number, can also provide the name of the caller, (if provided by the
local CO). Caller ID is a feature offered by local COs on ground or loop start lines, whereas, ANI
is delivered by long distance providers on digital (T1) or analog DID and Tie lines.
Note Caller ID is not available on analog DID, Tie, or digital T1 lines.
Caller ID data is routed to DNs, Distributed Hunt groups, ACD groups (DK424 only), voice mail
devices, and external network numbers through External Call Forward for private lines only.
Caller ID data on answered calls can be displayed on SMDR reports and routed to different
destinations during Day, Day 2, or Night mode.
Abandoned Call Numbers
Caller ID data is stored in system memory for calls that ring, but are abandoned before being
answered. This gives the user the name (if provided by the local CO) and telephone number of
caller, even if the caller did not leave a message. LCD telephone and Attendant Console users can
display and Auto Dial the “abandoned call” numbers.
The DK424 system stores up to 2,000 abandoned calls with the RCTUE/F processor, up to 1000
on RCTUC/D, up to 400 on RCTUBA/BB, and up to 200 on RCTUA3. DK14 and DK40i can
store up to 200 abandoned call numbers. Individual stations can be programmed to store from 0 to
100 of the total abandoned calls in increments of 10. A typical abandoned call display is shown
below:
Computer Applications
For computer applications, Caller ID digits are sent to an individual PC using an Integrated PC
Data Interface Unit (RPCI-DI). On DK424 ACD applications, the digits can also be sent to ACD
agents using a LAN computer with system open architecture if it has the Serial Interface Unit
(RSIU). It enables pop-up screens on the PC that provide information regarding the calling/called
party before answering and during the call. System open architecture requires Release 3.2 or
higher DK424 software.
Benefits
Provides instant information about the calling person. It expedites call handling by shortening the
length of the phone call. Most of the information that the caller has to provide is already available
to the call taker. Even abandoned call information is available, so station users know the phone
number, even if the caller hung up without leaving a message. This provides better service to
callers and is a big productivity boost to call takers.
3029
08/02 17:38
7145833700
08/02 17:52
2138794321
JAKE JENSEN
7145833700
Features
System Features
30 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Centrex/PBX Compatibility
Any Strata DK system can be installed behind a Centrex or PBX system. It can function as part of
the Centrex or PBX system while providing its users with the Strata DK features and digital
feature telephones.
To further enhance Strata DK compatibility with Centrex and PBX, access codes for features in the
host system can be programmed as if they were system Speed Dial numbers. These codes can then
be assigned to the Speed Dial button, also known as station Automatic Dialing buttons, providing
one-button access to the CO, Centrex or PBX feature. Each CO/Centrex/PBX feature access code
can have up to 20 digits, including pauses and flashes.
When a Strata DK system is installed behind a PBX, some or all of the CO/PBX line buttons
function like PBX extensions. When such a PBX line button is accessed, the station user receives
PBX dial tone, not CO dial tone. To access a CO line on the PBX, the user must dial an access
code. For example, “9” might be dialed to get a local CO line; Tie lines to other company locations
might be accessed by “72” or “73.”
A Strata DK system can be programmed to recognize these PBX access codes or disregard them
on identified lines when it inspects dialed numbers for toll restriction purposes or performs other
features such as Last Number Redial. This enables the system to continue to provide its features,
even when calls are ultimately going out from the PBX.
Benefits
Increased cost savings to the customer because the economical Strata DK systems can be used in
satellite locations. Users can take advantage of the Centrex and/or PBX features, the PBX
trunking, and the PBX networking capabilities.
Strata DK systems can also be used within a PBX environment to serve a community of interest
which needs the functionality of electronic telephone sets that may not be provided by the PBX.
Also, CO/Centrex/PBX feature buttons give users easy, one-button access to features that would
otherwise require more complicated access procedures. Since users do not have to look up feature
access codes, this saves time. Time wasting dialing errors can also be eliminated through the use of
feature buttons.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 31
Centrex Ringing Repeat
Strata DK systems can be programmed to reproduce Centrex or PBX ringing patterns, enabling the
user to differentiate between station or CO line calls and various callback features on the Centrex
or PBX line.
Benefits
Enables the user to hear the same on/off ringing patterns that are heard for special calling and
callback features on CO, Centrex, or PBX lines. Users do not have to learn new ringing cadences
and can easily differentiate between station or CO line calls or various callback features on the
Centrex or PBX line.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
System Features
32 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)
CTI combines the capabilities of the Strata DK digital business telephone system with custom
functionality provided by computer applications. This is provided through digital telephone
integrated PC interface. The PC must be running Microsoft Windows software.
Digital Telephone Integrated PC Interface
Toshiba 2000-series digital telephone can be connected to a PC, enabling routine simultaneous
voice and data switching applications and more robust CTI applications. The connection is made
with an RS-232 cable from a communication port on a PC to an RS-232 port on the digital
telephone.
The RS-232 port is provided by equipping the digital telephone with an integrated Personal
Computer Interface Unit (RPCI-DI). This is an optional unit that replaces the normal telephone
base.
Data switching applications enable users to make data calls to printers, PCs, and other data
devices. Users can also make voice calls using PC directory dialing software without the need of a
modem or an extra outgoing line. The system can also be programmed with one to four security
groups and can restrict calls between groups. It can also support modem pooling and printer
sharing.
For CTI applications, digital telephones can be connected to a computer with application software
using the TAPI to provide customized functionality. Any TAPI enabled PC software is compatible
with Strata DK systems. The most common use of this application is a database look up and
pop-up screens that contain calling party information. Caller ID, ANI, DNIS, and call-processing
information is passed from the digital telephone to the application computer, providing
information necessary for the look-up and pop-up screens.
StrataLink
The Strata DK can interface with computer applications that conform to Windows TAPI format.
The Toshiba StrataLink Telephone Service Provider Interface (TSPI) software enables the Strata
DK to communicate with TAPI applications. It is bundled with the RPCI-DI on a 3.5 inch, IBM-
compatible, floppy disk.
StrataLink software greatly enhances the use of the basic TAPI interface. It enables you to
customize the call-control functions of your PC application with many value-added capabilities,
such as:
♦Selecting how the PC application responds to the next call event.
StrataLink accepts call events from the telephone, applies call handling rules and conditions,
and causes resulting actions to take place in the PC application. You choose the rules and
conditions to customize how your application works.
♦Handling multiple telephone calls
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 33
Most TAPI compatible applications only respond to a ringing line for Caller ID database look
up and screen display so only one call is handled at a time. StrataLink enables the application
to respond to multiple calls and events that capture calls and when reconnecting to a held call.
You can delay the screen display while on another call or for a programmed amount of time.
♦Handling multiple PC applications from the same telephone. Incoming calls can activate
actions in different applications depending upon the type of call. For example, you can:
♦Generate a “customer database” application display of callers on your regular DNs
♦Use “help desk” application software generated from ACD calls
♦Beep your pager with Caller ID when you are away from your desk
♦Assign different applications to work on specific buttons on your telephone, or on all
buttons
♦Enhancing outbound calling
StrataLink provides for outbound telephone calling and call control from the PC application.
♦Setting up, testing, and monitoring are easy
StrataLink provides tools for testing the interface, debugging or monitoring the call events,
and setting up. Simply select from predefined tested applications and the proper interface is
automatically assigned.
Figure 1 is an example of the TAPI interface that connects the digital telephone to the PC in a
desktop integration application example. This is used when the database information resides in the
individual PC.
Figure 1 PC and Digital Telephone TAPI Interface Connection
Figure 2 is an example of the TAPI interface that connects the digital telephone to the PC and the
PC to the LAN server in a LAN application. This is used when the database information resides in
the server.
Strata DK
Features
System Features
34 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Figure 2 CTI Interface Connection
Benefits
Provides custom functionality for business telephone systems by combining the two technologies.
Users gain functionality that cannot be provided by the telephone or the computer by themselves.
Simultaneous voice and data transmission over a single-wire pair eliminates additional wiring
requirements and minimizes port usage on the system. For example, modem pooling and printer
sharing enables multiple users to maximize efficient usage of expensive peripheral devices.
PC keyboard dialing of data or voice calls increases user efficiency. Auto dialing by name from
directories stored in PCs equipped with inexpensive desk organizer-type software (modem not
required) is an example. Data security groups control who is authorized to make outside data calls,
which can get expensive if linked to databases which charge for access.
Telephone Connection
Strata DK
LAN Server
Physical Connection Between
Client PC and Telephone
LAN Backbone
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 35
Conferencing
Conferencing enables other people to join your conversation. These additional people can be
inside or outside the DK system. Any digital or standard telephone can set up conferencing with
other digital or standard telephones. The following combinations are available:
♦One or two stations and two outside lines
♦Two or three stations and one outside line
♦Four stations on one internal DN line
♦Voice mail plus one station and two other internal or outside line parties (DK424 only)
Note Amplified conference is available on DK40i and DK424 systems, but unavailable on the
DK14.
System-wide programming enables or disables Conferencing. The number of simultaneous
conferences are:
On DK40i and DK424 systems, the CO line conference can be amplified with a customer-supplied
two-way amplifier to improve the negligible loss encountered through the system over the public
network (see “Amplified Conference” for details).
The basic application of this feature enables a station user to call voice mail during a conference
call and play messages to all parties in the conference. The DTMF tones can be sent from any
DK424 station in the conference.
Benefits
Provides a convenience to business, because everyone participating in the conference gets the
same information at the same time reducing confusion and saving time.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
System Four-party Three-party
DK14 2 2
DK40i 3 4
DK424 RCTUA 3 4
DK424 RCTUBA/BB 7 10
DK424 RCTUC/D 7 10
DK424 RCTUE/F 14 20
Features
System Features
36 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Credit Card Calling (“0+” Dialing)
Callers can make “0+” telephone credit card calls from selected toll restricted stations. Calls are
billed to the credit card instead of the Strata DK CO line. The “0+” credit card calling feature can
be selectively assigned to stations and CO lines.
If a toll restricted station has the credit card calling feature, the Strata DK system requires the user
to enter a certain number (programmable) of digits after dialing “0” on a CO line that has the
feature. If the caller does not enter that number of digits within 20 seconds after dialing “0”, the
call is dropped.
If the system has LCR, a station that has the feature can place a “0+” credit card call on any CO
line accessed by LCR.
Benefits
Provides the convenience of “0+” telephone credit card calling without compromising toll
restriction.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 37
Delayed Ringing
A ringing delay of 12 or 24 seconds can be programmed for each CO line that rings at a given
station. For example, an incoming CO line can be programmed to ring at one station (or a group of
stations) immediately when the call comes in, and at a second station (or group of stations) 12 or
24 seconds later. It can be applied to ringing assignments for Day 1, Day 2, and Night ringing
modes. See “Night Transfer (Day/Night Modes)” for more information.
The Auto Attendant can be programmed to answer CO lines, either 12 or 24 seconds after stations
have been ringing. In this case, the telephones that initially ring, stop ringing when the Auto
Attendant answers.
For multiple DNs, the same capability as above exists for ground or loop start CO lines. For
internal, DID or Tie line calls, a different delayed ringing controlled by different system programs
is available. This means that secondary DNs can ring delayed after the PDN or PhDN. Or, the SDN
can ring first, followed by delayed ringing of 12 or 24 seconds at the PDN or PhDN.
Benefits
Improves call handling and call coverage by providing one or more alternate answering positions
for any incoming CO line or DN appearances. Calls have a greater chance of being answered
promptly.
Because of the delay in ringing, employees at alternate answering stations are not disturbed by
ringing while they wait to see if the called station answers. If the line rings at their station, they
know they should answer it. Delayed ringing on multiple DNs is perfect for “Boss/Secretary” call
coverage.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
System Features
38 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS)
DNIS identifies the called number and displays it on the LCDs of ringing telephones. The DK424
compares the received digits (DNIS tag) to a program table that determines how to route the call
and what display to provide. A 16-character alpha/numeric identifier is displayed on the ringing
telephone’s LCD or Attendant Console display.
DNIS digits can also be sent to an application computer. DNIS
names are stored within the Strata DK as defined by the user and
programmed into Strata DK system programming. The names
display on direct, incoming, transferred, and call forwarded
calls. This enables calls to be answered appropriately by type of
call. A DNIS display is shown below:
Figure 3 shows a sample overview of the call flow provided by the Strata DK DNIS capability.
DNIS is supported on digital T1 or analog DID and Tie lines. DNIS is typically used with “1-800”
type of calls using long distance carriers over T1, but can also be provided over analog DID and
Tie line circuits.
It is important to note that the Strata DK DNIS feature can treat all incoming local DID and Tie
line calls the same. It can treat them as incoming DNIS long distance 1-800 calls for the purpose of
routing these calls through the DNIS tables in the Strata DK. This is what makes DNIS such a
flexible feature.
DNIS enables multiple numbers to ring into the same line or line group, providing optimum trunk
usage as well as helpful called number/name identification information. This provides much more
efficient usage of lines than the traditional usage of 800 numbers. Traditionally, each 800 number
was assigned to its own line group, often resulting in a large number of under-used lines. The
Strata DK DNIS capability solves this problem by using each DNIS line on an as-needed basis for
different 800 number calls.
DNIS data is routed to DNs that can have multiple appearances, Distributed Hunt groups, ACD
groups (DK424 only), and external network numbers through external call routing. DNIS digits
can be received independently or simultaneously with ANI digits.
Each DNIS number can have its own voice mail ID code and can be routed to different
destinations during Day/Day2/Night mode.
The DK424 supports 500, 350, 200 DNIS numbers and 300, 200, 100 telephone network numbers
for the RCTUE/F, RCTUC/D, RCTUBA/BB, RCTUA, respectively. The DK40i supports 200.
System Availability
Unavailable on Strata DK14
Standard for dial pulse DNIS
Optional on DK40i/DK424 with DTMF DNIS
Requirements
Typically requires DTMF receivers
GINZU KNIFE S ALE
LINE 3 RINGING
0960
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 39
v
Figure 3 DNIS Examples
Day 1
Example Normal
Routing
Incoming
Number Day 1
Destination LCD Display
1209 201 Sales Dept
1210 202 Service Dept
1211 225 Credit Dept
1212 310 Production Dept
1213 350 Documentation
1214 555 Tech. Support
1215 420 Marketing
1216 430 Administration
1217 502 Engineering
1218 271 National Accts
Day 2
Example Routing to
Other Offices Still Open
Incoming
Number Day 2
Destination LCD Display
1209 801-1209 Sales Dept
1210 801-1210 Service Dept
1211 225 Credit Dept
1212 802-1212 Production Dept
1213 350 Documentation
1214 803-1214 Tech. Support
1215 420 Marketing
1216 430 Administration
1217 502 Engineering
1218 802-1218 National Accts
Night
Example Routing to
Outside Answering Service
Incoming
Number Night LCD Display
1209 1-714-555-2222 Company Name
1210 1-714-555-2222 Company Name
1211 1-714-555-2222 Company Name
1212 1-714-555-2222 Company Name
1213 1-714-555-2222 Company Name
1214 1-714-555-2222 Company Name
1215 1-714-555-2222 Company Name
1216 1-714-555-2222 Company Name
1217 1-714-555-2222 Company Name
1218 1-714-555-2222 Company Name
1219 1-714-555-2222 Company Name
1220 1-714-555-2222 Company Name
Destination can be:
• ACD group number (DK424 only)
• Distributed Hunt group number
• Station Directory Number
• Attendant Console
• Voice Mail or Auto Attendant port*
• External telephone network number
*
Stand-alone Auto Attendant, not Strata DK built-in Auto Attendant.
800-556-1212
800-556-1212
1212
CO
CO
1212
Strata DK
Caller dials the
telephone number.
The telephone company
CO receives and
passes on the
full number.
The local CO sends
the last four digits
to the Strata DK.
The Strata DK compares
received digits with the
programmed DNIS table to
determine routing and LCD
display.
3033
Features
System Features
40 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
External Telephone Network Numbers
All DNIS/DID/Tie numbers that ring into the Strata DK can be routed externally to any outside
telephone number. Depending on the application, the caller DNIS name may be passed to the
destination Strata DK when routed over the user’s end-to-end telephone network.
Voice Mail
If assigned in the system database, incoming calls for each unique DNIS/DID/Tie number can be
directly routed or call forwarded to a designated voice mailbox. This enables callers of each DNIS/
DID/Tie number to receive immediate, personal custom greetings. This feature is available using
in-band integration, but not available using SMDI.
Benefits
Enables the easy answering of calls appropriate to the type of call with the helpful call
identification information. For example, this is very helpful for answering services, executive
suites, or multiple product line sales applications. Also, optimum trunk usage saves money by
providing the same level of service with fewer “1-800” type lines.
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 41
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
DID enables incoming calls to ring a specific DN, or any number of stations which share a
common DN, without going through the answering position. Calls over a single DID line can reach
any one of a number of stations, ACD groups, or Distributed Hunt groups, depending upon the last
four digits of the telephone number dialed. DID lines can use DNIS programs to provide DID with
all DNIS features.
Each DID line has a single office code and a block of extension numbers that can individually ring
stations as assigned in system programming. DID lines can directly access the remote maintenance
modem, but not the Strata DK built-in Auto Attendant.
DID lines can optionally provide automatic camp-on busy when callers dial a busy station on
incoming DID calls. This feature provides a camp-on tone and distinctive LED flash at the busy
station.
If a second DID call is received at a busy station that has only one PDN button, the station user
hears muted camp-on tone, and the second call camps-on (assuming camp-on has been turned on).
If camp-on is off, the second caller hears busy tone unless forwarded to another station.
If a second DID call is received at a busy station that has more than one primary PDN button, the
station user has the option of hearing muted camp-on tone and the second call camp-on, or the
second call rings continuously on the other PDN button. This enables the station user to answer
multiple calls to their DID number, including transferred calls. Two appearances of the PDN are
recommended for this operation. Up to four PDN appearances may be used for some applications.
Outgoing calls can be made on two-way DID lines. However, ABR is not supported for those two-
way lines. DID lines can be either DTMF or dial pulse signaling. Also note that a secondary
protector is required for each DID circuit.
DID calls call forward externally if the station has Call-Forward External activated.
DID lines can be provided through analog circuits on the TDDU and RDDU interface or through
digital circuits on the T1/DS-1 RDTU interface. An optional DTMF tone receiver (K5RCU or
RRCS) is typically required for DID line DTMF operation.
Benefits
Provides efficient, direct calling to individual stations without going through the answer position
and reduces the load on call answering positions. It also gives “private line” service to many
individuals at a lower cost.
System Availability
Unavailable on DK14
Optional on DK40i/DK424
Requirements
Typicall requires DTMF tone receivers
Features
System Features
42 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
By calling in on a specific telephone number assigned to DISA, callers are connected directly to
the Strata DK system and can dial internal stations or outgoing CO lines without going through the
Attendant.
The caller dials the CO line number for DISA and hears two rings. Then a tone sounds for nine
seconds, during which the caller dials a station number or the access code for a specific outgoing
CO line or line group (“9” for LCR is not enabled). If the station or CO line is busy, the caller can
dial another station or CO line. If no station number or CO line access code is dialed and the nine-
second interval elapses, the call is transferred to a pre-assigned ringing arrangement (Day, Day2,
or Night).
An optional DISA security code (1~15 digits) can be programmed and is highly recommended in
all DISA applications. When the security code is programmed, the caller must enter it in order to
make outgoing DISA calls on CO lines. The security code is not required to dial internal stations.
Certain digital telephones selected in programming can revise the DISA security code.
A caller can also be required to enter a forced/verified account code (1~15 digits), along with the
DISA security code, to access to an outgoing CO line through the system. This can be used as a
secondary level of access security.
Strata DK systems can provide a DISA class of service to CO lines, which enables Toll Restriction
to be applied to DISA CO line calls. For example, outgoing CO line calls could be restricted to
local calls only when accessed through DISA. Any number of CO lines can be programmed with
the DISA feature. CO lines can be programmed as normal lines during daytime operation and
DISA lines at night.
The DISA feature can be accessed from the Strata DK built-in Auto Attendant by dialing “*”
during the Auto Attendant greeting. Whenever using the DK built-in Auto Attendant, the system
DISA security code should be used to prevent unauthorized calls through (into and out of) the
Strata DK system.
Benefits
Saves money because employees can use the company’s calling network even when they are not in
the office. Saves time because employees can call directly into the desired station without waiting
for the Attendant to answer. Reduces the Attendant’s incoming call load and enhances service.
Before and after hours, family members and others can use DISA to directly dial an employee’s
station, improving the chances that the employee receives the call.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Requirements
DTMF tone receivers
Loop and ground start CO lines can be
DISA programmed, but not DID and Tie
lines
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 43
Distinctive CO Line/Internal Ringing
Incoming CO lines ring with a different ring cadence than do internal intercom/DN calls. Users
can easily distinguish the type of call, even when the telephone is not in view. This feature works
with digital, electronic, or standard telephones.
Benefits
Conveniently identifies the type of call ringing the station. The station user can answer with an
appropriate greeting.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/ DK424
Features
System Features
44 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Door Lock Control
The Door Lock Control feature enables any telephone programmed with the Door Unlock button
to unlock a door. Pressing the button activates the electronic door lock, and the lock opens for three
to six seconds as specified in programming. The electronic door lock mechanism must be supplied
by the customer. The number of locks each system supports is:
♦DK14 – up to two locks
♦DK40i – up to three locks
♦DK424 – up to four locks with the RCTUA; all other processors support up to five locks
Benefits
Provides a great convenience by eliminating the need for extra equipment to remotely control the
lock, or the need to physically get up and go to the door to open it.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Requirements
DDCB PCB
DK40i/DK424 can use PIOU, PIOUS, or
PEPU
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 45
Door Phone
The optional door phone/monitor station is an external/remote two-way speaker box which has a
direct voice link to a station. A door phone is frequently mounted near a building entrance and
associated with a customer-provided door lock to help screen visitors. Pressing the button on a
door phone sends a distinctive ringing only to idle digital or electronic stations which have been
programmed to receive ringing from that door phone.
If all stations are busy, a muted ring is sent to the lowest numbered station programmed to ring.
When a station answers, it is automatically connected to the door phone. Door phones can be
programmed to ring over external page when the system is in Night mode.
A station can dial an individual door phone/monitor station and either converse with someone at
the door phone, or simply monitor conversation or sound at the door phone. No warning tone is
heard at the door phone/monitor station when it is called by a station.
Door phones are supported by the door phone/lock control box (DDCB) external module. One
control box supports up to three door phones. The DDCB requires one DKT station circuit on a
PDKU, RDSU, KCDU, or QCDU.
Door phones can be assigned to ring PDNs and/or PhDNs. The number of door phones is each
system supports is:
♦DK14 – up to six door phones
♦DK40i – up to nine door phones
♦DK424 – up to nine door phones with RCTUA, and up to twelve door phones with all other
processors
Benefits
Increases building security and employee safety, especially after hours. It can also provide a “hot
line” calling link between an office and such facilities as a warehouse or laboratory.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424 that
require DDCB PCB
Features
System Features
46 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
DTMF and Dial Pulse CO Line Compatible
Signals generated by pressing the dial pad buttons of a digital telephone are neither DTMF nor
rotary dial signals. The system can be programmed to translate these station signals to either
DTMF or rotary dial signals as required by the serving CO.
Each line is programmed individually for DTMF or rotary dial signaling. If a CO line is rotary, a
telephone or Attendant Console user can send DTMF tones as required, by pressing the Tone Dial
Select button (flexible program option).
The system can be programmed to enable or prevent DTMF tones from being returned to digital
telephones when a user dials on outside lines or sends DTMF digits to a voice mail device.
Benefits
Provides easy accommodation of both older, rotary CO and the newer touch-tone COs. In both
cases, the station user can still have the convenience and aesthetic appeal of a push-button phone.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 47
DTMF Signal Time Setting
For Strata DK systems, the Speed Dial and voice mail integration DTMF signal time can be set
independently at 80 or 160 ms in system programming for CO line dialing and for voice mail auto
dial digits. The standard setting for CO line dialing is 80 ms. The standard setting for voice mail
digits is 160 ms.
See also the station feature, “Continuous DTMF Signal Time.”
Benefits
Provides flexibility in meeting both the DTMF requirements of the serving CO and those of a
voice mail device. As a result, a customer can have faster connection time to the public network
and still accommodate voice mail systems.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
System Features
48 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
E911 Enhanced Operation
Strata DK14, DK40i, and DK424 systems support Enhanced 911 (E911) emergency services. This
feature uses special Centralized Automatic Message Accounting (CAMA) trunks to include the
Caller’s Emergency Service Identification (CESID) in the 911 call. The local carrier delivers the
CESID to the Public Safety Answering Position (PSAP) which uses it to determine the exact
location (building, floor, office number, etc.) from which the call is originating.
Notes
●Each station in the Strata DK may be programmed with a unique CESID. In some
jurisdictions, the CESID must be a valid directory number that the PSAP can call back if
disconnected. In many cases, this may require Direct Inward Dialing (DID).
●In order for the E911 feature to be effective, 911 calls and 9+911 calls must be dialed from a
digital telephone DN or from a single line telephone. 911 calls originated from the CO Line
button or the Pooled Line button bypass the adjunct equipment and go directly to the CO
exactly as dialed.
Enhanced 911 is distinguished from conventional 911 by providing more precise information
about the location from which the 911 call originates. A conventional 911 call is identified to the
PSAP by the listed directory number of the organization providing the multi-line telephone
systems. Emergency service workers cannot determine the precise location of the caller with
conventional 911 and this results in services being misdirected, time wasted, potentially and lives
lost. Enhanced 911 provides a unique CESID for each telephone using it to identify the location of
the caller within a large, multi-floor building, multiple buildings within a campus type
environment, or from an off-premise station that is terminated at a different address than the main
telephone system.
The CESID is delivered to the PSAP by the local carrier. The PSAP then uses the CESID to
interrogate an Automatic Location Identifier (ALI) database that returns precise location
information. Once translated, this information becomes associated with the emergency call and
can be shared with responding agencies such as police, ambulance, fire, etc.
Note In some jurisdictions, the business owner is responsible for maintaining accurate
information in the ALI database. Since Automatic Set Relocation allows telephones to be
relocated without the business owners knowledge, you may wish to turn Automatic Set
Relocation off.
For complete information on E911, please see the National Emergency Number Association’s
home page at http://www.nena.org. The “911 Tutorial” at that address is particularly helpful.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Requirements
DK14/DK40i/DK424 - adjunct equipment
DK424 - RMCU/RMCS PCB
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 49
Strata DK14 and DK40i systems support the E911 feature through a standard telephone port to an
external, third party system. The third-party E911 adjunct system provides translation and
signaling of the correct CESID location information to the 911 PSAP.
The Strata DK424 system supports the E911 enhanced locator service through either external
adjunct equipment or the CAMA Trunk Interface Unit (RMCS). The RMCS is a special CO line
card installed in a card slot. A system will support up to four trunks. Excess calls will route as
standard 911 calls over local trunks.
The CAMA card solution provides internal notification. When a 911 call is connected to the
PSAP, the Strata DK will ring designated stations and attendant consoles and present CESID
information in the displays. When a notified station answers the call, a three-way conference is
established between it, the calling party and the PSAP. The SMDR port generates two call records:
one at the beginning of the call and one at its termination.
Note The FCC is in the process of defining national standards for E911 compatibility, but there
is no official due date. At present both legal and technical requirements vary significantly
by state and readers are advised to contact local emergency service providers and
telephone companies for detailed requirements.
DK14 and DK40i Operation
Strata DK14 and DK40i systems support E911 operation by forwarding 911 calls and 9+911 calls
to designated standard ports to interface with external, third-party, translation equipment. The
systems provide up to two standard telephone ports for this purpose. The external interface
connects a standard telephone port to a CAMA trunk and provides multi-frequency (MF) signaling
and translates the DN from the Strata DK to CESID.
The interface between the third-party adjunct equipment and the E911 tandem CO must use
special CAMA trunks. These specialized trunks are ordered through the special ordering desk of
your local phone company.
DK424 Operation
In addition to the external solution, the Strata DK424 system supports the E911 service through the
CAMA Trunk Interface Unit (RMCU/RMCS), a special CO line installed in a card slot. The
CAMA Trunk Interface Unit (RMCU) supports two CAMA Trunk Subassemblies (RCMS) that
support two CAMA trunks each. Software in the DK424 performs the CESID translation and
signaling.
Adjunct Equipment Suppliers
Two companies have been identified that supply the E911 adjunct translation systems -Proctor and
Associates, Redmond, WA (800) 824-9719; and Telident, Inc., Minneapolis, MN (800) 536-4911.
Information regarding the E911 adjunct interface equipment can be found in the Strata DK
Installation and Maintenance Manual.
Benefits
Enables the Strata DK to conform to most regulatory environments. The agency responding to the
911 call gets location information that makes it easier for them to find the right location within the
facility. This provides faster emergency service to those needing it.
Features
System Features
50 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
External Amplified Speaker
The External Amplified Speaker (HESB) is a six-inch, three-watt speaker with a three-watt
amplifier built into a wooden speaker box. It can be used to:
♦Amplify the ringing on a digital or electronic telephone.
♦Provide a paging amplifier/speaker.
♦Create an amplified talk-back speaker arrangement in an area where a telephone is not needed.
The HESB is installed as a speaker and connected to a door phone unit that is used as the talk-
back microphone.
The number of HESBs that can be installed per system depends on the function of the HESB. Any
number of HESBs can provide loud ringing bells for electronic or digital telephones. Only one
HESB can be installed if it is used as a paging or an amplified talk-back speaker.
Note Digital or electronic telephones, an HHEU2 interface, and an HESC-65A cable are
required for each phone that has a loud ringing bell. A 2000-series digital telephone that
has been upgraded with a data interface unit can be upgraded with the HHEU2 options but
older telephone models cannot.
On DK40i and DK424 systems, the PIOU or PEPU Option Interface Unit is required when an
HESB is used as a paging/amplifier speaker or an amplified talk-back speaker.
Benefits
Provides several options to make a communications system more efficient. A loud ringing bell can
improve call handling in noisy areas where non-amplified ringing on a phone may not be heard.
A paging speaker ensures that paging announcements can be clearly heard throughout an area. In
an area where a DKT is not needed, a talk-back speaker provides a cost-effective communications
solution.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Requirements
HESB and HHEU or PIOU/PEPU (paging)
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 51
Flexible Button Assignment
On both 10-button and 20-button telephones, one button is usually assigned to the Intercom/PDN
function. In some cases, the Automatic Off-hook Selection feature is programmed to select the
Intercom line, eliminating the need for an Intercom/DN button.
The other buttons can be assigned to a CO/PBX line or to certain features. Some possible
assignments are:
♦CO/PBX Line Button – If the telephone is being used in conjunction with a DSS console, all
buttons could be used as CO/PBX buttons.
♦Pooled Line Button – Enable a group of CO lines to appear under one button. Up to four
Pooled Line buttons per CO line group can be assigned at each telephone. See “Pooled CO
Lines” for more information.
Table 7 lists the features that can be assigned to flexible buttons.
There are several standard keystrip patterns that can be programmed to make button assignments
easy. Buttons on individual stations can then be changed from the standard keystrip pattern
selected for that station. Strata DK systems have four keystrip patterns from which to choose (A,
B, C, and D).
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Table 7 Assignable Features
Feature Name
Account Codes Alarm Reset Alert Signal
All Call Voice Page Alphanumeric Messaging Automatic Busy Redial
Automatic Callback (Internal Calls) Background Music (BGM) Interface Call Forward – All Calls
Call Forward – Busy Call Forward – Busy/No Answer Call Forward – External
Call Forward – Fixed Call Forward – No Answer Call Park
Call Park LCD Display Call Park/Page Call Pickup (Directed)
Call Pickup (Group) Call Pickup 1~4 (Tenant 1~4) Data Release
Caller Identification (ID)/ANI Data Do Not Disturb (DND)
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Directory Numbers
(PhDN, PDN, SDN) Locked Automatic Dialing
Door Unlock 1~5 DTMF/Rotary Signal Selector
(Tone Key) LCD Message
Flash Handset OCA Lost Call Auto Dial
Modem Night Transfer (Day/Night Modes)
(Tenant 1~4) Night Transfer Lock
Pause (1.5, 3, or 10 Seconds) Pooled Line Group 1~16 Privacy
Privacy Release Release Released Answer
Redial Last Number Saved Number Redial Speed Dial Select
Speed Dial Pause and Long Pause Station Speed Dial Codes Tone (DTMF/Rotary Signal
Selector)
Message Waiting for PhDNs Microphone Cutoff
Features
System Features
52 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
However, on 10-button and 20-button telephones, Flexible Button Assignment enables the
programmer to define each of the buttons instead of choosing a standard keystrip pattern and then
changing individual buttons. Any button which is not programmed for a specific feature or CO line
is automatically assigned per the initialized pattern.
The use of the “Keyprint 2000” PC software package now makes custom keystrips easy to create
and print.
Benefits
Flexible Button Assignment enables each phone to be customized to the particular needs of the
station user. The system can be tailored to fit the business communication needs.
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 53
Flexible Intercom/DN Numbering
Flexible Intercom/DN Numbering enables a station intercom or DN, including the numbers for the
Attendant stations, to be any number from one to four digits long. The intercom/DN does not have
to correspond to the fixed station location number in the Key Service Unit (KSU).
The maximum number of available unique station DNs (PDNs plus PhDNs) are listed below:
♦DK14 - up to 20 unique station DNs are allowed
♦DK40i - up to 56 unique station DNs are allowed
♦DK424 - up to 672 unique station DNs are allowed
Single-digit DNs, such as “0”, can be assigned to Attendant Consoles or Attendant telephones.
Benefits
Enables a consistent numbering plan for and facilitate the efficient use of a business’
communications system when the system includes several different types of telephone systems.
Branch offices which have Strata DK systems can have the same numbering plan as larger offices
using PBXs.
In the case where a system is being used behind Centrex, intercom numbers/DN can match
Centrex numbers.
If a Strata DK system is replacing a system that had a three- or four-digit numbering plan, the same
plan can be used with the new system, eliminating the need for new directories and new extension
numbers.
Finally, if the Strata DK system is being used with a voice mail system that has three- or four-digit
mailbox numbers, the extension numbers can match the mailbox numbers.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
System Features
54 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Flexible Line Ringing Assignment
Each incoming CO/PBX line that appears on a given station can be programmed to either ring or
not ring at that station. Each CO/PBX line can be programmed to ring at any number of electronic/
digital telephones. Thus, the number of ringing electronic/digital telephones per CO line is limited
only by system size. In the DK424, a maximum of 120 phones can ring at one time.
Each CO line can be programmed to ring the Auto Attendant, night bell, DISA, remote
maintenance modem or any station DN in the system. A different ringing assignment can be
created for each of three ringing modes – Day, Day2 or Night. Also, stations assigned to ring can
do so with any of the following timing designations.
♦Immediate
Stations assigned Immediate timing ring as soon as the line rings into the system.
♦Delay 1
If stations with Immediate timing have not answered within 12 seconds (3 rings), stations
assigned Delay 1 timing also begin ringing. Immediate Ring telephones continue to ring when
Delay 1 Ring telephones ring.
♦Delay 2
If the above stations have not answered within 24 seconds (6 rings), stations assigned Delay 2
timing also begin ringing. Immediate and Delay 1 Ring telephones continue to ring when
Delay 2 Ring telephones ring.
A related feature, Night Transfer, enables programming of up to three different CO line ringing
patterns (Day, Day 2, and Night). The ringing pattern can be controlled by any station programmed
with a Night Transfer button. In tenant service, there are two Night Transfer buttons on DK14 and
DK40i systems and four on the DK424.
If a DK system is being used in tenant service, each tenant can separately define and control three
ringing patterns using the Night Transfer1~4 buttons.
Benefits
Provides the flexibility to define CO ringing arrangements to fit the needs of the business. Calls
can get to their destination quickly. CO/PBX lines can ring directly to a station or group of stations
in a specific department, without going through a central Attendant. This reduces the Attendant
call load and enables better service to callers. Flexible Line Ringing Assignment also enables the
use of private lines in the system, and is used for tenant service.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 55
Flexible Slot Assignment
The flexible slot architecture on DK424 systems enables almost any combination of CO line and
station ports. Slots in the KSU can be assigned as station, CO line, or Option Interface slots in a
variety of custom configurations. All stations, CO lines, and optional printed circuit boards are the
same size and use the same connector to mount into the backplane of the base or expansion Key
Service Unit cabinet.
Any printed circuit board can be installed in any slot, with the exceptions of the RCTU common
control unit, which goes in designated processor slots, and the PDKU or PEKU which must be
installed in slot 11 if RSIU is not used. If RSIU is used, RSIU must be installed in slot 11, in this
case a PDKU or PEKU must be installed in slot 12 of the DK424 to enable system programming
and system administration functions.
Benefits
Increases the variety of line/station combinations, so a customer can have a system that is sized
and tailored to meet their specific needs.
System Availability
Unavailable for Strata DK14
Standard on DK424
Available on DK40i (expansion cabinet only)
Features
System Features
56 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Ground Start Lines
Ground start lines provide better trunk supervision for disconnect signaling than loop start lines.
This is particularly valuable in voice mail, Auto Attendant, and ACD applications. It also greatly
reduces the possible collision of incoming and outgoing pooled line groups calls.
Individual circuits on the RGLU ground/loop start interface unit or RDTU T1 interface unit can be
configured individually for loop start or ground start, and for DTMF or dial pulse signaling, thus
maximizing performance and configuration flexibility on a line-by-line basis.
Benefits
Provides flexibility in choosing the best type of lines for the customer’s application and assists in
gaining the performance characteristics they require.
System Availability
Unavailable for Strata DK14
Optional on Strata DK40i/DK424
Requirements
Analog - one RGLU for groups of four lines
Digital - T1 Interface (RDTU)
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 57
Hotline Service (Emergency Ringdown)
Analog single-line telephones can be programmed so that when the user goes off-hook, they
automatically ring a designated extension without dialing. The receiving station or Attendant
console displays the station name/number of the off-hook calling station.
This feature is very useful for hotel/motel applications, in which lobby or public area telephones
either do not have dial access, or for convenience, automatically call the front desk.
This feature is also very useful for healthcare applications. If an analog single-line station is left
off-hook and fails to complete the dialing of a valid number within a programmable time period,
continuous ringing occurs at a designated extension.
Benefits
Provides convenience and service to hotel/motel guests calling from lobby or public area
telephones. In healthcare applications, emergency ringdown operation assists callers who may not
be able to complete the call by dialing.
System Availability
Unavailable for Strata DK14
Standard on Strata DK40i/424 (only works
with SLTs, not DKTs)
Features
System Features
58 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI)
BRI is the smaller capacity ISDN interface, providing two simultaneous voice or data connections.
BRI uses the 2B+D transmission format which is defined as two 64 kbps bearer channels and one
16 kpbs data (control) channel.
The two B-channels can also be combined for data transmission at speeds up to 128 kbps. The D-
channel carries call setup control data and can also be used as a third connection for packet data
transmission when using an external NT-1.
ISDN BRI services are designed mostly for end-user station interfaces. The system can connect
group IV faxs, PCs, computer terminals or ports, LAN bridges and routers, video conferencing
terminals, or other devices that can benefit from an all digital transmission link.
The DK40i and DK424 system also supports BRI interface from the public network as CO line
service. The station-side connection supports multi-point multiple device connection to the same
BRI circuit. Applications that are supported include:
♦Video conferencing
♦Remote access servers
♦Faster Internet access
♦High-speed data connections to the public ISDN network, as well as typical voice and fax
connections
♦Calling Number ID services
♦DID
Calling Number ID services are provided through the D-channel function of ISDN’s out-of-band
signaling format. The ISDN link sends the Caller ID for the service originating the call. This
number can be the listed DN, DID number, or a private line number used for billing, as well as
identification to the called location. Caller ID blocking and screening are available options.
Incoming calls are identified by Caller ID and the information is used in the DK424 like ANI.
DNIS information is also provided over ISDN lines.
The Strata 40i supports the BRI interface by installing the Basic Rate Interface Unit S/T (TBSU) in
the base cabinet. The TBSU provides two BRI S/T (four wire) interfaces that can be independently
used for network- or station-side connections.
The following BRI S/T Interface cards are supported by DK424 Release 4.1 and higher systems.
The DK40i also supports these interfaces in the expansion cabinet:
♦Basic Rate S/T Interface Unit (RBSU) provides two BRI S/T (four-wire) interfaces that can be
used for network- or station-side connections. It has connectors for a two-port add-on
subassembly.
System Availability
Unavailable for Strata DK14
Optional on Strata DK40i/DK424 (Release
4.1 and higher)
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 59
♦Basic Rate S/T Interface Subassembly (RBSS) attaches to the RBSU to provide two additional
BRI S/T interfaces that can be used for station-side connections only.
The combination of the RBSU and the RBSS subassembly can provide four BRI interfaces in one
card slot.
Note Network connections using BRI S/T interface require a customer-supplied external NT-1
device.
The following BRI U Interface cards are supported by DK424 Release 4.2 and higher systems:
♦Basic Rate U Interface Unit (RBUU) provides two BRI U (two-wire) interfaces that can be
used for network- or station-side connections. The RBUU has connectors for a two-port add-
on subassembly.
♦Basic Rate U Interface Subassembly (RBUS) attaches to the RBUU to provide two additional
BRI U interfaces that can be used for station-side connections only.
The combination of the RBUU and the RBUS subassembly can provide four BRI interfaces in one
card slot.
ISDN Applications
ISDN features can be employed in many useful applications.
♦Calling Number Services: The Signaling System 7 (SS7) communications network supports
ISDN PRI trunks across various CO switching systems by providing end-to-end digital
connectivity. In a calling number service application, for example, this extends calling number
information across the entire Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) by passing this
information across the various CO switching system nodes. Calling number information is
very important in CTI applications.
♦High Speed Data: Performance improvement (speed and accuracy) and connectivity is
becoming a major factor in ISDN data-related applications. For example, a computer database
interface works well on ISDN lines for large capacity file transfer, high resolution graphics
transfer, online transaction processing, and information retrieval applications. ISDN provides
better performance for these applications which require faster call setup and network response
times than older, more restrictive analog networks can provide. ISDN also provides higher
data accuracy than today’s analog network.
♦Video Conferencing: Color video transmission requires greater bandwidth and flexibility for
video conferencing and related applications. Video conferencing systems integrate cameras,
displays, CODECs, and control units. The CODEC can set up various transmission rates
between 64 kbps and 1.5 Mbps, as required.
♦Video Telephones: Video phones can transmit voice and image simultaneously with ISDN.
Transmission of still images at high speeds is easy, as well as color moving picture
communication among several parties. This integrates a telephone, a video camera with an
image sensor, and a small color LCD display.
♦Multi-device Connection: Up to eight devices can share one ISDN BRI line using station-side
connections. For example, one line can accommodate two phones and multiple PCs or fax
machines. The station interface is limited to two DNs. With conventional analog service, two
lines are required to transmit data and talk on the phone at the same time, unless a Data
Interface Unit (DIU) is used. The customer saves money by sharing CO line resources and is
provided the benefits of higher speed.
Features
System Features
60 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
♦Multiple LAN Link: Linking multiple LANs together, using ISDN, is very efficient at the 64
kbps high-speed rates, and data transmission over the digital network provides extremely high-
data accuracy. This would replace the typical LAN bridge and modems in use today, which are
much slower and provide less data accuracy via the analog network. The DK40i and DK424
support BR1 station-side connection of access router devices used in these applications.
♦High Speed Fax: G4 Facsimile offers high-speed and high-image quality. G4 Fax machines do
not have to be isolated within a stand-alone system. Many G4 Fax machines can also
communicate with G3 Fax machines, because the connection with existing networks is
handled by the ISDN side.
♦Telecommuting: The idea of employees working at home is a much more effective and
practical option with ISDN services. The employees have access to office technology
necessary to make them work almost as effectively at home as in the office.
♦Resource Sharing: Local network functions, such as printer sharing and modem sharing, are
supported by connecting these devices through terminal adapters. Users can share equipment
regardless of location. It also eliminates the need for dedicated connections, since all network
resources are available on a dial-up basis.
♦ISDN BRI through Centrex: This is offered by many local exchange carriers, who offer both
Centrex and ISDN lines. Blending the calling features of Centrex with BRI provides many
customized capabilities. Examples are Caller ID, and the ability to set up data calls between
parties using the 64 kbps B-channel without the need for lower speed modems.
♦Carrier Gateway: This is the general “catch all” category that connects anything to anything
over the PSTN. Using ISDN for this purpose provides speed, accuracy, and connectivity
advantages for applications like Internet connection, e-mail, Telex, Voice Mail, and Fax
forwarding.
Benefits
Faster call setup times make ISDN call connections faster, because a separate modem-type of
communication with the public network is used. Calls using analog connections or T1 digital
connections can take several seconds longer before the call connection is made, because they send
DTMF tones and wait for audible tones in return.
Immediate Caller ID is provided on ISDN calls, because Caller ID is transmitted with each call
setup message. This makes Caller ID information immediate rather than waiting for this
information to be sent after starting the ringing process as with analog lines.
Higher speed digital data connection is possible on a BRI connection to the ISDN network.
DID-type functionality enables direct incoming calls to be routed and ring at designated
telephones according to the number dialed. This provides DID functionality over ISDN lines
without the additional expense of purchasing a block of numbers from the telephone company and
subscribing to DID service.
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 61
ISDN Primary Rate Interface (PRI)
PRI is the larger capacity ISDN interface, providing 23 simultaneous voice or data connections.
PRI uses the 23B+D transmission format which is defined as 23 64 kbps bearer channels and one
64 kbps data (control) channel, with total bandwidth of 1.536 Mbps.
ISDN PRI is designed as the bulk trunk interface to the ISDN network. PRI connects the DK424
telephone system to an intra- or inter-LATA communication provider. PRI can be used to send and
receive voice and data.
PRI can save money by enabling the multiple use of the channels on the PRI link for a variety of
services on demand, such as DID, Tie, FX, WATS, 800, etc. This capability to support multiple
services and dynamically allocate channel use as needed is known as the call-by-call feature and is
described in more detail below. PRI lines also support the Calling Number ID Services also
described below.
ISDN PRI is supported in the DK424 system by using the Primary Rate Interface Unit (RPTU).
The RPTU is a 24-channel PRI card providing 1 data (control) channel and 23 bearer channels. All
B-channels appear and program as CO lines in the DK424 system and can be individually
configured for local service, FX, WATS, DID, Tie line, etc. service operation. Network connection
using PRI interface requires a customer supplied external Channel Service Unit (CSU).
The DK424 provides the following ISDN PRI features:
♦Call-by-Call Service Selection permits the grouping of individual PRI B-channels to be shared
among various types of services specified by the customer, instead of having to dedicate each
channel to a particular type of service. For example, when using standard (POTS), DID, Tie,
FX, WATS, and 800, the line circuits (individual or groups) of B-channels of a PRI circuit can
be designated to these various services dynamically on a call-by-call basis.
B-channels can be dynamically allocated among services on a demand basis, depending on
varying requirements for outgoing and incoming calls. This could also be used for voice or
data on demand. This dynamic allocation of service can reduce the number of circuits required
to access various services, especially if different services have peak busy periods at different
times of the day.
Release 4.2 enables a minimum and maximum number of B-channels to be used for each
service on this common set of B-channels in system programming. Each of these values can be
set for three time periods during the day. With these values, calls can be rejected if they exceed
the maximum number subscribed for that service or they can ensure that a minimum number
of channels remain available for incoming calls. Thus, the system can be used to provide an
optimum service to meet the objectives of the business.
♦Non-facility Associated Signaling increases traffic handling on PRI lines. A single 64 kbps D-
channel on one PRI line can be used to handle the signaling for two PRI lines on the DK424
system, instead of the usual signaling that requires one 64 kbps D-channel for each PRI line.
System Availability
Unavailable for Strata DK14/DK40i and
DK424 using RCTUA processor
Optional on Strata DK424 using RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D or RCTUE/F processors
Features
System Features
62 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
This is very important when using the Call-by-call feature to enable trunk groups larger than
the 23 B-channels available on one PRI line. This extends the number of call-by-call B-
channels to 47 (2 x 24 -1) and extends the number of B-channels on the second (non-signaling)
PRI line from 23 to 24. This provides better performance and cost savings in high volume
ISDN PRI applications.
♦Calling Number Services are provided through the D-channel function of ISDN’s out-of-band
signaling format. The ISDN link sends the Caller ID for the service originating the call. This
number can be the listed directory number, DID number, or a private line number used for
billing, as well as identification to the called location. Caller ID blocking and screening are
available options. Incoming calls receive the Caller ID from the caller and is used in DK424
like ANI. DNIS information is also provided over ISDN lines.
Calling Number Services can be divided into four different types:
♦Number Provisioning for outgoing calls is controlled by subscription parameters with your
telco provider. The choice is for the number to be necessary or not. The number sent is
based on the call originator and the call type. The originator can be a tandem call, a station
(with or without DID), or a station with a designated number. The type of call refers to
whether it is direct or redirected (call forwarded).
For a tandem call, the Calling Party Number digits received are the digits that are sent. For
a direct station call, the default number assigned to the selected service and which is
programmed into the Strata DK as the Listed Directory Number are the number that is
sent. In this case, the system can send a fixed number (assigned in the system) or it can use
the DID programming to determine he number to be sent.
♦Number Screening is a feature of the public network. This is normally performed by the
network to ensure the call being placed has a valid billing number for the call. In systems
with a flexible Calling Number Provisioning, the network can perform the screening of the
call to ensure the number provided is valid for billing or reject the call, rather than
completing the call and billing it to the default Listed Directory Number.
♦Number Privacy enables the caller to prevent the public network from delivering the
Calling Number to the called party on a per-call basis. Service subscribers can request
from the public network that the number be presented or not as a default. Subscribers can
also select the ability to change or not change the default settings. If a public telco service
enables changes to be made, then a user can enter change a code to the setting for that call
after selecting a trunk group.
♦Number Delivery sends the calling number with the call setup message to indicate who is
calling, if that number is not blocked. When the Strata DK receives this number, it is
handled the same way that ANI information from T1 trunks is handled. i.e., The number
displays on the called telephone’s LCD, or it can be used by TAPI interfaces, or recorded
in SMDR data records, etc.
Note Name Delivery is not currently supported due to the lack of a common specification for
the public ISDN network.
ISDN Applications
♦Calling Number Services: The Signaling System 7 (SS7) communications backbone network
supports ISDN PRI trunks across various COs. ISDN depends upon SS7 out-of-band D-
channel signaling control to provide end-to-end digital connectivity. In a calling number
service application, for example, this extends calling number information across the entire
PSTN by passing this information across the various CO nodes. Calling number information is
very important in Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) applications.
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 63
♦High Speed Data: Performance improvement (speed and accuracy) and connectivity is
becoming a major factor in ISDN data related applications. For example, computer database
interface works well on ISDN lines for large capacity file transfer, high resolution graphics
transfer, online transaction processing, and information retrieval applications. ISDN provides
better performance for these applications which require faster call setup and network response
times than older, more restrictive analog networks can provide. ISDN also provides higher
data accuracy than today’s analog network.
♦Video Conferencing: Color video transmission requires greater bandwidth and flexibility for
video conferencing and related applications. Video conferencing systems integrate cameras,
displays, CODEC, and control unit. The CODEC can set up various transmission rates
between 64 kbps and 1.5 Mbps, as required.
♦High Speed Fax: G4 Facsimile via ISDN offers high speed and high image quality. G4 Fax
machines do not have to be isolated within a stand-alone system. Many G4 Fax machines can
also communicate with G3 Fax machines because the connection with existing networks is
handled by the ISDN side.
♦Telecommuting: The idea of employees working at home is a much more effective and
practical option with ISDN services. ISDN can provide employees working at home access to
office technology necessary to make them work almost as effectively at home as in the office.
♦PRI Static Integrated Network Access: Designed to eliminate the cost of maintaining separate
access lines for private-line services and switched services. The traffic over the two types of
access lines can be combined over the same access line.
♦Resource Sharing: ISDN lines can support local network functions such as printer sharing and
modem sharing by connecting these devices through terminal adapters. This enables users to
share equipment regardless of location. It also eliminates the need for dedicated connections,
since all network resources are available on a dial-up basis.
♦Carrier Gateway: This is the general “catch all” category that would be used to connect
anything to anything over the public network. Using ISDN for this purpose provides speed,
accuracy, and connectivity advantages for applications like Internet connection, e-mail, Telex,
Voice Mail, and Fax forwarding.
Benefits
Enables faster call setup times because a separate modem-type communication with the public
network is used. Calls using analog connections or T1 digital connections can take several seconds
longer before the connection is made because of DTMF tones.
Provides immediate Caller ID because it is transmitted with each call setup message. This makes
Caller ID information immediate rather than waiting for this information to be sent after starting
the ringing process as with analog lines.
Enables shared use of lines for voice, data, fax, and video on each channel for multiple purposes
based upon the setup request. Lines can be used for many services without the need for modems or
other devices, saving you money in monthly service charges.
Provides higher speed digital data connections for higher data accuracy. ISDN provides better
performance for applications that require faster call setup and network response times than older,
more restrictive analog networks can provide.
Enables DID-type functionality for direct incoming calls to route and ring at designated telephones
according to the number dialed. This provides DID functionality over ISDN lines without the
additional expense of purchasing a block of numbers from the telephone company and subscribing
to DID service.
Features
System Features
64 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Least Cost Routing (LCR)
LCR enables automatic routing of each outgoing call over the least costly trunk, CO line, or
common carrier. A station user simply dials the access code (9) and the telephone number. The
system can also choose a specific route for long distance or local calls when enabled. Up to three
schedules can be set up, enabling different routes selected at different times of the day. Up to five
special codes (ones that should never be blocked, such as 911) can be exempt from LCR. Table 8
lists the LCR capacities for each Strata system.
An optional warning tone can be heard, if programmed, when the system has selected the most
expensive route. The user can then wait until a less expensive line becomes available.
LCR is compatible with ABR and line-to-line connections. LCR and Toll Restriction features have
the following additional capabilities:
♦“Assume 9” – enables the input of four-digit Centrex numbers and be routed locally, even if
the number conflicts with restricted long distance area codes.
♦Special area codes that:
♦Enable input without the “1” prefix, so calls are unrestricted and routed the same as local
seven-digit numbers.
♦Can be stored in a table (up to six special area codes) for areas not using standard North
American Numbering Plan dialing.
♦Special codes (begin or end with * or #) – overrides Toll Restriction so the call is routed
locally in normal or Centrex environments. It can be used for Caller ID per-call blocking.
♦Universal 976 number blocking. Four other office codes can be stored in a table to provide
universal blocking.
Benefits
LCR reduces the costs of long distance calling by ensuring that each call is placed over the least
costly route available to that user at that time. Placing a call is simpler for station users, since they
do not have to decide which line to use, or remember how to access specific lines.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Table 8 LCR Capacities DK424
LCR DK14 DK40i RCTUA RCTUBA/BB RCTUC/D RCTUE/F
LCR route plans 8 8 8 8 16 16
Area Code/Office Code
(AC/OC) exception
tables 88 8 8 16 16
Time schedules 3 3 3 3 3 3
Station classes 4 4 4 4 8 8
Route definition tables 4 4 4 4 6 6
Modify digit tables 6 6 6 6 12 12
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 65
Line Call Pickup Groups
With the CO Line Call Pickup Group feature, up to two CO Line Call Pickup Groups can be
programmed on DK14 and DK40i systems and up to four groups on DK424. Ringing CO lines in
the first CO line group can be picked up with an access code or with the Directed Pickup1 button,
if it appears on the telephone. Ringing CO lines in the second CO line group can be picked up with
an access code or with the Directed Pickup2 button, if it appears on the telephone.
As an option, all CO lines could be put into one group. A ringing CO line could then be picked up
with an access code or with the Directed Pickup button.
On Strata DK systems with tenant service, the CO lines for tenant 1 could be put into one CO line
group, and the CO lines for tenant 2 could be put into another CO line group. Then, tenant 1
station users can use the Directed Pickup1 button and tenant 2 station users can use the Directed
Pickup2 button to pick up the CO lines assigned to them.
Benefits
Enables convenient and efficient call handling for CO line calls. Station users do not have to
determine which CO line is ringing in order to answer it, nor does the ringing CO line have to
appear on their telephone in order for them to pick it up.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
System Features
66 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Line Groups
Also known as Trunk Groups, this feature enables the CO lines on any Strata system to be assigned
to CO line groups. Station users can access the CO line groups by dialing a specific CO line group
access code. This enables a customer to group various types of CO lines together for convenient
access.
For example, a customer might want to put Tie lines in one CO line group and WATS lines in
another. Users would then access the CO line group that was appropriate for the type of call being
placed. If all lines in that CO line group were busy, the user could queue for the CO line group.
If the system is programmed for Least Cost Routing (LCR), station users do not need to select a
specific CO line group. DK14 systems recognizes up to four CO line groups. DK40i and DK424
systems with RCTUA or RCTUBA/BB processor can be programmed for up to eight CO line
groups. DK424 systems with an RCTUC/D or RCTUE/F processor can be programmed for up to
16 CO line groups.
CO line groups are also the pooled line groups that can be assigned to buttons on a DKT. Pooled
Line Group 1 is CO Line Group 1, Pooled Line Group 2 is CO Line Group 2, and so on. Up to four
Pooled Line Group buttons for the same CO line group can be assigned to a station to facilitate
handling several calls on that CO line group at that station. See “Pooled CO Lines” for more
information.
Benefits
Enables queuing, single-line telephone access to CO lines, Pooled lines, CO line Call Pickup
Groups, and Tenant Service. They are also used to define LCR schemes.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 67
Line Queuing
This feature is also known as trunk queuing. When all lines are in use, this provides a means to
“stack” station users in a waiting queue for an available outgoing CO line. The Automatic
Callback feature notifies the station user when a line becomes available.
A DKT or a standard single-line station can queue up for a busy outgoing CO line or CO line
group. When the desired line is available, the system calls the station back, and the station can
proceed with the call.
Users save time since they do not have to keep checking to see if the line they want is free. Once
they have queued for the line, they can return to their work, knowing that the system calls them as
soon as the line is available.
Benefits
If LCR is installed, Line Queuing provides a convenience to users who are restricted to certain call
routes.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
System Features
68 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Live System Programming
Programming can be performed on a Strata DK system without taking the system out of service.
The system can be put into programming mode, and data can be entered.
During the programming, the station executing commands is the only station that loses normal
functioning. Service is not interrupted to any other station.
Live system programming can be done locally or remotely using a DKAdmin PC, if the system is
equipped for remote administration/maintenance. When the system is programmed from a remote
or local terminal, all stations remain functional.
Benefits
Eliminates any disruption to telephone service during the business day caused by programming
adds, moves or changes. In addition, it helps control costs by eliminating the need to do these
changes after hours at overtime rates.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 69
Memory Protection
The system memory has its own battery backup to protect the system’s and customer’s
programmed data in the event of a power failure. The battery system is capable of retaining
information for up to six years. In the event of a short-term or long-term power failure, data
integrity is maintained. This means that the system programming (e.g., system parameters, toll
restriction tables, station classes of service, LCR programming, ringing assignments, message and
Speed Dial memory, etc.) is not lost.
Benefits
In the event of a power failure, the system data is completely reinstated upon restoration of power.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
System Features
70 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Message Waiting
The Message Waiting feature enables any station and most voice mail devices to set a Message
Waiting LED at any digital/electronic station which has a Message Waiting (MSG) button. On
Strata DK systems with digital telephones, there is a fixed MSG button.
The Message Waiting indication can be turned on by the calling station; or, if the station has been
forwarded to voice mail, the message waiting indication is activated once the calling station leaves
a message in voice mail. The station user can retrieve the message simply by pressing the Message
button associated with the LED.
The Message Waiting feature on DK40i or DK424 systems also applies to standard telephones
with a message waiting lamp. However, unlike the digital telephone station user who can retrieve
messages by pressing a button, the standard telephone user is notified by an activated message
waiting lamp on the telephone. The standard station user can enter an access code to retrieve the
messages. A standard telephone with message waiting lamp must be connected to an RSTU2
station card in the DK40i or DK424. Message Waiting features on DK14 systems do not apply to
standard telephones.
Up to four message waiting indicators can be set on any given station. However, the fourth
indicator is always reserved for a message from the message center. This means that a maximum
of three other stations can activate Message Waiting on a station at any one time.
The extension number of the station that sent the message is displayed on an LCD telephone. The
total number of station numbers that can be displayed depends on the length of the station
numbers. Up to eight LCD characters can be used for all of the station numbers. Thus, if station
numbers are two digits long, up to four station numbers can be displayed. All station numbers can
be displayed using the Scroll button.
Any station or voice mail system can be designated as a message center. There can be only one
designated message center in the system, even if tenant service is installed.
If a voice mail system is assigned as the message center, the voice mail system can set message
waiting at a station when a message arrives in that station’s mailbox. It can also dial a code to
cancel the Message Waiting LED on a station, once the station user has picked up the message.
When the voice mail system leaves a message waiting indication on an LCD telephone, a “V” is
displayed next to the voice mail port extension number to indicate that the message is from the
voice mail system.
When LCD messaging is used to send a silent message to the LCD telephones, an “M” is displayed
next to the station DN.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
with DKTs
Standard on DK40i and DK424 with SLTs
and RSTU2 PCB
Unavailable on DK14 with SLTs
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 71
Benefits
People sometimes forget to check for messages, or do so infrequently, especially if they are not
located near the Attendant Console. They may not be aware that they have messages, and
important messages or requests for timely callbacks can go unattended for several hours. The
Message Waiting feature alerts the station user to waiting messages, thereby making the
communication system more efficient and providing better service to customers and other callers.
Standard telephone applications are more feasible with Call Waiting lamp activation, especially in
voice mail and hotel/motel applications. This can be important to a DK40i or DK424 customer
who wants to reuse a substantial number of existing standard single-line telephones.
Features
System Features
72 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Multiple Directory Numbers (DNs)
Multiple DNs provide the
ultimate in call coverage
flexibility. Station DNs can
appear on multiple telephones,
and individual telephones can
have multiple appearances of
their own station DNs (shown in
Figure 4). All DNs can originate
and answer calls.
A DN button can also release an
existing call and originate
another call with one press of the
DN button. Press the DN button
you are using to automatically
release the existing call. This
gives you a dial tone enabling
you to make another call.
There are three DN types (maximums by system are given in Table 9):
♦Primary Directory Number (PDN) – each telephone has a unique PDN and can have up to four
button appearances of its own PDN.
♦Secondary Directory Number (SDN) – when the PDN of a station appears on another station,
it becomes an SDN on the other station. The PDN of one telephone can appear as a SDN on all
other digital telephones and ring on all other digital telephones (except the DK424 with a
maximum of 120 telephones). Incoming and outgoing calls can occur on each PDN or SDN.
Each telephone can be assigned with up to four of the same SDN buttons. The maximum
number PDN plus SDN buttons on each telephone is 16.
♦Phantom Directory Number (PhDN) – the system also provides PhDNs that can be dedicated
to a station or group of stations (usually in the same area or department). Each PhDN number
can only appear once on a given telephone, but each telephone can have up to eight different
PhDN buttons. A PhDN can also appear on all digital telephones on the system and can ring on
all other digital telephones (except DK424 with a maximum of 120 telephones).
PhDNs are assigned to designated telephone owners in system programming with the following
telephone privileges:
♦Set Call Forward and Mail Box destination
♦Receive Message Waiting (MW) indication for up to four PhDNs on individual PhDN/MW
button LEDs
♦Receive OCA when the called
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
210-1
210-2
210-3
211-1
211-2
500 MW/5001
501
504
Station 210's
Primary Directory
Numbers [PDNs]
Secondary Directory
Numbers [SDNs] of
Station 211
Calls to Station 211 can
be originated or
answered by Station 210
by pressing the 211-1 or
211-2 button.
Phantom Directory
Numbers [PhDNs]
Station 210
211-1
211-2
210-1
210-2
210-3
500
501
508
Station 211
0934
Figure 4 Multiple DNs
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 73
Each PhDN can have a dedicated Message Waiting PhDN/MW button for message notification for
the person or department associated with the PhDN. Up to four PhDN/MW buttons can be
programmed into each telephone.
PhDNs (the 500-series extension numbers on the keystrip in this example) are usually associated
with a function such as an “800” number for a technical support group. A specific PDN is usually
associated with a person.
Incoming calls come into a PDN from the top down. For example, incoming calls to Station 210
rings first at the top 210 line; the second call rings at the 210 line below it; and the third call rings
at the bottom 210 line. Auto preference for DNs are from the bottom PDN up. A station PDN
shows busy on Busy Lamp Field when the station is off-hook on any DN, CO line or Tie line.
PhDNs do not display Busy Lamp indication.
Benefits
Multiple DNs provide the ultimate in call coverage flexibility. They are convenient and provide an
easy way to answer each other’s calls or general calls to a departmental group. This is both a
common requirement in most large installations and has many useful applications in smaller
organizations as well.
Table 9 Maximum Multiple DNs DK424
Type of
Number Digital
Telephone DK14 DK40i RCTUA RCTUBA/BB RCTUC/D RCTUE/F
PDNs 4 (same DNs) 10 28 32 80 240 336
SDNs 151
1. Total of 16 combinations of PDN and [SDN] per telephone.
102
2. PDNs and SDNs are the same number.
28232280224023362
PhDNs 8 (different DNs) 10 28 32 80 240 336
Total DNs 20 20 56 64 160 480 672
Features
System Features
74 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Multiple FCC Registration
DK14 and DK40i systems can be configured as either key or hybrid with separate FCC registration
numbers for each type. DK424 systems can be configured as a key, hybrid, or PBX, with separate
FCC registration numbers for each type. The appropriate configuration for an individual system
depends on how it functions.
If the system is configured for only manual selection of outgoing lines, it may be registered as a
key telephone system. If the system is configured for automatic selection of outgoing lines such as
dial access, Least Cost Routing, and pooled line buttons, the system may have to be registered as a
hybrid or PBX telephone system.
In addition, certain features (DID, Tie lines, and off-premises stations) can also require hybrid or
PBX telephone system registration in some areas.
Benefits
Ensures compliance with FCC regulations regardless of how the system is configured.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 75
Multiple Simultaneous Handsfree Intercom Paths
The intercom paths on the Strata DK systems are designed to carry handsfree conversations on all
intercom calls at the same time. The digital technology of the DK systems provides completely
non-blocking intercom paths and enables unlimited, simultaneous, and handsfree intercom calls.
Benefits
Non-blocking, digital technology enables any station to make a handsfree intercom call at any
time.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
with EKTs and DKTs
Features
System Features
76 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Music-on-Hold (MOH) Interface
A MOH/Background Music (BGM) RCA jack is built into the common control unit on DK14,
DK40i, and DK424 systems. The jack connects a customer-supplied music source for MOH,
BGM, or both.
The MOH interface connects the system to a customer-supplied music source. CO lines placed on
hold are connected to the music source. BGM can share a music source used for MOH or have a
separate source.
If a DK40i and DK424 system is configured with a tape recorder that plays a pre-recorded
message to holding parties, the Option Interface Unit (PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU) is suggested.
These units have a relay that can be programmed to control a tape player every time a CO line is
placed on hold. The tape recorder does not run continuously. When the relay activates, the tape
plays. When the line goes off hold, the tape stops. DK14 does not support the PIOU, PIOUS, or
PEPU card.
The MOH volume can be adjusted using system controls.
Benefits
Customers can realize a cost benefit with this feature, as they do not have to purchase a separate
interface card for MOH (the customer provides the music source). MOH is not simply for
entertaining callers while they are on hold. It also assures the caller that he or she is still connected
to the system. The customer can substitute a promotional tape for a music source, enabling the
customer to advertise to callers on hold.
The separate music sources available on Strata DK enables callers on hold to hear special music
and/or advertising messages while station users hear and external speakers play different music.
Some firms like to select a particular type of music to reinforce an image they are trying to create.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 77
Night Ringing Answer Code
The Night Ringing Answer Code enables any station to answer an incoming call that rings when
the system is in Night mode. The user dials a code to answer the call.
When a DK system is used in tenant service, each tenant can have a separate Call Pickup button
which connects the user to the ringing call.
Benefits
Enables answering a call after hours when it rings over the external page, a night bell, or through
selected telephones. Family members, other employees, and even customers can reach employees
after hours. This affords peace of mind to the employees and their families.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
System Features
78 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Night Ringing Over External Page
An option can be selected through system programming to have incoming CO line calls and door
phones ring over external paging when the system is in Night mode. Night ringing over the
external page can be assigned on a CO line-by-CO line basis.
Door phone ringing can also be programmed to sound over an external speaker. The call can be
picked up by any telephone.
If a system is used for Tenant Service, the lines assigned to Tenant 1~4 can be programmed to ring
over the external paging system. Lines for Tenants 1~4 ring according to the Night mode that is
programmed for them.
Benefits
If a customer has an external paging system that gives sufficient coverage to the work area, there is
no need to purchase additional equipment for night ringing. CO line calls after hours ring over the
existing paging system, assuring those people working after hours that they will receive important
calls.
Because ringing can be programmed on a line-by-line basis, lines which do not require attention
after hours need not ring over page. This minimizes disturbance to those working after hours.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 79
Night Ringing Over Selected Page Zone
If zone paging has been installed, incoming CO line calls can be programmed to ring over selected
page zones using customer-supplied paging equipment. The CO lines can be placed into two
groups, and each group can be assigned to night ring over different PIOU paging zones.
Programmed lines can be divided into tenant groups which can then be assigned to night ring over
the selected zones.
Programmed lines can be divided into tenant groups which can then be assigned to night ring over
the selected zones:
♦DK40i – two tenant groups
♦DK424 – two tenant groups with RCTUA; all other processors support four tenant groups
Benefits
Enables night calls to ring over external paging and differentiate between two groups of calls.
People working after hours are not bothered by calls that are not directed to their area.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK40i/DK424 with PIOU,
PIOUS, or PEPU
Unavailable on DK14 (Zone Paging)
Features
System Features
80 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Night Transfer (Day/Night Modes)
Also known as Night Service, all Strata systems can be programmed for up to three alternate CO
line ringing arrangements. They are Day, Day2, and Night.
Day mode is for normal system operation during business hours. DAY2 mode is often used for a
ringing arrangement to handle calls when the Attendant is at lunch or on a break. For example,
incoming calls could be sent to a secretary or Auto Attendant that has been designated as the
backup Attendant. Night mode is used after hours and on weekends.
For each of the three modes, each CO line can be assigned to ring at any station in the system
including off-premises stations. For example, the CO lines could be assigned to ring a voice mail
port, or could ring any number of stations. For a given CO line, the ringing arrangements for each
of the three modes can be entirely different. The Delayed Ringing feature can also be applied
individually to all three modes.
If a CO line is programmed to ring at only one telephone in a particular ringing arrangement, a CO
line call to that telephone forwards if the telephone is in the Call Forward mode. If the telephone is
in a station hunt group, the call hunts.
Night Ringing can also go to external page. It can also go to a night bell and/or to an answering
machine. The PIOU, PIOUS or PEPU option interface unit is required for night ringing over
external page on a DK40i or DK424 system.
Benefits
Efficient handling of calls by several pre-programmed ringing arrangements. The customer can
easily switch among the arrangements to handle calls at different times of day.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 81
Non-blocking Dialing
On Strata DK systems, Non-blocking Dialing means that all outside CO and internal DN lines can
be in use simultaneously, and any station can be connected to any other station on an intercom call.
Since there is no set number of intercom paths, no one would be blocked from making a call if a
CO line is free.
The only potential blocking a Strata user could experience is with single-line telephones. Blocking
could occur if an insufficient number of DTMF receiver circuits are installed or in an extremely
high traffic situation.
Benefits
Enables buying a system that is the correct size for a business, because the system capacity is fully
used at all times. The customer does not have to buy extra capacity in order to ensure that calls are
never be blocked during busy hours. This non-blocking digital technology enables station users to
make calls whenever they need to.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
System Features
82 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Off-premises Station (OPS)
An OPS is a standard 2500-type (DTMF/tone) or 500-type (rotary) single-line set located off-site
from where the system is installed. It normally requires a special line from the CO. Secondary
protectors must be installed on OPS lines. Each Strata system can support the following off-
premise stations.
♦DK14 – up to two OPS
♦DK40i – up to a total of 20 OPS
♦DK424:
♦RCTUA – up to 24 standard single-line telephones
♦RCTUBA/BB – up to 72 standard single-line telephones
♦RCTUC/D – up to 232 standard single-line telephones
♦RCTUE/F – up to 328 standard single-line telephones
Standard, single-line sets have access to many of the same features as digital stations, although the
access method is different. Since the standard phone does not have feature buttons, access codes
are used to activate features.
The system can be programmed to enable standard single line sets to access an outside line by
dialing a CO line access code (often “9”). CO lines can be selectively included in, or excluded
from, the “dial 9” group.
As a programmable option, CO line groups can be defined. The standard single line set can access
a CO line group by dialing the CO line group access code. This option is useful when the set is
only enabled access to a certain group of CO lines. Individual CO lines can be selected by a
standard single line set by dialing “7” plus the CO line number.
A 48-volt interface is available (R48S) to extend the loop length or match the network interface.
Benefits
Enables installation of stations beyond the 1000-foot limitation of the DKT. It also enables the less
expensive standard telephones to be used at satellite locations and to have access to many system
features. It can eliminate the cost of installing a separate phone system.
Customers can use the less expensive standard single line telephones on-premises for employees
who do not need the full complement of features afforded by the digital telephone.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424 with
standard station ports and DTMF receivers
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 83
Outgoing Call Restriction
Through programming, stations can be selectively restricted from making outgoing calls on any, or
all CO/PBX lines. However, a station that is restricted from making outgoing calls may still
receive calls on those lines.
Because Outgoing Call Restriction is applied on a CO line-by-CO line basis, each employee’s
phone can be programmed so that the employee can only access those CO lines necessary to do his
or her job. For example, if a set of WATS lines was installed in the system for the use of a special
sales group, employees who are not in the sales group can be restricted from accessing those
WATS lines.
Benefits
Provides potential cost and productivity benefits, because employees who do not need to make
outgoing calls as part of their job, are restricted. In addition, if it is an employee’s job to answer
incoming calls, this feature ensures that the employee do not tie up those lines with outgoing calls.
More efficient service can then be given to the incoming callers.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
System Features
84 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Paging - All Call Voice Page
All Call Voice Page enables a station user to make a voice announcement through the speakers of
all telephones which are not in use or otherwise blocked from receiving an all call page (maximum
120 on DK424). The user presses the All Call Page button or dials an access code and makes the
announcement through the station handset. Stations that are busy on-hook or off-hook do not
receive the page, even if equipped with Off-hook Call Announce.
The system can be programmed to include external paging in the All Call Voice Page. Through
programming, stations can also be excluded from receiving such page announcements.
Benefits
Enables paging of all employees simultaneously without the need for an external paging system.
All Call Voice Page provides this capability without the expense of an external paging system.
Even if an external paging system is installed, the All Call Voice Page feature can still be very
useful. People sometimes “tune out” external paging. Paging through the phone with this feature
gets attention.
Some employees may not be located within range of the external paging system. This feature can
bring a paging announcement directly to their desktop.
Certain applications may not be appropriate for external paging where the paging activity might
distract or disturb the clientele. In these cases, paging through the telephones provides an excellent
solution.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 85
Paging - External Page Interface
On DK14 and DK40i systems, there is a 600-ohm output which can be connected to a customer-
provided external amplifier and compatible talk-back speaker.
On DK424 systems, an Option Interface Unit (PIOU or PEPU) can be installed to provide an
internal three-watt amplifier and an external page interface. The PIOU can support zone paging
with up to four zones. The PEPU can support just one zone. An optional two-way 600-ohm voice
path is available on the PIOU, PEPU, or PIOUS for use with a customer-supplied talk back
speaker/amplifier.
The PIOU or PEPU provides a relay contact to mute background music over external page when a
voice page is in progress.
Benefits
Provides instant access to employees who do not have phones or who are away from their desks,
and saves time locating them.
All Strata DK systems connect easily to an external paging system.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i
Optional on Strata DK424 with PIOU,
PIOUS, or PEPU
Features
System Features
86 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Paging - External Zone Paging
The DK40i can support as many as four and the DK424 can support up to eight External Page
Zones. Station users can access one, four, or eight zones simultaneously by dialing a brief access
code.
The PIOU Option Interface Unit and customer-supplied speakers and amplifiers are required to
support external zone paging. DK424 systems require two PIOU units to support eight Page
Zones.
Benefits
Conveniently pages a specific area without distracting employees who do not need to hear the
announcement.
System Availability
Unavailable on Strata DK14
Optional on Strata D40i/DK424 with PIOU
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 87
Paging - Group Paging
Any number of digital/electronic telephones can be divided into paging groups and one station can
be in up to four. A unique access code is assigned to each paging group, that enables voice paging
exclusively to that group. Any station user can make an announcement to just one or all of these
groups (All Call Page) that is sent to the speaker of all idle telephones in the page group. The DK
systems support:
♦DK14 – up to five paging groups
♦DK40i – up to five paging groups
♦DK424 (RCTUC/D and RCTUE/F – up to nine paging groups in systems
♦DK424 (RCTUA or RCTUBA/BB) – up to five paging groups
Notes
●The Cordless DKT-2004-CT or standard telephone is not compatible with paging.
●If one group is being paged, the Group Paging feature is not available to any other group until
the first group page is completed.
Benefit
Enhances office efficiency by providing a quick way to contact a group of people without
disrupting other workers who do not need to hear the message. When all groups are paged,
everyone can hear the announcement simultaneously.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
System Features
88 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Pooled CO Lines
A “CO line group” and a “CO line pool” are the same except a pool of CO lines can appear under
one CO line button on a telephone. CO lines can be pooled in categories. For example, all WATS
lines of the same type can be in one pool, all regular CO lines in another, and all Tie lines to the
same destination in a third. Pooled and single-appearing line buttons are designed for use with
loop- and ground-start lines, not DID, Tie, DNIS, or ANI lines.
The number of CO line groups available on Strata DK systems are as follows:
♦DK14 – 4
♦DK40i – 8
♦DK424 with RCTUA or RCTUBA/BB – 8
♦DK424 with RCTUC/D or RCTUE/F – 16
Each CO line pooled group can appear on up to four Pooled Line Grp (group) buttons on a digital
telephone. This enables the user to process several calls in that CO line group at the same time. If a
station user regularly processes more than one call at a time, Toshiba recommends that the station
be assigned more than one Pooled Line Grp button.
It is also recommended to separate incoming and outgoing CO lines into separate groups. This
prevents the accidental pickup of incoming calls when making outgoing calls.
Benefits
Provides the use of less expensive 10-button telephones instead of 20-button telephones for access
to the same number of CO lines.
The Pooled Line Grp button also offers “hybrid” type system operation, even while configured for
“key” operation. This also enables the Strata DK to compete more cost effectively against hybrids.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 89
Power Failure Transfer
Power Failure Transfer automatically switches CO lines directly to a standard single-line
telephone and provides emergency service if commercial AC power fails. When AC power is
restored, the system automatically switches back, and the standard power failure transfer telephone
becomes inoperative again.
The DK14 and DK40i have one power failure transfer port as standard equipment. The DK424
required one port (DPFT) and transfers up to eight CO lines to dedicated, customer-provided
single-line telephones.
The DPFT requires one port on an RSTU or RDSU, and only one DPFT can be supported per
RSTU or RDSU. The DPFT 24V control connects only to an RSTU or RDSU. Multiple DPFTs can
be attached depending upon the number of power failure transfer CO line circuits required.
During a power failure, the following connections are made:
♦DK14 – one CO line is connected directly to the PF phone.
♦DK40i – one CO line in the base KSU in connected directly to the PF phone. Up to eight more
can be added in the expansion cabinet using a DPFT and RSTU.
♦DK424 – multiple CO lines can be switched. If AC power is lost, the PF telephone is
automatically and directly connected to the first CO line.
Benefits
Enables making and receiving calls without interruption of service.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i
Optional on DK424 with DPFT
Features
System Features
90 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Privacy/Non-privacy Option
The system can be programmed as private or non-private. When the system is in the private mode,
a station user who makes a call on a CO line or intercom has exclusive use of that line. Other
stations cannot enter the line by pressing the Line button. When the system is in the non-private
mode, other stations can enter the conversation by pressing the CO Line button.
This feature applies to CO line buttons only and does not apply to DNs. Outside CO lines can be
private or non-private on a station-by-station basis. Private lines prohibit users from pressing a
common CO line button and accessing a line that is already in use, whereas users can do so on
non-private lines.
Private line users can change the mode by pressing the Privacy Release button enabling as many as
three stations (total) on a line. Non-private users can block access to their lines by pressing the
Privacy button.
Benefits
Greater flexibility because the system can be customized to meet the business’ needs.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 91
Relay Service
The standard relay can be programmed for one of three options:
♦External Page: A page over external speakers mutes Background Music (BGM) that is being
broadcast over the same speakers.
♦Night Relay: An answering machine or a night bell (or chime) are activated when a call rings
in during Night mode.
♦Hold Relay: A Music-on-Hold source turns on when a call is placed on hold, and goes off
when the caller is taken off hold. With the relay installed, the music source does not have to
play continuously.
On DK40i or DK424 systems, two relays are provided using a PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU option
card. In addition to External Page, Night Relay, or Hold Relay, these optional relays can also be
programmed for Door Lock Control, which opens a customer-supplied door lock for three or six
seconds when a designated button is pressed on selected telephones. See “Door Lock Control” for
more information.
If a system has BGM on an external paging system, the external page relay makes it possible to
suppress the BGM when a voice announcement is made over the paging system. Voice
announcements can be heard clearly without interference from the BGM.
Benefits
Increases options for handling calls when the system is in night service. The customer can choose
the best arrangement that meets the needs of their business.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
(one relay)
Optional on DK424 with PIOU, PIOUS, or
PEPU (two relays)
Features
System Features
92 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Remote Administration/Maintenance
Remote Administration/Maintenance enables administrative and diagnostic software programs to
be run “live,” without interruption of normal system operation from a remote location. The IMDU
modem can operate at 300 or 1200 baud full duplex. DK424 can use the RSIU card with the
RMDS modem at up to 2400 baud or an external modem at up to 9600 bps.
The Remote Administration module requires two programmable security codes for access to all
programs (Level 1) or station class of service programs only (Level 2). There are six operating
modes:
♦Programming mode – all programs
♦Data dump mode – all programs
♦Test CO lines/stations
♦LCD messaging – edit and set completely new messages for any DKT (system and personal
messages)
♦Speed dial edit/change
♦DKAdmin for backup/restore and program administration (see DKAdmin description in
System Overview section for details)
In order for the Remote Administration module to work, one CO/Centrex/PBX line must be
connected to the system. However, this line does not have to be dedicated to the module. If the CO
line is dedicated it can be programmed to ring the module directly during any ringing mode (Day,
Day 2, or Night).
If automatic connection is not programmed, connection between a CO line and the module is
accomplished using the Call Transfer feature. Remote administration/maintenance can also be
accessed through Auto Attendant, Direct Inward System Access (DISA), and/or DID lines.
Benefits
Reduced service costs because routine service and administrative procedures can be done from the
service company’s office. Service time is also reduced.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Requirements
DK14 - QSMU and external modem
DK40i - PIOU or PIOUS and IMDU modem;
or RSSU and external modem
DK424 - PIOU or PIOUS and IMDU
modem; or RSSU and external modem; or
RSIU with RMDS or external modem
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 93
Reserve Power Battery Backup Interface
On the DK14, an optional battery backup unit is available for the system power supply. The
backup unit (HPFB-6) includes the battery pack and built-in charger and mounts externally. Either
one or two HPFB-6s can be connected. If other types of batteries are used with DK14, they are not
charged by the DK14 power supply.
Customer-supplied 12-volt batteries can be connected to the DK40i or DK424 systems as a power
failure backup system. Batteries are connected to the system’s standard power supply by an
optional connector cable. The DK40i and DK424 power supplies provide a built-in battery
charger. Gel-cell maintenance free batteries are recommended.
In the event of a power failure, the system automatically switches to battery power without
interruption. All functions of the Strata system continue to operate for several hours after a loss of
normal electrical power. The exact time period depends on the type and size of batteries used,
system capacity, and traffic (see the Strata DK General Description for details). No calls are
disconnected during the switch to battery power.
During normal power conditions, the batteries are kept fully charged by the system power supply.
Benefits
Ensures that telephone service is not interrupted by a power failure.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
System Features
94 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Speed Dial (SD)
Also known as automatic dialing or one-button dialing, this feature enables the customer to assign
dialing codes to telephone numbers that are frequently called. Each system SD number can have
up to 20 digits. Two or more speed numbers can also be “chained” during one call to accommodate
numbers that have more than 20 digits. Pauses and flashes can be programmed into the number.
Both system and station SD numbers are available.
System Speed Dial (SSD) numbers are available to all station users. A designated station,
Attendant console, or DKAdmin PC can assign the SD numbers.
The maximum number of available SD numbers is:
♦DK14 – up to 40
♦DK40i – up to 40
♦DK424
♦RCTUA processor – up to 40
♦RCTUBA/BB processor – up to 100
♦RCTUC/D processor – up to 100
♦RCTUE/F processor – up to 800
Access to the SD numbers can be assigned on a station-by-station basis, and some stations can be
restricted. If a station user is restricted from using the SD numbers, that user is automatically
restricted from having station speed numbers. The SD numbers can also be programmed to
override toll restriction.
If the system is installed behind a Centrex or a PBX, the SD locations can also be used for storage
of Centrex/PBX feature access codes. Those codes can then be assigned to appear as automatic
dialing buttons on phones that need them. In this way, Centrex or PBX feature codes can be
programmed for one-button access.
SSD codes 90~99 can be pre-defined and incorporated into any other SD code to dial up to 20
digits (37 digits chained) using one code. For example, an Other Common Carrier (OCC) access
number could be programmed as SD code 90. Then, SD code 90 could be used as part of the
telephone number for another SD code by entering *90 as the first three digits in the telephone
number for that SD code.
Station SD enables the station user to have a private automatic dialing list. Each station can have
up to 40 station SD numbers. The numbers in this list can be changed by the station user at will.
Station SD can be enabled or denied on a station-by-station basis.
The station user assigns a two-digit code to each of the telephone numbers, and programs a
number for each code. The user can then “speed dial” the number by using the code, instead of
having to dial the number manually. If the station has buttons assigned as SD buttons, one speed
dial number can be programmed for each SD. Numbers not assigned to SD must be accessed with
a SD code.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 95
If SSD codes 60~90 or 600~699 have been pre-defined, they can be incorporated into a station SD
code to dial up to 37 digits automatically using one code. For example, an OCC access number
could be programmed as system SD code 90. Then, system SD code 90 could be used as part of the
telephone number for a station SD code by entering *90 as the first three digits in the telephone
number for that station SD code.
If the user has a 20-button LCD telephone with the SD memo feature, a 12-character name can be
programmed for each of the 40 personal SD numbers. The LCD user can then scroll through the
“memo pad” of names and numbers. When the desired name and number appears on the LCD, the
user can press a CO line to automatically dial the number.
Benefits
Looking up telephone numbers can be time consuming. Errors can be made in dialing which also
waste time and can be costly. By using automatic dialing for numbers that are frequently called,
those time-wasters are eliminated.
Sometimes certain employees need to make business toll calls. However, it may also be desirable
to toll restrict those employees, yet enable them to dial specific business toll calls using system
speed dial numbers. This eliminates the possibility of telephone abuse and can reduce costs.
Station Speed Dial enables the Strata DK system to be customized. Station users can us personal
Speed Dial for telephone numbers they need which are not on a System Speed Dial list.
Features
System Features
96 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Station Hunting
There are three types of station hunting:
♦Serial Hunting (SH) – routing of calls to the next station in a hunt group
♦Distributed Hunting (DH) – routing of calls to the next hunt group
Serial Hunting
When a called station is busy, the call is routed to the next station in the hunt group. If that station
is busy, the call is routed to the next station in the hunt group and so on. If a station has Call
Forward set, the call that is hunting is forwarded and leaves the hunt group. Hunt group routing is
assigned in the system programming database.
Assignment is flexible, so any station may hunt to any other station. Many stations may be linked
together in the same chain. The hunt group may be as big as all the stations in the system, or as
small as two stations.
SH can be used with PhDNs, PDNs, or a combination of these. In the case of tone ringing to
multiple appearing PDNs, hunting takes place only if none of the multiple appearances of that DN
are idle. If the call is Voice Announce, then hunting occurs if that PDN’s station is off-hook on any
DN or CO line. A ground or loop start call hunts from a PDN or PhDN only if it has been assigned
to ring exclusively at the owner station of that DN.
Data-call serial hunting is different from voice-call serial hunting. Data-call group assignment is
independent from voice-call hunt groups, but the same hunt group size characteristics as above
also apply to data-call hunting.
Distributed Hunting
When a call is directed to a DH group, the systems hunts for the next available idle station in
rotation order and then sends the call there. Calls are more evenly distributed than with SH. If a
station has DND set, hunting skips to the next idle station.
A maximum of 16 DH groups are provided. Each group has its own unique DN which is like a
pilot number. Up to 32 stations can be in any one group, and distribution can be in any rotation
desired. A station can be a member of more than one group. If such is the case, the lower group
number has priority. For example, a call in group seven’s queue would first ring to station 201 even
if another call had been in group eight’s queue and had been waiting longer for station 201.
Calls can be routed to DH groups from Caller ID/DNIS/ANI lines, Tie lines, loop or ground start
lines, stations transferring calls, internal direct calls, DISA calls and calls routed through built-in
or external Auto Attendant. Calls forwarded from stations, or overflow calls from ACD groups can
also be routed to a particular DH group (except for Call Forward Fixed).
DH group member telephones should be equipped with Pooled Line buttons if ground/loop start
lines ring directly to DH groups. The routed CO line flashes only on the called members Pooled
Line button.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 97
DH member telephones should be equipped with PDNs, not CO Line or Pooled Line buttons for
DID and Tie lines that directly ring to a DH Group. This is to avoid two buttons flashing on the
telephone when it is called.
PhDNs cannot be assigned as members of DH groups.
ACD Overflow to DH Group (DK424 only)
ACD calls can overflow to DH groups if there is an idle agent in the DH group, but remain in the
ACD queue at overflow time if all DH group members are busy.
ACD Agent Ring-No-Answer to DH Group (DK424 only)
ACD calls can route to a DH group during an agent ring-no-answer condition if there is an idle
agent in the DH group. If all DH group members are busy when an agent ring-no-answer call
attempts to route to the DH group, the ACD call routes to the ACD CO line normal ringing
assignments.
However, once a call enters a DH group, it cannot be forwarded or serial hunted out of that group.
This is to avoid falsely routing calls to personal voice mail boxes. Calls cannot be routed to DH
groups by SH. Also, calls overflowing from an Attendant Console position or DID intercept calls
cannot be routed to a DH group.
Calls are distributed to a station’s PDN in the case of internal, DID, or Tie line calls. In the case of
ground or loop start lines, Pooled Line buttons can be established on a station for separate
identification of DH calls. In this case, both the Pooled Line LED and a common PhDN LED
flashes. When answered, the call is resident on the Pooled Line button. Individual PhDNs cannot
receive DH calls.
If no stations in a DH group are idle, new calls routed to that group are placed in a queue waiting a
station to become idle. A maximum of 10 calls can be in each group’s queue. Callers in queue hear
ringback tone until a DH member becomes idle and the call is answered. The 11th caller trying to
enter the queue receives busy tone.
Benefits
Enhances call handling by providing better service to customers and outside callers, because they
usually reach someone on the first try who can help them. It can also boost productivity for
internal callers, since they do not have to hang up and redial another DN if the first party does not
answer.
DH is very popular in voice mail applications with all voice mail ports in a DH group. This
provides very efficient use and availability of voice mail ports.
Features
System Features
98 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
SMDR prints call records of both incoming and outgoing calls or outgoing calls only. Strata DK
systems can also print a call record of outgoing toll calls only. Calls of less than one or ten seconds
(programmable option) are not recorded. The basic SMDR printout includes:
♦Time and duration of the call
♦Time to answer the call
♦Stations to which the call was transferred
♦Type of call – all calls, outgoing only, and toll
♦Station number that made the call
♦DN of the destination
♦Account codes (if the system has been programmed to include)
♦ANI, Caller ID, and DNIS/DID/Tie numbers/names (if the system has been programmed to
include)
If present, the names take the place of the system Account Codes. A sample of the SMDR output
for outgoing calls is shown in Figure 5.
SMDR is supported in each system as follows:
♦DK14 – requires the WSIU, equipped with an RS-232C connector for attachment to a
customer-provided printer or recording device. Data output speed can be set at 300 or 1200
bps.
♦DK40i – requires the TSIU, PIOU or PIOUS, equipped with an ASCII RS-232, 6-wire
modular connector, compatible with most call accounting devices.
♦DK424 – requires the PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU, or RSIU, equipped with an ASCII RS-232 6-wire
modular connector and compatible with most call accounting devices.
The DK40i and DK424 also require a PPTC connector that converts a 6-wire, modular connection
to a 25-pin connection (DB-25) and is available from Toshiba.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Requirements
DK14 - WSIU
DK40i - TSIU in base; PIOUS or PIOU in
expansion
DK424 - PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU, or RSIU
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 99
1. Call Duration (incoming, outgoing, or transfer) must be 1 or 10 secs (set by Program 60-2) to generate a call record printout.
2. “MSS”: designates a DISA or CF–External CO call to an unanswered station or answered after 1 or 10 secs (threshold) per
Program 60-2. The call registers as a normal incoming call if answered before the threshold time. DISA calls always register 5~6
seconds ring before answer duration time.
3. Field column information is provided for SMDR output formatting purposes.
4. A “*” in the first column indicates a disconnected call by the CO Calling Party Control (CPC) or Automatic Release signal. Loop
start CO lines must have Programs 15-0 and 15-3 enabled before the CPC is dropped.
5. Answered calls ANI, DNIS, and Caller ID data transmits using the SMDR port. Abandoned calls data is not transmitted, but can
be stored in station memory. See Program *51 and *52.
6. See Program 60-1.
7. Strata DK sends a Carriage Return (CR) and Line Feed (LF) ASCII symbol after each line of data.
General Notes
The call record data is ASCII-formatted, 8 bits; no parity, 1-stop bit.
Special dial printout: Tone = “T”, Long pause = “L”, Flash = “F”, Pause = “P”
“DISA”: designates a DISA or CF–External call through the system via CO-to-CO connection.
“MODM”: designates a call to the IMDU, Remote Maintenance Modem.
Figure 5 SMDR Output - Incoming Calls
A = Non-ISDN call established, then network disconnects. A = ISDN call established, then DK disconnects.
+ = ISDN call established, then network disconnects. S = Start of E911 call. E = End of E911 call.4Field Number 1
BCO Line Number (001~144). Field Number (2~4)3
CC = Caller ID Call; D = ANI or DNIS Call. Field Number 5
D[PDN] of the Station (1~4 digits)2 making/answering a call. Field Number (7~10)3
EPrimary, Secondary, or Phantom Directory Number which made/answered the call (1~4 digits). Blank if call
is made from a CO line button. Field Number (12-15)3
FTime of Day (HH:MM:SS).1Field Number (17-21)3
GCall Duration (HH:MM:SS).1Field Number (23-30)3
HCO Line Incoming Ring Duration Before Answer (MM:SS). Field Number (32-36)3
IStation to which the CO line was transferred (1~4 digits). Field Number (38-41)3
J
Telephone Number
♦Incoming (1~20 digits)5
ANI (10 digits), DNIS (2~5 digits), Caller ID Number or ID Code
♦Outgoing Number (1~20 digits)
♦E911 Station ID (Prg 12)
Field Number (43-63)3
DNIS/ANI Format:
7145833730 3846
ANI DNIS
Field Number (43~52)
KDNIS NAME5 (0~16 characters); Caller ID Name5 (0~16 characters), or Account Code6 (4~15 digits); LCD
User Name on E911 Calls Field Number (65~80)3
LOutgoing Subaddress on ISDN call. Field Number (82~101)
MIncoming Subaddress on ISDN call. Field Number (103~122)
1
001
001
003
003
001
003
003
003
004
003
002
*
D
C
205
MODM
200D
DISA
DISA
MSS
205
202
200
200
205
205
500
200
11/06/97
08:14
08:15
08:16
08:16
08:17
08:18
08:19
08:19
08:20
08:22
08:23
00:00;22
00:00;18
00:00;28
00:00;15
00:00;25
00:00;12
00:00;22
00:00;16
00:00;34
00:00;22
00:00;40
123456987
1234567890123456789
7145933700
7145833700
4567897
1234567894563210
1993021977
093772981
00;00
00;08
00;06
sw
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
MM/DD/ YY, Every Fifty Call Records and at Midnight
DISA Call to IMDU
205 Answers DISA Call 12 Seconds After DK Dial Tone
Outgoing DISA Access by Incoming DISA 01
Incoming DISA and Access CO 03 Outgoing
First Digit (varies) Last Digit (always this column)
First Digit
Last Digit
ABCD E F G H I J K L M
2890
Features
System Features
100 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Benefits
Save costs because telephone abuse can be pinpointed and corrected and telephone bills are
properly allocated back to the departments that made the calls.
Further, since account codes are included in the SMDR printout, lawyers, accountants, and others
who provide hourly professional services can accurately bill clients for telephone time.
SMDR can also help increase productivity for employees such as telemarketers who must learn to
spend the optimal amount of time on each call.
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 101
Station Relocation
There are two types of Station Relocation – moving the physical location of the telephone, or using
dial codes to relocate telephone set features without physically moving its location. When Station
Relocation is activated, a telephone can automatically maintain its particular characteristics
(personal speed dial, flexible keys, feature set, and all DNs) when it is relocated from one modular
jack to another.
A vacant jack of the same circuit type (DKT, EKT, and SLT) must be available whenever
relocating a station. You can swap or remove an existing telephone to provide a vacant jack. Only
one telephone can be relocated at a time. Station Relocation is available system-wide and can be
turned off and on only by the System Administrator’s station.
Note This feature does not work when stations are relocated from a PDKU to a KCDU in the
DK40i.
Benefits
Makes moving telephones quick and easy. Just unplug the telephone from one jack and plug it into
another. Saves the expense of having a third party re-program the system to reflect these changes.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
System Features
102 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
System Programming Through Station
Any Strata DK system can be programmed using a 20-button digital LCD telephone in the system.
On DK424 systems, programming is done from the digital telephone connected to PDKU port 005.
On DK14 and DK40i systems, programming can be done using any station port.
During programming, the station executing the commands is the only station that loses normal
functioning. Service to all other stations remains normal.
Benefits
Enables simple moves and changes without purchasing additional terminal equipment. All
programming can be done with a digital LCD telephone.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 103
Tandem CO Line Connection (Trunk-to-Trunk)
Also known as Trunk-to-Trunk Connection, this feature connects a user to two CO lines in a
conference. A DKT that sets up a Tandem CO line connectino must have two CO line appearances
or the connection must be set up on a DN. After connection, the user can drop out of the
conversation leaving the two outside parties in an unsupervised conference. The CO lines remain
connected until one of the parties hangs up. Each CO line in the system can be enabled or denied
the Tandem CO Line Connection feature. Each system supports:
♦DK14 – two connections
♦DK40i – four connections (maximum)
♦DK424 – ten connections (maximum)
Amplified Conference
If the amplified conference option is installed and the amplifier is available, the Tandem CO Line
Connection is automatically amplified. A trunk-to-trunk connection (up to 10 at one time) is
established on each DNIS external network call.
Drop Out
On DK424 Release 3.2 and later versions, Tandem CO Line Connection – With Drop Out enables
standard telephones and Voice Mail/Auto Attendant ports to set up a conference with two CO lines
and then drop out of the conference leaving the two CO lines connected.
The station that sets up the two-line connection can reconnect to the tandem connection by dialing
a pickup code. If more than one tandem connection is set up by a station, the pickup code
reconnects that station to the tandem connection that has the lowest CO line number as a priority.
Prior to Release 3.2 software, standard telephones could set up two-line conferences, but they
could not drop out of the connection. The pickup code function applies only to the station that sets
up the tandem connection. A station cannot pick up a tandem connection which was set up by
another station.
Automatic Release from Hold
For loop start lines, Strata systems have an Automatic Release from Hold capability that provides
automatic disconnect. It recognizes the disconnect signal from the CO. If the CO does not provide
the disconnect signal (most do), the trunk-to-trunk conference must be monitored and released by
the station user who set it up. For ground start, DID or Tie lines handling the incoming trunk,
automatic release is accomplished from disconnect supervision.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Requirements
Two CO line appearances for the DKT, or
call set up on a DN
Features
System Features
104 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Benefits
Enables important incoming calls to be connected to employees who are out of the office, resulting
in more convenient calling and efficient call handling. Internal callers who set up conference calls
can drop out of the conference when they no longer need to participate. They can return to
productive work and use their phone to make and receive other calls.
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 105
Tenant Service
Businesses in the same office building can share a system. One DK14, DK40i, or DK424 (with an
RCTUA processor) can be shared by two businesses. The DK424 with an RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/
D, or RCTUE/F processor can have up to four tenants.
Tenants can have separate LCR and Toll Restriction plans, Page Groups/Zones, Night Transfer
ringing assignments, flexible door phone assignments, and CO line ringing assignments. CO/PBX
lines for each tenant appear in the correct sequence on telephones, and each tenant can have up to
two dedicated DSS consoles. Station-to-station calling can be done between the two businesses.
CO lines assigned to Tenants 1 and 2 can activate night ringing over external page. Each tenant has
its own Night Transfer function and can independently control night ringing using their DSS units.
Both tenants share a common night bell or a common external page zone for night ringing. With
DK40i and DK424 systems, if zone paging is installed, the two CO line groups can ring over
different paging zones at night.
Ringing CO lines assigned to Tenant 1 can be picked up using the Night Transfer1 button, while
ringing CO lines assigned to Tenant #2 can be picked up using the Night Transfer2 button.
Benefits
Provides sharing of functions, features, and costs of a Strata DK system by two to four small
companies that do not each require a separate system. They also may be able to reduce costs
further by sharing a receptionist.
If the businesses are related, a common system enables them to communicate easily with each
other without the expense of separate systems.
Tenant service enables the businesses to appear as two separate companies. They can have separate
lines, Attendants, and ringing arrangements. Costs can be easily allocated according to use.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
System Features
106 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Tie Lines
Tie lines can be installed on a DK40i or DK424 system to connect it to a PBX or another DK
system in a private communications network. Tie lines can use all DNIS program assignments.
Incoming Tie line calls can ring a number of destinations within the DK system.
Incoming Tie lines are enabled with Voice First Calling, and the called station can answer back
handsfree. Incoming Tie lines cannot originate Off-hook Call Announce to a station at the distant
end.
On the transferring station’s LCD, Tie Line Transfer Recall displays the destination station number
and CO line number of a CO line call transferred to a station over a Tie line to another system,
when the call times out and recalls back to the transferring station. The recall timing is
programmable to meet each customer’s individual need. This feature enables the answering
position to answer calls appropriately by knowing the difference between a new incoming call and
a transferred call recalling to the Attendant.
Analog Tie lines are supported by the E&M Tie Line Unit (REMU), which provides four E&M
type 1 or 2 signaling Tie lines. The Tie lines can be two-wire or four-wire transmission Tie lines
and can be immediate or wink start. Digital Tie lines are supported by the T1 Interface Unit
(RDTU).
A secondary protector is required for each Tie line circuit. An optional DTMF tone receiver PCB
is required in Tie line operation. Tie lines can be configured as dial pulse (rotary) or DTMF (tone),
and can be toll restricted.
Benefits
Helps to fix costs when the customer has heavy traffic to specific locations, because Tie lines are
tariffed at a flat rate per month and are not usage dependent. If Tie lines and toll restriction are
used together, there can be significant reductions in telephone expense.
Tie lines can also access features or CO lines in the distant PBX or key system providing an
opportunity to further reduce costs.
Calls transferred from the answer position are often unanswered by the station to which the call is
transferred. The Tie Line Transfer Recall feature works with calls transferred over Tie lines just as
they would within the originating system. This feature enables the answering position to answer
calls appropriately by knowing the difference between a new incoming call and a transferred call
recalling to the Attendant. This provides the caller better treatment and service.
System Availability
Unavailable on Strata DK14
Optional on Strata DK40i/DK424
Requirements
REMU (DK40i/DK424) or RDTU (T1 on
DK424)
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 107
Toll Restriction
Station users can be individually restricted from making toll calls, according to one of the three toll
restriction schemes which are:
♦0/1 – system denies any CO calls with 0 or 1 as the first or second digit in the number dialed.
♦Area code (three digits) – system denies any calls made by a station whose first three digits are
toll restricted.
♦Area code/office code (six digits) – system denies any calls made by a station whose first six
digits are toll restricted.
The three- and six-digit toll restriction schemes can be further refined as follows:
♦Any one of four toll restriction levels (eight with DK424 RCTUC/D or RCTUE/F) can be
assigned. The levels can be defined so that each one is progressively more restrictive by
enabling or denying specific area or office codes, calls to long distance information,
international calls, and operator-assisted calls. The levels can be modified using up to eight
exception tables that enable access to specific office codes within restricted area codes.
♦A toll restricted station can still be enabled to dial 411, 911, or 800 numbers if desired.
♦Traveling class of service codes can be defined, one for each level of toll restriction. When
dialed at a toll restricted station, these codes change the level of toll restriction on the station to
the level enabled by the code for one call. The station then reverts back to its original level of
toll restriction. The codes can be changed by certain stations that are selected in programming.
♦Any toll-restricted station can be assigned the credit card calling feature, which enables a user
to make a “0+” telephone credit card call from that station.
♦Verifiable Account Codes can have a toll restriction class of service. When such an account
code is entered at a station, the station assumes the toll restriction class of service of the
account code for that call.
♦The Toll Restriction feature can be disabled on a given CO line. For example, toll restriction
might be disabled on a Tie line, to enable the station to dial extension numbers on the distant
PBX.
♦Restriction levels can also be assigned to verified account codes, which require a user to enter
an account code before dialing long distance. Individual lines can be defined as unrestricted.
All systems can also be programmed to recognize equal access codes (10XXX and 950-10XX), an
OCC (Other Common Carrier) DN, authorization codes, and PBX access codes.
On Strata DK systems, any OPS or Tie line can be toll restricted, but it is recommended to use
LCR for standard single-line telephones.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
System Features
108 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Toll Restriction Override
There are several ways to override a Toll Restriction level. They are:
♦Assign three- to four-digit codes
♦Use Centrex feature codes beginning with *
♦Assign system Speed Dial numbers
Up to two toll restriction override codes can also be defined. When dialed at a toll restricted
station, these codes enable the user of the code to override the toll restriction at that station. The
codes may be changed by certain stations that are selected in programming.
See “Toll Restriction Override Codes” and “Toll Restriction Override Using System Speed Dial”
for more information.
Benefits
Reduces phone bills because users can make only those toll calls that are necessary for them to
carry out their job responsibilities.
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 109
Toll Restriction Override Codes
Up to two Toll Restriction Override codes can be defined. When dialed at a toll restricted station,
these codes enable the user to override the toll restriction at that station. The codes may be
changed by certain stations that are selected in programming.
Up to four (eight on DK424 RCTUC/D and RCTUE/F) service code traveling classes can be
defined, one for each level of toll restriction. When dialed at a toll restricted station, these codes
change the level of toll restriction on the station to the level enabled by the code for one call. The
station then reverts to its original level of toll restriction. The codes may be changed by certain
stations that are selected in programming.
See the “Toll Restriction” for additional information.
Benefits
Enables authorized users the convenience of overriding toll restriction for more flexible outgoing
calling.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
System Features
110 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Toll Restriction Override Using System Speed
Dial
System Speed Dial numbers can be programmed to override Toll Restriction. When employees
need to access a toll number restricted by area/office code, an employer can assign that particular
toll number as a System Speed Dial number.
After overriding Toll Restriction with system Speed Dial, the user can be enabled or blocked from
dialing additional digits. Dialing long distance provider access codes (10XXX and 101XXX) is
not allowed, except when using system Speed Dial numbers or LCR.
Benefits
Enables employees to dial specific legitimate business toll calls, without making any other calls to
that particular area or office code. Preventing unnecessary toll calls can result in cost savings.
Sometimes an Attendant is asked to screen and place calls for toll-restricted users. This feature
eliminates that extra work, and frees the Attendant to give more attention to incoming calls.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 111
Transfer Privacy
In a system programmed for Transfer Privacy, an outside call that has been transferred can only be
answered at the station to which the call has been transferred or at another station using the
Directed Call Pickup feature. No other station can pick up the transferred call using the CO Line
button.
Privacy features only apply to CO lines and CO line button appearances. The Transfer Privacy
feature does not apply to multiple DN appearances. However, if Transfer Privacy is enabled, a call
that is blind-transferred to a multiple appearing DN of a CO Line, will only ring on the DN of the
prime station (of a PDN) or the owner of a PhDN.
The transferred call rings on all stations having the transferred-to DN before the transferring
station releases (hangs up) the call, but rings on the prime or owner station only after the call is
released.
Benefits
Enables protection for the confidentiality of outside calls that have been transferred. Callers are
assured that the only station that can answer the transferred call is the station to which the call has
been transferred.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
System Features
112 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Traveling Class of Service
The normal Toll Restriction class of a station can be temporarily changed to another class. Each of
the four (eight in DK424 RCTUC/D or RCTUE/F) toll restriction classes of service can be
assigned a four-digit code and given to users.
By entering the code at a station, a user changes the toll restriction class of service on that station
to the class of service of the code, which remains in effect for the duration of the call. The station
then reverts to its normal class of service. Any station can be programmed to change these codes
for security purposes.
The codes do not print on the Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) call records. However,
Verified Account Codes, which can also change Toll Restriction Class of Service, print out on
SMDR reports.
Benefits
Helps organizations manage telephone expenses and enables selected employees with the
convenience of using any station while maintaining toll restriction control.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 113
T1 Interface
The T1 Interface provides 8, 16, or 24 multiplexed, simultaneous two-way voice channels for cost-
effective connection to high quality, digital CO services. This enables the system to connect to a
CO, another DK424 system, or other telephone systems.
Each T1 channel can be individually configured for ANI, DNIS, loop and ground start operation,
DID operation, or Tie line operation. Both Super Frame and Extended Super Frame modes are
supported. T1 Interface requires the installation of a Telco or customer-provided Channel Service
Unit.
T1 DID hookswitch flash capability provides hookswitch flash operation on T1 two-way DID,
ground start, and Tie lines. This improves DID functionality in T1 applications. This feature
requires the RDTU2 T1 card.
For E&M Tie lines, configured incoming 800, or other services, an answering position or DN must
be provided to answer and transfer calls, because all calls are routed to one number. This applies
for AT&T Megacom™ and like services. With multiple DNs, a Megacom call can be answered
from any phone having the corresponding DN.
Ground start operation must be used with ACD or Auto Attendant. T1 loop start lines do not have
any disconnect supervision.
Benefits
Provides economic advantages using the high-traffic capacity of 24 multiplexed, simultaneous
two-way channels. T1 users also benefit from the increased quality of digital transmission. Access
to the T1 interface is completely transparent to the station users.
System Availability
Unavailable on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
(RCTUA processor)
Optional on Strata DK424 using RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F processors
Features
System Features
114 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Voice Mail Interface
Any Strata DK system can be configured with a voice mail messaging system. The system can be
a Toshiba Stratagy, or a customer-supplied voice mail messaging system.
When voice mail is installed with a DK system, each port on the voice mail system requires one
standard single-line phone port. No external modules are required.
Depending on the voice mail product installed, some or all of the following features may be
provided.
♦Automated Attendant – Many voice mail systems offer Automated Attendant as part of their
overall feature package.
♦ANI/DNIS Routing to Voice Mailbox – Routing ANI/DNIS calls directly to a voice mailbox
can be set for all calls or just calls during a particular system mode (Day, Day2, or Night). This
feature is available with in-band voice mail integration only, not with SMDI.
♦Call Forward to Voice Mailbox – Each user can forward calls directly to a personal mailbox.
The caller bypasses the usual sequence of voice mail commands and leaves a message after
hearing a greeting and/or a tone. Also, if someone calls Station A and Station A call forwards
to Station B, which in turn call forwards to voice mail, the caller is connected to Station A’s
personal mailbox.
♦Message Waiting Indication – When a message is recorded in a user’s mailbox, the voice mail
system automatically sets a message waiting indication at the station user’s DKT, EKT, or
single-line telephone with message lamp (DK40i and DK424 systems, only). The indication is
turned off after the user listens to the message.
♦Station Voice Mail Control – Station users can control voice mail equipment from their
telephone dial pad. DK14 and DK40i stations can control voice mail equipment when not
connected in a conference call. DK424 stations can control voice mail equipment on normal or
conference calls with other stations and outside parties. Users with 2000-series digital
telephones can also send continuous DTMF tones.
♦In-band Voice Mail Integration – The integration of special voice mail features in system
software enables the Strata DK and Toshiba Voice Processing systems to work together
efficiently using in-band DTMF signaling tones. This is standard on the DK14, DK40i, and
DK424 systems. Many other manufacturers’ voice mail systems also support in-band
signaling integration with DK14, DK40i, and DK424 systems.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Requirements
Standard station ports, or RS-232 port
using SMDI
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 115
SMDI Voice Mail Integration
SMDI voice mail integration is available for use with Stratagy or non-Toshiba voice mail systems
and can provide more efficient voice mail integration than in-band DTMF signaling when used in
high volume applications. It requires fewer DTMF receivers and sends information quicker,
because the voice mail machine processes digital RS-232 data faster that DTMF tones.
SMDI integrates Strata DK with Stratagy and other voice mail systems, through a digital RS-232
connection on a WSIU, TSIU, PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU, or RSIU using standard central office
protocol, providing more universal compatibility with Stratagy or non-Toshiba voice mail systems.
SMDI provides all the integration features of in-band DTMF signaling, except it does not support
the equivalent of A-tone answer supervision, B-tone recall supervision, or D-tone disconnect
supervision. SMDI can be important in selling Strata with non-Toshiba voice mail systems that
customers may already have and want to keep to use with their new Strata DK system.
Advantages provided by the Strata DK and the Stratagy SMDI integration are:
♦Uses the ports faster and more efficiently. SMDI is a faster and more efficient integration
compared to DTMF (in-band) integration and is recommended for high-traffic installations.
♦Improves call coverage. Stratagy uses the call forwarding status (all calls, no answer, busy,
etc.) supplied by SMDI to provide better call coverage. Status information enables Stratagy to
perform custom applications using Stratagy RNA and Busy Chain options.
♦Streamlines messaging procedures. SMDI provides calling party extension numbers to
Stratagy. Users calling Stratagy do not have to enter their user ID to log onto their mailboxes.
When an internal party calls an extension that is forwarded to voice mail, SMDI applies the
calling party identification to the message. Caller ID and ANI numbers are delivered to the
voice mail machine using SMDI packets. DNIS names are not sent on SMDI packets.
Table 10 is a comparison of the feature integration provided by in-band DTMF signaling and
SMDI.
Table 10 In-band and SMDI Comparison
Equipment In-band SMDI
A-tone (or equivalent) Answer Supervision Yes Yes
B-tone (or equivalent) Recall Supervision Yes No
D-tone (or equivalent) Disconnect Supervision Yes No
Option Card Required in Strata DK No Yes
Performance Slower Faster
DTMF Receivers Required More Fewer
Integration Software in Voice Mail System Standard1
1. In-band integration standard with Toshiba Stratagy. It is standard with most other manufacturers, but
may be optional with some.
Optional2
2. SMDI integration standard with all Stratagy systems. SMDI integration optional with most other manu-
facturers, but may be standard with some.
Available in DK14 and DK40i Yes Yes
Available in DK424 RCTUA Yes Yes
Available in DK424 RCTUBA/BB Yes Yes
Available in DK424 RCTUC/D Yes Yes
Available in DK424 RCTUE/F Yes Yes
Features
System Features
116 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Benefits
The customer can gain the benefits of using a voice mail system, because it can easily be attached
to a Strata system. DK systems are compatible with all Toshiba Stratagy systems and many
different brands of voice mail systems.
Callers can leave detailed messages for a specific employee and feel their needs are being
addressed immediately, rather than neglected until the employee calls back. This uses your
employees’ time more efficiently and enables them to provide your customers better service.
Features
System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 117
Voice or Tone Signaling
Any Strata DK system can be programmed for tone ringing or voice announce as the standard
method of internal call signaling. With tone ring signaling selected, a station rings when called by
another internal station. The called telephone receives a one-second ring tone every three seconds.
With voice announce signaling selected, a station does not ring when called on its DN/PDN by
another internal station. Instead, a tone burst is heard, followed by the caller’s voice over the called
telephone’s speaker. Voice announce signaling enables handsfree talkback from the called
telephone on internal and private network Tie line calls.
Regardless of whether tone ringing or voice announce has been programmed for the system, a
caller can always select the alternate method by dialing “1” after the station number.
When PhDNs are called, they always ring with tone ring signaling. Callers can select voice
announce signaling by dialing “1” after the PhDn.
If there is a DSS console in the system, it can be programmed for voice or tone signaling
independent of the choice for the system (DSS console is not used with DK14).
Benefits
Provides privacy and protects confidential communications. Voice signaling enables quick
communication with handsfree talkback.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
System Features
118 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Wall or Table Mounting
The DK424 base Key Service Unit (KSU) and expansion cabinets can be wall or floor mounted
even with a fully configured, seven-cabinet system. The modular DK424 cabinet configuration can
be built from the bottom (base cabinet) up or from the top down.
Benefits
Enables installation almost anywhere the customer has space available.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK424
DK14 and DK40i designed for wall mount
only
Features
Station Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 119
Station Features
This section describes the features that are available to Strata DK station users. Not all of the
features for digital phones are available on the digital cordless phones.
Features
Station Features
120 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Alert Signal Button
The Alert Signal button enables a digital or electronic telephone user to signal a designated station.
Whenever the user presses the Alert Signal button, they automatically ring the designated station
with a distinctive alert-ring signal. This signal alerts a person about some pre-arranged event or
action. No talk path exists between the called and calling telephones.
The alerting signal is sent to phones that are idle, busy (on or off-hook), in speakerphone mode,
call forwarded, or in a Do Not Disturb mode.
Each station that has this feature can send or receive the alert signal to and from another station. A
station can have up to four unique Alert Signal buttons to signal to and from four different stations.
Benefits
Useful in interoffice applications to alert everyone about pre-arranged events or actions. This
option is engaged with the press of a button without the need for conversation.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
Station Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 121
Automatic Busy Redial (ABR)
ABR enables a station user to automatically redial a busy outside number up to 15 times at pre-
programmed intervals. Call attempts can be programmed for 30- or 60-second intervals. ABR is
not attempted if the calling station is busy with another call, but the pre-programmed timer
continues to run.
When the redial is successful, the calling station receives ABR ringback tone for 40 seconds or
until the call is answered.
This feature can be enabled or denied on a station-by-station basis. It can be accessed by using a
feature code, or it can be programmed as a feature button.
Important! This feature is not available on outgoing Tie or DID lines.
Automatic Busy Redial is completely compatible with Least Cost Routing functions.
Benefits
Saves time and money because the station user does not waste time looking up numbers. The
system redials the number accurately, eliminating costly dialing errors, especially on long
telephone numbers. Business can be completed efficiently, because the system automatically tries
the number again, while the user continues to work.
Since the feature can be assigned on a station-by-station basis, a company can assign it only to
those who require it. This way, CO lines are not be tied up with an excessive amount of redials.
Automatic Busy Redial can cut costs because it only redials a call on the CO line originally
selected by the Least Cost Routing feature.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Requirements
Strata DK14/40i - DKT or EKT with busy
tone detectors
Features
Station Features
122 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Automatic Callback (Internal Calls)
A station user makes an internal call and finds the called station busy or in Do Not Disturb mode.
By using a flexible button or by dialing a special code, the caller can activate Automatic Callback.
When the called station is free, the system rings the caller with a special tone. When the caller
answers, the system automatically rings the called party.
If the caller hears a busy tone after answering the Automatic Callback, it means that the called
party has made or received another call. The callback request is not canceled, and the system rings
the caller as soon as the called station is free again.
When calling a station with multiple PDNs in the ring first mode, ACB is available to the calling
station only if all the PDNs of the called station are busy.
The caller can cancel the callback request at any time with a cancellation feature code.
Benefits
Minimizes user’s time redialing a busy number. The caller can use that time more productively.
Automatic Callback also minimizes the frustration of continuous busy signals.
Sometimes people “hang around” outside an office, waiting for someone to complete a phone call.
Automatic Callback could be used to give an indication that the person is off the phone instead of
wasting time “pacing the hall.”
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
Station Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 123
Automatic Hold
Each station can be individually set in programming for Auto Hold or Auto Release of an existing
call when another incoming call is answered. Auto Hold automatically places an existing CO line
or internal call on hold when another incoming call is answered. Auto Release automatically
releases an existing CO line or internal call when another incoming call is answered.
Both Auto Hold and Auto Release can be overridden by pressing the Release or Hold button,
respectively, before answering another incoming call.
Benefits
Saves time in call splitting applications in which users want to switch back and forth between two
calls, particularly the busy DSS operator. Auto Release saves time in heavy-call answering
applications when users want to disconnect from a finished call and answer the next call
simultaneously.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
Station Features
124 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Automatic Off-hook Line Selection
Automatic Off-hook Line Selection enables a station to automatically access a specific line or line
group and an internal PDN when the station user lifts the handset to place a call. The station user
does not have to press the line button or DN button for the preferred line. The Spkr button also
auto-selects the programmed line or line group and DN.
A station can be programmed to require manual selection of a line or to automatically access one
of the following when the user picks up the handset to place a call:
♦A specific CO/PBX line group
♦An intercom or DN
♦The lowest numbered CO/PBX line that appears on the DKT
If Automatic Off-hook Line Selection is not assigned, the user gets no dial tone and must manually
access the line or feature.
If Automatic Off-hook Line Selection for a particular station is assigned to a CO/PBX line group,
the station user gets dial tone from the last free line in that line group when the handset is lifted.
The station user can dial the telephone number without pressing a CO/PBX line button. If all lines
in the assigned group are busy, the user hears busy tone and can use the trunk queuing feature.
Assigning Automatic Off-hook Line Selection to a trunk group is a convenience to the user who
almost always makes outside calls. If Automatic Off-hook Line Selection is assigned to an
intercom or DN, the user gets internal call dial tone when the handset is lifted. The user can dial
another station without using the intercom or DN button. This is a convenience to the user who
almost always makes internal calls.
If Automatic Off-hook Line Selection is assigned to the lowest numbered CO/PBX line on the
telephone, the user gets dial tone from that specific CO line, and can dial a telephone number
without pressing the button for that line. This could be a convenience to an executive whose
private line appears on that DKT.
Note Unavailable for Off-premises Station or on a standard single-line station.
Benefits
Provides the convenience of not having to look for a free line or press a line button to place the
most frequently made calls.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Requirements
DKTs or EKTs
Features
Station Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 125
Background Music (BGM) with Station Control
A BGM/Music-on-Hold (MOH) RCA jack is built into the common control unit on DK14, DK40i,
and DK424 systems. This jack connects a customer-supplied music source to be used for BGM,
MOH, or both.
BGM can be sent to a digital or electronic telephone and external speakers. The customer-supplied
background music can be applied to the telephone and external speakers, or each can have a
separate music source.
If a system is connected to a music source and this feature is activated, a station user can access
background music through the speaker of a digital or electronic telephone. The music can be
turned on and off at the user’s option using the Tel Set Music button or dialing an access code. The
user can also control the volume.
If an external paging system is installed, music can also be broadcast through the external paging
speakers providing background music throughout the facility. The background music over external
page can be turned on and off from a telephone or Attendant Console.
No optional hardware is required when background music is broadcast over digital or electronic
telephone speakers. The customer-supplied music source for both background music on telephone
speakers and MOH connects directly to the common control unit.
If a separate music source for background music over telephone speakers is desired, it can connect
to a designated station port. This enables separate sources for MOH and telephone background
music.
Music on both the external speaker and the telephones is muted when a paging announcement is
made or when night ringing occurs.
Music Sources
Each system can support the following:
♦DK14 – two separate music sources, one for MOH and the other shared by DKT speaker and
external speaker background music. The QSTU card provides the music source connection to
designated station ports.
♦DK40i – up to three separate music sources, one can broadcast background music over digital
or electronic telephone speakers, another can broadcast over external speakers, and the third
can provide music or a recording for MOH. The KSTU, RSTU, PSTU, PEKU, or PESU cards
provide the music source connection to designated station ports.
♦DK424 – up to three separate music sources one can broadcast background music over digital
or electronic telephone speakers, another can broadcast over external speakers, and the third
can provide music or a recording for MOH. The RSTU, RDSU, PSTU, PEKU, or PESU cards
provide the music source connection to designated station ports.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
Station Features
126 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
On a DK40i or DK424 system, when the source input for background music over external
speakers is unamplified, it can use the built-in three-watt amplifier of an Option Interface Unit
(PIOU or PEPU). Amplified music output requires either the PIOU or PEPU, or the music input
source can be connected through an external amplifier.
Benefits
Provides relaxing music to employees while they are working, and music that is conducive to the
work environment. Conflicts over type of music played are avoided and employees have the
option of simply turning off the music on their telephones.
Features
Station Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 127
Busy Override Tone
After dialing an internal station and receiving a busy signal, a caller can press a Soft Key or dial a
code which signals the called station with a tone burst indicating that a call is waiting. This enables
a station user to send tone bursts to a busy station’s idle DN or line button by dialing 2 or by
pressing a feature button.
The tone burst can be sent either two times (four seconds apart) or repeated continuously every
four seconds. If there are no idle DNs or line buttons on the busy station, the station receives two
bursts of camp-on tone (see “Call Transfer with Camp-on” for more information).
A busy digital or electronic station can receive this tone. DKT2000-series telephone users can
adjust their telephones to receive the tone over their handsets or headset receivers, as well as the
speaker. Standard telephones receive camp-on tones twice from the handset receiver (it is not
continuous on standard telephones).
Benefits
Provides user convenience and calling efficiency. Selected users can access busy extensions, either
to give them a priority message or to announce a caller or guest.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
Station Features
128 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Busy Station Transfer/Busy Station Ringing
The Busy Station Transfer and Busy Station Ringing features operate together to ensure that a
busy digital or electronic telephone station always receives transferred calls along with distinct
LED and tone indications. A typical application is when an Auto Attendant device transfers calls
frequently to a busy answering position station.
Digital and electronic telephones, programmed with this feature, ring and provide ringback even
when they are busy on another call. This is important to voice mail and Auto Attendant
applications, in which incoming calls are often transferred from the Auto Attendant to busy
stations, especially the DSS station. It prevents outside callers from being sent back to the Auto
Attendant or voice mail after already making their choice from the Auto Attendant or voice mail
greeting.
When either an internal caller or Auto Attendant transfers an external call to a busy telephone
assigned with this feature, the caller hears ring-back tone, not busy tone. The called, busy
telephone rings with a muted tone, and the applicable LED flashes in synchronization with the
ringing. Both the called and the calling party must be programmed for this feature. If one is not,
normal operation occurs.
To answer the incoming call, the called party can transfer, release, or place the current call on hold
before pressing the button associated with the flashing LED. If Auto Hold is programmed for that
station, the user presses the button of the new call and the existing call is held automatically.
Otherwise, the transferred call camps-on after ringing and not being answered.
If the called station is an LCD telephone, it shows which CO line is camped-on. Called stations can
continue to operate other features in the normal way. If called while idle, these stations ring
normally.
Any number of electronic and digital telephones can be individually programmed with this feature.
Busy Station Transfer/Ringing does not operate on standard telephones.
Benefits
Ensures that important calls are answered more efficiently and reduces caller frustration by
preventing them from looping back and forth from the Auto Attendant or voice mail without
talking to anyone. This feature may also have applications for stations needing to get through to a
busy answering position or message center without getting a busy signal.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
Station Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 129
Call Forward
Using the Call Forward feature, a station user can route all calls to an alternate station or voice
mail device. Except for fixed call forwarding, the station user selects the destination when setting
call forward. Call forwarding can be set by a feature button or access code. Stations in call forward
mode can originate calls as usual.
Internal DN and CO line calls that have been transferred to the station are forwarded. CO lines that
ring only at that station also forward. CO lines that ring more than one station do not forward on
DK14 and DK40i systems, but do forward on a DK424 system under certain conditions.
On DK424, a telephone can be designated in system programming as the Call Forward controlling
telephone in applications that require ground and loop start CO lines to ring a group of telephones.
The Call Forward control telephone must be only one designated to ring in the delay ring
assignment, in which the call should forward.
The ringing assignment (Immediate, 12-second delay, 24-second delay) in which a CO line call
forwards is designated independently for the Day, Day2, and Night Ring modes. Once assigned,
the CO line follows the call forward setting (Busy, No Answer, etc.) of the designated control
station. If the call forwards to voice mail, it is sent to the mailbox of the Call Forward controlling
telephone’s PDN or designated PhDN. This feature does not apply to Tie, DID, ANI, or DNIS
lines which ring to a particular DN and follow the call forward setting of the DN.
Call Forward can be assigned to PhDNs–the type and destination can be different from the PDNs.
Up to eight PhDNs can be call forward controlled from one station by the PhDN owner. A station
can have up to four PhDN MW button/LEDs.
When Call Forward No Answer is active on a Handsfree Call, this option prevents a handsfree
(internal call) from forwarding while engaged in a handsfree (internal call) with a station that has
Call Forward No Answer or Busy/No Answer activated. This occurs even if the answering station
does not press the Internal Call button to answer the call within the 12-second forwarding time.
Call forwarding still occurs when the caller forces the call from Handsfree mode to Ring mode.
Each station can be individually set in programming to enable or disable this feature.
The system can be programmed so that the Attendant station/DSS console can either override call
forwarding and ring station users, or follow the call forwarding of called stations. If set for
override, calls placed or transferred via buttons on the DSS console overrides call forwarding and
ring the called station. In this case, calls placed via the dial pad of the associated digital or
electronic telephone does not override, and forwards, thus giving the operator the ability to either
override or forward a call. If override is not selected in programming, calls placed or transferred
via buttons on the DSS console are forwarded.
Call Forwarding takes precedence over Station Hunting but not over Distributed Hunting (DH). If
a station in a DH group activates call forward, calls to the DH-DN that ring that station do not
forward. Calls to the station’s DN do forward.
When a station is in any Call Forward mode, outgoing calls can still be made from that station. If
system power is lost, Call Forward remains on stations when the power is restored.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
Station Features
130 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Call Forward Modes
There are several available Call Forward modes. Each can be set and canceled by the station user.
They are:
All Calls
When a station is idle or busy, all calls to the station forward immediately. The station does not
ring.
Busy
When this mode is set, all calls to a busy DN immediately forwards. If a station has an idle PDN,
but is busy on another DN or CO line call, calls to the PDN do not forward if the system has Ring
First signaling, but do forward if the system has Voice First Signaling. If all the station’s PDNs are
in use, then calls to the PDN forward immediately. When a station is in the DND mode, all calls to
the station’s PDN forward immediately.
No Answer
When a station does not answer, the call forwards. No Answer time is flexible, 8 to 60 seconds.
When the station is busy, incoming calls get busy tone. Call Forward No Answer is optional on
Handsfree Answerback. OCA calls do not Call Forward. Handsfree internal calls can be
programmed to automatically forward or not forward if there is no answer. If they are programmed
to not forward, callers can force Call Forward with a one-digit entry.
Busy/No Answer
When a station is idle and in this mode, calls ring for 8 to 60 seconds and then forward. The Ring
No Answer time can be set by the telephone user. When all the stations’s DNs are busy or when the
station is in the DND mode, the call will “Call Forward-Busy” immediately.
On ring first systems, if the station is busy on a call but has an idle DN, calls mute-ring the idle DN
until the Call Forward No Answer timer expires and then the call forwards. This enables other
users (such as a secretary) to answer the call if the called DN appears on their telephones. On
Voice First systems, calls immediately Call Forward-Busy when the station is busy on a call, even
if it has an idle PDN. A station in the DND mode call forwards immediately.
Fixed
A feature button can be programmed on a digital or electronic telephone to put that station in Call
Forward mode to a fixed destination. The destination can be a PDN, PhDN, or Distributed Hunt
DN. For example, the station may be programmed to forward to the Attendant station or a voice
mail system. The destination is fixed in programming and cannot be changed by the station user. A
station user with fixed Call Forward registration can also have standard call forwarding.
External
Call Forward External with remote change capability permits incoming CO line calls to be routed
over an outgoing CO line to an outside directory number, increasing availability to receive
incoming calls and making it efficient and easy to control.
Features
Station Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 131
Only incoming calls on DID or private lines can be forwarded to numbers outside the Strata DK
system. Internal, Tie line, and transferred calls do not call forward externally, but do forward
internally if another Call Forward mode is set simultaneously with Call Forward-External. The
intention is that CO line calls ringing at multiple stations, or that can be answered by other stations
internally, should be answered rather than be forwarded externally. Call Forwarding can be set for
PDNs and PhDNs individually, with the exception of Call Forward External and fixed Call
Forward which applies only to PDNs.
The station user has the ability to cancel or change the destination of forwarded CO line calls. This
is done remotely via DISA. Toll restriction applied by DISA is also applied to externally
forwarded calls. A DTMF receiver (RRCS) is required to change call forwarding remotely.
External Call forward establishes a trunk-to-trunk connection.
Benefits
Ensures efficient call handling and better service to callers. It is more likely that calls to a station
are answered promptly. By providing more efficient handling of calls, this feature helps a company
to project a professional and courteous image, both internally and externally.
Station users can work in locations other than at their desks and not miss their telephone calls.
They can forward their calls to a nearby phone. Used in conjunction with voice mail, Call Forward
ensures that calls are not lost and callers have the opportunity to leave complete and detailed
messages.
Call Forwarding can be set up by department or special mailbox or destination with the use of
PhDNs. Using PhDNs, Call Forwarding can be set up by department, special mailbox or
destination.
Features
Station Features
132 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Call Park
When a CO line does not have a button appearance on a station, that station can use the Park in
Orbit button or a feature code to put the call on hold and make a second call. The second call can
be an internal call, a page, or a CO line call. After completing the second call, the original call can
be retrieved using the Park in Orbit button or a feature code. Internal station-to-station calls can be
parked.
Any station user can page someone else to pick up a parked call at their station. The paged person
can retrieve the call from the park orbit by dialing an access code plus the park orbit number. If a
parked call is not retrieved within a pre-designated time, it recalls the parking telephone or
Attendant Console. The park recall time can be individually set for each station (from 11 seconds
to 15 minutes.).
Park Orbits
There are 20 general Park Orbits available. General Park Orbits are selected in the order they are
available. They should only be used by LCD telephones or Attendant Consoles, because the
selected Park Orbit number displays when a call is parked. In addition to general Park Orbits, each
station user can park a call on its personal Park Orbit (one per station). All types of telephones can
use the personal Park Orbit including standard telephones. Call Pickup is available from any
station.
Park and Page
A station user can park a call in any of the general Park Orbits or in a personal Park Orbit, then
enter a Page Zone or Group access code and announce to the paged party the orbit number of the
waiting call. The user’s telephone can be connected to a pre-designated external paging circuit, a
telephone paging group, or both.
Auto Park
This feature is only available to LCD telephones. When a telephone user parks a call, the user can
enter 999 instead of a specific Orbit Number. The system automatically selects the next available
general Park Orbit and park the call. The parking telephone LCD shows the Park Orbit that has
been automatically selected for the parked call.
Benefits
Enables convenient consultation calling for stations that do not have direct CO line appearances.
Without Call Park, these stations cannot retrieve held calls. Call Park enables the station user to
keep one call on hold, place another call, and return to the first call. Call Park Orbits make paging
and call pickup much easier. Employees can easily pick up their calls from their personal park
orbit. The Park and Page feature combines two functions into one quick-and-easy operation.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
Station Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 133
Call Pickup
By pressing a button or dialing an access code, any station can pick up:
♦PDN or PhDN calls that are on hold or ringing at other stations
♦CO/DID/Tie line calls ringing at other stations, all lines or designated lines. See “Tenant
Service” in the System Features section for more information.
♦External or Station Group Page
♦CO line ringing during the Night mode over External Page or night bell
♦Door Phone calls
♦Incoming CO line calls
♦Parked calls
♦Any ringing line or designated Tenant Group lines
♦Tandem CO line connections by tandem origination telephone
To pick up a:
♦Call enter a code and number of the ringing station or use the Directed Pickup button and the
PDN (see the “Call Pickup Groups” for additional capabilities).
♦CO line call when the ringing number is unknown, enter a specific code. See “Computer
Telephony Integration (CTI)” in the System Features section for more information on call
pickup by CO line group.
♦Call using any DN at another station, enter a code and the DN (the code can also be
programmed on a button). In a multiple DN environment, use DN Call Pickup because held or
ringing calls can be picked up by specific PDNs or PhDNs.
Selective Pickup on All Call Page (DK424 only)
This feature enables All Call Page and External Page (depending on programming) pickup,
exclusive of internal station-to-station ringing call pickup. It does not pick up ringing DNs.
Note On DK14 and DK40i systems, the pickup code picks up a ringing DN as a priority over
All Call Page if the internal station-to-station call rings at the same time the All Call or
External Page needs to be picked up.
Benefits
Call Pickup provides a convenience to station users by enabling them to answer their calls from
another station in the area. Employees in the same work area can answer calls for others who are
away from their desks, minimizing long ringing times and reducing disturbances in the work area.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
Station Features
134 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Call Pickup Groups
Call Pickup Groups enable you to pick up all types of calls including intercom or PDN calls
ringing at other stations, or station groups. Calls can be picked up using programmable buttons
(Group Pickup), or brief access codes that are easy to use and remember.
Station users can pick up incoming calls at any station in their own group, and can pick up calls to
stations in other groups. Up to 20 Call Pickup Groups can be created to provide maximum call
coverage. A station can be in more than one group. One group can have all stations.
Benefits
Provides a convenience to station users by enabling them to answer their intercom and CO line
calls from another station in the area. Employees in the same work area can answer calls for others
who are away from their desks, minimizing long ringing times and reducing disturbances in the
work area.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
Station Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 135
Call Transfer with Camp-on
Calls can be transferred to another station on either an announced or unannounced (immediate)
basis. Immediate transfers initiated with a designated feature prompting soft key on
LCD-equipped digital telephones transfer immediately after the final digit of the destination is
dialed.
If the called station is not available or is busy, the call automatically camps onto it. This feature is
important for stations that process a large number of calls with no time to wait for transferred calls
to be answered. A “camp-on” tone (two tone bursts) is heard at the called station. The tone can be
enabled or disabled for each station.
A station user can transfer a CO, DID, Tie line, or internal call to a station that is idle or busy. The
call can be transferred even if the CO line does not appear on the station to which the call is
transferred. An internal call, as well as a CO line call, can be transferred to another internal station.
If the transferred call is not answered, it recalls to the originating station within a pre-programmed
time from 16 to 64 seconds. The recall time can be individually set for each transferring station.
As an option, the system can be programmed so that a CO button transferred call can only be
picked up by the station to which it was transferred or by a station using Directed Call Pickup. See
“Transfer Privacy” for more information.
Benefits
Provides an easy and convenient way to transfer calls to the appropriate people and to alert a busy
station to a waiting call resulting in better service to callers.
Internal station-to-station transfer is useful for Attendant Console operators who get lots of
internal calls asking for other station users.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
Station Features
136 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Centrex/PBX Feature Buttons
Feature access codes, including pauses and flashes, which access features in a host CO, Centrex, or
PBX system can be programmed as if they were system speed dial numbers. Such codes can then
be assigned to system Speed Dial (SD) buttons on all stations, and used for one-button access to
the CO, Centrex, or PBX feature. A SD button that is programmed in this way is called a “locked”
SD button.
Each feature access code can have up to 16 digits, including pauses and flashes. Buttons are
assigned to system speed dial numbers in system programming.
Benefits
Provides users easy, one-button access to features that would otherwise require more complicated
access procedures. Features that must be accessed through the CO/Centrex/PBX can be used more
easily.
Since users do not have to look up feature access codes, SD buttons save time. Dialing errors can
also be eliminated.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
Station Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 137
Continuous DTMF Signal Time
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) dial signal is transmitted to the CO line or voice mail/Auto
Attendant device for as long as the telephone user presses a button on the dial pad. This feature
operates on 2000-series digital telephones only.
The maximum DTMF duration is determined by the length of time the user presses a button on the
dial pad. The minimum DTMF duration is determined by system programming. A minimum
DTMF duration, either 80 or 160 ms, is required when using Speed Dial and when sending voice
mail integraton digits to a voice mail machine.
Benefits
Provides compatibility with a variety of outside services and devices, which require manually
dialing DTMF tones of varying lengths. Application examples are MCI credit card calling, which
requires holding down a button (to create a tone) for one second to make another call, or remotely
signaling an answering machine to rewind by holding down a button for a specified amount of
time.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
with 2000-series DKTs
Features
Station Features
138 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Data Buttons
Flexible buttons on 2000-series digital telephones can be programmed for data functions if
equipped with the Integrated PC Interface Unit (RPCI-DI).
A flexible button on a digital telephone can be assigned as a Data Call button, that can be used to
dial internal data calls. The telephone must be equipped with an RPCI-DI for Data Call button
applications.
A modem button enables a digital telephone user to reserve a modem from a pool or to switch
from a voice to a data call. Its LED indicates the availability of modems. The telephone must be
equipped with an Integrated PC Interface Unit (RPCI-DI) for modem button applications.
Benefits
Provides programming with the touch of one button for speed and convenience.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
Station Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 139
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Buttons
Any available button on a 10-button or 20-button digital or electronic telephone, add-on module,
or DSS console can be programmed to provide a direct connection to any other telephone in the
system. The LED associated with each button serves as a Busy Lamp Indicator that lights when the
station named on the button is busy. Pressing the DSS button immediately rings the station
assigned to that button.
Calls made with station DSS buttons forward if the station assigned to the DSS button is in Call
Forward mode.
Benefits
Provides instant, one-button access to other stations, eliminating the need to repeatedly look up
extension numbers to place internal calls, and show the status of the extension. This feature
provides quick communication between two people who work cooperatively, such as an executive
and the executive’s secretary.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
Station Features
140 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Distinctive LED Indicators
Each line/feature button on a digital telephone has an associated LED. When a button is assigned
to a CO/PBX line, this LED flashes at different rates to indicate the status of that line.
The in-use flash rate appears on the LED when the line is in use by that station. Other stations
show a steady LED on that line. The incoming call flash rate appears when a call (internal or CO/
PBX) is ringing in on that line. The on-hold flash rate appears on a station when the station puts a
call on hold. Other stations show the usual system hold flash rate. The camp-on and busy station
ringing flash rate appears when an incoming call is camped-on or ringing at a busy station. Other
distinctive flash rates appear on LEDs associated with a CO/PBX line when that line is on
exclusive hold, is being recalled from hold, or has a conference call in progress.
When a line/feature button is assigned to a feature, the LED indicates the status of the feature. For
example, when the “Message Waiting/Flash” button indicates that a message is waiting for that
station.
LEDs are also distinctive LED indicators with certain dedicated feature buttons, such as Spkr, Mic,
and Msg. The Spkr LED indicates the on/off status of the speaker or background music. The Mic
LED indicates the on/off status of the station’s microphone when the station is in Speakerphone
mode. The Msg LED indicates there is a message waiting.
An LED associated with the DSS button functions as a busy lamp for the station assigned to the
DSS button.
Digital telephones have dual-color LED indicators. Green indicates CO line or intercom buttons
you are using. Red indicates use by someone else.
Benefits
Provides quick status of a line or feature by looking at the LED.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
with DKTs
Features
Station Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 141
Distinctive Station Ringing
Stations in close proximity to one another can be programmed to ring differently. Three different
tones are available for incoming CO and DID line calls that are transferred to a station or ring
directly to a station.
Benefits
Provides quick recognition of the ringing telephone when the user is away from their desks.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
Station Features
142 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Do Not Disturb (DND)
After DND is activated by a station, internal calls and transferred calls do not ring at the station,
and voice announcements do not come through. Off-hook Call Announce is also blocked. The
station user can still place outgoing calls, however.
Incoming internal and CO line calls to stations in DND do not ring the station but the DN flashes.
Incoming CO line callers hear ringing until forwarded or answered by another station. Also, if a
station is not in DND when an incoming internal and CO line call rings the station, the DND
button can be pressed during ringing to turn off the ringing at the station, and the caller continues
to hear ringing until forwarded or answered by another station.
If an internal call is placed to a station that is in the DND mode, and all the appearances of the
station’s PDN are in-use, the caller hears a fast busy tone. DND can be overridden by any station
that has the DND Override feature or the Alert Signal button assigned to the DND telephone.
Incoming CO line callers hears busy tone, unless forwarded or recalled to another station.
If a station is in the DND mode and if the station’s PDN appears on another station as an SDN, the
callers ring the secondary DNs providing the SDN appearance is idle and the telephone having the
secondary DN is not in DND. The caller receives ring back tone. If all stations having a particular
DN (PDN, PhDN, or SDN) are in the DND mode, internal callers receive fast busy tone when
calling the DN.
DND can be assigned selectively on a station-by-station basis. DND can only be activated by
electronic telephone or digital telephone stations, not by standard single-line telephones.
Benefits
Improves employees’ time management and productivity by dedicating uninterrupted blocks of
time to projects or meetings.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
Station Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 143
Do Not Disturb (DND) Override
After dialing an internal station and receiving a DND signal, a caller with the DND Override
feature can dial an access code. The called station is signaled with a tone burst, indicating that a
call is waiting. If the called party has an LCD phone, the number of the calling station is displayed.
This feature can be assigned on a station-by-station basis.
Benefits
Provides convenience and efficient calling by enabling selected users access to stations which are
in DND. A priority message or announcement is given about important callers or guests.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
Station Features
144 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Dial Pulse/DTMF Mode Change
If the Tone button has been assigned to a station, that station user can change the outpulsing mode
on the CO/PBX line in use from dial pulse to DTMF with the touch of a feature button.
With some other electronic key systems, DTMF tones are generated only by the Key Service Unit
(KSU) while an external number is being outpulsed. After that, the tone generator is no longer
engaged, and the system simply “passes through” the generated electronic pulses. Since these
electronic pulses are neither rotary nor DTMF, the user is unable to remotely operate any systems
requiring DTMF tones.
The Tone button on Strata DK systems enables the user to tell the system to switch from rotary
outpulse to DTMF tone outpulse when required. It also enables users who are in a location served
by a rotary-only CO to generate DTMF tones for the remote operation of answering machines and
other devices.
Benefits
Enables users to outpulse DTMF tones at any time. This is especially useful for the remote
operation of equipment that requires DTMF tones for operation, such as answering machines,
bank-by-telephone systems, dictation machines, and voice mail systems.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
with DKTs
Features
Station Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 145
Exclusive Hold
Exclusive Hold enables a station user to put a call on hold so that the call can be picked up at that
station only or at another station using Directed Call Pickup. No other station can pick up the call
by simply pressing the DN or the Line button . A distinctive LED flashes indicating that the line is
on Exclusive Hold.
In order for the feature to work, there must be an appearance of the CO line or DN on the station
activating Exclusive Hold. To activate, the user presses the Hold button twice. Each system uses
the feature as follows:
♦DK14 – if a DN receives a call while it is on hold, there is no audible or visual indication that
another call is camped onto the DN. This assumes that there are no idle appearances of the
DN, which would ring if called while another appearance of the DN is on hold.
♦DK40i – if a DN receives a call while it is on hold, there is no audible or visual indication that
another call is camped onto the DN. This assumes that there are no idle appearances of the
DN, which would ring if called while another appearance of the DN is on hold.
♦DK424 – if a telephone receives a call of any type and the DN that should receive the call is on
hold, the camp-on tone is sent to that telephone. The camp-on tone consists of two muted ring
tones three seconds apart.
Benefits
Enhances efficient call handling by providing a way for a station to secure a call on hold. It
eliminates any annoyance to a caller caused by being accidentally picked up by another party.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
Station Features
146 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Executive Override
Executive Override can be selectively assigned to enable a station user to “break into” a
conversation of a busy station. Stations with this feature programmed can enter any conversation
in the system by dialing an access code or by pressing a feature prompting Soft Key. An optional
warning tone signal is heard through the handset which indicates to the conversing parties that
another station is about to enter the conversation. After the “break-in,” a three-way conference is
in effect until one of the parties hangs up.
This feature can be assigned to any station in the system. The maximum number of simultaneous
Executive Override calls is the same as the number of simultaneous conferences enabled.
Executive Override to any station can be blocked selectively in system programming providing
security for modem (data) calls, voice mail calls, fax machine calls, etc.
Benefits
Enables selected stations to access a busy station for an emergency or a high-priority message.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
Station Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 147
Flash Button
The Flash button serves one of two purposes:
♦Disconnect a line and get CO dial tone again. If the Flash button is pressed when a station is
connected to an outside loop start line, a “flash” signal is sent to the CO that is long enough to
disconnect the line and get CO dial tone again.
♦Operate features on a PBX or Centrex. If the Flash button is pressed when a station is
connected to a PBX, the station can use the features on the PBX or Centrex.
Different flash times are usually required for each purpose. If the flash is programmed with one
value only, it can perform only one of these two functions, but not both.
Benefits
Enables the user to disconnect the line and get CO dial tone again on the same CO line with one
touch of a button. When a station user is making a series of CO calls or is redialing a busy number,
it is inconvenient to have to press the hookswitch, release it, and access a CO line again.
When the system is installed behind a PBX, users can access PBX features that require a “flash” to
operate, enabling stations to function more fully as a part of the PBX, and to take advantage of the
PBX features.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
with DKTS
Features
Station Features
148 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Handsfree Answerback on Intercom
When a voice-announced internal DN call comes into a digital or electronic telephone, users can
answer without lifting the handset. All Toshiba digital key telephones (except the single-line
model) are equipped with either Handsfree Answerback or a full speakerphone.
The Handsfree Answerback feature can be enabled or blocked on a station-by-station basis. If
enabled, a station user can answer a voice call without lifting the handset by simply speaking in the
direction of the phone. If the call is a tone call, the user must first press the Spkr button and then
begin to talk.
The Microphn Cut-off button can be assigned to a digital telephone and used to disable the
Handsfree Answerback feature to ensure private office conversation.
Note The Cordless DKT-2004-CT, Single-line Digital DKT2001, and standard telephones are
not compatible with this feature.
Benefits
Provides convenience, efficient calling, and increased productivity. People who are engaged in
“hands-on” work, such as engineers, architects, designers, and PC users, can carry on short
conversations without having to pick up the handset.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
Station Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 149
Hearing-aid Compatible
All Toshiba digital key telephones are hearing-aid compatible and do not interfere with the
operation of a hearing device.
The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) requires that telephones in certain locations are
hearing-aid compatible. For example, emergency phones, hotel room phones, and phones in
lobbies must be hearing-aid compatible.
Benefits
Provides use with hearing aid devices. Customers who install the Toshiba digital key telephones
are in compliance with FCC regulations.
System Availability
Standard on DKTs
Features
Station Features
150 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
LCD - Alphanumeric Messaging
If a station is equipped with a 20-button LCD telephone, system messages and personal messages
can be displayed on the 32-character LCD. Forty system messages can be created, each of which
can be up to thirty-two characters long. System messages can be used by all LCD telephones. For
example, a system message might be: “Out to lunch,” or “Back at ______.”
A specific number of LCD stations can also create up to 10 personal messages. Each DK system
had its own maximum number which are:
♦DK14 – 8 stations
♦DK40i (RCTUA) – 16 stations
♦DK424:
♦RCTUA – 16 stations
♦RCTUBA/BB – 32 stations
♦RCTUC/D and RCTUE/F – 96 stations
Stations that are enabled for personal messages are also enabled for the personal speed dial memo
feature.
System and personal messages are used with the following features:
♦Busy Station Messaging
♦Called Station Messaging
♦Calling Station Messaging
♦Remote/Group Station Messaging
♦Timed Reminders
Note Busy Station Messaging and Called Station Messaging are not available when using
feature prompting Soft Key operation.
Benefits
Enables station users to leave quick messages for people they call as well as for people who call
them. It saves time by eliminating the need to walk to another office to leave a note or give a
message to a secretary or Attendant.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
with LCD telephones
Features
Station Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 151
LCD - Automatic Callback Number Display
A station user makes an internal call and finds the called station is busy or in DND mode. By
dialing a code, the caller activates the Automatic Callback feature. When the called station is free,
the system rings the caller with a tone. When the caller answers, the system automatically rings the
called party again, and display the station number of the called party.
This feature is not compatible with Call Forward-Busy. If Call Forward is required, use Call
Forward-No Answer.
Benefits
Sometimes the called station is busy for a long time. If the calling station user forgets who they
called and activated the Automatic Callback feature, the LCD displays the station directory
number of whom they are calling.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
with LCD telephones
Features
Station Features
152 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
LCD - Busy Lamp Field Indication
The LCD indicates the status of all telephones in the system.
Each 16-character LCD line displays the status of 10 stations.
Two LCD lines can display 20 stations or port group numbers at
a time (shown at right).
The DK14 or DK40i has two-digit internal DNs and DK424 has
three-digit internal DNs. The “10” stands for group 10, and
each dot following represents a station number–10, 11, 12, 13,
14, and so on. Likewise, “20” stands for station group 20, and
each dot following represents the station numbers–20, 21, 22,
23, 24, and so on.
On DK424 systems, stations are usually numbered from 200-439 (shown above). The first PDN of
210 is shown as 0210, and each dot following represents a four-digit station number that starts
with “2”–201, 202, 203, 204, and so on. Likewise, primary 0210 is shown as 0210, and each dot
following represents the station numbers 211, 212, 213, 214, and so on.
If there are more than 20 stations in the system, other station
numbers are displayed by pressing the Page button once (shown
at right).
When the Page button is pressed again, more stations display
(shown at right).
When a station is on-hook (free), a dot appears in the location
of the station number. If a station becomes busy, the last number
of that station replaces the dot. If stations 20, 24, and 37 are
busy (DK14 or DK40i), the LCD displays this:
When BLF is activated, no other LCD features display.
Benefits
The BLF feature on the LCD telephone enables the customer to have as many Busy Lamp Fields
as needed in the business without the expense of additional Key Service Unit (KSU) hardware or
extra station equipment.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
with LCD telephones
3191
10 . . . . . . . . . .
20 . . . . . . . . . .
200 . . . . . . . . .
210 . . . . . . . . .
3192
220 . . . . . . . . .
230 . . . . . . . . .
3193
230 . . . . . . . . .
240 . . . . . . . . .
3194
02 0 . . . 4 . . . .
03 . . . . . . . 7 .
Features
Station Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 153
LCD - Busy Station Messaging
When one LCD station calls another and the called station is busy, the caller can send a
pre-programmed LCD message (system or personal) to the busy station. A tone is heard at the
called station and the message appears on the called station’s LCD.
The busy station can respond with another pre-programmed message which appears on the caller’s
LCD. The two stations can exchange messages back and forth, creating an interactive silent
“conversation.”
See “LCD - Alphanumeric Messaging” for a general description of Alphanumeric Messaging.
Note Busy Station Messaging and Called Station Messaging are not available when using
feature prompting Soft Key operation.
Benefits
Enables silent communication with an LCD station user who is engaged in another telephone
conversation. The caller can send a message without creating background conversation (as would
be the case with Off-hook Call Announce). Busy Station Messaging also ensures the privacy of the
message since it can not be seen by the distant party.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
with LCD telephones
Features
Station Features
154 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
LCD - Call Duration Display
When an LCD station user is on an outgoing or incoming CO line call, the LCD displays the
elapsed time of a call. Call duration may be toggled with time and date using the Page button when
not in feature prompting Soft Key mode.
Benefits
Provides accurate call duration information. This is useful in applications where outside parties are
billed for professional services which include telephone consultation. It also makes station users
aware of how long they have been on long distance calls. This makes them more conscious of
controlling telephone costs.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
with LCD telephones
Features
Station Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 155
LCD - Call Forward Source/Destination Display
When call forwarding is set at your telephone, all of your calls are forwarded to the destination you
selected. The LCD displays the DN to which your calls are forwarded. It also shows the type of
call forwarding set, which can be Call Foward Busy, Call Forward Busy/No Answer, etc.
When you call a DN, if that station is forwarded to another, your LCD display changes to the DN
to which your call is being forwarded.
When an internal call is forwarded to your telephone from another station, both the calling DN and
the number of the station called is displayed.
The LCD displays the “forwarded from” DN and the “forwarded to” DN if more than one DN is
forwarded, a “+” sign displays, the user can press the Scroll button to scan all DNs that have Call
Forward set on his/her telephone.
Benefits
Internal callers can see their call’s destination and the origin of calls received.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
with LCD telephones
Features
Station Features
156 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
LCD - Calling/Called Number Display
When an idle LCD station user receives an internal call, the LCD displays the PDN of the station
that is calling, even if the call is made from a PhDN. When the user places an internal call, the
LCD displays the number of the station that was dialed by the user. For incoming or outgoing CO
line calls, the LCD displays the CO line in use. If user name is set, it displays in place of the station
number.
Benefits
Called station users know which station is calling them on internal calls. When making internal
calls, they can see who they are calling in case they are momentarily distracted. Knowing the CO
line an incoming call is using is useful in paging applications.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
with LCD telephones
Features
Station Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 157
LCD - Called Station Messaging
An LCD telephone user can leave his or her station number and a message indication at another
LCD telephone. When the called party accesses the message, the complete LCD message
automatically appears on the LCD.
See “LCD - Alphanumeric Messaging” for a general description of Alphanumeric Messaging.
Note Called Station Messaging and Busy Station Messaging are not available when using
feature prompting Soft Key operation.
Benefits
Enables users to leave private messages at another LCD telephone.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
with LCD telephones
Features
Station Features
158 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
LCD - Calling Station Messaging
An LCD telephone user can set a message on his or her telephone. Whenever another LCD user
calls that station, the pre-selected message is displayed on the LCD of the calling station.
See “LCD - Alphanumeric Messaging” for a general description of Alphanumeric Messaging.
Note Calling Station Messaging can be used when using feature prompting Soft Key operation.
Benefits
Enables users to leave information for other LCD callers about where they can be reached or when
they will return. It eliminates the need for callers to disturb a secretary or Attendant to find out
where someone is, how to reach them, or when they will be back.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
with LCD telephones
Features
Station Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 159
LCD - Clock/Calendar Display
The date and time are continuously displayed when the LCD station is idle. Date and time can be
adjusted on a system-wide basis from station port 00 for DK14/DK40i and station port 000 for
DK424 or the Attendant Console. The clock/calendar can be alternated with call duration on the
display during a CO line call by pressing the Page button when not in feature prompting Soft Key
mode.
Benefits
This provides convenience to the user. They can see both the date and time at a glance.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
with LCD telephones
Features
Station Features
160 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
LCD - CO Line Identification
Each CO line can be identified by a 16-character name. When a user with an LCD telephone
selects a CO line or receives a CO line call, the name of the CO line is displayed instead of the
number. Names are assigned to the CO lines in system programming. DNIS and ANI displays have
priority over CO line ID displays.
Benefits
Provides the convenience of being able to quickly verify that they are using the appropriate CO
line for the current call.
When used in conjunction with the Least Cost Routing feature, the CO Line Identification feature
lets the LCD user know what type of line is being used for the call. If the user sees that the call is
being routed on an expensive route and the call is not urgent, he or she can choose to place it at
another time. This can result in cost savings to the customer.
When used in conjunction with the Pooled Line button feature, CO Line Identification helps users
identify the specific line they are using.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
with LCD telephones
Features
Station Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 161
LCD - Dialed Number Display
When an LCD station places a call on a CO line, the LCD displays the digits dialed. The display
automatically changes from dialed number to elapsed time after a programmed period of time
(system-wide choice: either 15 seconds or one minute).
Benefits
Provides verification of a dialed telephone number, so the user can see if they have misdialed.
They can hang up and dial again before the party answers. If they are calling long distance, this can
save money as well as aggravation.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
with LCD telephones
Features
Station Features
162 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
LCD - Feature Prompting with Soft Key Operation
Feature access is made easier with feature prompting instructions appearing on the LCD. Station
users do not have to use or remember access codes or operational sequences to access commonly
used features. While on a call or using a ringing phone, users can access these features by pressing
one of the Soft Keys that correspond to labels displayed on the LCD. Some displays prompt users
to dial a station or telephone number. As a call progresses, the labels change to provide the most
logical options enabled by the user’s class of service.
The example below shows a typical sequence of Soft Key LCD prompts while you are using the
Conference feature. Gray is used to indicate which button to push in each step of the Conferencing
sequence.
1. While talking on a CO line, the Soft Keys TRNS, CONF,
and PGE display (shown at right).
2. After pressing the button under CONF, the display at the
right appears. In this example, you would press STA. to
conference to another station.
3. The LCD prompts you to dial the station number (shown
at right). Press RTRN to cancel and the message in Step 1
displays.
Station users can also input access codes instead of the
Prompting/Soft Key mode. Turn off the Prompting/Soft Key
feature using an access code and the buttons used as Soft
Keys function as Mode, Page, and Scroll.
Benefits
Enables quick and more efficient call processing. Customers can use sophisticated features without
being intimidated by seemingly complex procedures. Provides a user-friendly initial installation
for the occasional feature user who forgets how to make a conference call or is afraid of dropping
a call during one.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
with LCD telephones
Mode Page Scroll
TALK ON LINE 7
TRNS CONF PGE
Mode Page Scroll
LINE OR STATION?
LINE STA. RTRN
Mode Page Scroll
DIAL STATION NO.
RTRN
Features
Station Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 163
LCD - Message Waiting Display
When an LCD station user activates message waiting at another LCD station, the calling LCD
shows the DN of the station at which the message was left. When an LCD station user receives a
message waiting signal, the display shows up to four DNs that left messages.
The messages are scrolled, right to left, by pressing the Scroll button. The fourth “message” is
always reserved for a message from the message center. This means that a maximum of three
stations other than the message center can leave a message on an LCD. A “V” indicates a message
from voice mail. An “M” indicates a silent LCD message.
The station DNs indicating message waiting activations that can be displayed on an LCD phone
depends on the length of the station DNs. Up to eight LCD characters can be used for all of the
station DNs. Therefore, if station DNs are two digits long, up to four station DNs can be displayed.
Benefits
Improves interoffice communications. The station user readily sees that they have messages
because the LED is lit. The LCD also displays the message information.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
with LCD telephones
Features
Station Features
164 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
LCD - Recalling Station Identification
If a transferred call goes unanswered, it recalls the station that originated the transfer, displaying
both the CO line number and the station from which it is recalling.
In the DK40i and DK424 systems, if a Tie line transferred call goes unanswered, it recalls the
station that originates the transfer, displaying the line number, CO line number, and the called
station DN.
Benefits
Notifies the recalled station user that the call is coming back. Knowing the station and line number
enables them to answer appropriately, and either transfer the call elsewhere, or provide any
required special handling.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
with LCD telephones
Features
Station Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 165
LCD - Remote/Group Station Messaging
Remote/Group Station Messaging enables any station to set a Called Station Message for another
station or group of stations. See “LCD - Alphanumeric Messaging” for a general description of
Alphanumeric Messaging.
Notes
●Calling station messages can be set remotely by one station for another station, but not by one
station for a group of stations.
●Remote/Group Station Messaging can be used when using feature prompting Soft Key
operation.
Benefits
Saves time because the user can set the same message for an entire group at one time.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
with LCD telephones
Features
Station Features
166 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
LCD - Speed Dial Memo Directory Dialing
Station users can program a 12-character name for each of their 40 personal speed dial numbers.
These are the same stations that can create personal messages. The number of stations on a Strata
system that can have these features are:
♦DK14 – 8 stations
♦DK40i – 16 stations
♦DK424 (RCTUA) – 16 stations
♦DK424 (RCTUBA/BB) – 32 stations
♦DK424 (RCTUC/D or RCTUE/F) – 96 stations
The station assigned to port 00 on DK14 and DK40i systems, or port 000 for DK424 systems or
Attendant Consoles, can program 12-character names for the system speed dial numbers.
The LCD telephone user can scroll through the “memo pad” of names and numbers, including
system speed names and numbers. When the desired name and number appears on the LCD, the
user can press a CO Line button to automatically dial the number.
Benefits
Provides ease and convenience of always having a speed dial directory at their fingertips. Speed
dial numbers are identified by the name of the person or company associated with the number.
This ensures that the correct speed dial number is selected, and can eliminate charges for calls
placed to a wrong speed dial number.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
with LCD telephones
Features
Station Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 167
LCD - Station Identification
When the handset is on-hook, the LCD displays the station’s primary directory number as well as
the time and date. If a title is programmed for the station, the station user can toggle between the
title and the station number by using an access code.
Benefits
The station number is always visible. Guests or employees working in areas other than their usual
workstation can conveniently reference their extension if they need to have someone call them.
Station identification is also useful for technicians when troubleshooting.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
with LCD telephones
Features
Station Features
168 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
LCD - Timed Reminders
LCD telephone users can define up to five separate messages and have each message appear on
their LCD at a specific time. When the message appears, the station user hears a muted ring for 30
seconds, or until the handset is lifted or the Mode button is pressed.
The user can program a message to appear just once, or to appear at the same time each day. The
number of stations that can have these features are:
♦DK14 – 8 stations
♦DK40i – 16 stations
♦DK424 (RCTUA) – 16 stations
♦DK424 (RCTUBA/BB) – 32 stations
♦DK424 (RCTUC/D or RCTUE/F) – 96 stations
A variation on this feature is available on all digital telephones even without an LCD. Digital
telephone users can program up to five timed “alarm” reminders. At the appointed times, the user
gets a 30-second muted ring.
Benefits
Provides a convenient, simple way to remind users of appointments or other responsibilities. It can
help eliminate the need to “write notes to oneself,” which often get misplaced on a busy desk.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
with LCD telephones
Features
Station Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 169
LCD - User Name/Number Display
Station users with LCD telephones can program a title (name, location, etc.) of up to 16 characters
in station memory. When the station is idle, the name displays on the top line of the station’s LCD.
The station user has the option of using a simple access code to “toggle” between the title display
and the usual station number display.
When the station calls another LCD station, whichever display is on the calling station appears on
the bottom line of the called station. When feature prompting Soft Key mode is on, the name of a
called station appears on the calling station’s LCD.
Non-LCD stations, including standard telephones, electronic telephones, and voice mail ports, can
be programmed to send a name to LCD stations that they call.
Benefits
Called station users know at a glance who is calling, without having to recognize the station
directory number.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
with LCD telephones
Features
Station Features
170 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Message Waiting
If you call a station and the user does not answer, you can leave a message waiting indication by
pressing the Msg button. The Msg LED at the called station flashes for message notification. If an
LCD phone is used, message information is also displayed. Voice mail devices can also leave
message waiting indications. The called station user can call you back by pressing the Msg button
with the flashing LED.
The Message Waiting feature on DK40i and DK424 systems also applies to standard telephones
with a message waiting lamp. The standard station user enters an access code to retrieve messages
or initiate a callback. A standard telephone with message waiting lamp must be connected to an
RSTU2 station card in the Strata DK system. Message waiting features on DK14 systems do not
apply to standard telephones.
Up to four Message Waiting indications may be left at a station at one time. One of the indications
is reserved for the Message Center set in system programming.
Benefits
Improves interoffice communications because the user readily sees they have messages (LED is lit
and flashing). The LCD, if used, also displays message information.
Standard telephone applications are more feasible with Call Waiting lamp activation, especially in
voice mail applications. This can be important when selling a DK424 to a customer who wants to
reuse a substantial number of existing standard single-line telephones.
With Multiple DNs, up to four flexible buttons function the same as, in addition to, the fixed Msg
button LED. These four button LEDs can only appear on the station that owns the PhDNs.
System Availability
Unavailable on DK14 with SLTs
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
with DKTs
Standard on DK40i/DK424 with SLTs with
RSTU2
Features
Station Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 171
Microphone Control Buttons
Digital telephones can be programmed with a Microphn Cut-off button, which turns the
microphone inside the telephone on and off while idle.
If a Microphn Cut-off button is assigned on a station, the station user can enable or disable the
Handsfree Answerback microphone for that station when the station is in the idle state. This is
used for station security and ensures that a private office conversation is not heard when the
Handsfree Answerback is enabled. This function also blocks room monitoring.
The operation of the Microphn Cut-off button can be assigned as either auto-on or auto-off in
programming. This enables each station user to use the Microphn Cut-off button whichever way is
best for them.
When used during a speakerphone conversation, a fixed Mic button disables and enables the
station’s microphone. This enables the station user to temporarily block the other party from
hearing the conversation.
Benefits
Ensures that no intercom callers can hear private office conversations (if the system is
programmed for voice signaling) when the caller is using Handsfree Answerback feature. The
Microphn Cut-off button disables Handsfree Answerback.
The Mic button is especially helpful when multiple people are talking through the speakerphone to
the party on the other end. Using the Mic button, they can confer among themselves while
preventing the other party from hearing their conversation.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
with DKTs
Features
Station Features
172 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Modular Handset and Line Cords
All Toshiba digital key telephones have modular handsets and can connect to the system by
standard one or two-pair modular line cords. Handsets and/or cords can be interchanged by the end
user as desired. Line cords come in three different lengths; handset cords are available in 6 or 13
feet lengths.
Benefits
Gives the customer the flexibility to use long coil or line cords, as required. Modular cords also
simplify maintenance; reducing the time and cost of repair.
System Availability
Standard on all Toshiba DKTs
Features
Station Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 173
Modular Headset Interface
Every 10-button and 20-button telephone can be upgraded to provide a modular headset jack and a
loud ringing bell interface. An upgrade assembly (HHEU2) is installed inside the phone.
Most standard carbon-type headsets plug into the HHEU2 jack and are compatible with the
electronic telephone. Both options may be installed simultaneously. If a 2000-series digital
telephone is upgraded with a data interface unit, it can also have the HHEU2 assembly.
Benefits
Simplifies the use of headsets for customers who want them for convenience or productivity.
System Availability
Optional on all Toshiba DKTs
Features
Station Features
174 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Off-hook Call Announce (OCA)
A station user can send an announcement to a busy digital/electronic telephone. The internal call
must be directed to a PDN or PhDN, if it is the PhDN owner. Only the PhDN owner can receive
OCA. OCA does not occur when calling SDNs.
OCA uses two different methods of operation—handset/headset or speaker mode. It can be set
individually for each telephone that receives OCA.
Any telephone can originate OCA using intercom dialing, transfer/conference dialing, or DSS.
There are no special requirements to enable a digital, electronic, or conventional single-line
telephone to make OCA calls. The feature is activated automatically or by dialing 2, depending on
how the station is programmed.
Stations receiving OCA must be assigned with OCA-receiving capability in system programming
and be a proprietary digital/electronic telephone. Standard single-line telephones cannot receive
OCA.
Note The digital telephone only requires standard one-pair cabling.
Handset Mode
The OCA is sent to the called telephone handset or headset receiver. The OCA called station user,
while off-hook and engaged in a conversation, hears an OCA warning tone (optional) and
announcement over the handset. The Cordless DKT-2004-CT also receives the warning tone and
announcement. This method of OCA does not require the DVSU in the telephone.
The called station hears the original and the OCA calling party. The called station user responds to
the OCA calling party by holding down the Mic button and talking into the telephone handset or
headset transmitter. The original outside talking party does not hear the OCA calling party or the
station user’s response, so this is a more private method of OCA than the speaker OCA mode.
A HS OCA Talkback button can be programmed on a digital telephone feature button to operate
with “push-on” and “push-off” mode for each individual telephone that receives OCA. When the
OCA button is pressed on, the outside caller hears Music-on-Hold, and the internal parties are in a
two-way, dedicated conversation.
Speaker Mode
The OCA is sent to the called telephone speaker. When the OCA announcement is heard over the
speaker, user can respond to the OCA caller by talking into the telephone microphone. There exists
two simultaneous two-way conversations, so the OCA call is heard by other people near by, or by
the outside original talking party, depending upon the speaker volume setting.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
with DKTs (Handset OCA)
Optional on DK14/40i/424 with DKTs
(Speaker OCA)
Features
Station Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 175
If the called station is using the speakerphone or the Handsfree Answerback feature, the caller gets
a busy signal. If the called station is in Do Not Disturb mode, OCA is blocked.
This method of operation is available on all Strata DK systems, but requires a DVSU in the digital
telephone set receiving OCA.
Note The PC Data Interface (RPCI-DI) cannot be used if speaker mode OCA is installed, or
vice versa. The Cordless DKT-2004-CT telephone is not compatible with Speaker OCA.
Benefits
Ensures that users get important telephone calls. A caller with an important message gets through
to the called party, even if the called party is using the telephone. The caller contacts the called
party directly rather than through an anonymous “camp-on” tone, which is often ignored.
Features
Station Features
176 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
On-hook Dialing
A station user can dial any call without lifting the handset and hear the progress of the call
(outpulsing, ringing, busy signal, and intercept announcements) through the speaker. The user
must lift the handset in order to converse with the called party unless the telephone is a full
speakerphone. On-hook Dialing is available on all digital telephones.
Benefits
Provides convenience and comfort to the station user. Often a station user makes a call, only to get
a recording, and a request to “wait for the next available agent.” Not wanting to waste time, the
user holds the phone with his/her shoulder, to free his hands to do something else. Being able to
monitor the call with the handset on-hook eliminates the discomfort of “shoulder hold.”
On-hook Dialing also provides monitoring capability without the expense of a full speakerphone.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
with DKTs
Features
Station Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 177
Personal Computer Interface (RPCI-DI)
Digital telephones that are equipped with an RPCI-DI connect to a PC or ASCII terminal to make
data calls to printers, PCs, and other data devices. Users also make voice calls using PC directory
dialing software without the need of a modem or an extra outgoing line. The system is
programmed with 1~4 security groups and restricts calls between groups. It also supports modem
pooling and printer sharing.
These digital telephones are connected to a computer with application software using the
Microsoft Telephony Application Programming Interface (TAPI) to provide customized
functionality through Computer Telephony Integration (CTI). Any TAPI enabled PC software is
compatible with Strata DK systems.
The most common example of this type of application is using the computer for database lookup
and pop-up screens containing information on the calling party. Caller ID, Automatic Number
Identification (ANI), Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS), and call processing
information can be passed from the digital telephone to the application computer to provide the
information necessary for the application’s database lookup and pop-up screens. This is especially
useful with ACD applications (DK424 only).
See “Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)” for more information.
Benefits
CTI provides an efficient and convenient custom functionality to the user’s business telephone
system. By combining the two technologies, users gain functionality that is not provided by either
the telephone or the computer. Users choose among many TAPI enabled PC software packages
that provide custom functions for their specific needs.
Simultaneous voice and data transmission over a single-wire pair eliminates additional wiring
requirements and minimizes port usage on the system.
Modem pooling and printer sharing enables multiple users to maximize efficient usage of
expensive peripheral devices.
PC keyboard dialing of data or voice calls increases user efficiency. An example is auto dialing by
name or initial from directories stored in PCs equipped with inexpensive desk organizer-type
software (modem not required).
Security groups help control who is authorized to make outside data calls, which can get expensive
if linked to databases which charge for access.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424 with
2000-series DKTs
Requirements
RPCI-DI
Features
Station Features
178 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Pooled CO Line Buttons
Pooled Line Group buttons enable a group of CO lines to “appear” under one button. Pooled and
single appearing line buttons are designed for use with loop and ground start lines, not Tie, DID,
DNIS or ANI lines.
A maximum of eight CO line groups can be defined on a system (16 CO line groups on a DK424
with RCTUC/D and RCTUE/F processor). A CO line group can be assigned to up to four Pooled
Line Grp buttons on a digital telephone. Multiple appearances of the CO line group can facilitate
handling several calls on lines in the same group.
If a station user regularly processes more than one call at a time, it is recommended that the station
be assigned more than one Pooled Line Grp button. It is also recommended to separate incoming
and outgoing CO lines into separate groups. This prevents the accidental pickup of incoming calls
when making outgoing calls.
A CO line group is accessed for an outgoing call by pressing the Pooled Line Grp button, or by
using an assigned access code.
Benefits
Saves money for the customer, since the less expensive 10-button telephones can be used instead
of 20-button telephones to provide access to the same number of lines. They also offer a “hybrid”
type operation enabling the Strata DK to compete more effectively against other hybrids.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
with DKTS
Features
Station Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 179
Privacy Button
If a Strata DK system has been programmed to be non-private (see “Privacy Release Button”), a
button is assigned to a station that activates privacy on the CO lines and the intercom for that
station. Privacy prevents other stations from breaking in on calls using common CO Line buttons.
It does not prevent alternate point answer of transferred calls if the system is set for it. The privacy
remains in effect until the button is pressed again, even if the user makes several other calls.
A Privacy button can be assigned to any station on Strata DK. By pressing the Privacy button, the
station user prevents Privacy Override. Privacy remains in effect on that station until the user
presses the Privacy button again to release privacy.
Please note that privacy features apply to CO lines and CO Line button appearances on telephones
used in all Strata DK systems. Privacy does not apply to multiple DN appearances on telephones
used in Strata DK systems because multiple DN buttons are always private.
Benefits
Adds flexibility to the system because selected users can make private calls, even when the system
is programmed to be non-private. Organizations can use Privacy Override on CO lines for quick
conferencing or for training purposes and still enable private, confidential calls.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
with DKTs and EKTs
Features
Station Features
180 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Privacy Override
Privacy Override enables a station user to break into any ongoing CO line call by pressing that CO
Line button on the phone. Any number of stations can have the feature. If the system is
programmed to be private, this feature overrides the system privacy.
When the overriding station breaks into a call, the conversing parties hear a single tone and a
three-way conference is immediately in effect. No periodic warning tones are heard after the
optional initial tone.
Note Privacy features apply to CO lines and CO Line button appearances on telephones.
Privacy Override does not apply to multiple DN appearances on telephones. Multiple DNs
are always private with no Privacy Override allowed.
Benefits
Provides a way to instantly contact any station that is engaged in a CO line conversation to deliver
an important message.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
with DKTs
Features
Station Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 181
Privacy Release Button
All Strata DK CO lines are in private mode by default (see “Privacy Button”). Individual CO lines
are changed to non-private and back to private by pressing the Privacy Release button while the
CO line is selected. The telephone automatically reverts back to the private mode (Privacy LED
turns OFF) after each non-private call.
A maximum of four parties, including the distant parties on the CO line, participate in a
“non-private” call.
Note Privacy features apply to CO lines and CO Line button appearances on telephones.
Privacy Release features do not apply to multiple DN appearances on telephones. DN
buttons are always private.
Benefits
Users conveniently and easily release the privacy on a CO line when they want to set up a “quick
conference.”
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
with DKTs
Features
Station Features
182 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Private CO Lines
All systems are programmed to enable certain CO lines to appear only on one station and can be
accessed only by that station. This effectively provides a “private” CO line. If the station is in the
Call Forward mode, calls on the private CO line are forwarded.
Benefits
Provides the privacy, prestige, and convenience of a private line to selected employees. Private
lines ensure that a CO line is always available to the user. Private lines are also used to help a
business manage costs by billing back the full cost of the private line to the user.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
with DKTs
Features
Station Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 183
Pushbutton Dialing
The dial pads on all Toshiba digital key telephones are pushbutton style. Electronic signals
generated by the dial pad are neither DTMF nor rotary dial signals. On outgoing calls, the system
converts the station signals to DTMF or rotary before they are outpulsed according to the
requirements of the CO.
The DTMF receiver provides end-to-end signaling, and is required whenever devices, which send
DTMF signals, are connected to standard telephone circuits in the system.
Benefits
Provides ease and convenience of a pushbutton telephone regardless of the serving CO.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
with DKTs
Features
Station Features
184 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Release Button
A Release button can be programmed on a digital telephone. The user presses the Release button
to disconnect an existing call and does not have to press the hookswitch. It puts the telephone into
an idle state. For automatic off-hook selection, use the Release/Answer button.
Benefits
Provides convenient, quick and smooth disconnects from calls by eliminating the fumbling with
the hookswitch. Users often waste time and become irritated when using the hookswitch to
disconnect calls. They press it too quickly to send a clear disconnect signal and have to try several
times to actually disconnect.
With one touch of the Relase button, a user can conveniently, quickly and smoothly disconnect
from a call. The Release button is especially useful in headset applications.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
with DKTs
Features
Station Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 185
Release/Answer Button
The Release/Answer button provides an efficient way to handle multiple incoming calls. A station
user who is talking on a call can release and transfer or disconnect the active call, and
automatically answer a new incoming call with Incoming Auto Selection. Calls can be received on
the CO Line, Pooled Line, or DN buttons.
This provides convenient release and answer capabilities with the press of one button. The
Release/Answer button is especially useful for telephones or Attendant Consoles that must answer
calls in heavy traffic situations.
Benefits
Enables the answering of calls quickly and efficiently in heavy traffic applications. This feature
enables users to streamline the call handling process with the touch of one button that disconnects
or transfers the current call, and answers the next. Operators can process more calls and provide
better service to callers.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
with DKTs
Features
Station Features
186 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Remote Retrieval of Held Calls
Remote Retrieval of Held Calls enables any station user to retrieve a call that has been put on hold
by another station by pressing a feature button or dialing an access code.
This feature is particularly useful if the call to be retrieved is held on a CO line that does not
appear on the station from which it is retrieved.
If more than one call is on hold at a station, the lowest number CO line is picked up first. Also see
“Call Pickup”.
Benefits
Improves call handling by providing complete call retrieval flexibility. A user can easily pick up a
call that was held at a different station without having to physically go to that station. Time is
saved, and calls are handled promptly.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
Station Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 187
Repeat Last Number Dialed
This feature enables a digital or electronic station to automatically redial the last number dialed
from their station by selecting an outgoing line and pressing the Redial button or by dialing an
access code. Digital key telephones have a fixed Redial button for automatic redialing of the last
number dialed.
Benefits
Ensures accurate and speedy redial of the last number which reduces dialing errors and eliminated
the wasted time involved in redialing a number that is busy or not answering.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
Station Features
188 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Ringing Line Preference
If an incoming CO, DID, or Tie line is ringing at a station, the station user who has this feature
answers the line by simply lifting the handset or pressing the Spkr button. The station user is
automatically connected to the line that is ringing, without having to press the specific line button
for the call.
Benefits
Enables quick and convenient answering of calls because the user does not have to look at the line
buttons or think about which line button to press.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
Station Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 189
Saved Number Redial
A station user with this feature saves a dialed number for redial at a later time by pressing an
optional feature button. The number is saved before the called number rings, during a
conversation, or after the call has ended.
This feature is independent of the Repeat Last Number Dialed feature and enables the saved
number to be redialed at any time by selecting a DN or CO line and pressing the Save button. The
user can make other calls and then redial the saved number. The number is saved until the Save
button is used to save another number.
Benefits
Saves a number for redialing at a later more convenient time even if additional calls have been
made. The station user saves time because the number does not have to be looked up and redialed.
Repeat Last Number Dialed feature cannot be used to redial the number because more calls have
been made.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
with DKTs
Features
Station Features
190 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Speed Dial (SD) Button
Buttons on a digital key telephone can be assigned as Speed Dial (SD) buttons. Each button stores
a pre-programmed telephone number, providing “one-touch” dialing for frequently called
numbers. Telephone numbers can be up to 20 digits on Strata DK systems.
SD buttons also store feature sequences creating User Programmable Feature Buttons. Refer to the
“User Programmable Feature Buttons”. Each SD button that is programmed on a digital telephone
reduces by one the number of station automatic dialing numbers available to that station.
There are the following types of SD:
♦Station SD – Station users store their own personal telephone numbers on Station SD buttons.
Each button uses one of the assigned 40 station speed dial number storage locations.
♦System SD – A designated station user stores numbers for System SD buttons, which can be
assigned to any digital or electronic telephone. For the number of available system speed dial
numbers, see “Tandem CO Line Connection (Trunk-to-Trunk)” in the System Features
section.
♦Locked SD – SD buttons can also be used to store CO/Centrex/PBX feature access codes in
system speed dial locations. Those system speed dial codes can then be assigned in system
programming to a button on any digital telephone using the Flexible Button Assignment
feature. When a SD button is used in this way, it is referred to as a “locked” SD button. The
station assigned to port 00 or 000 is the only station that can program or change the numbers
programmed for a “locked” SD button providing security and control.
Benefits
Provides instant, one-button access to personal speed dial numbers eliminating dialing errors and
saving time used to look up frequently called numbers.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
with DKTs and EKTs
Features
Station Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 191
Timed Reminder
A digital telephone station user can set five separate reminders on his/her station even if the digital
telephone has no LCD. The reminder tone sounds at the preset time. The user hear a 30-second
muted ring. Each reminder may be set to ring only once, or at the same time daily.
For expanded Timed Reminder capabilities with display information, see “LCD - Timed
Reminders”.
Benefits
Provides a convenient, built-in tone reminder system.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
with DKTs
Features
Station Features
192 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Toll Restriction Override Code Revision
Two special codes can be defined to override toll restriction. Each code can have up to four digits.
Access to these override codes can be assigned to individual employees as required. Any person
who knows either code can override toll restriction at any station.
The toll restriction override check method is very sophisticated and makes it almost impossible for
anyone to break the override code.
These codes can be changed from any station that is enabled to do so in system programming.
They are changed by dialing a special feature code and entering the new override code. This makes
it simple for selected executives to change the override codes without having to call the service
company.
Benefits
Ensures that certain non-restricted users (such as the executives) can make calls from any
telephone in the system and not be subject to the toll restriction on the station used to place the
call.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
Features
Station Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 193
User Programmable Feature Buttons
Enables digital telephone users to program their own flexible buttons to perform sequences of
operation. The user uses the station speed dial function to dial features as well as station numbers
or outside telephone numbers.
As many as 20 digits can be stored on a button, and fixed feature button functions (such as PDN,
Intercom, Conference/Transfer, and Hold) can also be stored. In addition, several features can be
linked together. For example, a user can program a button to place the call on hold, access
intercom and dial a page access code, so that with one push of a button the user is ready to make an
announcement.
In addition to being stored on speed dial buttons, feature sequences can also be stored in speed dial
numbers.
Benefits
Enables fast and simple access to features because users don’t have to remember or look up
instructions or follow prompting instructions. Multi-step feature operation is stored and activated
at the touch of one button.
Individual station users use flexible buttons to tailor their phones to fit their special needs. They
can use access codes if they do not have buttons available.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK14/DK40i/DK424
with DKTs and EKTs
Features
Station Features
194 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 195
Strata AirLink 3
The Strata AirLink Wireless system adds wireless telephone service to new or existing Private
Branch Exchanges (PBXs) or key/hybrid telephone systems. There are two available
configurations:
♦Base Station Interface Adapter (BSIA) system that interfaces to Strata DK systems and many
non-Toshiba systems using the standard telephone ports.
♦RWIU system that interfaces to Strata DK16 and DK16e, DK40i, DK280, and DK424, using a
proprietary RWIU Printed Circuit Board (PCB).
The Strata AirLink wireless systems operate in single building and campus environments in the
1920~1930 MHz bandwidth. This bandwidth is designated by the Federal Communication
Commission (FCC) for unlicensed operation in the United States.
The Strata AirLink Standard wireless system has Base Stations, handsets, Base Station Interface
Adapters (BSIAs) or controllers, and the Strata AirLink Manager software. The BSIAs interface
with the standard analog telephone PCB (RSTU2) to support up to two Base Stations.
The Strata AirLink Digital wireless system has Base Stations and handsets, but interfaces directly
to the Strata DK16, DK16e, DK40, DK40i, DK280, and DK424 using its own digital PCB
(RWIU) instead of the BSIA. The card functions as a protocol converter between the Base Stations
and the telephone system. It has four digital circuits that connect to four Base Stations using the
industry standard RJ11 jack. Multiple RWIUs can be installed to increase the capacity.
System Components
Figure 6 shows the external interface wireless telephone system connected to a PBX. Analog
station ports in the PBX connect to the BSIA and provide a signal to the Base Stations. The Base
Stations convert the analog signal to an RF signal for transmission to the handsets. The same lines
can be connected to wired extensions for users that have both wireless and wired extensions.
Strata AirLink
System Components
196 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Figure 6 External Wireless System Components
Figure 7 shows the integrated wireless system interfacing to the PBX using the RWIU PCB that
supports four Base Stations.
Figure 7 Integrated Wireless System Components
3660
Controller (BSIA)
Analog Telephone
Circuits (1-32)
PBX
RS232-C
PC running Strata AirLink
Wireless Manager software
Base Stations
Handsets
Handsets
Strata DK
RWIU
Base Station
Base Station
Base Station
Handsets
(maximum of
32 per RWIU)
Base Station
Digital
Interface
3190
Strata AirLink
System Components
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 197
Base Station Interface Adapter (BSIA)
The BSIA interfaces the wireless system to the office telephone system. It supports up to two Base
Stations and is designed for wall or rack mounting. Information stored in the BSIA assigns
handsets to Base Stations and defines the handset feature operation.
The BSIA sends information about system operation and alarm conditions to a PC using its RS-
232-C port and the Strata AirLink Manager software.
RWIU Interface Unit
The RWIU PCB functions as a protocol converter between the Base Stations on one side and the
Strata DK system on the other. The RWIU is the “master” PCB, generating timing and
synchronization signals and the WWIS PCB is the “slave.” The WWIS has four Base Station
interface connectors. The PCBs have LEDs that indicate a continuous status of operation for both.
Base Stations
Base Stations (shown in Figure 8) have
radio transmitters and receivers that
handle communication with the handsets.
The Base Stations relay calls between the
handsets and other telephones and trunks
connected to the office telephone system.
LEDs on the Base Station provide
diagnostic information for System
Administrators.
Each Base Station provides coverage for a
particular area and supports eight
simultaneous conversations.
In typical office environments, each Base
Station, using four antennas for the best possible signal reception, has a broadcast range of up to
328 feet and supports an area of 320,000 square feet. To increase traffic capacity without
interference, the Base Stations can be placed in the same coverage area (co-location).
Wireless Test Stand
The Strata AirLink Wireless Test Stand easily determines proper Base Station positioning prior to
permanent installation. The test stand is mobile, enabling quick identification of the best possible
locations for each Base Station. It generates set frequencies for the handset to lock onto and
verifies Bit Error Rate (BER) status.
Strata AirLink BSIA Manager Software
The Strata AirLink BSIA Manager software is a Windows 95 application that includes:
♦Easy-to-use Desktop Toolbar for navigation
♦Configuration Window for setting system parameters and handset features
♦Status Window to view system alarms
♦Upgrade icon for immediate upgrades to the BSIA and Base Stations
3399
Antennas
LEDs
Antennas
Figure 8 Wireless System Base Station
Strata AirLink
System Components
198 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
♦Viewable or printable log files
♦Online Help
PC Hardware and Software Requirements
Table 11 lists the minimum hardware and software that your PC must have to use the Strata
AirLink BSIA Manager software.
Desktop Toolbar
When you open the Strata AirLink BSIA
Manager software from its Program
Group, the Desktop Toolbar displays
(shown at the right).
Use this toolbar to easily configure the
system, access the Status Window,
upgrade the system, edit and save log
files, access online Help, and exit the
program. The toolbar can be placed anywhere on your desktop.
Configuration Window
The Configuration Window accesses the databases that set system parameters, user settings, and
feature button sequences. The button sequences enable the handsets to use the office telephone
system features.
Status Window
The Status Window, accessed from the Desktop Toolbar, gives you valuable system activity
information. It is an excellent troubleshooting tool. You can check the status of Base Stations,
lines, and calls. You can also clear critical alarms and make a software version inquiry.
Table 11 PC Hardware and Software Requirements
Minimum Recommended
Processor 386DX 33 MHz 486DX2 66 MHz
Hard Drive 1.5MB 3MB
RAM 4MB 8MB
Video VGA SVGA
Mouse Any supported by Windows Same
Floppy Drive 1.44 MB 3.5 inch Same
Software Microsoft Windows 3.1/3.11 Windows 95
Exit Help
Configuration
Window Log Files
Status Window System Upgrade
3401
Strata AirLink
System Components
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 199
Strata AirLink RWIU Manager Software
The Strata AirLink RWIU Manager software is a Windows 95 application that includes:
♦Easy-to-use Desktop Toolbar for navigation
♦Configuration Window for setting the system ID, handset IDs, time and date, and
communication ports
♦Status Window to view software versions, log messages, reset the Base Stations and/or the
RWIU
♦Software Upgrade Window for immediate upgrades to the RWIU and Base Stations
PC Hardware and Software Requirements
Table 12 lists the minimum hardware and software that your PC must have to use the Strata
AirLink RWIU Manager software.
Desktop Toolbar
When you open the Strata AirLink
RWIU Manager software from its
Program Group, the Desktop Toolbar
displays (shown at the right).
Use this toolbar to easily configure
the system, access the Status
Window, upgrade the software,
activate UTAM, and exit the
program. The toolbar can be placed
anywhere on your desktop.
Table 12 PC Hardware and Software Requirements
Minimum Recommended
Processor 386DX 33 MHz 486DX2 66 MHz
Hard Drive 1.5MB 3MB
RAM 4MB 8MB
Video VGA SVGA
Mouse Any supported by Windows Same
Floppy Drive 1.44 MB 3.5 inch Same
Software Microsoft Windows 3.1/3.11 Windows 95
Exit
Help
UTAM
Software
Status
Configuration
Window Window Upgrade Activation
Strata AirLink
System Components
200 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Handsets
The Strata AirLink wireless handset
(Figure 9) is small, lightweight, easy to
use, and operates the same in the
integrated and external wireless system.
Feature access depends on the office
telephone system. The System
Administrator can provide information
specific to the telephone system.
Electronic Serial Numbers (ESNs) are
programmed into the handsets at the
factory and are automatically configured
the first time a call is made. They are
unique to each handset.
There is a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
for alphanumeric information and icons
that report handset status. Table 13
briefly describes the functions of the
LCD fields, fixed buttons, and icons.
Table 13 LCD Fields, Fixed Buttons, and Icons Descriptions
Handset Description
LCD Fields
Idle Message Displays an idle message.
Date Displays the current date.
Time/Call Duration Displays the call duration.
Icon Display Area Displays icons that represent different
battery and handset conditions.
Fixed Buttons
3:5 Turns the power ON and OFF.
)/6+ Performs hookflash functions.
)&1
Enables features with the use of other
buttons; for example, Call Forward,
Transfer, Speed Dial, and Conference.
▲Increases listening volume and scrolls
forward through menu options.
▼Decreases listening volume and scrolls
backward through menu options.
$%& Toggles handset between alpha and
numeric modes.
5&/ Recalls numbers stored in memory.
672 Stores Speed Dial numbers/names and
the idle message.
Idle Message
Date
Time/Call Duration
Volume/Scroll Buttons
Scroll/Lock Button
s
Icon Display Area
END
CALL
PWR
Figure 9 Strata AirLink Wireless Handset
Strata AirLink
System Components
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 201
&$// Places the handset off-hook to enable
calling.
(1' Places the handset on-hook and exits
from 5&/, )&1, 672, and $%& modes.
&/5 Erases one or more digits in the display.
ÈScrolls backwards through the Speed Dial
list.
ÉScrolls forward through the Speed Dial list
and locks/unlocks the dial pad.
)&1+1Places calls on Hold.
)&1+1Conferences or transfers calls.
)&1+1Retrieves messages.
Icons
Off-hook or ringing handset.
Indicates battery strength—one bar is low
and four is high.
Indicates the currently configured ring
volume.
ABC Indicates alpha mode—you can use the
dial pad to enter letters in the display.
Indicates signal strength.
Indicates a message waiting.1
Indicates that your handset is forwarded.1
1. Available in Strata DK systems only.
Table 13 LCD Fields, Fixed Buttons, and Icons Descriptions
(continued)
Handset Description
Strata AirLink
System Components
202 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Charger Base
The handset comes with a charger base that has two slots
(see Figure 10). The rear slot, for a spare battery,
automatically starts its discharge function when it detects
that discharging is necessary.
The front slot functions as a cradle for the handset and a
charger for its battery. It provides rapid charging only.
The unit has LEDs that indicate battery status while
charging. The LEDs flash and use the colors red, green,
and amber to indicate different conditions.
2959
Handset LED
Battery LED
Figure 10 Charger Base
Strata AirLink
Handset Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 203
Handset Features
This section describes the specific handset features available to Strata AirLink Wireless handset
users. The handset can also access the system and station features provided by the host telephone
system.
Strata AirLink
Handset Features
204 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
FCN Feature Access
Pressing the FCN button with other buttons enables access to office telephone system features,
such as Automatic Call Back, Speed Dialing, and Call Forward. Some features require a few steps
before you use the FCN button. For example, to establish a conference, you must be in
conversation with one party and have another party on hold before you press FCN + 4.
Note Access to system features using the FCN button requires system programming and can
vary depending on your office telephone system. Your System Administrator can provide
information specific to your telephone system.
Benefits
Provides easy access to certain system features using the handset.
System Availability
Standard for the handset
Strata AirLink
Handset Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 205
Flash Button
The ordinary telephone hookswitch is located in the handset cradle of your telephone. The wireless
telephone has a special button (FLSH) that flashes the hookswitch. The FLSH button enables a
number of features.
Conferencing, Centrex, or behind PBX operation, which are CO line features, require “flashing a
CO Line” to enable Centrex/PBX access codes or extension numbers.
Benefits
Convenient way to make a series of CO calls or redial a busy number. The Flash button enables the
user to easily disconnect and reconnect to the same CO line with one touch of a button.
When the system is installed behind a PBX, the features that require a “flash” to operate can be
easily accessed, enabling stations to function more fully and take advantage of the PBX features.
System Availability
Standard for the handset
Strata AirLink
Handset Features
206 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Lock/Unlock the Dial Pad
You can lock the handset dial pad to avoid the accidental pressing of buttons. The dial pad
automatically unlocks when you receive an incoming call and then relocks when the call ends.
Benefits
Prevents inadvertent calling or making busy of the handset.
System Availability
Standard for the handset
Strata AirLink
Handset Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 207
Menu Operation
You can configure some aspects of handset operation using the Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
menu, such as:
♦Auto Answer
♦Change Idle Message
♦Click Volume
♦Del All Speed Dial Numbers
♦Del Last Number Dialed
♦Display Contrast
♦Display Test Option
♦Ringer Type Option
♦Ringer Volume
♦Time Format
Benefits
Provides flexibility according to individual user requirements.
System Availability
Standard for the handset
Strata AirLink
Handset Features
208 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Mute
The handset has two types of mute:
♦Voice – the handset microphone temporarily disconnects, so the other party cannot hear you.
♦Ring – the ringer temporarily disconnects during an incoming call without affecting the call.
Benefits
Enables the station user to control what the other party hears during conversations (voice mute) or
ensures that others are not disturbed in meetings or in the immediate area of the handset (ring
mute).
System Availability
Standard for the handset
Strata AirLink
Handset Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 209
Speed Dial
Your handset stores 70 speed dial numbers, 10 of which can be dialed by pressing one button. You
can also assign memory locations or names. Before you store any numbers or names, you need to
know how many locations are available.
You can easily find available locations, search for a number or name, program a pause or “wait.”
Benefits
Saves time when looking up and dialing telephone numbers. It also avoids costly long distance
dialing errors.
System Availability
Standard for the handset
Strata AirLink
Handset Features
210 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Volume Adjustment
The Strata AirLink wireless handset has 13 volume settings that adjust the calling party voice
level. To adjust the volume, press the scroll up or down button until you reach the level you want.
Benefits
Sets the volume to individual user requirements.
System Availability
Standard for the handset
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 211
PC Attendant Console 4
The Strata PC Attendant Console is optional on Strata DK424 systems with RCTUBA/BB,
RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F processors and unavailable on DK424 RCTUA, DK40i, or DK14
systems. It combines the DK424 with easy-to-use Microsoft® Windows®. Attendants can process
a heavy load of incoming calls quickly and efficiently using the PC Attendant Console. Figure 11
shows the components of the PC Attendant Console.
Figure 11 PC Attendant Console
Features
The console’s streamlined features can be operated by clicking the mouse on screen buttons or
using equivalent keys on the keyboard. This enables Attendants to use whichever method is most
comfortable for them. The mouse and keyboard can be used together interchangeably.
The monitor displays detailed call information including:
♦Call identification
♦Calling/called numbers and name indications
♦Answer prompting
♦Call waiting count
♦Hold timer
♦Advisory messages and much more
Figure 12 shows the call information fields in the Main Display screen.
3032
PC Attendant Console
Features
212 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Figure 12 Main Display Screen Layout
The display also provides a name/extension directory, an outgoing Speed Dial directory, and a
Busy Lamp Field (BLF), which enables the Attendant to see station status at a glance. Various
colors indicate different statuses or conditions, making them more distinguishable to the
Attendant. Call progress messages and Soft Key prompts are displayed also, making the PC
Attendant Console very easy to use.
Other powerful features include Call Answer Priority and Queuing, Direct Station Selection
(DSS), DTMF Tone Signaling from the dialpad, Emergency Calling, flexible programmable
buttons, Loop Hold display with timer, and headset/handset operation with volume control.
The PC Attendant Console also enables efficient outgoing calling using DTMF and flash
signaling, individual trunk access or trunk group access by programmable button, and system
Speed Dial access.
These features make outgoing calls easier and more functional on the PC Attendant Console than
on many Attendant Consoles provided by the competition. The features are described in detail
later in this section. It also uses many of the station features detailed in the Station Features
chapter.
Incoming Call Display
Feature Toolbar
Menu Bar Soft Keys Console ID Area Active Call Window Loop Hold Display
Volume
Control
Buttons
Notes Field
16 User Buttons (Programmable Feature Buttons)
DSS/BLF Station Directory
Status Bar
2340
PC Attendant Console
Operation
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 213
The PC Attendant Console is sold as a kit that includes:
♦RATI interface
♦RATHC handset/cradle
♦Custom keyboard (see Figure 13)
♦Toshiba-proprietary software
♦User guide
Note The RATU and PC are not included in the kit.
The RATI interface connects to an RATU card in the DK424 system cabinet via a single pair of
wires.
Figure 13 Custom Keyboard Layout
Operation
The Strata PC Attendant Console software runs as an application within Windows on the PC. It is
recommended the PC be dedicated to the console function.
Other applications can also run simultaneously on the same PC. The Attendant can toggle from
Attendant Console mode and enter some other application. If a call is received while in another
application, the PC can automatically switch to Attendant Console mode to handle the incoming
call. When incoming traffic is light, the Attendant can quickly and easily toggle back and forth
between another application and Attendant Console mode at the touch of a keyboard button.
Tone
INSERT
F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12
Join
HOME
Retrieve
Pg Up
Del
Num
Lock
7
Home
89
Pg Up
Answer
Incoming
—
/
Dial
DELETE
Split/
Switch
.
End
Conf/
Trns
Pg Dn
Answer
Hold
+
Release
Enter
1
End
Ins
2
0
3
Pg Dn
456
F1
Help Vol Up Vol Dn
1306
PC Attendant Console
PC Requirements
214 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
PC Requirements
The PC is customer supplied and should have the following recommended minimum PC
requirements:
♦Pentium® processor, 100 MHz
♦16MB RAM
♦200MB drive (PC Attendant Console uses about 5MB)
♦2 COM ports (one for PC Attendant Console and one for general use)
♦1 printer port
♦SVGA color monitor
♦Mouse
♦Windows 95 (recommended) or Windows 3.1
♦Windows Graphics Accelerator (recommended)
Windows PC Operation
The Strata PC Attendant Console software runs as a Windows-based application on a PC. The
commands operate and look like other Windows applications. It is recommended the PC be
dedicated to the console function, but other applications can run simultaneously with the console
software.
The PC toggles from Attendant Console mode to other applications. If a call is received while in
an application, the PC automatically switches to Attendant Console mode. When calling traffic is
light, the Attendant can quickly and easily toggle back and forth between applications and the
Attendant Console mode.
Operating in a Windows environment maximizes the use of the computer as a multi-purpose
workstation during non-peak traffic periods. The console application is easy to learn and use,
because its commands look and operate similar to other Windows applications.
Applications
In DK424 answer position applications, you can offer flexibility by providing a choice that meets
the specific customer requirement. Choose between add-on modules, DSS consoles, or Attendant
Consoles to best serve their needs. Complemented by ACD, Auto Attendant and Voice Mail, you
can offer the most complete call answering solution available today.
Attendant Consoles process calls faster than DSS consoles and add-on modules. Table 14
describes guidelines for choosing which equipment to use.
PC Attendant Console
Applications
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 215
Table 14 Comparison of Attendant Consoles, DSS Consoles, and Add-on Modules
Use the Attendant Console
When: Use the DSS Console
When: Use the Add-on Module
When:
There is a very high volume of
incoming call traffic. The volume of incoming call traffic is
moderate. Smaller departmental answer
positions are needed.
Too many stations appear on a DSS
console – the directory display is a
more efficient tool.
The Attendant needs individual
button access to all CO Lines. 20 or 40 DSS/BLF buttons are
sufficient.
Multiple Attendants simultaneously
share the Call Answering function.
Multiple consoles work well
together, automatically sharing the
load of incoming calls on a
call-by-call rotation basis.
Simple BLF display and DSS
transfer are the main applications. A DKT needs more buttons for
general feature use.
Many calls of different types
(incoming, transfers, recalls, etc.)
are received by the Attendant.
Additional station ports may not be
available for DSS console
connection. Add-on modules share
the station port of the attached DKT
and do not require their own station
port.
Answer prompting is needed to
provide the Attendant important
information to answer properly, such
as multiple product lines,
departments, or tenants.
Features are required which the
DSS console does not provide, for
example, Load Sharing, Answer
Priority, Emergency Calls, Overflow,
and Dialing-by-Name.
A multi-purpose work station is
required to provide a high level of
answered calls and other
processing capabilities in a
Windows PC environment.
PC Attendant Console
PC Attendant Console Features
216 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
PC Attendant Console Features
This section describes the specific console features available to PC Attendant Console users.
PC Attendant Console
PC Attendant Console Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 217
Answer Button
Pressing the Answer button automatically answers any incoming call regardless of the type
(incoming CO, internal DN, transferred, recall, etc.). Multiple calls are automatically queued and
answered on a first-in, first-out basis, or according to the priority defined by the user with the
“Answer Priority” feature.
Benefits
Enables quick and efficient answering of calls by clicking or pressing one button. The Attendant
does not have to find and select the ringing line. This greatly streamlines the process and reduces
Attendant stress in high-volume applications.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK424 with RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F processors
Unavailable on Strata DK14/40i/DK424 with
RCTUA processor
PC Attendant Console
PC Attendant Console Features
218 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Answer Priority
Answer Priority enables the Answer button to queue and answer multiple incoming calls in a
priority sequence. The priority sequence is programmable except for emergency calls, which are
always the highest priority. The program default priority sequence (highest to lowest) is Park Orbit
Recall, Transfer Recall, Hold Recall, Transferred to “0” Call, Incoming CO Line call, Internal
“Dial 0” Attendant Call, and Internal to Attendant Directory Number call.
Benefits
Ensures that the most important calls are answered first without the Attendant having to decide
which call should be answered. This makes it easy for the Attendant and streamlines the process
prioritizing all incoming calls.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK424 with RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F processors
Unavailable on Strata DK14/40i/DK424 with
RCTUA processor
PC Attendant Console
PC Attendant Console Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 219
Answer Prompting
Answer Prompting by CO Line or Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS) information
makes it easy for the Attendant to answer calls appropriately for different product lines,
departments, tenants, etc. The CO line identification or DNIS information causes the ringing
console’s screen to display a prompted greeting up to 100 characters long, according to the line
called or number dialed. Programming DID lines to use DNIS routing enables for personalized
answering of DID calls.
Benefits
Answering for multiple tenants, product lines, or departments is easy for the Attendant who only
has to look at the screen to see how to greet each caller. This not only makes appropriate answering
easy, but provides a professional image to callers.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK424 with RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F processors
Unavailable on Strata DK14/40i/DK424 with
RCTUA processor
PC Attendant Console
PC Attendant Console Features
220 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Attendant Conference Setup
Attendant Conference Setup enables the Attendant to setup a conference call with up to four
members. Conference members can be either another console, stations, or CO lines. The
conference can be originated by the Attendant or requested by a station user or outside party.
Benefits
Provides convenience to station users who can request the Attendant to set up a conference call.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK424 with RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F processors
Unavailable on Strata DK14/40i/DK424 with
RCTUA processor
PC Attendant Console
PC Attendant Console Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 221
Auto Day/Night Mode Switching
Auto Day/Night Mode Switching enables automatic switching of the DK424 system between Day,
Day 2, and Night modes according to the time of day and day of the week. Parameters are
programmable by the console Attendant.
This provides automatic mode switching without having to manually press the Night Transfer
button.This automatic mode switching feature is only available with a PC Attendant Console
installed, and is not a standard system feature of the DK424.
Benefits
Provides automatic switching between day and night modes. No one has to remember to push the
Night button to place the system into Night mode at the end of the business day, because the
system clock sends the appropriate commands to the DK424 to change the modes.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK424 with RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F processors
Unavailable on Strata DK14/40i/DK424 with
RCTUA processor
PC Attendant Console
PC Attendant Console Features
222 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Auto Dialing
The PC Attendant Console has a name/number search function that automatically dials the number
of the matched name/number when the Auto Dial option is on. If Auto Dial is off or no match is
found, the Attendant can still use the directory and press a button to call the party or enter a
number to be dialed.
The Attendant can call anyone listed in the directory by typing their name (first, last, or both). A
directory listing is displayed and continually updated as characters are entered until a match is
found. If several entries in the listing are similar, the use of the up and down arrow keys allow a
specific name to be called or have a call transferred to.
Benefits
Facilitates quick and easy call processing, primarily for call transfer. The Attendant can quickly
dial a desired party by a name search, making number finding easy.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK424 with RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F processors
Unavailable on Strata DK14/40i/DK424 with
RCTUA processor
PC Attendant Console
PC Attendant Console Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 223
Busy Lamp Field (BLF)
The BLF on the screen displays the busy/idle status of stations so the Attendant can see who is
busy or idle at a glance. The BLF data is displayed in the directory area of the screen either with or
without station users’ names. The choice of display options is set by the console Attendant.
Benefits
Enables quick identification of station status (busy and idle) and provides faster service. The
Attendant can immediately inform the caller that their party is not available or route the call to
another station. It saves the Attendant time by only handling the call once, rather than a second
time if it recalls after being transferred to a busy station.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK424 with RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F processors
Unavailable on Strata DK14/40i/DK424 with
RCTUA processor
PC Attendant Console
PC Attendant Console Features
224 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Call Waiting Count
This feature displays, on screen, the number of calls in the answer queue. The list is continuously
updated for the Attendant.
Benefits
Facilitates fast call processing by activating Call Overflow or notifying someone that an additional
Attendant is needed during peak calling periods because it lets the Attendant know when call
traffic is getting too heavy for efficient handling.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK424 with RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F processors
Unavailable on Strata DK14/40i/DK424 with
RCTUA processor
PC Attendant Console
PC Attendant Console Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 225
Color CRT Display
Console text information is displayed on the monitor screen in full color. Various colors indicate
different status of conditions, making them more distinguishable to the Attendant.
Benefits
Makes certain features and status of conditions stand out to the Attendant, because they are in
color. Many of the colors are similar to other Windows applications. This makes the console easier
to use for Attendants who are familiar with the standard Windows environment.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK424 with RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F processors
Unavailable on Strata DK14/40i/DK424 with
RCTUA processor
PC Attendant Console
PC Attendant Console Features
226 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Dial “0” for Attendant
Up to four Attendant Consoles can be installed per system, and this feature enables a user to call
any available console by simply dialing “0”. The system routes their call to any available
Attendant. To call a specific console, dial the console directory number.
Benefits
Enables automatic routing of calls to any available Attendant. Station users who want to reach an
Attendant only have to dial “0;” they don’t have to know the DN. In a multiple console
application, they do not have to keep dialing different attendants until they reach one that isn’t
busy.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK424 with RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F processors
Unavailable on Strata DK14/40i/DK424 with
RCTUA processor
PC Attendant Console
PC Attendant Console Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 227
Dial Outside Number for Station User
The Attendant can access a CO line and dial an outside destination number for a station user. To
perform this operation, the Attendant must be in the talking state with either a station user, an
outside caller, or a caller on an incoming Tie trunk.
Benefits
Provides convenience and saves time for station users.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK424 with RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F processors
Unavailable on Strata DK14/40i/DK424 with
RCTUA processor
PC Attendant Console
PC Attendant Console Features
228 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Direct Station Selection (DSS)
The Attendant can click on the station DN on the internal directory screen to perform direct station
calling or transfer operation.
Benefits
Provides rapid and easy DSS calling, because the DN and name directory is on-screen. This
provides the convenience and functionality of having a DSS module with the Attendant Console.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK424 with RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F processors
Unavailable on Strata DK14/40i/DK424 with
RCTUA processor
PC Attendant Console
PC Attendant Console Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 229
Directory Display and Dialing
The directory listing area of the screen can display both names and DNs of internal station users.
The Attendant can point and click on a name or DN, or use the keyboard to automatically dial the
number. These may be accessed using Name Dialing or Department Dialing.
The directory includes each employee’s name and DN. The directory display also includes busy/
idle status of each name and/or DN. A scroll bar enables the Attendant to quickly scan all names in
the directory listing. This information facilitates quick and easy call processing, primarily the
transfer of incoming calls.
Benefits
Enables quick recognition of who is busy or idle and makes it easy to find requested employee
names and/or DNs. It facilitates quick and easy call processing, primarily the transfer of incoming
calls.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK424 with RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F processors
Unavailable on Strata DK14/40i/DK424 with
RCTUA processor
PC Attendant Console
PC Attendant Console Features
230 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
DTMF Tone Signaling
The Attendant Console can generate DTMF tones from the dial pad to signal external devices such
as voice mail, auto attendants, and answering machines on outgoing calls. This makes the
Attendant Console efficient to use for both outgoing and incoming calls.
Both the Strata DK424 and the PC Attendant Console work with DTMF or dial pulse CO lines.
The Attendant can change the CO line out-dialing signal mode from Dial Pulse to DTMF by
clicking or pressing a button.
Benefits
Saves inconvenient use of another station to make outgoing calls by the Attendant. The Attendant
can use the console for all types of outgoing calls, including those calls that require tone responses
to external devices.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK424 with RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F processors
Unavailable on Strata DK14/40i/DK424 with
RCTUA processor
PC Attendant Console
PC Attendant Console Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 231
Emergency Calls
Emergency Calls from internal stations to an Attendant Console always receive the highest answer
priority. They have priority over the first in, first out or priority sequence established in
programming. Emergency calls are initiated by station users by dialing a special number. They
display on the screen in the incoming call area. If the call is placed on hold, the hold time appears
in red to highlight this call for easy identification and retrieval.
Benefits
Enables station users an immediate way to get through to the Attendant. This is very important in
emergency situations or anytime a station user needs priority access to the Attendant.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK424 with RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F processors
Unavailable on Strata DK14/40i/DK424 with
RCTUA processor
PC Attendant Console
PC Attendant Console Features
232 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Emergency Page
An Attendant Console equipped with an assigned Emergency Page button can page the All Call
Telephone Page Group. The page sounds over the speakers of all idle telephones in the All Call
Page Group, but does not sound over the external paging speakers. An Emergency Page pre-empts
an existing page connection.
Benefits
Provides quick and easy access to station paging, either for emergency situations or anytime an
announcement needs to be made. This feature also provides more private paging than external
speaker paging, since Emergency Page goes only through telephone speakers. This is important if
the page desires not to alarm customers or others in the general area.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK424 with RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F processors
Unavailable on Strata DK14/40i/DK424 with
RCTUA processor
PC Attendant Console
PC Attendant Console Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 233
Employee Profile Information
By typing a name (first, last, or both) or a directory number, the console Attendant can display a
complete profile for an employee. A special search by department can also be used to direct a
caller to the appropriate person available to handle the call. Calls for employees not on-site can
have information displayed on how they can be reached, or the Attendant can use the Transfer to
Voice Mail feature to allow callers to leave a message for these employees who are not available
for call transfer.
Benefits
Provides useful information about employees and assists proper alternate routing of calls. This
enables the Attendant to provide better service to callers.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK424 with RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F processors
Unavailable on Strata DK14/40i/DK424 with
RCTUA processor
PC Attendant Console
PC Attendant Console Features
234 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Feature Online Help
Feature Online Help provides feature user instructions at the touch of a button or click of the
mouse. This functions the same as other Windows PC applications. Online help provides
information that is more detailed than routine feature prompting Soft Key instructions, but less
detailed than the examples and instructions contained in the PC Attendant Console User Guide.
Online Help is context oriented, providing information for the operation at hand on the console.
Help can also be accessed using a table of contents or word search function.
Benefits
Makes the console easy to use by providing a quick and simple way of looking up needed
information. Also, the online help function of the PC Attendant Console is similar to other
Windows applications. This makes the PC Attendant Console easier to use for Attendants familiar
with the standard Windows environment.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK424 with RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F processors
Unavailable on Strata DK14/40i/DK424 with
RCTUA processor
PC Attendant Console
PC Attendant Console Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 235
Feature Prompting with Soft Keys
Feature prompting with Soft Key operation provides access to various console features. On-screen
instructions and Soft Key functions and choices change according to the state of the Attendant
Console, making the console easy to use.
Examples:
♦Sending a message waiting indication to a station
♦Breaking into an ongoing conversation
♦Performing a transfer, conference, or voice page
Benefits
Makes call processing quicker and more efficient. Attendants are not intimidated by sophisticated
features and can use them simply by following the instructions on the screen.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK424 with RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F processors
Unavailable on Strata DK14/40i/DK424 with
RCTUA processor
PC Attendant Console
PC Attendant Console Features
236 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Flexible Programmable Buttons
The console has 16 buttons on the display screen that can be programmed by the Attendant with a
variety of feature assignments, trunk access, or as Incoming Call (In) buttons.
Benefits
Provides customization by the Attendant. Commonly used functions can be programmed on
flexible buttons to provide one-touch access to these features, making the console easy and
efficient to use.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK424 with RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F processors
Unavailable on Strata DK14/40i/DK424 with
RCTUA processor
PC Attendant Console
PC Attendant Console Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 237
Headset Operation
In addition to the handset, the console can be used with a headset. The headset can be plugged into
the Attendant Console Interface Unit (RATI).
Benefits
Provides both comfort and convenience to the Attendant. The Attendant does not end the day with
a sore ear. Both hands are free to operate the keyboard and mouse.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK424 with RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F processors
Unavailable on Strata DK14/40i/DK424 with
RCTUA processor
PC Attendant Console
PC Attendant Console Features
238 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Hold Button
Pressing or clicking the Hold button places the current call on hold. The loop hold display area on
screen shows held calls waiting for assistance.
A reminder note can be entered for a call with the name field displayed in the loop hold. This can
be used to remind the Attendant who is holding or who they are holding for (see the Reminder
Notes feature for more details).
The amount of time each call has been on hold is also displayed. If the call is not answered within
a preprogrammed time period, the Attendant is reminded by a ring indicator and the recall
information is moved from the loop hold display area to the incoming call display area on the
screen.
The Attendant can operate with Auto Hold, which automatically places an existing CO line or
internal call on hold (when another call is answered) or the dialing process is started.
Benefits
Provides customized functionality that helps the Attendant know the status of holding calls. The
timer display serves as a reminder of calls needing attention, so the Attendant can provide better
service to callers.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK424 with RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F processors
Unavailable on Strata DK14/40i/DK424 with
RCTUA processor
PC Attendant Console
PC Attendant Console Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 239
Hold Timer Display
The Hold Timer Display shows the amount of time each call has been on hold. This information is
shown in the loop hold display area on screen. This serves as a reminder for the Attendant,
ensuring that the held calls are not be ignored or forgotten. If the call is not answered within a
preprogrammed time period, the call is recalled with a ring indication in the incoming call display
area on the screen. Also, the color indicates whether the call is on Hard Hold, Consultation Hold,
Supervised Hold, or Emergency Call Hold.
Benefits
Serves as a reminder of calls needing attention, so the Attendant provides better service to callers.
The recall function provides an automatic reminder so holding callers are not be forgotten.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK424 with RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F processors
Unavailable on Strata DK14/40i/DK424 with
RCTUA processor
PC Attendant Console
PC Attendant Console Features
240 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Incoming Call Identification
Incoming Call Identification provides selective answering of all categories of calls to the
Attendant (internal DN, transferred, park recall, hold recall, transfer recall, emergency, Attendant,
and incoming CO for all 16 CO line groups). Selecting and answering the desired ringing call in
the incoming call display area, instead of using the Answer button to answer the next call in order,
enables the Attendant to specifically answer a certain type of call and override the FIFO or priority
order established by the Answer button and the Answer Priority feature.
Benefits
Provides better service to priority calls or calls that have been waiting a long time, because the
Attendant has total control of call handling. The Attendant decides which call to answer and
selects by type.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK424 with RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F processors
Unavailable on Strata DK14/40i/DK424 with
RCTUA processor
PC Attendant Console
PC Attendant Console Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 241
Incoming Call Statistics
Incoming call statistics are collected by the PC on incoming calls received at the console.
Information included is number of calls received per hour, total talk time (in seconds) per hour,
total waiting time (in seconds) in queue per hour, and maximum number of calls in queue each 15-
minute interval. The data is stored on disk for display or printing. This information can be
displayed on the console screen or sent to an attached printer from selections available on the
Menu bar.
The call statistics information can be displayed or printed for any of the following time periods:
hourly, daily, weekly, or monthly (up to 2 months data stored). The top of the display/report
indicates the time frame used to compile the information.
This built-in capability is only designed to collect a few basic statistics. A separate, more complete
Call Accounting application would be required for more extensive data collection and reporting.
For example, the console can send the data to a separate call accounting application also resident
on the same computer.
If the PC is running a separate call accounting application, in addition to the Attendant Console
application, the PC can temporarily exit Attendant Console mode and enter Call Accounting mode
using the Windows Alt-Tab command. The Attendant can easily toggle back and forth between the
call accounting application and the Attendant Console application using Alt-Tab on the keyboard.
If a call rings to the console when the PC is in Call Accounting display mode, an interrupt
capability may or may not immediately switch back to console mode to answer the call, depending
upon the setting of the Auto Incoming option.
Benefits
Evaluates traffic patterns and call answering requirements, so a more expensive call accounting
package is not required for simple statistical gathering applications.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK424 with RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F processors
Unavailable on Strata DK14/40i/DK424 with
RCTUA processor
PC Attendant Console
PC Attendant Console Features
242 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Interposition Call Transfer
Interposition Call Transfer enables calls to be transferred from one Attendant Console to another,
as well as transferring a call to a station.
Benefits
Enables one console to transfer a call to another console with a simple and streamlined procedure.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK424 with RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F processors
Unavailable on Strata DK14/40i/DK424 with
RCTUA processor
PC Attendant Console
PC Attendant Console Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 243
Join Button
The Join button enables the Attendant to connect an existing call with either an outside held party
or an internal station. Rather than transferring the call, the Attendant presses the Join button to
create a temporary conference from which the Attendant can then drop out.
Benefits
Ensures that two parties connect before dropping out of the conversation. This is sometimes more
appropriate than using transfer, since the Attendant can provide more personalized service.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK424 with RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F processors
Unavailable on Strata DK14/40i/DK424 with
RCTUA processor
PC Attendant Console
PC Attendant Console Features
244 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Keyboard or Mouse Operation
Keyboard or mouse operation is available. Most functions of the PC Attendant Console can be
operated either from clicking the mouse on screen buttons or pressing equivalent buttons on the
keyboard. This enables Attendants to use whichever method is easiest for them. The mouse and
keyboard may be used together interchangeably.
Benefits
Enables the most comfortable use of each individual Attendant Console – either by using the
keyboard or the mouse for operations. Most Attendants use a combination of both the keyboard
and the mouse for optimum efficiency and ease of use.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK424 with RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F processors
Unavailable on Strata DK14/40i/DK424 with
RCTUA processor
PC Attendant Console
PC Attendant Console Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 245
Load Sharing
In a multiple console application, Load Sharing distributes incoming calls among available
Attendant Consoles (up to four) on a call by call rotation basis. This is better than ringing all calls
to all consoles. Individual Attendants only get their fair share of calls and answer only those
ringing at their console. The Attendants also have other features such as Call Pickup, overflow, etc.
to handle calls during heavy traffic periods.
Benefits
Provides the most efficient way of handling calls among multiple consoles by enabling an even
distribution of calls. Along with other features, it provides methods of handling calls whenever an
Attendant is tied up with a long call.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK424 with RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F processors
Unavailable on Strata DK14/40i/DK424 with
RCTUA processor
PC Attendant Console
PC Attendant Console Features
246 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Loop Hold Display
The loop hold display area on screen shows held calls waiting for assistance, either on a supervised
or released loop basis. Supervised loop operation retains a transferred call in the loop display area,
enabling the Attendant to visibly monitor it, or re-enter the conversation. Release loop operation
briefly displays the held call in the loop display area, while it is being transferred and until it is
answered by the station receiving the transferred call, at which time it disappears from the loop
hold display area.
A reminder note can be entered for a call with the name field displayed in the Loop Hold. This can
be used to remind the Attendant who is holding or who they are holding for (see the Reminder
Notes feature for more details).
The amount of time each call has been on hold is also displayed in the loop hold area. If the call is
not answered within a preprogrammed time period, the call is recalled with a ring indicator, and
the recall information is shown in the incoming call display area on the screen.
Benefits
Provides the status of holding calls to the Attendant. The timer display serves as a reminder of
calls needing attention, so the Attendant can provide better service to callers. The recall function
provides an automatic reminder so the holding callers are not forgotten.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK424 with RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F processors
Unavailable on Strata DK14/40i/DK424 with
RCTUA processor
PC Attendant Console
PC Attendant Console Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 247
Message Center
The Attendant can type a message for anyone entered into the directory by entering the message
database from the keyboard. When a message is entered, it automatically sets the message light at
the receiving message station. The station user can press the Msg button to call the Attendant that
has the message. If the station is an LCD telephone, the message to call the Attendant is displayed
on the LCD. The Attendant can display a list of messages for the caller and read them back.
Messages can be taken for any person entered into the directory of the Attendant Console. By
entering important guests into the directory, messages can be taken for visitors as well as
employees.
Benefits
Provides a message center capability in applications not using voice mail, or situations in which
messages are not generated from a telephone call. Specialized message centers for guests can be
set up for functions such as training seminars, client visitations, etc.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK424 with RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F processors
Unavailable on Strata DK14/40i/DK424 with
RCTUA processor
PC Attendant Console
PC Attendant Console Features
248 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Multitasking
The Strata PC Attendant Console software runs as a Windows application on a personal computer.
It is recommended that the PC be dedicated to the console function to maximize PC response time
and efficiency for the console function. However, other applications can also run simultaneously
on the same PC. This enables both the console Attendant and the PC to multi-task between the call
answering function and other PC applications.
The PC can toggle from Attendant Console mode to some other application, and back to the
console mode. If a call is received while in another application, the PC can immediately switch
back to the Attendant Console mode to handle the ringing call. This can be done either
automatically with the Auto Activate option set to on or manually if it is set to off. Thus, when
calling traffic is light, the Attendant can quickly and easily toggle back and forth between the
Attendant Console mode and another application, automatically or at the touch of a button on the
keyboard.
Benefits
Makes the PC a multi-purpose workstation during non-peak traffic periods. The Attendant uses
time more efficiently between calls and maximizes the use of the computer.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK424 with RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F processors
Unavailable on Strata DK14/40i/DK424 with
RCTUA processor
PC Attendant Console
PC Attendant Console Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 249
Name or Number Dialing
The Attendant can call anyone listed in the dial directory by typing their name (first, last, or both).
This can be internal stations or external numbers. The dial directory searches the listing as
characters are entered until a match is found. If several entries in the listing are similar, the use of
the Up and Down arrow keys enable a call or transfer to a specific name.
Name dialing can also be used for finding departments as well as individuals. Many incoming calls
are not for a specific person, but for a departmental feature or department. Callers requesting help
by function may not know the name of an employee to ask for in the department they are
requesting, i.e. “May I speak to someone in Customer Service.” Dialing by function or department
enables the Attendant to display a list of employee names and directory numbers, sorted by their
function or department, and select the person or group (ACD or Distributed Hunt) that can best
handle the call.
Benefits
Facilitates efficiency because the Attendant has internal and external numbers listed in a directory
screen, or can use the name/number lookup and speed dialing. It’s as easy as pressing a button or
clicking the mouse. Time waste and errors can be easily avoided.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK424 with RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F processors
Unavailable on Strata DK14/40i/DK424 with
RCTUA processor
PC Attendant Console
PC Attendant Console Features
250 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Overflow
Overflow mode re-routes calls, which have been waiting in the ringing queue too long, to another
console, station, or answering device as assigned in programming. This feature is controlled by the
overflow timer and can be manually activated by the Attendant during high-traffic conditions via
the Overflow button.
Benefits
Provides backup for the Attendant during busy periods when it is difficult to keep up with heavy
incoming call traffic. Overflow serves as another efficient way of providing call coverage.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK424 with RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F processors
Unavailable on Strata DK14/40i/DK424 with
RCTUA processor
PC Attendant Console
PC Attendant Console Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 251
Override
There are three ways to override calls:
♦Busy Override lets the Attendant send a tone to a busy station to signal a call is waiting.
♦Do Not Disturb (DND) Override lets the Attendant send a tone to an idle station in the DND
mode to indicate that an important call is coming in.
♦Executive Override lets the Attendant enter an established conversation.
Each of these can be enabled or disabled by programming.
Benefits
Enables the Attendant to access stations for emergency messages or high-priority calls.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK424 with RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F processors
Unavailable on Strata DK14/40i/DK424 with
RCTUA processor
PC Attendant Console
PC Attendant Console Features
252 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Park and Page
The Attendant can combine the Park and Page functions into one quick and easy function. The
Park and Page feature enables the Attendant to park a call in one of the Park Orbits, enter a Page
Zone or Group access code if desired, and announce the page. The console can be connected to a
predesignated External Paging circuit, a Telephone Page group, or both. See Call Park in the
Station Features chapter of this manual for more details on this feature.
Benefits
Provides quick and easy access to station paging by combining two functions into one. This saves
the Attendant valuable time in high-traffic applications.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK424 with RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F processors
Unavailable on Strata DK14/40i/DK424 with
RCTUA processor
PC Attendant Console
PC Attendant Console Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 253
Position Busy
The Position Busy feature makes it easy to place the console in unattended mode or re-enter the
normal call processing mode. When in Position Busy mode, calls to the Attendant Console are
routed to other attendants on the system.
This feature is intended for use only when more than one Attendant Console shares the load of
incoming calls. In this mode, new calls are sent to other consoles. Held and unanswered
transferred calls continue to recall to the console that processed them. When the last console in the
Attendant group is placed in Position Busy mode, the entire group is considered unattended, and
consoles must set Call Forward and/or Night Transfer to cause Attendant Console calls to be re-
routed to another destination.
Benefits
Makes it easy for Attendants to leave for breaks at the touch or click of one button. In addition to
procedural efficiency, call coverage provides smooth continuation of call answering by other
consoles. Returning to service is just as easy, by pressing or clicking the Position Busy button.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK424 with RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F processors
Unavailable on Strata DK14/40i/DK424 with
RCTUA processor
PC Attendant Console
PC Attendant Console Features
254 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Release Button
The Attendant can click or press the Release button to release the console from any connection by
disconnecting or transferring the call and placing the console in the idle state.
Benefits
Increases speed and efficiency by enabling the console Attendant to complete the call transfer and
go idle with the click or press of one button.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK424 with RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F processors
Unavailable on Strata DK14/40i/DK424 with
RCTUA processor
PC Attendant Console
PC Attendant Console Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 255
Reminder Notes
The Attendant has the option of entering a reminder note for an incoming call that is about to be
transferred or placed on hold. The note is typically the name of the calling and/or called party. This
note is displayed on hold calls in the Loop Hold display area, and in the message window
whenever the call recalls to the console.
The reminder note is typically used to remind the Attendant who is holding or who they are
holding for if the Attendant has to handle the call a second time. This secondary handling usually
results from a transferred call recalling to the Attendant, or if the call has been on hold waiting for
a page pickup and recalls to the Attendant. This makes it quick and easy to offer alternative call
processing without having to start over with the caller.
Benefits
Enables a more personalized response to the caller when they have been put on hold, parked, or
transferred. The Attendant can be reminded of who is calling and from whom they are holding
when the call recalls to the Attendant. This saves time for the Attendant, because they don’t have
to ask a second time for whom the call is. It also gives the caller better service.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK424 with RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F processors
Unavailable on Strata DK14/40i/DK424 with
RCTUA processor
PC Attendant Console
PC Attendant Console Features
256 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Split/Switch Button
The Attendant can alternate between source and destination parties on hold, by clicking or
pressing the Split/Switch button, while keeping the two parties separate on the console. This can
only be performed when the console is involved in a three-way conference with a source and
destination party. The parties can either be connected on outside lines only, on directory number
DN lines only, or on a combination of outside and internal lines. The Split/Switch button does not
function on four-party conference calls.
Benefits
Makes it quick and easy for the Attendant to talk to either of the other two parties. This is
especially useful when the Attendant alternates between parties.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK424 with RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F processors
Unavailable on Strata DK14/40i/DK424 with
RCTUA processor
PC Attendant Console
PC Attendant Console Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 257
Speed Dial Calling
Through the use of an “active keyboard,” the Attendant can access speed dial names or speed dial
location numbers when dialing or transferring a call. When the Attendant types in a speed dial
name or location number, the speed dial information is displayed for quick access. Up to 40
personal numbers and 100 (800 with RCTUE/F) system numbers can be stored in the speed dial
list.
The Attendant enters the names for the speed dial numbers on the console. Names entered from the
console can be different from those entered in the system records, so the Attendant can customize
the names list for easy use.
Benefits
Provides a more efficient method of making calls by using the name/number lookup and speed
dialing. It’s as easy as pressing a button or clicking the mouse.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK424 with RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F processors
Unavailable on Strata DK14/40i/DK424 with
RCTUA processor
PC Attendant Console
PC Attendant Console Features
258 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Three-way Calling
Three-Way Calling lets the Attendant talk with the source and destination parties simultaneously.
This requires a connection with a station user or outside caller and a party on Consultation Hold.
After placing a party on Consultation Hold and connecting to another party, the Attendant is
engaged in a three-way conversation. The console display indicates the connection to both the
source and destination parties. The Attendant can disconnect from the conference, leaving the
other parties connected, or can add another party to the conference.
Benefits
Provides the flexibility of connecting calls together in more ways than the typical conferencing.
The console Attendant can ensure the two parties get together before dropping out of the
conversation. This is often more appropriate than using transfer, because the Attendant can provide
more personalized service.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK424 with RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F processors
Unavailable on Strata DK14/40i/DK424 with
RCTUA processor
PC Attendant Console
PC Attendant Console Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 259
Through Dialing
Through Dialing enables an Attendant to provide a restricted station user with temporary outgoing
call privileges. On a call-by-call basis, the Attendant can access otherwise denied trunks and then
pass the dial tone to the station user. The station user can then complete the call dialing procedure.
Through Dialing can be applied to callers using DISA and incoming Tie trunks, as well as to
station users. To access a specific trunk group, the Attendant’s Class of Service must permit such
access.
Benefits
Enables toll-restricted station users temporary access to outside lines through the Attendant on a
per-call basis. This maintains the integrity of toll restriction, while still extending outgoing calling
privileges when necessary.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK424 with RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F processors
Unavailable on Strata DK14/40i/DK424 with
RCTUA processor
PC Attendant Console
PC Attendant Console Features
260 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Transfer Direct to Voice Mail
Transfer Direct to Voice Mail Box provides the Attendant Console Attendant a Transfer to Voice
Mail (TVM) button, on screen and on keyboard, to transfer outside callers directly to a station
user’s voice mailbox, rather than to their station which would forward to voice mail if busy or not
answered.
This direct transfer to voice mail box function is used when the Attendant looks at the BLF or
knows the requested station user is either busy or not available. This feature works the same
regardless of the status of the destination station (busy, DND, idle, forward). It provides a way to
transfer calls to the desired mailbox without relying upon proper forwarding set at the station. This
is also useful for internal calling directly to a station’s mailbox when you know they are not going
to answer, or for transferring calls to mailboxes that do not have stations on the Strata DK system.
The Attendant can release the call immediately after a voice mail port answers.
Benefits
Provides better service to callers by transferring a call directly to a busy or absent station user’s
mailbox. They can leave a message sooner without having to listen to ringing while forwarding.
This is also more efficient for the console Attendant who will not get transfer recalls from stations
that do not answer and may not be forwarded to voice mail.
Using this feature to reach Audiotext messages of VM gives the Attendant an efficient way to
handle routine information requests, such as directions to the business location.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK424 with RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F processors
Unavailable on Strata DK14/40i/DK424 with
RCTUA processor
PC Attendant Console
PC Attendant Console Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 261
Trunk Group Control
Trunk Group Control enables the Attendant to restrict access to outgoing CO line groups on an as-
needed basis. This feature also lets the Attendant restrict outgoing calls on two-way CO line
groups.
The display shows the group number of all trunk groups in which all lines within that group are
currently in use. Trunk groups with no members are always shown busy.
These capabilities enable control of outgoing traffic on heavily used line groups during busy hours.
Benefits
Provides maximum availability for incoming calls and better service to callers because the trunk
groups are as free as possible during peak traffic periods.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK424 with RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F processors
Unavailable on Strata DK14/40i/DK424 with
RCTUA processor
PC Attendant Console
PC Attendant Console Features
262 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Volume Control
The Volume Control buttons on screen adjust the Attendant Console’s ringing volume and
handset/headset volume. The ringing volume and the handset/headset volume are adjusted
separately. The Volume Up button increases the volume, while the Volume Down button decreases
the volume.
Benefits
Provides volume adjustments according to the Attendant’s needs.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK424 with RCTUBA/
BB, RCTUC/D, or RCTUE/F processors
Unavailable on Strata DK14/40i/DK424 with
RCTUA processor
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 263
Automatic Call Distribution 5
Strata DK424 Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) capability is provided as a value-added option
with the RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D, and RCTUE/F processor versions. Each DK424 processor
supports the following number of stations and CO lines.
♦RCTUBA/BB – combination of up to 80 stations or 48 CO lines (up to 2 cabinets).
♦RCTUC/D – combination of up to 240 stations or 144 CO lines (up to 6 cabinets).
♦RCTUE/F – combination of up to 336 stations or 200 CO lines (up to 7 cabinets).
Note ACD is not available with the DK424 RCTUA or DK40i and DK14 systems.
ACD Operation
The ACD feature can accommodate up to 16 ACD groups, 120 individual Agent stations, 256
Agent identification codes, and 16 Supervisor identification codes (see Table 15).
Note See the Strata DK General Description for more information on common control units.
Call centers need an efficient method for the automatic distribution of a large number of incoming
calls to prearranged groups of Agent positions. ACD in the Strata DK is the most cost-effective
method for distributing incoming calls to call centers. The calls are served in the order of their
arrival and are evenly distributed among the Agents (see Figure 14).
Table 15 Strata DK System ACD Capacities
ACD Maximum Capacities
for Strata DK424 Systems RCTUBA/BB RCTUC/D
RCTUE/F
Number of Groups 8 16
Number of Supervisor Positions 8 16
Number of Agent ID Codes 200 256
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Operation
264 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Figure 14 ACD and Auto Attendant Application Flow Diagram
ACD call centers can be telemarketing, inside sales, customer service, technical support, or any
other group that handles a large number of incoming calls (see Figure 15).
Figure 15 Typical ACD Interaction
Incoming Call
ACD Group X
ACD PhDN
ACD Group Y
ACD Queue
(No Overflow Assignment)
ACD Queue
Agent PhDN
• Distributed Hunt Group
• Station PDN, PhDN or CO Line
• Attendant Console
• Another ACD Group
• Auto Attendant
• Announcement
Station
Auto Attendant
(Built-in or External)
1971
Agent
Answers Overflow
Operation
After Shift
Service
All Agents Busy
or After Call Work,
then Stack Call
Into Queue
All Agents
Unavailable All Agents
Logged Off
End of ACD
Shift Mode
Agent
Available
Ring Agent's
Telephone
ACD Call
Talk
No
Yes/No (optional)
Select Overflow Option Select After Shift Option
Yes
Program
Option
Incoming ACD Call
Ring another ACD Group, Distributed Hunt Group, Auto Attendant,
Attendant Console, designated station(s), bell, or play an
announcement and hang up.
1970
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Operation
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 265
ACD can distribute calls to all Agents in the group on a “Most Idle Agent Next”, so that over a
given period of time, each Agent spends approximately the same amount of work time on ACD
calls. Alternatively, ACD can distribute calls on a “First Available Agent Next” (rotation) basis, so
over a given period of time, each Agent receives an equal number of ACD calls.
Callers waiting in queue can hear up to three different announcements per ACD group. A flexible
sequence is provided to play these announcements for incoming calls when no Agent is currently
available to handle the call. Between announcements, callers can hear music and/or company
promotional/advertising messages provided by external equipment.
Additionally, calls that have been in queue for a predetermined time can be forwarded to another
ACD group or other selected destination for immediate service.
Calls received after a group’s shift has ended (After Shift mode) are routed to an alternate answer
point, such as another telephone’s DN, an Attendant, an Auto Attendant, a voice mail box, another
ACD group or a Distributed Hunt (DH) group for call handling. In the After Shift mode, a different
announcement can be used.
The DK424 transmits data about the operation of the ACD system to the Management Information
System (MIS) processor, where it can be stored on hard disk. This data is manipulated by the MIS
processor and organized into real-time displays and reports, and historical reports. The displays are
provided to the ACD group supervisor via the MIS processor display screen. The reports can be
called up by shift, hourly, daily, weekly, monthly, or annual periods. They can be either displayed
at the supervisor terminal or printed on a printer connected to the MIS processor.
Toshiba offers two types of MIS products that are ideal for use with DK424 ACD applications.
♦Call Center Viewer provides real-time ACD status displays and connection of electronic wall
boards.
♦Software MIS (SMIS) provides real-time displays and historical reports.
The Call Center Viewer application organizes and displays ACD call center events received from
the DK424 system. The data is displayed on your PC screen in easy to read full color format.
♦Real-time supervisor displays provide information on call queue status, agent status, and other
useful information for managing the ACD groups.
♦Audible alarms alert you when thresholds you assign are exceeded for the number of calls
waiting, longest call waiting, and unavailable agents.
♦Electronic wall boards can be connected to the supervisor’s PC to display call center data over
head from the Call Center Viewer application.
SMIS provides historical reports in a full featured and cost effective MIS package.
♦Reports provide information and statistics on individual agents, ACD groups, or the system
status.
♦Reports can be generated over a selectable period of time for periods of minutes, shift, daily,
weekly, monthly, and annually.
♦Real-time supervisor displays provide agent statistics, agent status, call statistics, and system
status.
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Operation
266 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
The combination of Call Center Viewer and SMIS enables you to add ACD supervisory display
and reporting capabilities as you need them. The Call Center Viewer application can work in
conjunction with SMIS to provide the ideal solution for call centers needing historical reports,
real-time displays, and electronic wall board messaging of call center ACD activity.
♦The Call Center Viewer application can be used by itself in ACD applications needing PC
screen ACD group status visibility but not MIS reports.
♦Electronic wall boards can be connected to the PC running the Call Center Viewer application
to provide over head message visibility.
♦Additional Call Center Viewer applications can be added to support multiple ACD group and
multiple ACD call center supervisor display applications.
♦Software MIS (SMIS) can be used with Call Center Viewer for call centers needing historical
reports as well as real-time displays for ACD group status visibility.
ACD agents may use either Toshiba-proprietary digital telephones or standard 2500-set
telephones. The ACD supervisors will typically use digital LCD telephones. The use of digital
telephones permits the end-user to assign agent features to flexible feature buttons for easier, more
efficient operation. Use of LCD telephones is highly recommended, because it enables both
supervisors and agents to use valuable display information such as the number of calls waiting in
the group’s queue and the length of time spent on each ACD call.
When applying the ACD function with the general use of the DK424, it is important to note that
additional instruments are not needed for ACD agents. They can use that same telephone to make
and receive regular system calls as well as receive calls into the ACD group. Outgoing calling
privileges can be controlled by class of service and toll restriction.
Agent digital/electronic telephones require a unique, single appearing, PhDN button called the
agent ACD Call button. Any single appearing PhDN can be used to log in to any ACD Group to
receive ACD calls and to originate or receive PBX calls. Agents can also receive or make non-
ACD calls from other DN buttons or CO line buttons.
ACD agents using digital/electronic telephones can answer and make various types of calls that
are:
♦ACD Call – An incoming external line call that is routed or transferred to an ACD Group and
then rings an agent ACD Call button.
♦PBX Call – An external or internal call that is routed or transferred directly to an ACD Call
button directory number, and not routed through the ACD group. A PBX call is also a call
originated from the ACD Call button on an agent telephone. When on a PBX call, an agent
cannot receive ACD calls. When on an ACD call, an agent cannot receive PBX calls, but can
originate and receive calls on CO or DN buttons other while on a ACD or PBX call is on hold.
♦Non-ACD Call – Any call received by or originated from a directory number button or CO
line button that appears on an agent telephone, other than the agent ACD Call button. When
on a non-ACD call, an agent can receive ACD calls because the ACD calls will ring on the idle
ACD Call button.
Any type of CO line that is used with the DK424 is also compatible with the ACD function.
Ground start, DID, or Tie lines are preferred, due to their superior disconnect supervision
capability. If loop start is used, reliable Automatic Release from the CO must be provided.
The maximum ACD agents allowed within each system processor with and without MIS are
outlined in Tables 16~19.
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Operation
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 267
Table 16 Maximum Number of ACD Agents Allowed without MIS (RCTUBA/BB)
Light Traffic
15 calls per agent per hour Medium Traffic
30 calls per agent per hour Heavy Traffic
60 calls per agent per hour
Agent
Telephones Non-agent
Telephones Agent
Telephones Non-agent
Telephones Agent
Telephones Non-agent
Telephones
80 0 80 0 70 0
70 10 70 10 65 15
60 20 60 20 60 20
50 30 50 30 55 25
40 40 40 40 50 30
30 50 30 50 40 40
20 60 20 60 30 50
15 65 15 65 20 60
10 70 10 70 15 65
5 75 5 75 10 70
———— 5 75
Table 17 Maximum Number of ACD Agents Allowed with MIS (RCTUBA/BB)
Light Traffic
15 calls per agent per hour Medium Traffic
30 calls per agent per hour Heavy Traffic
60 calls per agent per hour
Agent
Telephones Non-agent
Telephones Agent
Telephones Non-agent
Telephones Agent
Telephones Non-agent
Telephones
65 15 38 42 19 61
60 20 30 50 15 65
40 40 20 60 10 70
20 60 10 70 5 75
575575——
Table 18 Maximum Number of ACD Agents Allowed without MIS (RCTUC/D)(RCTUE/F)
Light Traffic
15 calls per agent per hour Medium Traffic
30 calls per agent per hour Heavy Traffic
60 calls per agent per hour
Agent
Telephones Non-agent
Telephones Agent
Telephones Non-agent
Telephones Agent
Telephones Non-agent
Telephones
120 120 120 24 70 0
108 132 118 30 65 30
80 160 108 60 60 60
6018098905590
40 200 88 120 50 110
30 210 78 150 45 140
20 220 68 172 40 170
15 225 60 180 35 200
10 230 50 190 30 210
5 235 40 200 25 215
— — 30 210 20 220
— — 20 220 15 225
— — 10 230 10 230
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Operation
268 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Notes
●For the purpose of these tables, Agent calls are defined as ACD incoming, PBX incoming and
outgoing, and external/internal calls. If an ACD call is transferred, then two calls are created,
one ACD and one PBX.
●The maximum number of Agents shown in these tables is limited by the amount of MIS data
traffic sent from Strata DK. If there are more than 1,000 Agent calls in a heavy-traffic hour, the
MIS channel must be set higher than 1200 bps. The next higher speed, 2400 bps, can handle up
to 1300 calls per hour. Strata DK allows the choice of 1200, 2400, 4800, or 9600 bps for the
MIS channel. Based on a total system speed of 10,800 bps (9600 + 1200) for auxiliary serial
channels and a requirement of one channel each for SMDI, TTY, SMDR, and MIS, the
installation should use the lowest MIS channel speed for the expected amount of traffic.
Benefits
ACD gives the user a powerful tool for evenly distributing large volumes of inbound calls. It
makes processing those calls easier and more efficient, saving money and increasing the
productivity of the call handling Agents. This also improves the service provided to the outside
caller.
ACD reports enable the Supervisors to monitor the performance of ACD groups and individual
Agents within each group. This information makes it possible to configure the operation of the
ACD system for maximum productivity and profitability. For more information about the reports,
see “ACD Supervisor Log In/Log Out”.
A Work Unit code can be 1~15 digits. SMDR registers 1~15 digits, but SMIS only registers 1 or 2
digits.
—— 52355235
Table 19 Maximum Number of ACD Agents Allowed with MIS (RCTUC/D)(RCTUE/F)
Light Traffic
15 calls per agent per hour Medium Traffic
30 calls per agent per hour Heavy Traffic
60 calls per agent per hour
Agent
Telephones Non-agent
Telephones Agent
Telephones Non-agent
Telephones Agent
Telephones Non-agent
Telephones
65 175 38 202 19 221
60 180 30 210 15 225
40 200 20 220 10 230
20 220 10 230 5 235
52355235——
Table 18 Maximum Number of ACD Agents Allowed without MIS (RCTUC/D)(RCTUE/F)
(continued)
Light Traffic
15 calls per agent per hour Medium Traffic
30 calls per agent per hour Heavy Traffic
60 calls per agent per hour
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 269
ACD System Features
An ACD group is usually composed of a number of agents handling similar types of incoming
calls. Each ACD group is identified by an ACD group number.
Agents in each ACD group are identified by agent ID numbers. Agents log into the system by
entering their ID from any telephone. This means agents are not tied to particular telephone sets,
providing the flexibility to serve most any applicaiton. Incoming ACD calls for the agent’s group
are then routed to that station, when available or next in line to receive calls.
The following features are available in the ACD environment. A full description begins on Page
270.
♦“After Shift Service”
♦“Automatic Disconnect”
♦“Automatic Number Identification (ANI)”
♦“Call Distribution”
♦“Caller ID”
♦“Delay Announcements and Music”
♦“Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS)”
♦“Inbound Call Routing”
♦“Overflow”
♦“PBX Calls”
♦“Queuing”
♦“Queue Alarm Timer”
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD System Features
270 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
After Shift Service
When an ACD group is in the After Shift mode, callers calling the ACD group are routed to the
group’s designated After Shift destination. Each group can have the same or different After Shift
destinations. The After Shift destinations can be any of the following:
♦A designated station or group of stations
♦Another ACD group
♦An announcement
♦An Auto Attendant
♦An Attendant Console
♦A signaling device, such as chimes or a bell
If the After Shift destination is a telephone or announcement device, and it is busy, calls camp onto
the destination. They are answered as the destination becomes available. If the After Shift
destination is another ACD group, the call rings an Agent in that group. If all the Agents are busy,
the call is sent to the end of that group’s queue.
After Shift Service can be initiated two ways:
♦The ACD Supervisor can press the End of ACD Shift button.
♦The ACD group is automatically placed into the After Shift mode after all Agents logout or (as
a program option) when all Agents are in the Unavailable mode. Calls that are in an ACD
group queue just prior to the After Shift mode follow the normal queue routing programmed
for that ACD group. The After Shift mode is automatically cancelled when the first Agent logs
into an ACD group making the group available to receive ACD calls.
Benefits
Routes after-hours calls quickly and efficiently without effecting customer service. The destination
can be another ACD group, telephone, or announcement device.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK424 with ACD except
those with RCTUA processors
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 271
Automatic Disconnect
Loop start CO lines do not reliably and automatically release when a caller hangs up. With the
Automatic Disconnect feature, the user has the option to automatically disconnect calls which
have been waiting in queue for a certain length of time. Automatic Disconnect can be set at 1 to 60
minutes after the call comes into the system or it can be disabled.
An example of Automatic Disconnect is when an incoming call is sent to an ACD queue, either
music or an announcement is played for the caller. The call waits in the queue until an Agent
answers it. If the caller hangs up while in the queue (abandoned call) or an Agent does not answer
the call within the programmed Automatic Disconnect time, the call is automatically disconnected.
Benefits
Enables the efficient handling of expensive incoming calls, such as inbound 800 WATS line calls,
because they do not wait endlessly. They are answered or disconnected after they have exceeded
the waiting period.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK424 with ACD except
those with RCTUA processors
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD System Features
272 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Automatic Number Identification (ANI)
The telephone number of a calling party is displayed on the LCD of a ringing Agent telephone and
sent to a Personal Computer (PC). The system supports ANI on analog, digital (T1) DID, and Tie
lines and provides useful call information to Agents.
ANI is usually associated with “1-800” type calls offered by various long distance carriers (except
AT&T) through T1 facilities. However, the DK424 also provides ANI information received over
analog DID and Tie line circuits.
ANI digits can be received independently or simultaneously with Dialed Number Identification
Service (DNIS) called number digits. When received with DNIS digits, calls can be routed to
unique ACD groups for each DNIS number. ANI data for answered calls can be displayed on
SMDR reports.
ANI numbers that are abandoned before being answered, are stored in system memory so users
know the calling party’s telephone number even if no message was left. Designated Agent or
Supervisor LCD telephones can display and Auto Dial the abandoned call ANI numbers.
The system can store up to 2,000 ANI abandoned call numbers with the RCTUE/F processor, up to
1,000 with RCTUC/D, and up to 400 with RCTU-BA/BB. Individual stations can be programmed
to store from 0 to 100 of the total ANI abandoned call numbers in increments of 10. DKAdmin can
print a list of Abandoned Call numbers for all telephones that store lost call ANI numbers.
For computer applications, ANI and DNIS digits can be sent to an individual PC connected via an
Integrated PC Interface Unit (RPCI-DI). This enables users to receive pop-up screens on their PC
that provide information regarding the calling/called party before answering and during the call.
Benefits
Provides valuable information to agents as they answer calls. Computer applications enable users
to receive pop-up screens on their PC, before answering and during the call, further enhancing
service to callers. Abandoned call information provides the valuable ability to return calls to those
callers who did not get through or did not leave a message.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK424 with ACD except
those with RCTUA processors
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 273
Call Distribution
Incoming ACD calls are automatically distributed in a uniform manner among available Agents in
the group. The system offers two different methods for call distribution on a system-wide basis for
all ACD groups in the system.
♦Most-Idle-First – The first of these is true-ACD time-based routing. This algorithm attempts
over a period of time to keep Agents in the group on ACD calls for approximately the same
length of time.
♦Next-Available First – The second algorithm, which is call-based, attempts to deliver an equal
number of calls to the Agents in the group over a given time period.
Most-Idle-First routing is appropriate for most call distribution applications, since it tends to
maximize the productivity of individual Agents and the overall efficiency of the entire group.
However, some applications may need the specific capabilities of Next-Available-First routing.
The end user can choose the call distribution method that best fits their application. In both cases,
if all Agents are busy and calls are waiting in queue, the first Agent to become available will
receive the call.
Benefits
Routes calls efficiently and effectively using the Agents in various groups and maximizes
productivity. The overall efficiency of the entire Agent group is enhanced as well.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK424 with ACD except
those with RCTUA processors
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD System Features
274 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Caller ID
The telephone number and name of a calling party is displayed on the LCD of a ringing Agent
telephone and can be sent to a PC. A maximum of 10 telephone number digits and 15 name
characters can be displayed or sent to a computer.
The Caller ID Interface (RCIU) PCB is required, in conjunction with the normal ground or loop
start CO line PCBs to provide the Caller ID feature. It can be provided on analog loop start lines
(RCOU/RCOS, PCOU) and analog ground start lines (RGLU) only. It is not available on any other
type of analog lines, such as DID (RDDU), Tie (REMU, PEMU), or digital T1 lines (RDTU).
An RCIU/RCIS circuit must be available for each line that is to receive Caller ID. When ordered
from the factory, the RCIU PCB comes equipped with four Caller ID circuits. An RCIS piggy-
back PCB can be installed onto the RCIU to provide four more Caller ID circuits, for a maximum
of eight Caller ID circuits per slot. Caller ID data for answered calls can be displayed on SMDR
reports.
Caller ID data is stored in system memory for calls that are abandoned before being answered, so
users know the name (if provided by the local CO) and telephone number of who called even if
they did not leave a message. Designated Agent or Supervisor LCD telephones can display and
Auto Dial the abandoned call numbers. The system can store numbers up to 2,000 with the
RCTUE/F processor, 1,000 with the RCTUC/D processor, and 400 with the RCTUBA/BB
processor. Individual stations can store from 0 to 100 in increments of 10.
DKAdmin can print a list of abandoned call numbers for all telephones that store abandoned call
numbers.
For computer applications, Caller ID digits and names (if supplied by the local CO), can be sent to
a PC connected via an RPCI-DI. This enables users to receive pop-up screens on their PC that
provide information regarding the calling/called party before answering and during the call.
Benefits
Provides valuable information to agents as they answer calls. Computer applications enable users
to receive pop-up screens on their PC, before answering and during the call, further enhancing
service to callers. Abandoned call information provides the valuable ability to return calls to those
callers who did not get through or did not leave a message.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK424 with ACD except
those with RCTUA processors
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 275
Data Collection and Reporting
The system collects real-time data and transfers it in packets to the MIS processor. The MIS
processor organizes the information into real-time displays, statistics, and reports. The information
collected includes ACD call activities (before and after answer), PBX call activity, Agent status,
average wait times, lost calls, and ACD queue activities. Data can be displayed or printed. For
more information, see “ACD Call Center Viewer” and “ACD Software MIS (SMIS)” later in this
section.
Benefits
Effectively assists in managing call center operations.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK424 with ACD except
those with RCTUA processors
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD System Features
276 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Delay Announcements and Music
Announcements and music are provided to calls in the queue at predetermined time intervals. The
system provides flexible announcement patterns which can be assigned to each ACD group. Up to
three different announcements can be programmed per group.
Each announcement can be recorded into an external customer-provided digital announcer. The
message is synchronized to begin when a call is connected to the announcer.
Each ACD group can have its own announcements and/or music source, or groups can share the
sources.
The lengths of the music intervals are selected when the feature is programmed.
Benefits
Provides valuable information to callers while they are on hold. It also keeps them occupied so
they will continue to hold.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK424 with ACD except
those with RCTUA processors
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 277
Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS)
DNIS identifies the number dialed by the calling party regardless of which incoming line the call is
on. A 16-character alphanumeric is displayed on the ringing Agent telephone’s LCD. DNIS digits
can also be sent to an application computer. DNIS names will display on direct, incoming, and
transferred calls that overflow from the ACD group that cannot forward calls to the ACD group.
This enables calls to be answered appropriately by type of call.
DNIS is supported on digital (T1), or analog (DID), and Tie lines. It is typically used with 1-800
calls using long-distance carriers over T1, but can be provided over analog DID and Tie line
circuits. DNIS calls can be routed to unique ACD groups for each DNIS number, and each DNIS
number can be routed to different destinations during Day/Day2/Night mode.
DNIS digits can be received independently or simultaneously with ANI digits.
The Strata DK424 supports the following DNIS maximums (see Table 20).
Benefits
Enables multiple calls to the same line or line group, providing optimum trunk usage as well as
helpful called number/name identification information. This provides more efficient usage of CO
lines than the traditional usage of 800 numbers. Traditionally, each 800 number was assigned to its
own line group, often resulting in a large number of under-used lines. The DK424’s DNIS
capability solves this problem by using each DNIS line on an as-needed basis for different 800
number calls.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK424 with ACD except
those with RCTUA processors
Table 20 Strata DK424 Maximums
RCTUBA/BB RCTUC/3 RCTUE/F
DNIS Numbers 350 500 500
Telephone Network Numbers 200 300 300
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD System Features
278 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Inbound Call Routing
Calls can be routed into the ACD queues from incoming CO lines, DID, or Tie lines. They can be
transferred into the ACD queue from the Auto Attendant, answer position, or any station in the
system, as well as through the DNIS routing table. See the Strata DK424 ACD/MIS General
Description for more details.
Benefits
Routes calls to the appropriate ACD group from anywhere within the system.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK424 with ACD except
those with RCTUA processors
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 279
Overflow
ACD calls are sent to the ACD group queue when all Agents in the group are busy. Calls in queue
can be programmed to overflow to specified destinations or remain in queue and not overflow
independently for each ACD group.
ACD calls in queue can be programmed to overflow to:
♦A designated DN (PDN or PhDN) or group of stations
♦Another ACD group
♦An announcement
♦An Attendant Console
♦A signaling device such as chimes or a bell
♦The DK424 built-in or external automated Attendant (ground/loop start lines only, not Tie,
DID or DNIS lines)
♦Voice mail
♦Distributed Hunt group
An ACD group can have two overflow destinations programmed. The call overflows from the
queue to one destination when the caller has received a specified number of announcements, with
a maximum of three announcements. Calls are sent to the second destination when the caller has
been in queue for a specified time up to a one hour maximum.
Overflow timing for each destination can be set independently so that overflow will occur at the
first destination, if idle; but, if the first destination is busy, the call overflows to the second
destination immediately or after a predetermined time delay.
Notes
●Tie and DID lines cannot be routed (overflow or otherwise) to the DK424 built-in Auto
Attendant.
●Tie and DID lines can overflow to a single PDN, PhDN, or ACD group, but not to multiple
stations.
Overflow-Idle Only
If an overflow destination is idle when a call’s overflow time occurs, the call is immediately sent to
the overflow destination. The destination can be a station or another ACD group. If both of these
overflow destinations are busy, the call remains in the queue until either of these two overflow
destinations become idle or an Agent in the original ACD group becomes idle.
The system continuously monitors the Agents and the overflow destinations for an idle condition
and routes the call appropriately when one becomes idle.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK424 with ACD except
those with RCTUA processors
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD System Features
280 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
♦Overflow to Another ACD Group: An Overflow to Another ACD group sends the calls
waiting in queue to another ACD group. Each ACD group can have an overflow group to act
as a backup in the event that the original ACD group is unable to handle the call. Each ACD
group can be the overflow point for multiple ACD groups. Each ACD group queue is
associated with an overflow threshold which determines when the calls will overflow.
Overflow can be set to occur after a user-specified time in queue and/or a particular point in
queue. After the third “All Agents are Busy” announcement, for example.
If the overflow group’s Agents are all busy, the call will not overflow; it will remain in the
original group’s queue.
♦Look-ahead Operation: If the Overflow-idle Only option is set at overflow time, the system
“looks ahead” to verify that the overflow destination is not busy. If it is busy, the call remains
in queue and does not overflow. The system looks ahead, continuously checking the overflow
destination, and sends the call to the overflow destination when it becomes idle.
♦Look-back Operation: If the Overflow-idle Only option is set and the overflow destination is
busy at overflow time, the system looks back continuously to check for an idle Agent in the
ACD group while it simultaneously checks for an idle overflow destination. If either an
overflow destination or an ACD Agent becomes idle, the system sends the call to that
destination.
Overflow-Busy or Idle
The ACD call exits the queue and rings the overflow destination when it is idle or busy. The
destination can be a station, a group of stations, an Attendant Console or the DK424 built-in Auto
Attendant. If the overflow station is busy, it receives muted CO line ringing. If the DK424 Auto
Attendant is busy, the overflowing call camps onto the Auto Attendant until it becomes idle at
which time the Auto Attendant answers the call. Overflow to a busy destination is available on
ground and loop start lines only – not on DID or Tie lines.
Benefits
Overflow provides callers better service when agents in the group are too busy to handle holding
calls within a reasonable time frame. The various look-ahead and look-back options make sure that
calls overflowing to another destination will be helped as soon as possible.
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 281
PBX Calls
A PBX call is any incoming call (direct, transferred, forwarded, etc.) to the Agent’s ACD Call DN
button (not to the ACD group number). A PBX call is also any outgoing call placed from the
Agent’s ACD Call button. When on a PBX call, an Agent cannot receive ACD calls. When on an
ACD call, an Agent cannot receive PBX calls.
Benefits
Enables making and receiving non-ACD calls in addition to ACD calls. PBX calls are reported on
MIS reports in addition to ACD calls.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK424 with ACD except
those with RCTUA processors
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD System Features
282 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Queuing
Each ACD group has its own queue. If Agents are busy as calls arrive at an ACD group, the calls
are placed in queue. As the Agents become available, calls are distributed from the queue on a
first-in, first-out basis. While in the queue, callers may listen to music, announcements, or be
directed to an overflow destination.
Some of the key features of queuing are:
♦The announcements and music source for each group can be separate or groups can share
announcements and music sources.
♦Queue timing parameters and announcement sequences can be set independently for each
ACD group.
♦Up to three different announcements can be sent to callers in an ACD queue. One, two, or
three announcements can be repeated at intervals or the announcements can be sent only once.
ACD announcements are sent to callers via dealer-supplied digital announcement devices,
which must be connected to standard telephone circuit ports.
♦Each group can have a separate music source or no music at all. The music source can be the
system’s Music-On-Hold source or a music source connected to a designated electronic or
standard telephone port.
♦The maximum time a call can be in an ACD queue can be set at one-second intervals for up to
one hour for each ACD group. The time can also be disabled, allowing a call to remain in
queue indefinitely. After the queue timer expires, the call will overflow to the queue’s
overflow destination if it is idle, or, depending upon the destination and programming, if it is
idle or busy (refer to “Overflow” at the beginning of this section).
♦The auto-disconnect time automatically disconnects a call in an ACD queue. This time is set or
disabled separately for each ACD group and is normally only used on loop-start type central
office lines which may not provide reliable disconnection if a caller hangs up while in an ACD
queue.
Benefits
Provides flexibility so each ACD group can treat calls holding in queue according to the
requirements of that group.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK424 with ACD except
those with RCTUA processors
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD System Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 283
Queue Alarm Timer
The Queue Alarm Timer may be programmed to sound immediately at the Supervisor’s station
when the number of calls in queue exceed a specified quantity or for a specified period of time (up
to 255 seconds). A second alarm may be programmed to sound at any interval up to 600 seconds
from the first call alarm.
The alarm alerts the Supervisor immediately when the queue size exceeds a predetermined
threshold (1~144 calls), or permits up to two alarms to sound after a programmable wait time has
passed. The queue thresholds are:
♦First queue, program from 0~255 seconds
♦Second queue, program from 0~600 seconds
Alarms can be used in a maximum of 16 ACD groups (8 on RCTUBA/BB).
Benefits
Alerts the Supervisor when corrective action is required. This provides better service to callers.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK424 with ACD except
those with RCTUA processors
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Agent Features
284 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
ACD Agent Features
An Agent in an ACD group may use either a Toshiba-proprietary telephone or standard type
telephone. Toshiba-proprietary telephones have feature buttons and may have a LCD. The feature
buttons can be used to access Agent features. The LCD provides information about each ACD call
and the ACD group.
The following are the features available to an ACD Agent.
♦“ACD, PBX, and Non-ACD Calls”
♦“ACD Call Pickup”
♦“ACD Display Information”
♦“ACD Help”
♦“After Call Work Time”
♦“Auto Answer with Zip Tone”
♦“Log In/Log Out”
♦“Unavailable Mode”
♦“Work Unit”
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Agent Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 285
ACD, PBX, and Non-ACD Calls
Agent digital/electronic telephones require a unique, single appearing PhDN programmed on an
ACD Call button. Any single appearing PhDN can be used to log in to any ACD group to receive
ACD calls and to originate or receive PBX calls. Agents can also receive or make non-ACD calls
from other DNs or CO Line buttons. ACD Agents can answer and make these various types of
calls as defined below.
♦ACD Call – An incoming external line call that is routed or transferred to an ACD group and
then rings on the ACD Call button.
♦PBX Call – An external or internal call that is routed or transferred directly to the ACD Call
button and not routed through the ACD group. A PBX call is also a call originated from the
ACD Call button on an Agent telephone. When on a PBX call, an Agent cannot receive ACD
calls. When on an ACD call, an Agent cannot receive PBX calls.
♦Non-ACD Call – Any call received by or originated from a DN or CO Line button that appears
on an Agent telephone, other than the ACD Call button. When on a non-ACD call, an Agent
can receive ACD calls, because the ACD calls will ring on the ACD Call button if idle.
Benefits
ACD agents can make and receive regular calls in addition to receiving ACD calls. PBX calls will
be reported on MIS reports in addition to ACD calls.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK424 with ACD except
those with RCTUA processors
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Agent Features
286 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
ACD Call Pickup
ACD Call Pickup enables ACD Agents or Supervisors to answer ACD calls ringing to Agents
within their group by pressing the ACD Pickup button. Only calls to Agents logged into the same
ACD group can be picked up.
Benefits
Agents can answer calls for each other when needed.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK424 with ACD except
those with RCTUA processors
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Agent Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 287
ACD Display Information
This feature provides ACD Agents (using an LCD electronic/digital telephone) with a visual
indication of ACD call progress information, in addition to the standard display operation. When
an Agent position is in ACD mode, the number of ACD calls waiting in queue can be shown on the
LCD. Caller ID, ANI, and DNIS can also be displayed for incoming calls.
Benefits
Agents have display information available to provide better service to callers.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK424 with ACD except
those with RCTUA processors
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Agent Features
288 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
ACD Help
This feature enables an ACD Agent to call the Supervisor position for assistance. Pressing the
ACD Help button, while in the talk state, automatically places the current ACD call on hold and
initiates an assistance call to the Supervisor position. As soon as the Supervisor answers the call,
the Agent may establish a three-way conversation or may talk privately with the Supervisor, and
then return to the caller, or transfer the call to the Supervisor.
Benefits
ACD agents can quickly and easily get supervisor assistance when they need it.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK424 with ACD except
those with RCTUA processors
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Agent Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 289
After Call Work Time
Also known as Wrap-up Time, After Call Work Time gives the Agent a predetermined amount of
time to complete work (paperwork, order processing, filing) regarding the last ACD call. After
disconnecting from an ACD call, the Agent automatically enters After Call Work Time mode until
the predetermined “After-Call Work Time” period expires, or until the Agent manually exits this
mode by pressing the End After Call Work button.
When in “After-Call Work Time,” an Agent does not receive more ACD calls from the system.
The Agent can receive or place a non-ACD or PBX call during After Call Work Time, but the call
automatically cancels After Call Work Time Status.
Benefits
Agents have time to complete required actions before taking the next call.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK424 with ACD except
those with RCTUA processors
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Agent Features
290 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Auto Answer with Zip Tone
Auto answer will automatically connect an available Agent to an incoming ACD call without
requiring the Agent to lift the handset or push a button. When an ACD Agent position is in auto-
answer mode (electronic/digital telephone feature), the system will provide an audible burst of
tone (zip tone) to the Agent position before connecting the Agent to the incoming ACD call. The
zip tone will sound to the headset, if used, or to the telephone speaker.
Benefits
This feature enables ACD agents to answer calls faster.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK424 with ACD except
those with RCTUA processors
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Agent Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 291
Log In/Log Out
Enables the Agent or Supervisor to log IN or OFF the ACD system by dialing an Agent or
Supervisor identification (ID) code from any station. When an Agent logs into the system, the
station is activated as an ACD Agent position and is available for incoming ACD calls. Operating
statistics are collected for the Agent and output to an optional MIS processor until the Agent logs
out (when the station leaves ACD mode).
If an Agent attempts to log OUT and if the Agent is the last one logged into an ACD group, the
flashing Log IN/OUT LED notifies the Agent that additional calls are waiting. In this case, the
Agent will not be able to log OUT until the calls are answered and the ACD group queue is empty.
Agent digital and electronic telephones must have a unique, single-appearing PhDN that is
designated as the ACD Call button. Standard telephones receive ACD calls on their PhDN after
logging into an ACD group.
Benefits
Any ACD agent can log into any group from any telephone on the system. This provides flexibility
and convenience.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK424 with ACD except
those with RCTUA processors
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Agent Features
292 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Unavailable Mode
This feature enables an Agent to become temporarily unavailable to ACD calls without having to
log out. The Unavailable mode can be used for lunch and coffee breaks, extended work times, etc.
When Agent telephones are placed in the Unavailable mode by using a flexible feature button,
dialing code, or when two successive ACD calls are sent to the Agent and are not answered
(automatic).
All Agents Unavailable
If all Agents in a group are made unavailable at the same time, new calls to the group are directed
to the normal overflow point destination or the end-of-ACD shift destination of the ACD group.
This destination option is a system option, and it applies to all ACD groups. It can also be assigned
independently.
If the end-of-ACD shift or “all Agents unavailable” overflow destination is a busy station or
announcement device, the call camps onto the busy destination or routes to other designated
telephone or announcement.
If the all-Agents-unavailable overflow destination is another ACD group, the call rings an Agent
in that group. If all the Agents are busy in the overflow group, the call enters the overflow group’s
queue. If the overflow group’s Agents are unavailable or the group is in the After Shift mode, the
call follows the normal routing scheme programmed for the overflow ACD group.
ACD Calls Ring No Answer (RNA)
If a call is RNA to one Agent in the group, the call rings an idle Agent in the same group. The Ring
Agent Timer program sets the time limit for answering a call. The time period can also be assigned
independently for each ACD group.
If there isn’t another idle Agent telephone, the call is directed to the group’s normal overflow point
destination. If the normal overflow point destination is busy when an RNA call is routed to it, the
call is re-routed to ring or camp-on to other designated telephones or is sent to an announcement.
All of these options are set in system programming.
Benefits
Agents can become temporarily unavailable for ACD calls without having to log out of the group,
providing flexibility and convenience.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK424 with ACD except
those with RCTUA processors
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Agent Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 293
Work Unit
The Work Unit button enables an Agent to use the dial pad to tag a current call for tracking
purposes. Work Unit Identifiers may be used to track various data (response to sales campaigns,
calls from a particular area, etc.). A Work Unit code can be 1~15 digits. SMDR registers 1~15
digits, but SMIS only registers 1 or 2 digits.
The information is output to the system SMDR for printout and to MIS for reports. The Work Unit
feature only applies to ACD calls, not to PBX or non-ACD calls.
Note SMDR only registers the last Work Unit code entered for each call; SMIS registers
multiple work unit codes for a given call (e.g., 01 for Cookware, 02 for Furniture, etc.).
Benefits
Work unit codes help keep track of the type of calls received.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK424 with ACD except
those with RCTUA processors
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Supervisor Features
294 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
ACD Supervisor Features
The ACD group Supervisor can access all the standard Strata ACD features using the ACD
Supervisor’s ID code. When the Supervisor is not logged into the ACD system, full access to all of
the standard DK telephone features is available.
It is recommended that the Supervisor use a Toshiba-proprietary telephone to monitor the
operation of an ACD group with 10- or 20-feature buttons. It is also recommended that the
Supervisor use an LCD telephone, because it provides important information about the ACD
system and group, such as Queue and Agent Status.
Unlike Agent telephones, Supervisor telephones do not require a single appearing PhDN to
operate ACD Supervisor features. However, it is recommended that a Supervisor telephone be
equipped with at least two PDNs to answer Agent assistance request calls if the Supervisor is busy
on another call.
Each Supervisor can supervise only one group at a time.
The following ACD features are available only to the Supervisor position.
♦“ACD Agent Assistance”
♦“ACD Call Pickup”
♦“ACD Supervisor LCD Display”
♦“ACD Supervisor Log In/Log Out”
♦“Call Monitoring”
♦“End of ACD Shift”
♦“MIS Access”
♦“Queue Alarm Indication”
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Supervisor Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 295
ACD Agent Assistance
ACD Agent Assistance provides visual indication to the Supervisor position when an Agent
assistance call takes place. When an Agent calls an idle Supervisor station by pressing the ACD
Help button, the Supervisor station starts ringing and a message indicating the assistance call and
the Agent ID is shown on the LCD. The Supervisor can connect directly to the Agent by pressing
the flashing PhDN button.
The Agent can then speak privately with the Supervisor, or can initiate a three-way conference
with the Supervisor and the ACD caller, or transfer the call to the Supervisor. When the Supervisor
hangs up, during a conference call, the Agent remains connected to the ACD call. If the Agent
hangs up, during a conference call, the Supervisor remains connected to the call.
Benefits
Provides quick and easy access to the supervisor.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK424 with ACD except
those with RCTUA processors
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Supervisor Features
296 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
ACD Call Pickup
ACD Call Pickup enables a Supervisor to pick up an Agent’s ACD call within an ACD group. The
call is considered a non-ACD call by the MIS system.
Benefits
Enables answering calls by the Supervisor when agents are unable to answer.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK424 with ACD except
those with RCTUA processors
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Supervisor Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 297
ACD Supervisor LCD Display
The ACD Supervisor’s LCD telephone can display the number of calls holding in the queue of a
particular ACD group. By pressing the Queue Status button, the LCD displays the number of calls
in queue. The Supervisor can also scroll through individual calls holding in queue, displaying the
line number and how long the call has been in queue. Any ACD Supervisor can display queue
information about the ACD group logged into or other ACD groups in the system. The queue
status display is updated every five seconds.
The ACD Supervisor’s LCD telephone can display the status of Agents within a particular ACD
group. By pressing the Agent Status button, the LCD shows how many ACD Agents are logged
into the group. The Supervisor can also scroll through individual Agents logged in, displaying the
Agent ID number, telephone station number, and Agent status (available, unavailable, ACD call,
PBX call, or After Call Work Time). The Agent status display is updated every five seconds.
Benefits
Provides valuable status information to the Supervisor on their LCD with or without an MIS
processor.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK424 with ACD except
those with RCTUA processors
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Supervisor Features
298 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
ACD Supervisor Log In/Log Out
The ACD group Supervisor logs into the group by pressing the Log IN/OUT button, followed by
the Supervisor ID code. This station now has access to Supervisor features, but the station will not
receive ACD calls.
Benefits
Makes convenient and easy monitoring of group activities by the Supervisor.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK424 with ACD except
those with RCTUA processors
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Supervisor Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 299
Call Monitoring
Call Monitoring enables a Supervisor to monitor a conversation between an ACD Agent and ACD
caller. A one-way, listen-only path is established for the Supervisor while the Agent and the caller
continue their conversation.
As a system-wide programming option, a periodic tone can be inserted into a conversation to
indicate that the Supervisor is monitoring. The message is also displayed on the Agent telephone’s
LCD. Or, on a system-wide basis, the monitoring can be done without the tone being inserted into
the conversation.
Once in the monitor state, the Supervisor continues to monitor each ACD call to the Agent and
does not have to re-initiate the monitor function with each ACD call. Only ACD calls can be
monitored, not PBX calls or non-ACD calls.
Benefits
Provides additional call monitoring flexibility and is a valuable training tool.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK424 with ACD except
those with RCTUA processors
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Supervisor Features
300 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
End of ACD Shift
The group Supervisor can use the End of ACD Shift button to activate the After Shift service of an
ACD group shift.
If there are Agents logged in, the End of ACD Shift LED will flash until the last Agent logs off
after all calls in queue have been answered. Then the LED will be steady on. All incoming calls to
the ACD group after End of ACD Shift is engaged are directed to a preassigned After Shift
destination.
Benefits
Enables routing of calls that occur after hours quickly and efficiently without affecting customer
service. The destination can be another ACD group, telephone, or announcement device.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK424 with ACD except
those with RCTUA processors
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Supervisor Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 301
Insight DK and Insight DK Plus
The Insight DK system is a call center management software product that can be configured for
businesses served by the Strata DK 424 Business Telephone System. The Insight DK and Insight
DK Plus systems are full-featured ACD MIS tools for call center supervisors, providing user-
defined supervisor displays, user-defined historical reports, scheduled reports, electronic wall
board connection, and inView™ LAN-based status display messaging.
Insight DK and Insight DK Plus are a Microsoft® Windows®-based software programs capable of
using on PCs running Windows 95, Windows 98 or Windows NT®.
♦Insight DK is designed for simple supervisor applications. Insight DK offers 3 types of real
time windows, 4 real time window templates, 12 varieties of reports which cover up to a year’s
worth of data; and it supports wallboards.
♦Insight DK Plus supports up to 80 Supervisor Terminals. It provides more extensive display
and reporting capabilities, including graphical information, forecasting, and data exporting. It
also supports electronic wallboards.
Insight DK Plus provides 5 types of real time windows, and unlimited number of real time
templates, 28 kinds of reports which cover up to a year’s worth of data which can be exported
to other report generator or spreadsheet programs.
Configurations
The configurations start with a single supervisory position. System option modules can be added,
including:
♦External, wall mounted electronic reader boards for displaying information to a group.
♦inView LAN-based PC displays that provide information to Agents or Supervisory personnel.
(See “inView Features” on Page 315 for graphics of the displays).
♦Fully capable sub-supervisors, that allow individual sub-supervisors to control the reports and
displays needed for their group(s). Each sub-supervisor PC needs to be on with the Insight DK
Plus application fully functioning while the monitored ACD groups are active to continually
collect the real time data needed to display complete information for each shift. This is not
required for reports generated by sub-supervisor PCs because reports are generated from
information from the master PC.
The configurations can include database backup capabilities, including collecting data and acting
as an additional resource for generating reports. For instance, critical databases can be stored on a
reliable server, such as the server used for backing up the organization’s information. Also,
redundant MIS servers, connected to the Strata DK with a “Y” connector box, can collect event
data, thus performing additional backup.
System Availability
Optional on Strata DK424
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Supervisor Features
302 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Single Supervisor Configurations
A single supervisor configuration can be implemented using either Insight DK or Insight DK Plus.
The software is installed as a networked Server installation, but no physical network connection is
required. All data is collected and reported from this single position. As with all Insight DK
configurations, external electronic reader boards, such as a Spectrum Wallboard, can be added
using an additional COM Port. For an example of a single supervisor configuration, see Figure 15.
Figure 16 Single Supervisor Configuration
Single Supervisor with inView LAN Displays
The single supervisor configuration can be upgraded to provide a Client/Server operation using the
inView LAN Display clients. These displays can operate on a number of desktops connected via
the in-house LAN. The Insight MIS Server requires a Network Interface Card (NIC) and must be
connected to the LAN. The upgrade key for activating inView clients is sold in multiple concurrent
users licenses to provide the desired number of users.
The Insight MIS Server controls a list of possible users which can be larger than the number of
concurrent licenses. These clients can be started at any time and will reflect the current status and
statistics maintained by the MIS Server. See Figure 15 for an example of a single supervisor with
inView displays.
Figure 17 Single Supervisor with inView Displays
MIS Server COM Port Connection
CALLS WAITING: 18 LCW: 15:10
Strata DK
3908
MIS Server
inView Client inView Client
MIS Events LAN Connection
Strata DK
3909
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Supervisor Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 303
Multiple Supervisors Configurations
Multiple supervisor configurations are supported using the Insight DK Plus version only. This
configuration starts with one PC as the MIS server (the one connected to the Strata DK). All
additional PC’s loaded with the Insight DK Supervisor software are known as Sub-supervisors and
receive the MIS Events using the LAN and messages relayed by the MIS Server. Each supervisor
position provides complete control of its own data, how it is presented and how that location needs
to operate with a particular group of Call Center Agents.
The sub-supervisors would typically rely upon the MIS Server for keeping an accurate database of
events and use that database for all reports prepared by the sub-supervisor. Each Supervisor can
collect and report on data stored at each location. In this configuration, the Sub-supervisor will be
responsible for data relating to its real time display screens. See Figure 15 for an example of a
multiple supervisor configuration.
Figure 18 Multiple Supervisor Configuration
Multiple Supervisors with inView LAN Displays
The combinations of the previous configurations can be extended to include both MIS Supervisor
Clients and inView Display Clients at the same time. This combination can provide the best of
both applications where Call Center Supervisors need to control the reports and agents in that
particular group while still providing key information to agents or other management personnel
using inView Client. An example of multiple supervisors with inView LAN displays is shown in
Figure 15.
CALLS WAITING: 18 LCW: 15:10
MIS Server MIS Client MIS Client
MIS Events
LAN Connection
Strata DK
3910
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Supervisor Features
304 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Figure 19 Multiple Supervisors with inView Displays
Database Backup Scenario #1
One of the common techniques for ensuring the reliability of the database in PC based systems is
to provide redundancy of the hard drive memory within the Server. This can be accomplished by
adding additional hardware within the MIS server and using either redundancy (mirroring) or
striping of the hard drives for this redundancy.
In many cases, it may be too expensive to provide the redundancy within the MIS Server. To
accommodate this using other components that may be already available within the customer site,
the data files can be located on an existing Server which already is built with these capabilities.
The MIS Server is responsible for the database and files, but routines and operations concerning
backup and redundancy can administered by the administrator of the Network Server. An example
of Database Scenario #1 is shown in Figure 15.
Figure 20 Database Backup Scenario #1
MIS Client
inView Client inView Client
MIS Events
LAN Connection
MIS Server MIS Client
Strata DK
3913
3918
MIS Server Network
Server
Holds data files
for MIS Server
MIS Events LAN Connection
Strata DK
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Supervisor Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 305
Database Backup Scenario #2
A second method of providing security to the databases could be providing redundant MIS
Servers, each collecting information from the Strata DK. This operation is more costly in that two
MIS Server Licenses will need to be purchased. It does carry the added capability that two
different devices are collecting the Call Events and keeping a database of activities. The switching
from the Primary to the Backup Server is not automatic, but requires manual changes from each
client making the connection to the server. Database Backup Scenario #2 is depicted in Figure 15.
Figure 21 Database Backup Scenario #2
Fully Configured Insight DK Plus System
A fully configured Insight DK Plus system can contain up to 80 supervisors, and many inView
Clients. Each supervisor can have external wallboards to display messages and information for
that group of agents. The MIS Server could be implemented with dual MIS Servers for data
redundancy or it could be connected to an in-house server which provides the database redundancy
and backup routines as part of the normal operation of the in-house computer system. The choices
are up to the needs of the customer. See Figure 15 for an example of a fully configured system.
MIS Client
inView Client inView Client
LAN Connection
MIS Server
MIS Events
"Y" Connector
MIS Events
MIS Server
MIS Client
3915
Strata DK
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Supervisor Features
306 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Figure 22 A Fully Configured System
Strata DK System Compatibility
The Insight DK product family is compatible with the Strata DK280 and DK424 Business
Telephone Systems. The ACD functionality was introduced with Release 2 and has continued to
be enhanced through the latest release. Due to differences in operation with the different releases,
not all parameters will be reported in some Strata DK systems. A summary of differences follows:
♦Release 2 uses CO Line positions for ACD calls and thus does not have the concept of PBX
calls nor outgoing calls from an agent. DID numbers could not be used as part of ACD calls,
thus DID reports will not report any data.
♦Release 3 uses Phantom DNs for ACD calls and the introduction of PBX calls. Dialed
Number Identification Services (DNIS) can be used to route calls to ACD groups, but
reporting of this number over the MIS Link was inconsistent and the DID reports cannot be
relied upon for accurate information unless the system uses Release 3.2 or higher.
♦Release 4 adds messages for indicating when an agent phone is ringing. Reports of calls
overflowing from an agent who does not respond to the ringing line and the call moves to
another agent within the same group can be counted.
Toshiba recommends using Release 3.2 or higher with Insight DK to get the full value of the
reported events.
Single Supervisor Configuration – Server
Hardware
♦Pentium® PC - minimum 133 MHz
♦16 MB minimum memory for Windows 95/98 or 32 MB for Windows NT 4.0
♦1 printer port for license verification and optional printer connection
♦1 COM port for Strata DK MIS Event data stream
MIS Client
inView Client inView Client
MIS Events
LAN Connection
MIS Server MIS Client
3916
Strata DK
CALLS WAITING: 18 LCW: 15:10
Network Server
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Supervisor Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 307
♦1 internal or external modem with minimum 14,400 bps speed
♦Optional Network Interface Card (NIC) running TCP/IP and NetBEUI
Software
♦Dedicated PC: Windows 95 (A, B or C version only) or Windows 98
♦Shared PC: Windows NT 4.0 SP3
♦Running additional programs can done with Windows NT Workstation if the customer is
willing to risk data disruption if the PC must be restarted. Never run additional programs when
using Windows 95/98.
♦Symantec’s pcAnywhere® is required for Technical Assistance from Toshiba
Multiple Supervisor Configuration – Server
Hardware
♦Pentium PC - minimum 133 MHz
♦32 MB minimum memory
♦1 printer port for License Verification and optional printer connection
♦1 COM port for Strata DK MIS Event data stream
♦1 internal or external modem with minimum 14,400 bps speed
♦Network Interface Card (NIC) running TCP/IP and NetBEUI
Software
♦Windows NT 4.0 Workstation SP3 (up to 10 connections) or Windows NT Server 4.0 SP3
(greater than 10 connections)
♦Do not run additional programs except as diagnostic tools on the MIS Server
♦pcAnywhere is required for Technical Assistance from Toshiba
Insight DK MIS Client (Sub-supervisor)
Hardware
♦Pentium PC - minimum 133 MHz
♦16 MB minimum memory for Windows 95/98 or 32 MB for Windows NT 4.0
♦Network Interface Card running TCP/IP and NetBEUI
Software
♦Dedicated PC: Windows 95 (A, B or C version only), Windows 98
♦Shared PC: Windows NT 4.0 SP3
♦Running additional programs can done with Windows NT Workstation if the customer is
willing to risk data disruption if the PC must be restarted. Never run additional programs when
using Windows 95/98.
Automatic Call Distribution
General Features
308 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
♦Each sub-supervisor PC needs to be on with the Insight DK Plus application fully functioning
while the monitored ACD groups are active to continually collect the real time data needed to
display complete information for each shift. This is not required for reports generated by sub-
supervisor PCs because reports are generated from information from the master PC.
inView Client
Hardware
♦Pentium® PC - minimum 133 MHz
♦16 MB minimum memory (Windows 95/98) and 32 MB (Windows NT 4.0)
♦Network Interface Card running TCP/IP and NetBEUI
Software
♦Dedicated PC: Windows 95 (A, B or C version only) or Windows 98
♦Shared PC: Windows NT 4.0 SP3
System Functionality
The ACD MIS software is designed with a high degree of flexibility to suit the needs of a wide
range of call centers. The sophistication of the product can be hidden until the call center manager
is ready to take advantage of the enhanced capabilities of the MIS. To give even more flexibility,
there are two variants of the ACD MIS software, with a simple upgrade path between them:
♦The entry-level product is called “Insight DK.”
♦The enhanced product is known as “Insight DK Plus.”
General Features
The following lists features which are provided by Insight and Insight DK Plus.
License Options
There are a number of options available with both products with respect to sizing, wallboards and
sub-supervisor positions. These options are controlled by the software protection (license key)
system and the user license.
Sizing
Both products may operate up to 256 agents, with 256 extensions and 200 lines. Up to 500 groups
and 100 supergroups are supported. Both products allow up to 100 account codes.
Electronic Wallboards
Wallboards are supported by Insight DK and Insight DK Plus. Up to six wallboards may be
connected to each supervisor position. Wallboard drivers supplied are compatible with the
Shorekarn Messagemaker and a range of Spectrum Inc. wallboards, including:
♦Shorekarn Messagemaker 2 x 16
♦Spectrum 215C 1 x 15
Automatic Call Distribution
General Features
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 309
♦Spectrum 320C 1 x 20
♦Spectrum 4120C 2 x 20
Sub-Supervisors
Subsequent supervisor positions are available with Insight DK Plus. The number of subsequent
supervisor positions available is limited to 80 positions total.
Remote Access
Remote access is supported by Insight DK. To use this feature an additional remote access
package, pcAnywhere, is required by the user and the Toshiba support service center.
Password Protection
Password protection of the configuration is standard.
Help File
There is a comprehensive context-sensitive help file with both products, which provides users with
immediate on-line assistance on operation and programming.
Alarms
Alarms are available to enable the supervisor continue with their daily activities knowing they can
rely on the MIS to tell them when there is a problem. Audible and visual alarms may be
programmed at the individual device or group level.
Flexible Reporting
Reports can be compiled using statistics relating to any shift pattern, as defined by the call center
manager. When compiling a report, the user defines the time period over which the report is
compiled. This period can be defined to the nearest minute and is not limited to any time
boundaries. For example, a report can be set to cover only information relating to the call center’s
night shift from the period of 11:04 p.m. on May 21, 1998 to 3:43 a.m. on June 3, 1998.
The resolution of event reports is to the second. For profile reports the user may set the resolution
to any integral value of minutes, hours, days or weeks.
Automatic Reporting
The Automatic Reporting feature in Insight enables reports to be generated at user defined times.
Different report templates can be set up to be generated at different time intervals and there is a
choice of outputs, i.e., the reports could be sent to a printer, saved to disk, or exported.
Automatic Call Distribution
Insight DK Features
310 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Reporting Output Options
♦Print – After a report is generated, it is automatically printed from the Insight DK default
printer.
♦Close on Completion – After a report is generated or any other output options selected have
been completed, the report ise removed from the Insight Reporter screen.
♦Save to file – (Insight DK Plus only) The generated report is saved to the file name specified.
Every time this report is generated the name is overwritten.
♦Export to file – (Insight DK Plus only) Similar to “Save to file,” this option creates a text file
that can be opened in another application, such as a spreadsheet package.
♦Basic Scheduling – Basic allows you to select hourly, daily or weekly and allows you to
choose the time that the selected reports get generated.
♦Advanced Scheduling – Advanced options include more control over the frequency, starting
date, starting time and control over the period of the report.
Retrospective Analysis
Reports can be compiled even after software upgrades (including upgrades from Insight DK to
Insight DK Plus) using data collected from the original installation date of the MIS. If a new report
type is added to Insight DK, it can be used to analyze all previously collected MIS data.
Insight DK Features
The entry level ACD MIS is known as Insight DK. In addition to the previously described general
features Insight DK also has the following features:
♦Three different types of real time windows are available
♦Four real time templates can be created using any number of windows
♦There are 12 types of reports available on the Insight DK
♦Reports cover a maximum period of 1 year
♦Wallboards are supported
♦inView LAN-based displays are supported
Real Time Displays
The following real time windows are available:
♦Forty different parameters can be shown using the Large Character windows
♦Three different types of status displays:
♦Agent
♦Line
♦Extension
♦Four different types of statistical displays:
♦Agent
♦DID
Automatic Call Distribution
Insight DK Plus
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 311
♦Extension
♦Line Group
These displays may be configured to report on individual devices, device groups or on a
supergroup (groups of groups). The only limit to the number that can be displayed at any one
time is the size of the screen and the size of each window. Four real time templates may be
created and saved at any time. See Figure 15 for an example of Real Time Displays.
Figure 23 Sample Real Time Screen Using Insight DK Displays
Insight DK Plus
The enhanced ACD MIS product is the Insight DK Plus. As well as the general features described
previously, Insight DK Plus provides the following:
♦Five different types of real time windows
♦Any number of real time templates
♦28 types of reports
♦Up to one year’s worth of data reports
♦Ability to export reports in comma delimited format to spreadsheet packages like Excel or
Lotus® 1-2-3®, where information can be displayed in graphical format.
♦The Insight DK Plus database can be exported (in call record format) to Microsoft’s Open
Database Connectivity (ODBC) compliant database for further analysis.
♦Supports wallboards
♦Supports sub-supervisors
♦Supports inView LAN-based displays
4052
Automatic Call Distribution
Insight DK Plus
312 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Insight DK Plus Real Time Displays
The following real time windows are available:
♦Over 200 different parameters can be shown using the Large Character windows.
♦Three different types of status displays:
♦Agent
♦Line
♦Extension
♦Four different types of statistics displays:
♦Agent
♦DID
♦Extension
♦Line Group
There are also two different types of graphical displays:
♦Wait Time
♦Calls in Queue
These displays may be configured to report on individual devices, device groups or on a
supergroup (groups of groups). The only limit to the number that can be shown at one time is the
size of the screen and the size of each window. Four real time templates may be created and saved
at any time. Figure 15 shows sample Real Time Displays with graphs.
Figure 24 Sample Real Time Display including Graphs
In addition to being viewed on the screen and being printed, reports may be saved. Reports may be
exported as text files and database call records may be exported to Microsoft Open Database
Connectivity (ODBC) compliant databases with 16-bit drivers.
4051
Automatic Call Distribution
Insight DK Plus
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 313
Reports
Reports can be viewed on screen and printed, but may not be saved. The maximum period of an
individual report is one year. To view data over a period of two years, it is necessary to compile
two consecutive reports (each of period one year). Reports may be compiled using data collected
right back from when the product was first installed. Figure 15 shows a sample Agent Report.
Figure 25 Sample Agent Report
Types of Reports
This section defines the types of reports available for the user. The terms used in the reports are
explained in the next section. Insight DK Plus offers all of the reports listed. Insight DK provides a
subset of these reports, shown in bold in Table 21.
Table 21 Insight DK and DK Plus Reports
Report Type Available for Shows Uses
Event Reports
♦Agents
♦Extensions
♦Line Groups
Each event shown per line with
important information.
Provides a step-by-step account of
what is occurring on a particular
device.
Traffic Reports
♦Agents
♦Extensions
♦Lines
Each device is shown per line with
call statistics presented in columnar
format.
Traffic Reports are designed to give
an overview of activity and
performance of all members of a
group.
24 Hour
START:
STOP:
Monday 11/26/98 14:30
11/30/98
Agent Calls
Total Answered Calls OutgoingRNA
Part 1 of 2
Page 1 of 3
on
11/09/98
Ave.
Time %
Use Calls Ave.
Call Ave.
Talk Ave.
Wrap Avg.
Wait Avg.
Talk
Avg.
Calls
Calls
All Reports on Insight DK+
Demonstration
Agent Traffic for All Agents
15:30Friday
Andrew Parker 1 01:26:25 00:001.2 10 00:00 00:00
Dave Stringer 95 14:57 16:8019.7 1184 13:49 02:29
Dale Whitaker 96 09:47 11:1813.0 1581 08:32 02:46
Beverly Cardner 101 12:12 12:2417.1 298 09:36 02:48
Phil Otell 0 00:00 00:000.0 00 00:00 00:00
Jane Yeasky 79 16:49 16:4518.5 970 14:31 02:14
Jenny Harrington 0 00:00 00:000.0 00 00:00 00:00
Alan Harrson 15:01 16:3313.6 758 14:27 02:06
Gareth Wear
65
13:23 14:2713.4 863 11:43 02:44
Tracy Oldman
72
18:02 19:5816.8 760 17:30 02:28
Alson Halton
67
16:28 16:2417.4 2551 02:16
00:00
00:00
00:00
06:57
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
06:39
00:00
00:00
67
14:08
01:26:25
04:38
01:37
04:55
00:00
17:20
00:00
02:13
05:50
01:25
16:35
01:26:25
04:38
01:37
04:55
00:00
17:20
00:00
02:13
05:50
01:25
16:35
76
Calls
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
Total 652 14:25 12:4011.9 565 06:48 85 09:3515:11 02:31 2 09:35
3465
Automatic Call Distribution
Insight DK Plus
314 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Group Traffic
Reports
♦Agent
Groups
♦DID Groups
♦Ext. Groups
♦Line Groups
Each line reports call statistics and
performance. Each group of the
super group are displayed in a side-
by-side columnar format.
Group Traffic Reports are designed
to give an overview and comparison
of activity and performance against
certain parameters.
Traffic Profile
Reports
♦Agents
♦Extensions
Each line reports a time period with
call statistics for a particular device
reported in a columnar format.
Shows activity of particular device
for selected performance
parameters.
Group Traffic
Profile Reports
♦Agent Groups
♦DID Groups
♦Ext. Groups
♦Line Groups
Each line reports call statistics for a
particular group reported over a
profile time period.
Shows peak and quiet times for a
particular group.
Utilization
Reports
♦Agents
♦Extensions
Each line reports a particular device
with statistics displayed as the
percentage of time involved in a
given activity in a columnar format.
Utilization Reports can be used to
see how the resources in a
particular group are being used.
Utilization
Profile Report
♦Agents
♦Extensions
Each line reports a time period with
statistics displayed as a percentage
of time in a given activity in a
columnar format.
Utilization Profile reports show the
peaks and valleys of a selected
device over the selected time
periods.
Contention
Reports
♦Agents
♦Extensions
♦Lines
Each line shows a number of idle
devices and each group in a
columnar format.
Contention Reports are used to
show the amount of time (%) a line
or agent is free over the reporting
period.
Contention
Profile Reports
♦Agents
♦Extensions
♦Lines
Each line shows a number of idle
devices and time profiles in a
columnar format.
Contention Profiles provide a view
when devices are busiest over the
period defined.
Wait Time
Distribution
Reports
♦DIDs
♦DID Groups
♦Lines
Each line reports a time period for
the groups shown in a columnar
format.
Wait Time Distribution Reports are
used to profile the times into a chart.
Wrap-up Time
Distribution
Reports
♦Agents
♦Agent Groups
Each line reports a time period for
the groups shown in a columnar
format.
Wait Time Distribution Reports are
used to profile the times into a chart.
Call Time
Distribution
Reports
♦Agents
♦DIDs
♦Extensions
♦Lines
♦Agent Groups
♦DID Groups
♦Ext. Groups
♦Line Groups
Each line reports a time period for
the groups shown in a columnar
format.
Wait Time Distribution Reports are
used to profile the times into a chart.
Account Code
Reports
♦Acct Code
Groups Each line reports the statistics for an
account code number.
Account Code Reports present
information relating to the purpose
of the call as defined by the user.
Table 21 Insight DK and DK Plus Reports
(continued)
Report Type Available for Shows Uses
Automatic Call Distribution
Insight DK Plus
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 315
Figure 26 Sample Agent Group Statistics Report
inView Features
Examples of the two different types of views are shown below:
♦Wallboard View which displays statistics in a large character format (see Figure 15).
Figure 27 inView LAN Wallboard
Forecast
Reports
♦Standard
♦Profile
Each report shows the original data
for the period and modified data. The report can be either a profile or
standard report.
Table 21 Insight DK and DK Plus Reports
(continued)
Report Type Available for Shows Uses
24 Hour
START:
STOP:
Wednesday 10/28/98 00:00
10/28/98
Page 4 of 15
on
11/02/98
Technical Support
TSD Irvine
Agent Group Traffic for Tech Support
23:59Wednesday
4058
Part 1 of 1
Agent Group IVR Q KS (Q) VM (Q)
Calls answered 79 75 57
Calls intercom 000
Calls outgoing 0117
Average answered call time 01:02 13:31 15:30
Average wrapup time 00:01 02:29 02:27
Average intercom call time 00:00 00:00 00:00
Average outgoing call time 00:00 10:09 08:07
Longest answered call time 01:49 49:22 01:05:01
Longest wrapup time 00:03 03:16 03:15
Longest intercom call time 00:00 00:00 00:00
Longest outgoing call time 00:00 56:05 21:27
Minimum agents logged on 000
Maximum agents logged on 244
Number of short calls 000
Number of long calls 000
G.O.S.(%) 100.0 100.0 100.0
3931
Automatic Call Distribution
Insight DK Plus
316 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
♦Status view shows the status of individual agents with either long or short names (see Figure
28). The status is presented using a colored background to represent each agent’s status.
Figure 28 Sample inView Agent Status Display (Long Names and Short Names)
3858
3854
Automatic Call Distribution
Insight DK Plus
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 317
MIS Access
If the Call Center Viewer or SMIS option is installed, the ACD group Supervisor can access the
MIS displays and reports using the MIS processor connected to the DK424 system. The
Supervisor can call up displays and reports on the groups or individual Agents to monitor ongoing
performance.
The Supervisor can also signal the system to print out reports using a printer connected to the MIS
processor. The MIS processor provides Supervisors with a wide variety of status, statistics, and
traffic displays used to monitor the performance of ACD groups and individual Agents.
Benefits
Provides important management tools to the ACD Group Supervisor. For more information, see
the Call Center Viewer and Software MIS (SMIS) later in this section.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK424 with ACD except
those with RCTUA processors
Automatic Call Distribution
Insight DK Plus
318 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Queue Alarm Indication
An alarm is generated at the Supervisor’s station when calls waiting in the queue exceed
predetermined conditions. These conditions or queue thresholds (e.g., number of calls waiting,
waiting time for the oldest call) are established in system programming independently for each
ACD group. The audible alarm will continue at the station until the Supervisor acknowledges the
alarm by pressing the Reset Queue Alarm button.
Benefits
Provides an alert to the ACD Group Supervisor when corrective action is required. This helps
provide better service to callers.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK424 with ACD except
those with RCTUA processors
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Feature Interaction
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 319
ACD Feature Interaction
Strata DK424 provides the ACD features from system-resident software. Some station feature
operations are altered when a station is activated as an ACD Agent or Supervisor station. Most all
normal features are available to Supervisor and Agent telephone PDNs and PhDNs, except for the
PhDN designated as the ACD Call button on an Agent telephone when it is logged into an ACD
group.
The following features are described completely in the following pages.
♦“Assistance From Busy Supervisor”
♦“Call Forwarding”
♦“Executive/Busy Override”
♦“Message and Display”
♦“Station Do Not Disturb (DND)”
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Feature Interaction
320 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Assistance From Busy Supervisor
If a Supervisor telephone is busy and has an idle PhDN button (up to four PhDN buttons are
available) and the Busy Station Transfer/Busy Station Ring feature option is enabled on the Agent/
Supervisor telephones, an Agent can still ring the Supervisor telephone for assistance.
Benefits
Provides the Agent a means to get the Supervisor’s attention for assistance, even when all the DNs
on the Supervisor’s telephone are in use.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK424 with ACD (some
station feature operations are altered when
activated as an Agent or Supervisor station)
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Feature Interaction
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 321
Call Forwarding
ACD Agent and Supervisor Primary and non-ACD PhDNs can set Call Forwarding. This applies
for all types of Call Forwarding enabled on PDNs and PhDNs. If an Agent telephone ACD Call
PhDN button is forwarded, ACD calls will not forward, but other types of calls (PBX and non-
ACD) will forward in the normal manner.
If a Supervisor telephone PhDN is Call Forwarded, Agent assistance calls will not forward but will
ring the Supervisor’s PhDN; other types of calls to the PhDN will forward normally.
Benefits
Provides flexibility of handling call forwarding differently for non-ACD calls, which should
forward, and ACD calls which should get overflow handling.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK424 with ACD (some
station feature operations are altered when
activated as an Agent or Supervisor station)
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Feature Interaction
322 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Executive/Busy Override
If an Agent is talking on an ACD or PBX call, override is not enabled. However, the Agent can be
called by dialing the Agent’s PDN or an idle PhDN.
Benefits
Provides override only the ACD Group Supervisor and keeps ACD Agents from being disturbed
except when the Supervisor deems it necessary.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK424 with ACD (some
station feature operations are altered when
activated as an Agent or Supervisor station)
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Feature Interaction
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 323
Message and Display
When an Agent or Supervisor ID is entered, the LCD shows ACD-related messages. While the
telephone is in the ACD state, Soft Key labels and standard LCD messages, unrelated to ACD, do
not display.
Caller ID, ANI, or DNIS information displays on an Agent telephone and overwrites Calls In
Queue information when an Agent receives a Caller ID, ANI, or DNIS call. The Agent can retrieve
the Calls In Queue display by pressing the LCD Page button.
Benefits
Provides the ACD-specific display information that ACD Agents and Supervisors require for
optimum efficiency.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK424 with ACD (some
station feature operations are altered when
activated as an Agent or Supervisor station)
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Feature Interaction
324 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Station Do Not Disturb (DND)
The Station DND feature is not applicable to ACD calls and only applies to non-ACD calls.
Benefits
Enables calls to ACD Agents to flow as normal and the DND feature to apply only to non-ACD
calls.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK424 with ACD (some
station feature operations are altered when
activated as an Agent or Supervisor station)
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Feature Interaction
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 325
ACD Call Center Viewer
The Toshiba Call Center Viewer application organizes and displays ACD events reported by the
Strata DK424 MIS port. The data displays on a host PC screen in easy-to-read, full-color
Microsoft® Windows® format. The Call Center Supervisor gets real-time information on call
queue status, Agent status, and other useful information for managing the ACD groups.
The Call Center Viewer application runs concurrently with other Windows applications on the
ACD Supervisor PC. This enables ACD Supervisors to manage their ACD groups while working
in other applications. Multiple Call Center Viewer applications can be used simultaneously on a
DK424 system to accommodate multiple ACD Supervisors.
The data can also display on optional Spectrum Electronic Wall Boards that can be purchased from
the Spectrum Corporation.
Call Center Viewer can be used on the same DK424 system in conjunction with the Toshiba
Software MIS (SMIS), when historical reporting is required. Call Center Viewer provides the
multiple displays and connection of electronic wall boards, while SMIS provides the historical
ACD reports.
Computer Requirements
The Call Center Viewer application does not require a dedicated PC. When The Call Center
Viewer application connects to the DK424, it functions as a machine-to-machine interface,
constantly updating call center data. Toshiba recommends installing the Call Center Viewer
application on a customer-supplied PC that meets the following recommended minimum
requirements.
♦IBM-compatible Pentium® 100 MHz PC
♦Windows 95
♦16MB RAM
♦10MB available hard drive space for the application
♦3.5 1.44 MB floppy-disk drive
♦1 available serial communication ports (2 if using wall boards)
♦Parallel printer port (for activation key)
♦VGA color monitor
♦Keyboard and mouse
♦Windows Graphics Accelerator
Increasing the processor speed and adding more RAM improves the host PC’s and the Call Center
Viewer’s performance.
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK424 with ACD
software and MIS port
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Feature Interaction
326 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Display Information
The Call Center Viewer displays the following information:
♦Number of Agents
♦Logged in
♦Busy
♦Available
♦Unavailable
♦Number of calls in the queue
♦Longest call waiting
♦Individual Agent status and status times (available on the host PC screen, but not on the wall
board)
♦Strata DK date/time
♦User-defined messages to the wall boards
Main View
The Main View (shown below) displays the names and status of all active ACD groups. Columns
can be sorted in ascending or descending order.
Figure 29 ACD Main View
Agent View
The Agent View (see Figure 30) displays the status of all Agents in a group. It also displays real-
time ACD Agent status information across the top of the Agent listings (see “Button View Format”
on Page 328 for a list of displayed information).
The window can be enlarged to fit more Agents. However, the number of Agents displayed on the
screen depends in part upon monitor size and resolution. Agent names can be customized to be
longer than the eight-character length provided by the Strata DK.
2098
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Feature Interaction
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 327
Figure 30 ACD Agent View
Alarms
Visual and audible alarms alert the call center Supervisor when certain thresholds are exceeded.
The Supervisor can then take appropriate action. Visual alarms flash the screen or title bar. Audible
alarms sound over the standard PC speaker or play a sound wave (.WAV) file through the PC’s
sound card and speakers. Alarm thresholds (see Figure 31) are user defined to enable flexible
control of service levels.
Visual and audible alarms for each ACD group
include:
♦Calls in queue (number of calls waiting)
♦Longest call waiting
♦Unavailable Agents
Title Bar
The title bar (see Figure 32) makes it easy to constantly monitor the ACD group’s status while
working in other applications. It fits conveniently into the unused area of most applications, at the
top or bottom of the screen. It displays real-time ACD status information that is visible to the
Supervisor at all times, and provides visual and audible alarms to alert the Supervisor when
thresholds are exceeded.
Figure 32 Title Bar Display
2359
Figure 31 ACD AlarmThresholds
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Feature Interaction
328 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
The title bar displays the following information:
♦Number of calls waiting (CW)
♦Longest call waiting (LCW)
♦Number of Agents logged-in (LOG)
♦Number of busy Agents (Busy)
♦Number of Agents available (Avail)
♦Number of Agents unavailable (Unavail)
♦Group name (“Tech Support”)
Button View Format
The title bar can also be displayed in a condensed Button View format (see Figure 33). Button
view displays as one of the open applications minimized on the Windows task bar line at the
bottom of the screen. Clicking the mouse on the button expands the Button View to the full line
display.
Figure 33 Button View
Configurations
The Call Center Viewer computer can connect directly to the DK424, to other Call Center Viewer
computers, or to a Software MIS (SMIS) computer.
Direct Connection to DK424
The Call Center Viewer application
host PC can connect directly to the
DK424 MIS port on an RSIU,
RSSU, PIOU, or PIOUS card (see
Figure 34). Host PC with Call
Center Viewer (CCV)
CALLS WAITING: 18 LCW: 15:10
Strata DK Wall Board
4076
Figure 34 Direct Connection to DK424
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Feature Interaction
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 329
Connection to Insight DK or SMIS
If a SMIS computer or MIS system is
connected to the DK424 MIS port,
the Call Center Viewer application
host PC connects to it through a “Y”
cable RS-232 splitter distribution box
(see Figure 35). (Toshiba
recommends model TL159A from
Black Box® Corporation for this
purpose.)
The Call Center Viewer monitors the
connection between the Toshiba
SMIS, MIS or another Call Center
Viewer application PC. This enables
the Call Center Viewer application
PC to work in conjunction with the SMIS computer which is already connected to and controlling
the DK424 MIS port.
The Call Center Viewer application and the SMIS application must reside on separate computers
since SMIS requires a dedicated PC. The Call Center Viewer provides real-time status displays
and connection of electronic Wall Boards, while SMIS provides historical ACD reports.
Multiple Supervisor Call Center Viewer Applications
By using RS-232 splitters in a “Y” cable distribution box connection (Toshiba recommends model
TL159A from Black Box Corporation for this purpose), several PCs running the Call Center
Viewer application can connect, in the monitor mode, to the DK424 MIS port (see Figure 36). This
flexibility provides a variety of multiple Supervisor and electronic wall board connection
configurations.
Each host PC Call Center Viewer application functions independently of the other connections.
This functionality enables each group Supervisor to view real-time data associated with their
particular group or all ACD groups.
Figure 36 Multiple Supervisor Configurations
Strata DK
SMIS/MIS
Host PC
Spectrum Wall Board Displays
TECH SUPPORT CW:18 LCW: 15:10
MARKET SUPPORT CW:2 LCW: 1:56
2329
Figure 35 “Y” Splitter Connection
Strata DK
Host PC
Host PC
Spectrum Wall Board Displays
TECH SUPPORT CW:18 LCW: 15:10
MARKET SUPPORT CW:2 LCW: 1:56
2330
TECH SUPPORT CW:18 LCW: 15:10
MARKET SUPPORT CW:2 LCW: 1:56
CUSTOMER SUPPORT CW:5 LCW: 3:15
Strata DK
SMIS/MIS
Host PC
Host PC
Host PC
Spectrum Wall Board Displays
TECH SUPPORT CW:18 LCW: 15:10
MARKET SUPPORT CW:2 LCW: 1:56
CUSTOMER SUPPORT CW:5 LCW: 3:15
2331
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Feature Interaction
330 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Spectrum Electronic Wall Boards
Electronic wall boards can be connected to the Supervisor’s PC to display call center status data.
This provides visibility of important call center event information to both Supervisors and Agents.
The Supervisor can also send custom, user-defined text information to the electronic wall board
which can be used for general information or motivational messages.
One copy of the Call Center Viewer application supports a wall board network which can cover all
active ACD groups. The Call Center Viewer application works best with Spectrum 200 and 300
series wall boards.
Multiple Wall Boards
Multiple wall boards can be connected to the Call Center Viewer application PC. The boards can
be assigned to individual ACD groups, to one ACD group, or multiple ACD groups can share one
wall board.
Priority Text Messages
You can send Priority Text Messages from the Call Center Viewer application to an individual, a
group, or all wall boards. You can use Priority Messaging for motivational messages (i.e.,
Congratulations We Made the Numbers) or informing the group of current priorities (i.e., Meeting
at 2:00). When a Priority Message displays, all other messages including ACD information
suspends for the duration of the Priority Message.
You can enter messages sent to the group at the host PC. When Priority Messaging is used
frequently by a number of different Supervisors, we recommend configuring the Call Center
Viewer application and wall board on each Supervisor’s PC. This enables Supervisors to access
real-time data and eliminates the need for the Supervisor to access the host PC (which could be
unavailable) when sending their group a Priority Message.
Product Line Strategy
Call Center Viewer is an addition to the Strata DK product line and does not replace SMIS. Call
Center Viewer provides real-time ACD status displays but not reports. For call center customers
not needing reports, Call Center Viewer is ideal, because of its easy-to-use Windows format and
concurrent operation with other applications. It is also a very cost-effective way of accommodating
multiple ACD Supervisors and connecting electronic wall boards. Add SMIS when historical
reporting is needed.
Cost-effective Incremental Growth
A major advantage of the Call Center Viewer is the ability to add ACD supervisory display and
reporting capabilities when needed. This enables call center expansion to progress at the same
pace as business growth.
♦The Call Center Viewer application can be used by itself for call centers needing PC screen
ACD group status visibility but not MIS reports.
♦Electronic wall boards can be connected to the PC running the Call Center Viewer application
to provide overhead messages.
♦Additional Call Center Viewer applications can be added to support multiple ACD group and
ACD call center Supervisor display applications.
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Feature Interaction
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 331
♦The Call Center Viewer can be used with Software MIS (SMIS) for call centers needing
historical reports as well as real-time ACD group status displays.
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Feature Interaction
332 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
ACD Software MIS (SMIS)
SMIS was designed for small- to medium-sized ACD systems. It is entirely software-based, and
can be run on an IBM 486 or compatible DOS computer. SMIS requires the Strata DK RKYS3
feature key, PPTC9 adapter, and a TTY interface circuit card (typically an RSIU PCB).
SMIS provides Supervisors with a wide variety of status, statistics, and traffic displays and reports
used to monitor the performance of ACD groups and individual Agents. Figure 37 shows the menu
hierarchy of SMIS.
Note SMIS requires the DK RKYS3 feature key, PPTC9 adapter, and a TTY interface circuit
card (typically an RSIU PCB).
Figure 37 SMIS Menu Hierarchy
System Availability
Standard on Strata DK424 with ACD
software and MIS port
1 Agent Statistics ASTR
2 System Status SSUR
3 Agent Performance AGPR
4 Supervisor Group SUGR
5 ACD Group Overflow GOFR
6 EXIT to Reports Menu RPTSM
ACD Report Menu Work Unit Report Menu
1 Agent Work Unit AWUR
2 Work Unit WUTR
3 EXIT to Reports Menu RPTSM
ACD Spectrum Menu
1 Delayed Call DCSR
2 Lost Call LCSR
3 Incoming Call Duration ICDR
4 EXIT to Reports Menu RPTSM
1 Agent Status ASUD
2 Agent Statistics ASTD
3 System Status SSUD
4 ACD Group Traffic Monitor GTMD
5 EXIT to Main Menu MAINM
Display Menu
1 ACD Report Menu ACDRM
2 ACD Spectrum Menu SPECM
3 Work Unit Report Menu WURM
4 EXIT to Main Menu MAINM
Reports Menu
1 Display Menu DISPM
2 Reports Menu RPTSM
3 EXIT to Logout LOGOUT
Supervisor's Main Menu
2067
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Feature Interaction
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 333
SMIS System Configurations
SMIS must be installed on a dedicated 486 PC or above. The PC should have at least 4MB of
RAM memory (16MB recommended), a 3.5 floppy-disk drive, a hard disk (100MB or larger), one
serial and one parallel port, and a color monitor capable of displaying 25 lines of 80 characters
each. For more details about SMIS, refer to the SMIS Supervisor’s Guide.
Supervisor Displays
The SMIS provides Supervisors with a wide variety of status, statistics, and traffic displays used to
monitor the performance of ACD Groups and individual Agents.
These real-time displays show the Supervisor what type of work the Agents are involved in; how
efficiently the Group is handling incoming calls; how quickly calls are being answered; and how
many calls were lost. The real-time displays are updated every few seconds.
The Supervisor terminal can use either color or monochrome monitors. Color monitors can be
programmed to display important information in a variety of colors to further emphasize such
things as alert levels that affect ACD Group performance, and current Agent status such as Agent
available, Agent talking, Agent in After Call Work Time mode, and logged out or unavailable.
The following paragraphs describe the available Supervisor screens.
Agent Statistics
Displays the current status of each Agent within the ACD group, plus the accumulative
call-processing information for that period. Included are:
♦Number of calls waiting
♦Longest call waiting
♦Number of calls handled
♦Average talk time
♦Average After Call Work Time
♦Average handling time (talk plus After Call Work Time)
♦Available time
♦Number of PBX calls originated and received Name and ID number, ACD group number
♦Productivity percentages
♦Auxiliary work (non-ACD) time
The display shows the totals of each Agent’s statistics. It also shows group statistics, including the
group-productivity percentage, and warns if the service level of the group is falling below
acceptable levels. Figure 38 is an example of the display.
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Feature Interaction
334 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Figure 38 SMIS Agent Statistics Display
Agent Status
Displays the current availability of each Agent within the ACD group. Included are the Agent’s
ACD ID number, Agent’s name, current status, and Work Unit code, if used. Figure 39 is an
example of the SMIS display.
Figure 39 SMIS Agent Status Display
Group Traffic Monitor
Group Traffic Monitor displays real-time statistical information used by the Supervisor in
evaluating ACD staffing requirements. Included are:
♦Total calls offered, answered, overflowed, and lost
09:25 6/10/97 Tuesday
Number of Agents – Manned: 9 Busy: 4 Avail: 1 Unavail: 4
CW: 1 TM: 10
Agent Statistics Display ACD Group: 1
No.
Agent
Name
Current
Status
Stat
Time
Work
Unit
Call
Hndl Talk
Average
ACW Hndl
Avail
Time
Aux.
Work
Non-
ACD
%
Prod
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
409
414
Jane
Robert
Alan
Jeff
Judy
Tom
Ted
Ron
Erin
Unavail
Talk
Unavail
Unavail
Avail
Talk
Unavail
Aft Call
Talk
0:26
0:03
6:33
9:40
2:36
3:15
8:49
:45
4:45
0
0
1
2
1
1
0
2
3
10
0
0
565
240
465
189
0
485
320
251
0
0
44
25
44
67
0
0
23
22
0
0
609
265
509
256
0
485
343
273
0:26
0:18
1:30
0:00
0:00
2:48
0:00
1:53
4:40
1:16
100
32
64
48
100
75
100
93
81
77
55
0:00
0:00
0:00
0:00
0:00
0:00
0:00
0:00
0:00
0:00
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Totals
1972
09:25 6/10/97 Tuesday Agent Status Display
Agents
No.
2401
2403
2405
2407
2414
Name
Jane
Alan
Judy
Ted
Erin
Status
Unavail
Unavail
Avail
Unavail
Talk
Stat
Time
0:26
6:33
2:36
8:49
4:45
Work
Unit No.
2402
2404
2406
2409
Name
Robert
Jeff
Tom
Ron
Status
Talk
Unavail
Talk
Aft Call
Stat
Time
0:03
9:40
3:15
0:45
Work
Unit
55
Agents
ACD Group: 1
1973
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Feature Interaction
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 335
♦Service-level percentage, average speed of answering, maximum delayed call (in seconds),
current calls waiting
♦Number of logged-in, busy, available, and unavailable stations
Three warning messages are displayed to indicate when the service level for a group is falling
below the acceptable levels (e.g., service quality is low, bad, or unacceptable).
Figure 40 is an example of the display.
Figure 40 ACD Group Traffic Display
System Status
Accumulative ACD group totals display that the Supervisor is enabled to view. Included for these
groups are:
♦Total number of calls offered, answered, overflowed, and lost
♦Average talk time, after-call time, and handling time
♦Total number of calls delayed (held in queue)
♦Overall service level percentage
♦Total current number of calls waiting to be answered (queue)
♦Maximum number of calls in queue at one time
♦Longest time (in seconds) that a call waited to be answered
See Figure 41 for an example of the display.
11:16 6/10/97 Tuesday ACD Group Traffic Display
ACD Group
Offered
Answered
Oflo Ans
Lost
Serv Levl
A.S.A.
Long Wait
Calls Wait
Manned
Busy
Available
Unavail
1
3
3
0
0
100
26
0
0
3
1
2
0
2
8
6
0
2
86
16
28
2
6
3
0
3
3
3
3
0
0
100
18
10
1
2
2
0
0
4
6
6
0
0
100
10
0
0
3
0
3
0
1979
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Feature Interaction
336 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Figure 41 ACD System Status Display
Supervisor Reports
The Supervisor can run a number of reports that provide information and statistics on individual
Agents, ACD Groups, or the system status over a selectable time period. Each report can cover the
following time periods: periods (60 minutes), shift, daily, weekly, monthly, and yearly (up to two
years). The time frame used to compile the report is shown at the top of each report. The overall
total (or average) for each item on the report is included at the end of the report.
The SMIS and Strata DK systems provide the following reports. These reports have the same
layout when printed or displayed. SMIS can differentiate between PBX calls made to an internal or
an external destination. However, Strata DK reports all outbound calls to the SMIS the same way.
Because of this, all outbound call data is collected and reported as Originated Internal PBX Calls.
Agent Performance
The Agent Performance Report (see Figure 42) provides call processing and after-call-activity
information for all Agents within an ACD group. This report can be used for evaluating the
performance of each Agent in relation to other Agents in the group. Included on the report are:
♦Agents’ ID numbers and names
♦Total log in times
♦Number of ACD calls handled
♦Number of PBX calls handled (DK424 Release 3)
♦Average ACD talk, work-handling times, and available times
10:15 6/10/97 Tuesday ACD System Status Display
Grp
No.
1
2
Totl
Srv
Lvl
82
50
66
Calls
Offd
11
5
16
Prim
10
4
14
Oflo
0
1
1
Lost
1
0
1
Dely
1
2
3
Talk
47
73
60
Hndl
48
73
60
Dely
46
65
55
Curr
1
0
1
Max
2
3
3
Long
89
00
97
Handled Calls Average Waiting
2339
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Feature Interaction
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 337
Figure 42 SMIS Agent Performance Report - Daily
Agent Statistics
This report summarizes the performance of individual Agents (see Figure 43). The information
regarding the Agent includes:
♦Name, ID number, and ACD group number
♦Productivity percentage, number of calls per hour, number of work unit codes entered, and
number of Supervisor assistance calls
♦Total log in time, talk time, after call work time, available and unavailable time
♦Number of ACD and PBX calls received and originated, and the average length of the calls
Note All Agent calls originated are reported in the “Internal” section of PBX calls. “Originated
External is left blank.
Figure 43 ACD Agent Statistics Report
Avg
Talk
(Sec.)
Avg
Work
(Sec.)
Avg
Hndlng
(Sec.)
00:00 6/10/97
23:59 6/10/97 ACD Group: 1
4104
4105
4106
4108
4114
Agent Performance Report—Daily
ACD Group Related Work
Page 1
PBX Work
Originated
Login
Time
(Hrs)
Avail
Time
(Hr.)
Calls
Handled
Agent
No.
7.1
7.7
7.9
7.8
7.9
38.7
38.7
Totals:
Grand:
19
17
39
33
42
150
150
254
272
309
300
411
309
309
44
36
40
31
5
31
31
298
308
349
331
416
340
340
1.3
0.7
3.1
1.3
1.5
8.0
8.0
Aux.
Work
(Hr.)
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Agnt
Prod
(%)
40.46
27.98
88.48
55.96
80.65
62.45
62.45
Calls
Avg Dur
(Sec.)
Ed
June
Tom
Keith
Sally
Agent
Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1978
39 309
Avg
Talk
Sec.
40
Avg
Work
Sec.
349
Avg
Hndlng
Sec.
ACD Group Related Work
00:00 6/10/97
23:59 6/10/97
Agent # : 4106 Name: TOM ACD Group: 1
Prod % : 88.48 ACD Calls/hr : 4.9 WU PEG Cnt: 14
Agent Statistics Report—Daily
3.1
39.0%
ACD Group Related Work
Hours Breakdown
Page 6
0.0
0.0%
Aux.
Work
PBX Work
0.0
0.0%
Intern
0.0
0.0%
Originated
Extern
0.0
0.0%
Hold
PBX Work
Login
Time
3.4
43.0%
Talk
Time
0.4
5.3%
After
Call
Avail
Time
0.9
11.5%
Unav
Time
Call Analysis
0
Originated
0
External
Number Sec.
0
Sec.
0
Internal
Number
Calls
Handled
7.9
1990
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Feature Interaction
338 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Delayed Call
This report provides a summary of all calls offered to a group versus totals and percentages of calls
handled, calls delayed, and percentages of calls answered within predefined time increments. See
Figure 44 for an example.
This information can be compared to other reports, such as Agent Statistics and System Status
Reports, to see if Agents are working efficiently, and if staffing is adequate.
Figure 44 SMIS Delayed Call Spectrum - Daily
Group Overflow
Overflow information is used to determine under-staffing and over-staffing conditions. This report
(see Figure 45) summarizes the calls to the group and displays primary and secondary traffic for
comparison purposes. Included in the report are:
♦ACD group number
♦Number of calls offered
♦Percentage of calls handled, lost, and overflowed to another group
63
0
31
52
16
32
40
55
9
74
90
41
63
0
0
13
0
5
0
0
25
0
0
4
53
0
10
7
5
0
0
10
8
0
0
5
43
0
5
7
16
5
6
0
0
13
0
5
33
0
0
0
0
5
0
5
0
0
0
1
28
0
5
0
5
0
6
0
0
0
10
3
18
0
10
0
11
11
12
5
8
13
0
7
13
50
0
0
16
16
6
0
17
0
0
8
8
50
10
7
26
5
0
10
0
0
0
9
6
0
10
7
0
5
12
5
0
0
0
5
4
0
5
0
0
11
6
5
8
0
0
4
2
0
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
0
0
1
Max
Dly
12
376
330
326
339
371
529
133
1284
2132
2132
23
0
14
7
5
0
12
5
25
0
0
7
Avg
Dly
8
76
104
58
67
81
140
37
410
1340
211
%
Dlyd
100
100
100
100
95
100
100
100
100
100
99
No
Calls
Dlyd
6
21
15
19
18
17
21
12
8
10
147
No
Calls
Offrd
6
21
17
20
20
17
24
12
18
13
168
Time
HHMM
6:00
7:00
8:00
9:00
10:00
11:00
12:00
13:00
14:00
15:00
Total
00:00 6/10/97
23:59 6/10/97 ACD Group: 1
Delayed Call Spectrum – Daily Page 1
Percent Calls Handled Within x sec.
+
No
Calls
Hndld
6
21
15
19
19
17
21
12
8
10
148
1991
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Feature Interaction
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 339
.
Figure 45 SMIS ACD Group Overflow Report - Daily
Incoming Call Duration
Call duration statistics for a specified ACD group are provided by this report (see Figure 46). The
report is useful in determining staffing requirements and modifying acceptable service levels for
each group. Information included is:
♦Number of calls handled
♦Average duration of calls
♦Longest single-call duration
♦Percentage of calls answered within predefined time periods (in seconds)
Figure 46 SMIS Incoming Call Duration Spectrum - Daily
00:00 6/10/97
23:59 6/10/97 ACD Group: 1
ACD Group Overflow Report – Daily Page 1
Calls
Lost
(%)
0.00
0.00
11.76
5.00
5.00
0.00
12.50
0.00
55.56
23.08
11.29
Calls
Offered
6
21
17
20
20
17
24
12
18
13
168
Time
HHMM
600
700
800
900
1000
1100
1200
1300
1400
1500
Totl
Primary
Handled
(%)
100.00
100.00
88.24
95.00
95.00
100.00
87.50
100.00
44.44
76.92
88.71
Ovfl
(%)
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
1975
00:00
23:59 6/10/97
6/10/97 Incoming Call Duration Spectrum – Daily
ACD Group: 1 Page 1
230
66
41
65
41
64
58
56
43
74
60
56
230
0
14
7
11
0
0
5
8
0
10
6
200
0
0
7
11
0
0
14
8
0
0
5
170
0
5
0
5
11
12
0
0
13
10
5
140
0
10
0
5
0
6
0
25
13
0
5
120
0
0
0
11
5
0
10
8
0
10
5
80
17
0
7
11
5
0
5
0
0
10
5
60
0
10
7
5
5
6
0
0
0
0
4
40
0
0
0
0
5
0
0
8
0
0
1
30
0
5
0
0
0
12
0
0
0
0
2
20
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
10
0
5
0
0
0
6
0
0
0
0
1
100
17
10
7
0
5
0
10
0
0
0
5
Max
Dur
(sec)
521
848
979
1453
1334
1143
1046
441
1429
811
1453
Avg
Dur
(sec)
298
241
372
345
353
311
328
210
563
369
329
No
Calls
Hndld
6
21
15
19
19
17
21
12
8
10
148
Time
HHMM
6:00
7:00
8:00
9:00
10:00
11:00
12:00
13:00
14:00
15:00
Total
Percent Calls Lasting Less Than x sec.
+
1976
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Feature Interaction
340 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Lost Call
Provides a summary of calls that were disconnected before being answered or that left the queue
after the queue timer period expired (see Figure 47). Percentages are calculated based on 13 time
intervals (defined by the System Administrator).
This information is useful when determining the length of waiting periods before delay
announcements are given, or ACD calls overflow into another group. The Caller ID and ANI
numbers of callers that hang up while waiting in queue are not shown on the Lost Call report.
These numbers are stored in system memory and can be displayed at a Supervisor telephone or
other designated LCD telephone.
Figure 47 SMIS Lost Call Spectrum - Daily
Supervisor Group
The Supervisor’s Group report provides call processing and after-call activity information for
ACD groups. The report is similar to the Agent Performance report except that instead of detailing
each Agent’s statistics, group totals based on a requested time frame are shown.
Daily reports reflect each hour in the day. Monthly reports reflect each day in the month. Yearly
reports reflect each month in the year. All Agent calls originated are reported in the Internal
section of PBX calls. Originated External is blank. See Figure 48 for an example.
00:00 6/10/97
23:59 6/10/97 Lost Call Spectrum – Daily
ACD Group: 1 Page 1
63
0
0
50
0
100
0
100
0
90
100
85
63
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
53
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
43
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
33
0
0
0
100
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
28
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
10
0
5
18
0
0
50
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
13
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Max
Lost
Dly
0
0
121
32
98
0
445
0
609
852
852
23
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Avg
Lost
Dly
0
0
69
32
98
0
280
0
333
386
109
%
Lost
0
0
12
5
5
0
13
0
56
23
12
No
Calls
Lost
0
0
2
1
1
0
3
0
10
3
20
No
Calls
Offrd
6
21
17
20
20
17
24
12
18
13
168
Time
HHMM
6:00
7:00
8:00
9:00
10:00
11:00
12:00
13:00
14:00
15:00
Totl
Percent Calls Lost Within x Seconds
+
1993
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Feature Interaction
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 341
Figure 48 SMIS ACD Supervisors Group Report - Daily
System Status
Figure 49 shows the system status report. It summarizes the call handling characteristics of a group
during the current report interval. Statistics include:
♦Number of calls offered, answered, overflowed, and lost
♦Average talk time, after-call time, and handling time
♦Number of calls delayed (held in queue)
♦Service level percentage
♦Average and maximum delay time
♦Maximum number of calls in queue at one time.
Figure 49 SMIS System Status Report - Daily
Avg
Talk
(Sec.)
Avg
Work
(Sec.)
Avg
Hndlng
(Sec.)
00:00 6/10/97
23:59 6/10/97
ACD Group: 1
500
600
700
800
900
1000
1100
1200
1300
1400
1500
ACD Supervisors Group Report—Daily
ACD Group Related Work
Page 1
Aux.
Work
(Hrs.)
PBX Work
Received
Login
Time
(Hrs)
Agnt
Prod
Avail
Time
(Hrs.)
Calls
Handled
Time
HHMM
1.0
2.3
3.0
4.7
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
4.7
2.4
2.0
40.0
Totals:
0
6
21
15
20
19
17
21
13
8
10
150
0
298
242
373
329
354
311
328
195
564
370
326
0
44
40
27
31
33
23
24
34
4
10
27
0
342
282
400
360
387
334
352
229
568
380
363
0.0
1.2
1.2
0.8
1.2
0.9
0.9
0.3
1.2
0.0
0.1
7.8
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.00
76.9
94.8
52.4
64.0
58.8
49.6
47.0
43.1
52.5
57.7
65.7
Calls
Avg Dur
(Sec.)
Total
Agents
Manned
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
%
1977
00:00 6/10/97
23:59 6/10/97 System Status Report – Daily
ACD Group: 1 Page 1
Max In
Queue
3
3
4
4
3
5
3
8
4
3
0
8
Max
Delay
(sec.)
323
289
369
473
261
309
370
678
1116
220
15
1116
Avg
Delay
(sec.)
190
133
100
78
64
53
149
250
438
73
15
145
Serv.
Level
(%)
11.1
30.0
37.0
33.3
42.3
56.5
35.0
25.0
8.7
35.7
1.0
33.7
Calls
Delayed
7
7
15
16
15
6
13
9
18
7
0
113
Hndlng
Time
(sec.)
344
404
720
673
417
429
472
414
634
646
695
539
After
Call
(sec.)
30
26
17
32
21
25
31
23
20
24
1
23
Talk
Time
(sec.)
314
378
703
641
396
404
441
391
614
622
694
514
Lost
1
0
2
0
0
4
0
3
3
2
0
15
Avg Length Delayed Call Information
Overflow
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Primary
8
10
25
24
26
19
20
13
20
12
1
178
Offered
9
10
27
24
26
23
20
16
23
14
1
193
Time
HHMM
600
700
800
900
1000
1100
1200
1300
1400
1500
1600
TOTL
Number of Calls
Handled
1992
Automatic Call Distribution
ACD Feature Interaction
342 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Work Unit
Work Unit codes are established by each customer to represent types of call activities that an
Agent may be involved in. These two-digit codes are entered from the Agent’s telephone dial pad
during an ACD call. This information is helpful when modifying the distribution of certain types
of calls. See Figure 50 for the Agent Work Unit report and Figure 51 for the ACD Work Unit
report. Both reports are daily totals.
Figure 50 SMIS Agent Work Unit Report - Daily
Figure 51 SMIS ACD Work Unit Report - Daily
00:00 6/10/97
23:59 6/10/97
ACD Group: 1
2522
2522
2522
2522
2522
Agent Work Unit Report—Daily Page 2
Agent
No.
Agent
Name
Work
Unit
PEG
Count
Calls
Handled
Agent Total:
Group Total:
Grand Total:
ROBERT
ROBERT
ROBERT
ROBERT
ROBERT
07
08
12
88
99
3
1
4
1
1
10
27
27
1
1
1
1
0
4
7
7
1980
00:00 6/10/97
23:59 6/10/97
ACD Group: 1
ACD Work Unit Report—Daily Page 1
Work
Unit
PEG
Count
Calls
Handled
Total:
01
03
07
08
09
11
12
14
15
41
45
50
52
53
55
66
88
99
1
1
3
1
1
2
5
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
27
0
0
0
0
0
1
2
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
2
7
1989
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 343
Hospitality Management Information
System 6
Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) is optional with Strata DK40i and DK424
systems. HMIS cannot be connected to the Strata DK14.
The Toshiba Strata DK HMIS is a PC-based solution, designed to meet the specific operational
needs of small- to medium-sized hotel/motels. HMIS tightly integrates with the Strata DK Digital
Telephone System, Release 3.1 or higher, and the Stratagy Voice Processing System, providing a
complete and fully-integrated hospitality package.
The HMIS is a turnkey package that includes both the PC and software. Multiple PCs (one server
PC and from one to nine workstation PCs) can be networked to function as multiple front desk
terminals.
Both the server and workstation PCs are specific to the HMIS application requirements. The
HMIS PC is dedicated to running the HMIS application. For optimum performance, other
programs should not be installed on the HMIS PC.
The HMIS is available on two different PC platforms, at different prices and performance levels.
♦A lower-priced generic brand PC server and workstation is available at the current published
prices:
Server PC Workstation PC
Intel® Pentium® 133 MHz (or higher) Processor ✔ ✔
Windows® 95 ✔ ✔
RAM 32MB 16MB
2GB Hard Drive ✔ ✔
3.5” 1.44 MB Floppy-disk Drive ✔ ✔
2 Serial Communication Ports ✔ ✔
10Base-T Network Card ✔ ✔
14” SVGA Color Monitor ✔ ✔
Keyboard and PS/2 Mouse ✔ ✔
Windows Graphics Accelerator ✔ ✔
33.6 kbps Internal Modem (used for remote access to
the HMIS for troubleshooting) ✔
8x-speed CD-ROM Drive ✔
Symantec™ pcANYWHERE™ software ✔
Hospitality Management Information System
344 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
♦A slightly higher-priced Toshiba Equium PC server and workstation is also available to
provide higher performance and higher quality PC equipment:
Using a powerful PC provides excellent processor speed and performance of the HMIS
application.
The HMIS application provides hotel/motel features and property management capabilities that
are not resident within the Strata DK telephone system. The HMIS is well integrated with the
telephony features of the Strata DK telephone system to which it is attached.
The Strata HMIS provides guest check-in/check-out, up to 20-year reservation capacity, automatic
wake-up calls, SMDR telephone call tracking and costing, billing, telephone system control, and
many other features (see Figure 52).
Server PC Workstation PC
Intel® Pentium-II 266 MHz (or higher) Processor ✔ ✔
Windows 95 ✔ ✔
32MB RAM ✔ ✔
3GB Hard Drive ✔ ✔
3.5” 1.44 MB Floppy-disk Drive ✔ ✔
Serial Communication Ports 2 ports 1 port
10Base-T Network Card ✔ ✔
15” SVGA Color Monitor ✔ ✔
Keyboard and PS/2 Mouse ✔ ✔
33.6 kbps Internal Modem
(used for remote access to the HMIS for
troubleshooting)
✔
24-speed CD-ROM Drive ✔
Symantec™ pcANYWHERE™ software ✔
Hospitality Management Information System
Hardware Configurations
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 345
Figure 52 HMIS Applications
Hardware Configurations
There are two configurations of the HMIS product:
♦An HMIS server acting as a single front desk terminal (see Figure 53 below).
Figure 53 HMIS Server PC
Reports
Guest Name
LCD Display
Consolidated Billing
(customer-supplied printer)
Reservations
Stratagy Voice
Mail Integration
Maid Codes
SMDR Data
Collection
Remote Maintenance
Check In
Check Out
Employee Codes
Wake-up Calls
HMIS Server
Message Waiting
2536
Call Blocking
2420
HMIS Server
SMDR link to DK424 via a PIOU, PIOUS,
RSIU, or RSSU at 1200, 2400, 4800 baud
to COM Port 2 on HMIS-Server PC.
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
keeps the HMIS working even when
commercial power is down.
TTY link to DK424 via a PIOU, PIOUS, RSIU, or
RSSU at 1200, 2400, 4800 baud to COM Port 1 on
HMIS-Server PC.
Resident 33.6 modem
connected to a station on the
DK424 or a telephone
company line.
UPS
Hospitality Management Information System
Hardware Configurations
346 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
♦An HMIS server with HMIS workstation PCs networked on a LAN to function as multiple
front desk terminals (see Figure 54 below and “Multiple Front Desk PC Terminals” in the
HMIS General Description). The configuration includes a five-port network hub which can
support up to four workstations. Up to nine workstations can be connected using either a larger
or multiple hubs.
Figure 54 Server PC with Workstations
The hardware/software included with the server and workstation are well-adapted for their specific
uses. Using a powerful PC provides excellent processor speed and performance of the HMIS
application.
Table 22 HMIS PC/Software Specifications
Server PC Workstation PC
IBM-compatible Pentium 133 MHz Processor IBM-compatible Pentium 133 MHz Processor
Windows 95 Windows 95
16MB RAM 16MB RAM
2GB Hard Drive 2GB Hard Drive
3.5” 1.44 MB Floppy-disk Drive 3.5” 1.44 MB Floppy-disk Drive
3 Serial Communication Ports 3 Serial Communication Ports
10Base-T Network Card 10Base-T Network Card
14” SVGA Color Monitor 14” SVGA Color Monitor
Windows 95 Keyboard and PS/2 Mouse Windows 95 Keyboard and PS/2 Mouse
Windows Graphics Accelerator Windows Graphics Accelerator
8-speed CD ROM Drive
33.6 Internal Modem (used for remote access to
the HMIS for troubleshooting)
Symantec™ pcANYWHERE™ software
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
Network Hub
HMIS Workstations
HMIS Server
2572
UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
keeps the HMIS working even when
commercial power is down.
Hospitality Management Information System
Connection Requirements
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 347
Connection Requirements
The HMIS connects to the Strata DK using two connections, the TTY port and SMDR port on a
PIOU, PIOUS, RSIU, or RSSU at 1200, 2400, or 4800 baud. If SMDR is also used for general
purposes, in addition to hotel guest billing records, it requires a customer-supplied Y-connector to
the general purpose printer or call accounting device.
The Automatic Wake-up Call function provided by HMIS has some specific Strata DK system
requirements. They are:
♦One digital station port must be available for connection to a digital telephone that is dedicated
to the auto wake-up function. This telephone and port is not used for any other purpose. The
customer’s system must provide the available digital station port.
♦An external music or message source is required to play the optional music or greeting to
guests who receive auto wake-up calls. This requires a customer-supplied music source or
digital announcer to play the greeting, and a standard station port on an RSTU2 or RDSU card.
Main Screen
All screens and pop-up dialog boxes are accessed from the Main screen which serves as the central
point for the system. To make a reservation or check in/check out a guest, simply click on a button
from this screen to start the process. Entries made on other screens are automatically incorporated
into the HMIS databases and immediately displayed on the Main screen, providing a complete and
up-to-date record of business activity.
On-screen Guest Directory
The HMIS Main screen provides an on-screen guest directory (see Figure 56). The information
displayed includes the room number, room telephone extension, room type, reservation dates,
room rates, handicap indicator, check-in date/time/clerk ID, and confirmation number.
Browse Window
The Browse Window (see Figure 55) enables the authorized user to search the HMIS quickly and
easily. By clicking on the column heading, information can be sorted by any column displayed on
the screen. Or, you can sort the Window by any of the following categories:
♦All rooms (list of all rooms–designates occupied rooms and reserved rooms with pending
check-in).
♦Occupied rooms only (list of rooms with checked-in guests).
♦Check-out/renewal rooms only (list of rooms due for check-out or renewal on current date).
♦Rooms requiring cleanup (list of rooms scheduled for cleanup).
♦Rooms with DND enabled (list of rooms where call blocking is enabled)
...or, where Stratagy is installed, rooms with CFAC enabled (list of rooms where all calls are
forwarded to Stratagy).
♦Rooms with pending check-in (list of reserved rooms due for check-in on current date).
The operator can browse room availability or status such as a list of all rooms, occupied rooms,
rooms requiring check-out, rooms requiring cleanup, rooms pending check-in, rooms with DND or
Hospitality Management Information System
Customer Detail Window
348 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Call Forward – All Calls (CFAC) set. There is a Swap Room button (see “Room Change (Swap)”
in the HMIS General Description ) for changing a guest’s room quickly and easily.
When the All Rooms option is selected, the window displays the entire hotel guest list. The
Browse function is very useful during check-in for locating guest reservations.
Figure 55 Browse Window (with sample data)
Customer Detail Window
The Detail button at the bottom of the screen provides a toggle feature between the Browse and
Customer Detail Windows. The Customer Detail Window displays the following information
about the guest:
♦Home address/telephone number
♦Auto make/model
♦Auto tag #
♦Company affiliation (name/telephone number)
♦Number of adults/children in party
♦Any special comments
2554
Hospitality Management Information System
Function Tabs
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 349
Figure 56 HMIS Main Screen (with sample data)
Function Tabs
Dialog boxes are provided in the bottom half of the Main screen. The tabs enable the front desk
clerk to enter guest or room information during the guest’s stay and view the data, whenever
necessary. The tabs are described below.
♦Control/Status – Manually controls and displays telephone service, call forwarding or Do Not
Disturb (DND), maid service and wake-up call settings for the room.
♦Messages – Enables entry of messages and tracks wake-up calls for each room. Messages can
be printed at any time and remain in the database until the Clear Msgs/Wakeup Logs button is
selected or the guest checks out. A log of wake-up calls is also displayed and can be cleared
with the same button.
♦Restrict/Accommodate – Displays amenities (cable, TV, etc.) and special conditions (baby
crib, etc.).
♦Phone Calls – Tracks telephone calls/charges on a per room basis.
Function
Tabs
Reservations
Browse
Window
Check-in/out
Buttons
Customer Detail
Window
(alternates with
Browse Window)
Database
Settings
ReportsDisplays
Customer
Detail
Window
2550
2551
Hospitality Management Information System
Convenient Access to Screens/Functions
350 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
♦Billed Services – Enables entry of billed service charges for room service, movies, etc. to the
guest’s account and displays all entries during the guest’s stay.
♦FOP – Registers and displays the Form of Payment (FOP) that is being used by the guest
(cash, check or credit card) and room deposit payment.
Convenient Access to Screens/Functions
The HMIS Main screen provides button access to the functions and menus required to run the
hospitality facilities.
♦Check-in – Displays the Check-in screen. The screen enables the front desk staff to check in
either a walk-in or reservation guest (see “Check-in” in the HMIS General Description for
details). An Available Room Selection pop-up dialog box provides a list of rooms from which
to choose.
♦Check-out – Displays the Billing Statement screen. By highlighting a guest’s name in the
Browse Window and clicking on this button, front desk staff can view/print the guest’s
consolidated billing statement. Clicking on the Payment Received button clears the account
and the database of guest information, sets the Maid Service to “Required” and the telephone
service to “outgoing call restriction” (see “Check-out with Billing” in the HMIS General
Description for details).
♦Reserve – Displays the Reservation screen. This screen enables the front desk clerk to make
guest reservations. An Available Room Selection pop-up dialog box provides a list of rooms
from which to choose (see “Reprinting Processed Billing Statements” in the HMIS General
Description for details). During System Setup, the authorized user can choose between
reservation databases that can store 4, 8, 12, 16, or 20 years of reservation records.
♦Reports – Displays the Report Menu screen. This screen enables authorized personnel to view/
print a list of seven reports: Hotel Guest List, Maid Activity Report, Reservation List,
Uncleared Outgoing Phone Calls Made, Morning Check Out List, All Active Balance
Statements, and Consolidated Detail Night Audit Report (see “Reports” in the HMIS General
Description for detailed information).
♦Setup – Displays the Setup Menu screen. This screen enables authorized personnel to access a
group of six setup screens that must be completed before HMIS can be used. The screens
consist of: Master Room and AutoGen Setup screens for room record entries, Company for
entry of company information (name, address, etc.), Employee Codes for entry of staff names/
category/employee ID, Settings for telephone/tax settings, and Statement for customizing the
billing statement printout.
User-definable Settings
The HMIS application has user-definable settings, enabling the hotel/motel management to tailor-
make the application to suit the business’ individual needs.
For more information, refer to Hospitality Management Information System (HMIS) User Guide
and General Description.
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 351
Glossary
Term Definition
AA Auto Attendant (built-in or external) – acts as an automatic operator that directs incoming
callers to stations by offering a menu of dialing prompts.
ABR Automatic Busy Redial – enables a station user to automatically redial a busy outside
number up to 15 times at pre-programmed intervals.
ACB Automatic Callback – enables the station user, using a flexible button or dialing a special
code, to call back a station that was previously busy or in DND mode. When the called
station is free, the system rings the caller with a special tone.
ACD Automatic Call Distribution – enables incoming calls to be distributed to a group of ACD
agents. The ACD Supervisor's LCD telephone displays ACD Agent and Group
information which allows the Supervisor to monitor calls and assist agents.
ADM Add-on Module –
See DADM.
AMI Alternate Mark Inversion.
ANI Automatic Number Identification – sends the phone number of the calling party to the
Strata DK system over incoming DID or tie lines. This feature is provided by some long
distance telephone service companies.
B Channel Bearer Channel – ISDN data or voice channel which transmits at 64kpbs. It refers to the
frequency range of transmissions on a copper pair and is a logical, rather than a physical
channel. Also see BRI and PRI.
B8ZS Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution.
BGM Background Music – enables customer-supplied music to be sent to telephone speakers
and external speakers.
BLF Busy Lamp Field.
BPS Bits Per Second – unit of measure that refers to the transmission speed (baud rate) of
electronic signals. It describes the Data Interface Unit (DIU) and modem operation.
BRI Basic Rate Interface – ISDN line with 2B + 1D channel. BRI lines can have a U-interface
with RJ-11 jacks and single twisted pair wiring, or RJ-45 four pair S/T interface wiring. BRI
is the a smaller ISDN interface than PRI.
BSIA Base Station Interface Adapter – Strata AirLink Wireless Controller.
CESID Caller’s Emergency Service Identification – phone number for specific station or station
location which is sent to the CAMA trunk.
CFAC Call Forward-All Calls – forwards all calls when a station is idle or busy. The station does
not ring.
CFB Call Forward-Busy – forwards all calls when a station is busy.
CFNA Call Forward-No Answer – forwards all calls when a station does not answer. The “No
Answer” time is flexible, 8 to 60 seconds.
CFBNA Call Forward-Busy/No Answer – forwards all calls when a station is busy or doesn’t
answer. Calls ring for 8 to 60 seconds and then forward.
CLASS Custom Local Area Signaling Services – defines a number of features offered by local
telephone companies.
CLID or CND Calling Line Identification or Calling Number Delivery – phone number or name of the
calling party sent to the Strata DK system over incoming ground or loop start CO lines.
This feature is one of the “CLASS” features offered by some local telephone companies.
Glossary
CNIS ~ ESF
352 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
CNIS Calling Number Identification Services – caller ID for ISDN. CNIS is calling party
information for outgoing and incoming calls sent to the ISDN network.
CO Central Office – facility which houses switching equipment that provides phone service
(CO lines, E & M tie lines, DID lines, Centrex lines) for the immediate geographical area.
CODECs Coder/Decoder – semiconductors that process analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog
conversions.
CSU Channel Service Unit – required between the DK PRI interface and the PRI line provider
interface in most locations of the U.S.
CTI Computer Telephony Interface – combines the capabilities of the Strata DK digital
business telephone system with custom functionality provided by computer applications.
The PC must be running Microsoft Windows software.
D Channel ISDN Data Channel – transmits call control information (out-of-band signaling) for
B-channels. The D-channel is a logical, not physical channel.
DADM Digital Add-on-Module – provides 20 flexible feature buttons that can be assigned
individually for Direct Station Selection, System and Personal Speed Dial, and CO line
access. Connects to 2000-series digital telephones.
DDCB Digital Door Phone/Lock Control Unit – supports optional door phones (MDFBs) and
provides door lock control. A peripheral hardware unit compatible with designated digital
telephone circuits.
DDSS Digital Direct Station Selection Console – facilitates the processing of heavy loads of
incoming calls. The DDSS connects only to designated digital telephone circuits and is
associated with a digital telephone.
DH Distributed Hunt.
DID Direct Inward Dialing line – enables external callers to dial directly to an internal number.
DIL Direct In Line – refers to two-way, standard CO trunk lines that are assigned to a
particular extension or hunt group.
DISA
Direct Inward System Access – enables an outside party to access the Strata DK system
internal stations or outgoing CO lines without having to go through an operator or
automated attendant. An optional security code may be set to prevent unauthorized
access to outgoing CO lines for through system calling.
DIU Data Interface Unit.
DKT Digital Key Telephone.
DN Directory Number.
DND
Do Not Disturb – enables a station user to block incoming calls. After DND is activated,
internal calls and transferred calls do not ring at the station, and voice announcements do
not come through. Off-hook Call Announce is also blocked. The station user can still
place outgoing calls.
DNIS Dialed Number Identification Service – sends the phone number of called party over
incoming DID or tie lines to the Strata DK system. This feature is provided by some long
distance telephone companies.
DP Dial Pulse – signals sent to the Central Office which are regular momentary interruptions
of direct or alternating current and correspond to the value of the phone digit. It is the
same as rotary dialing.
DSS Direct Station Selection – enables a phone user (as well as a DSS console and ADM
user) to call another station with the touch of a flexible feature button.
DTMF Dual-tone Multi-frequency – pushbutton tone dialing.
DVSU A subassembly that equips a digital telephone with the capability to receive Speaker Off-
hook Call Announce (OCA) calls. DVSU is not required to receive Handset OCA (HS-
OCA).
EKT Electronic Key Telephone.
ESF Extended Super Frame.
Term Definition
Glossary
FIFO ~ PSAP
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 353
FIFO First-In, First-Out.
FOP Form of Payment – enables the front desk clerk to enter the form of payment (cash, check
or credit card) and amount and type of deposit paid using the FOP Tab screen
HDCB Electronic Door Phone/Lock Control Unit – supports optional door phones (MDFBs) and
provides door lock control. A peripheral hardware unit compatible with designated
electronic telephone circuits.
HDSS Electronic Direct Station Selection Console – facilitates the processing of heavy loads of
incoming calls. The HDSS console connects only to designated electronic telephone
circuits and is associated with electronic telephones.
HESB External Speaker Box – provides paging speaker and/ or a background music speaker,
etc. It is a speaker/amplifier that is configured with the system.
HHEU Headset/Loud Ringing Bell Interface – connects a headset or external speaker box
(HESB) to the phone. It is a subassembly that fits inside a digital telephone or a
6500-series electronic telephone.
ISDN
Integrated Services Digital Network – enables the exchange of digital information at each
end of the line without converting analog-to-digital signals. Connection speeds are faster
and audio quality is superior. ISDN service requires service subscription from a telco with
ISDN equipment.
LATA Local Access and Transport Area.
LCD Liquid Crystal Display – displays call information. It is supported by digital and electronic
telephones.
LCR Least Cost Routing.
LSI Large Scale Integration – related to circuit design technology. Strata DK system printed
circuit boards (PCBs) use LSI circuit design.
MDF Main Distribution Frame – wiring frame usually located in a phone closet.
MDFB Door Phone Box – two-way speaker box.
MOH Music-on-Hold – music (customer-supplied) or announcements sent to parties on-hold on
CO lines or the intercom.
NFAS Non-facility Associated Signaling – provides ISDN trunk groups beyond the 23 channels
available with a single Primary Rate Interface.
NT-1 ISDN Network Termination device – powers a U-interface ISDN line and enables multiple
S/T ISDN devices to connect to it. The NT-1 must be UL-listed (U.S.) or CSA-certified
(Canada).
OAI Open Architecture Interface – enables the computer to command the phone system to
answer, delay, switch, hold, etc., calls.
OCA Off-hook Call Announce. There are two types: Handset OCA and Speaker OCA.
OPS Off-premises Station.
PBX Private Branch Exchange – industry-standard term that refers to a telephone switch,
usually on-premises, which serves an individual company, and is connected to a public
telephone exchange through the Central Office (CO).
PC Personal Computer.
PCB Printed Circuit Board.
PDN Primary Directory Number.
PFT Power Failure Transfer – automatically switches CO lines directly to a standard single-line
telephone and provides emergency service if commercial AC power fails.
PhDN Phantom Directory Number.
PRI
Primary Rate Interface – trunk interface to the ISDN network, which enables multiple use
of channels for DID, tie, FX, WATS, 800, etc. It supports multiple services and dynamic
channel allocation. PRI is the larger ISDN interface (via the RPTU) with 23B+D
transmission format. Channels are 64-kbps. Also see BRI.
PSAP Public Safety Answering Point – used for E911 calls.
Term Definition
Glossary
PSTN ~ U Interface
354 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network
RAM Random Access Memory – refers to the type of system memory that holds individual
system configuration and feature programming. RAM is read/write memory, and can be
easily revised in programming.
ROM Read Only Memory – refers to the type of system memory that holds static software that
comprises the mechanics of the features’ functions. ROM is only revised by Toshiba
software engineers.
RPCI-DI Personal Computer Interface Unit – enables digital telephones to connect to a PC or
ASCII terminal to make data calls to printers, PCs, and other data devices.
S/T Interface Reference interface points (“S” or “T”) of an ISDN network. S/T interfaces are RJ-45,
8-wire connection interfaces for ISDN equipment. An NT-1 is needed to network U-type
BRI lines to S/T type interfaces.
SDN Secondary Directory Number.
SD Speed Dial – enables dialing of frequently called phone numbers by using a Speed Dial
button or codes.
SF Super Frame.
SLT Single-line Telephone.
SMDI Simplified Message Desk Interface – RS-232 link from PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU, RSIS, or
RSIU modular jack connected to a voice mail machine to provide Strata DK voice mail
integration.
SMDR Station Message Detail Reporting.
SMIS Software Management Information System (SMIS).
SS7 Signaling System 7
TA Terminal Adapter or ISDN modem that converts PC and other types of protocol into a
signal that works with ISDN. Generally, TAs support RJ-11 voice ports and RS-232C or
V.35 or V.449 data interfaces.
TAPI Telephone Application Programming Interface.
TE Terminal Equipment. This refers to devices using ISDN service (telephones, faxes,
computers, etc.). TE1 supports ISDN formats with S/T or U-type interfaces.
TSPI Telephony Service Provider Interface.
U Interface A single twisted pair of copper wire on an RJ-11 jack. The wiring is identical to POTS, with
different signaling. Only one U-interface device can be attached per line.
Term Definition
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 355
Index
A
account codes, 16
ACD
agent
features, 284
ACD, PBX, and non-ACD calls, 285
after call work time, 289
auto answer with zip tone, 290
call pickup, 286
display information, 287
help, 288
log in/log out, 291
unavailable mode, 292
work unit, 293
performance, 336
statistics, 333, 337
status, 334
supervisor features, 294
agent assistance, 295
call monitoring, 299
call pickup, 296
end of shift, 300
log in/log out, 298
MIS access, 317
queue alarm indication, 318
supervisor LCD display, 297
system features, 269
after shift service, 270
automatic disconnect, 271
automatic number identification, 272
inbound call routing, 278
overflow, 279
PBX calls, 281
queue alarm timer, 283
queuing, 282
ACD call center viewer, 325
agent view, 326
alarms, 327
button view format, 328
computer requirements, 325
configurations, 328
display information, 326
main view, 326
multiple supervisor call center viewer
applications, 329
priority text messages, 330
spectrum electronic wall boards, 330
title bar, 327
ACD feature interaction, 319
assistance from busy supervisor, 320
call forwarding, 321
executive/busy override, 322
message and display, 323
station do not disturb, 324
ACD software MIS (SMIS), 332
SMIS displays, 333, 334, 335
SMIS reports, 336, 337, 338, 339, 340, 341,
342
add-on modules
capacities, 2
airlink
(see strata airlink)
alarm sensor, 18
alternate answer point, 19
amplified conference, 20
auto attendant, 21
automatic
busy redial, 121
hold recall, 23
number identification (ANI), 24
release from hold, 25, 29
356 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Index
B ~ H
B
background music, 125
background music interface, 27
base station, 197
billed services
tab, 350
browse window, 347, 349
busy override, 127
C
call forward, 129, 321
call park, 132
call pickup, 133, 134
call transfer with camp-on, 135
caller ID
lines (see also BRI, PRI lines)
caller identification, 28
centrex ringing repeat, 31
centrex/PBX compatibility, 30
check-in, 350
check-out, 350
CO line
capacities, 2
computer telephony integration, 32
conferencing, 35
connection requirements, 347
control status tab, 349
convenient access to screens/functions, 350
cordless digital telephone, 2
credit card calling, 36
customer detail window, 348, 349
D
delayed
call, 338
ringing, 37
DIDlines, 2
digital telephones system capacities, 3
direct inward
system access, 42
distinctive CO line, 43
DKT2004-CT, 2
DNIS, 38
do not disturb, 142, 143
door lock control, 44
door locks, 2
door phone, 45
door phones, 2
DTMF and dial pulse CO line, 46
DTMF signal time setting, 47
E
E911 enhanced operation, 48
electronic telephone
system capacities, 3
executive override, 146
external amplified speaker, 50
F
Form of Payment (FOP) tab, 350
function tabs, 349
billed services, 350
control/status, 349
Form of Payment (FOP), 350
messages, 349
phone calls, 349
restrict/accommodate, 349
G
ground start lines, 56
group overflow, 338
group traffic monitor, 334
guest directory, 347
H
handset OCA stations, 3
hardware
configurations hardware, 345
connections, 347
server, 345
workstations, 346
hospitality management information system
(HMIS), 343
applications, 345
connection requirements, 347
hardware configurations, 345
main screen, 347
user-definable settings, 350
hotline service, 57
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 357
Index
I ~ P
I
incoming call duration, 339
Insight DK
client (sub-supervisor), 307
configurations, 301
multiple supervisors, 303, 307
single supervisor, 302, 306
features, 308, 310
Real Time Displays, 310
reports, 313
system
compatibility, 306
functionality, 308
Insight DK Plus
historical reporting, 312
real time displays, 312
Insight DK Plus, 311
inView, 308
ISDN
basic rate interface (BRI), 58
BRI, PRI channel lines, 2
primary rate interface (PRI), 61
L
LCR, 64
least cost routing, 64
line call pickup groups, 65
groups, 66
queuing, 67
live system programming, 68
lost call, 340
M
main screen, 347, 349
browse window, 347
convenient access to screens/functions, 350
customer detail window, 348
function tabs, 349
on-screen guest directory, 347
memory protection, 69
message waiting, 70, 170
messages tab, 349
multiple
DNs, 72
FCC registration, 74
music on hold, 76
N
network, 346
night ringing
answer code, 77
over external page, 78
night transfer, 80
O
OCA
handset, 3
speaker, 3
off-hook call announce, 3, 174
off-premises stations, 3
on-screen guest directory, 347
Open Database Connectivity (ODBC), 312
P
paging, 84, 85, 86, 87
PC attendant console system capacities, 2
PC attendant console, 211
features
answer button, 217
answer priority, 218
answer prompting, 219
attendant conference setup, 220
auto day/night mode switching, 221
auto dialing, 222
busy lamp field, 223
call waiting count, 224
color CRT display, 225
dial "0" for attendant, 226
dial outside number for station user, 227
direct station selection (DSS), 228
directory display and dialing, 229
DTMF tone signaling from dial pad, 230
emergency calls, 231
emergency page, 232
employee profile information, 233
feature on-line help, 234
feature prompting with soft keys, 235
flexible programmable buttons, 236
headset operation, 237
hold button, 238
hold timer display, 239
incoming call identification, 240
incoming call statistics, 241, 242
join button, 243
keyboard or mouse operation, 244
358 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Index
R ~ S
load sharing, 245
loop hold display, 246
message center, 247
multi-tasking, 248
name or number dialing, 249
overflow, 250
override, 251
park and page, 252
position busy, 253
release button, 254
reminder notes, 255
speed dial calling, 257
split/switch button, 256
three-way calling, 258
through dialing, 259
transfer direct to voice mail, 260
trunk group control, 261
volume control, 262
windows PC operation, 214
PDIU-DS, 3
phone calls tab, 349
pooled CO lines, 88
R
reports, 350
requirements
connection, 347
reservations, 350
restrict/accommodate tab, 349
ring mute
(see strata airlink features)
RPCI-DI, 3
S
screen
browse window, 347
customer detail window, 348
main, 347
setup, 350
SMIS
supervisor displays, 333
system configurations, 333
speaker
OCA stations, 3
Speed, 209
speed dial, 103, 190, 257
standard telephone, 3
station
features, 15
alert signal button, 120
automatic busy redial, 121
automatic callback, 122
automatic hold, 123
automatic off-hook line selection, 124
background music with station
control, 125
busy override tone, 127
busy station transfer/busy station
ringing, 128
call forward, 129
call park orbits, 132
call pickup, 133
call pickup groups, 134
call transfer with camp-on, 135
centrex/PBX feature buttons, 136
continuous DTMF signal time, 137
data buttons, 138
dial pulse/DTMF mode change, 144
direct station selection (DSS) buttons, 139
distinctive LED indicators, 140
distinctive station ringing, 141
DND override, 143
do not disturb (DND), 142
exclusive hold, 145
executive override, 146
flash button, 147
handsfree answerback on intercom, 148
hearing-aid compatible, 149
LCD
alphanumeric messaging, 150
automatic callback number
display, 154
busy lamp field indication, 154
busy station messaging, 151
call duration display, 154
call forward source/destination
display, 155
called station messaging, 154
calling station messaging, 158
calling/called number display, 156
clock/calendar display, 159
CO line identification, 160
dialed number display, 161
feature prompting with soft key
operation, 162
message waiting display, 163
recalling station identification, 164
remote/group station messaging, 165
Strata DK Feature Description 5/99 359
Index
S ~ S
speed dial memo directory
dialing, 165
station identification, 167
timed reminders, 168
user name/number display, 169
message waiting, 170
microphone control buttons, 171
modular handset and line cords, 172
modular headset interface, 173
off-hook call announce (OCA), 174
on-hook dialing, 176
personal computer interface, 177
pooled CO line buttons, 178
privacy
button, 179
override, 180
release button, 181
private CO lines, 182
pushbutton dialing, 183
release button, 184
release/answer button, 185
remote retrieval of held calls, 186
repeat last number dialed, 187
ringing line preference, 188
saved number redial, 189
speed dial button, 190
timed reminder, 191
toll restriction override code revision, 192
user programmable feature buttons, 193
strata airlink
base station, 197
components, 195
description, 195
FCN feature access, 204
features
FCN feature access, 204
flash button, 205
locking the dial pad, 206
menu operation, 207
ring mute, 208
speed dial, 209
voice mute, 208
volume adjustment, 210
handset, 200
charger base, 202
software manager, 13
configuration window, 198
desktop toolbar, 198, 199
PC hardware and software
requirements, 198, 199
supervisor group, 340
system
capacities, 2
feature availability, 4
features
account codes, 16
alarm sensor, 18
alternate answer, 19
amplified conference, 20
auto attendant, 21
automatic hold recall, 23
automatic number identification, 24
automatic release from hold, 25, 29
background music interface, 27
caller identification, 28
centrex ringing repeat, 31
centrex/PBX compatibility, 30
computer telephony integration, 32
conferencing, 35
credit card calling, 36
delayed ringing, 37
dialed number identification service, 38
direct inward system access, 42
distinctive CO line/internal ringing, 43
door lock control, 44
door phone, 45
DTMF, 46
DTMF signal time setting, 47
E911 enhanced operation, 48
external amplified speaker, 50
flexible
button assignment, 51
intercom/DN numbering, 53
line ringing assignment, 54
slot assignment, 55
ground start lines, 56
hotline service, 57
ISDN
basic rate interface, 58
primary rate interface, 61
least cost routing, 64
line call pickup groups, 65
line groups, 66
line queuing, 67
live system programming, 68
memory protection, 69
message waiting, 70
multiple DNs, 72
multiple FCC registration, 74
360 Strata DK Feature Description 5/99
Index
T ~ W
multiple simultaneous handsfree intercom
paths, 75
music on hold interface, 76
night ringing answer code, 77
night ringing over external page, 78
night ringing over selected page zone, 79
night transfer, 80
non-blocking dialing, 81
off-premises station, 82
outgoing call restriction, 83
paging
all call voice page, 84
external page interface, 85
external zone paging, 86
group paging, 87
power failure transfer, 89
privacy/non-privacy option, 90
relay service, 91
remote administration/maintenance, 92
reserve power battery backup interface, 93
speed dial, 103
station hunting, 96
station message detail recording, 98
station relocation, 101
system programming through station, 102
T1 interface, 113
tandem CO line connection (trunk-to-
trunk), 103
tenant service, 105
tie lines, 106
toll restriction, 107
toll restriction override codes, 109
toll restriction override using system speed
dial, 110
transfer privacy, 111
traveling class of service, 112
voice mail interface, 114
voice or tone signaling, 117
wall or table mounting, 118
migration, 2
overview, 1
status, 335, 341
tools
dkadmin, 10
dkbackup, 11
dkquote, 10
keyprint 2000, 13
strata airlink wireless manager, 13
stratacontrol, 11
system components, 197
T
T1/DS-1
lines, 2
telephones
DKT, 3
EKT, 3
tie lines, 2
toll restriction, 109, 110, 192
U
universal slots, 2
V
voice mute
(see strata airlink features)
W
window
browse, 347
customer detail, 348
wireless
(see strata airlink)
work unit, 342

Navigation menu